A Free Electronic Copy of The Most Up-To-Date Owner'S Manual, Uconnect and Warranty Booklet

2021 RAM 1500
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your
vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next
appointment, we know you will find the app an important extension of your Ram vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App
21_DT_OM_EN_USC
Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
FIRST EDITION
U.S. CANADA
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF
RAM 1500
THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLET
MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
20 21 OWNER’ S M ANUAL
RAMTRUCKS.COM (U.S.) RAMTRUCK.CA (CANADA)
©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the
equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle
is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit
With respect to vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common
questions.
1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada), or by contacting your dealer.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S.), www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting
www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the WARNING
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
21_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ 10 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................17 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ..................................................... 104 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING .............................................................................................. 140 4
5 MULTIMEDIA .............................................................................................................................. 236 5
6 SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................310 6
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................................................... 373 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 395 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................467
9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................479
10
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................483
11
INTRODUCTION VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .. 26 Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —

To Arm The System...................................... 26 If Equipped................................................... 36
Symbols Key..........................................................11 Heated Seats — If Equipped ...................... 38
To Disarm The System ................................ 26
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...............................11 Rearming Of The System............................. 27 Ventilated Seats — If Equipped................... 39
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS..........................11 Security System Manual Override .............. 27 Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers ................... 39
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.........11 DOORS .................................................................. 27 Head Restraints........................................... 40
Symbol Glossary ...................................................12 Manual Door Locks...................................... 27 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ......................41
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ............... 28 Introducing Voice Recognition.................... 41
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Power Side Steps — If Equipped................. 28 Basic Voice Commands .............................. 42
KEYS ......................................................................17 Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry .......... 28 Get Started................................................... 43
Key Fob......................................................... 17 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit — Additional Information................................. 43
SENTRY KEY ..........................................................20 If Equipped ................................................... 30 DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................21 Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ......... 30 IF EQUIPPED..........................................................43
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition..................... 21 Child-Protection Door Lock System — MIRRORS ..............................................................44
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (GASOLINE) ...22 Rear Doors ................................................... 31 Inside Rearview Mirror ................................ 44
How To Use Remote Start ........................... 22 STEERING WHEEL ................................................ 31 Outside Mirrors ........................................... 46
To Exit Remote Start Mode ......................... 23 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .............. 31 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation — If Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 32 Equipped ...................................................... 47
Equipped ...................................................... 24 DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED... 32 Power Mirrors............................................... 47
Remote Start Comfort Systems — Programming The Memory Feature............ 33 Power Folding Outside Mirrors For
If Equipped ................................................... 24 Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To Standard And Trailer Tow — If Equipped .... 47
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer Memory ........................................................ 33 Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped ......... 48
Activation — If Equipped .............................. 25 Memory Position Recall............................... 34 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................... 48
Remote Start Abort Message...................... 25 SEATS ................................................................... 34 Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse —
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) ........25 Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If If Equipped................................................... 48
How To Use Remote Start ........................... 25 Equipped ...................................................... 34
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ............... 36
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER Cargo Lights/Trailer Spotter Lights With Power Sliding Rear Window —
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED ...........................49 Bed Lights — If Equipped............................. 56 If Equipped .................................................. 79
Before You Begin Programming Battery Saver ............................................... 57 Manual Sliding Rear Window —
HomeLink® .................................................. 49 INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................ 57 If Equipped................................................... 79
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels........ 49 Courtesy Lights ............................................ 57 Wind Buffeting ............................................ 80
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Illuminated Entry ......................................... 58 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ....................80
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device .............. 49 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS............. 58 Single Pane Power Sunroof —
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Windshield Wiper Operation ...................... 58 If Equipped................................................... 80
Door Opener ................................................. 50 Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped............ 59 Dual Pane Power Sunroof —
Programming HomeLink® To A CLIMATE CONTROLS ........................................... 60 If Equipped................................................... 82
Miscellaneous Device.................................. 51 Automatic Climate Control Descriptions HOOD .....................................................................84
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® And Functions .............................................. 60 To Open The Hood ....................................... 84
Button ........................................................... 51 Manual Climate Control Descriptions And To Close The Hood....................................... 85
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..... 51 Functions...................................................... 63 TAILGATE ...............................................................85
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................52 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — Opening ........................................................ 85
Headlight Switch .......................................... 52 If Equipped ................................................... 65 Closing.......................................................... 85
Multifunction Lever ..................................... 53 Climate Voice Recognition .......................... 66 Locking Tailgate........................................... 85
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) ................. 53 Operating Tips ............................................. 66 Multifunction Tailgate — If Equipped.......... 85
High/Low Beam Switch ............................... 53 INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ............. 68 Tailgate Removal ........................................ 86
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Storage ......................................................... 68 Bed Step — If Equipped............................... 89
Control — If Equipped ................................. 53 USB/AUX Control ......................................... 72 PICKUP BOX .........................................................90
Flash-To-Pass ............................................... 54 Electrical Power Outlets .............................. 74 Bed Rail Tie-Down System —
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ......... 54 Power Inverter — If Equipped ..................... 75 If Equipped .................................................. 91
Parking Lights And Panel Lights ................. 54 Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped ........ 77 RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED ....................................92
Automatic Headlights With Wipers ............. 54 WINDOWS ............................................................ 77 Locking And Unlocking RamBox ................. 93
Headlight Delay............................................ 55 Power Windows............................................ 77 RamBox Cargo Storage Bins....................... 93
Lights-On Reminder ..................................... 55 Automatic Window Features ....................... 78 RamBox Safety Warning ............................. 94
Fog Lights — If Equipped ............................ 55 Reset Auto-Up ............................................. 78 Bed Divider — If Equipped........................... 95
Turn Signals ................................................ 55 Window Lockout Switch .............................. 79
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ............. 55
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS .............................................97 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY.....................114 STARTING AND OPERATING

Camper Applications ................................... 97 Instrument Cluster Display Controls.........114
STARTING THE ENGINE..................................... 140
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED .....97 Oil Life Reset..............................................115
Automatic Transmission............................ 141
Tonneau Cover Components....................... 97 Display Menu Items...................................116
AutoPark.....................................................141
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Folding For Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Tip Start Feature .......................................143
Driving Or Removal ...................................... 98 Messages ..................................................121
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition...................143
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation..........101 Displays ......................................................123
Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning..............103 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning
STOP Button — Gasoline Engine ..............143
Messages ...................................................123
Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fault
STOP Button — Diesel Engine .................. 144
INSTRUMENT PANEL Warning Messages ....................................124
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — Or −30°C) ................................................. 146
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
GASOLINE ........................................................... 104 After Starting..............................................146
Actions — If Equipped ................................125
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster Starting Fluids — Diesel Engine Only........146
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................126
Descriptions — Gasoline............................105 NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE ....... 146
Red Warning Lights ...................................126
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — Cold Weather Precautions ........................ 146
Yellow Warning Lights ...............................129
GASOLINE ........................................................... 107 Engine Idling ..............................................148
Yellow Indicator Lights ..............................133
Premium Instrument Cluster Stopping The Engine .................................148
Green Indicator Lights...............................135
Descriptions — Gasoline............................108 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ....... 150
White Indicator Lights ...............................136
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
Blue Indicator Lights..................................137
DIESEL................................................................. 109 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II.....137 GASOLINE ENGINE ........................................... 150
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
Descriptions — Diesel ................................110 Cybersecurity .............................................138 DIESEL ENGINE .................................................. 151
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND PARKING BRAKE ............................................... 151
DIESEL................................................................. 112 MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS .............................138 Electric Park Brake (EPB)..........................151
Premium Instrument Cluster
Descriptions — Diesel ...............................113
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .......................... 154 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINES PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
Ignition Park Interlock ...............................155 ONLY — IF EQUIPPED.........................................175 SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ................................... 195
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED............175 Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
System .......................................................155 Autostop Mode...........................................175 Active Park Assist System .........................196
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission.......156 Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — Autostop .....................................................175 Assistance Operation ................................197
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 161 To Start The Engine While In Autostop LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ........................... 199
Four-Position Electronically Shifted Mode...........................................................176 LaneSense Operation................................199
Transfer Case — If Equipped ....................161 To Manually Turn Off The Stop Start Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...................200
Five-Position Electronically Shifted System........................................................176 LaneSense Warning Message .................. 200
Transfer Case — If Equipped ....................163 To Manually Turn On The Stop Start Changing LaneSense Status.....................202
ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER AIR System........................................................177 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ............. 202
SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ........... 165 System Malfunction...................................177 AUX Camera — If Equipped ...................... 204
Description .................................................165 CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
Air Suspension Modes...............................167 IF EQUIPPED ......................................................177 EQUIPPED ........................................................... 204
Instrument Cluster Display Messages......168 Cruise Control — If Equipped.....................177 AUX Camera — If Equipped ...................... 208
Operation....................................................168 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE
ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER AIR If Equipped .................................................179 ENGINE................................................................ 208
SUSPENSION SYSTEM (REBEL MODELS PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED ....................................... 169 REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED....................................189
Description .................................................169 ENGINE ............................................................... 210
ParkSense Sensors ...................................190
Air Suspension Modes...............................171 Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel ............... 210
ParkSense Warning Display......................190
Instrument Cluster Display Messages......171 Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel............... 210
ParkSense Display.....................................190
Operation....................................................172 Diesel Exhaust Fluid ..................................211
Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or
AXLE LOCK SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .............. 173 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage....................211
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL — Rear ParkSense .........................................193
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid .....................211
IF EQUIPPED....................................................... 174 Service The ParkSense Park Assist
POWER STEERING............................................. 174 System........................................................193
Electric Power Steering ............................174 Cleaning The ParkSense System..............194
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....194
VEHICLE LOADING ............................................. 213 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ......213 MOTORHOME) ...................................................230 IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 282
Payload.......................................................213 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Is My Vehicle Connected?.........................282
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ............213 Vehicle ........................................................230 Introduction To Connected Vehicle
Tire Size ......................................................213 Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Services .....................................................282
Rim Size......................................................214 Models........................................................230 Getting Started With Connected Vehicle
Inflation Pressure ......................................214 Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Services .....................................................284
Curb Weight................................................214 Models........................................................231 Using SiriusXM Guardian™ ...................... 286
Loading.......................................................214 DRIVING TIPS......................................................234 Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™
TRAILER TOWING .............................................. 214 Driving On Slippery Surfaces ...................234 Account ...................................................... 301
Common Towing Definitions .....................214 Driving Through Water ..............................234 CONNECTED SERVICES FAQs ......................... 301
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Off-Road Driving Tips.................................235 Connected Services SOS FAQs ................ 301
Weight.........................................................218 Connected Services Remote Door Lock/
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer MULTIMEDIA Unlock FAQs ..............................................302
Weight Ratings)..........................................218 UCONNECT SYSTEMS .......................................236 Connected Services Roadside
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................219 Assistance FAQs .......................................302
CYBERSECURITY ...............................................236
Trailer Reverse Steering Control...............219 Connected Services Send & Go FAQs ..... 302
UCONNECT SETTINGS........................................237
Towing Requirements ...............................221 Connected Services Vehicle Finder
Customer Programmable Features ..........237
Towing Tips ................................................227 FAQs ..........................................................303
HEAD-UP DISPLAY (HUD) ..................................254
SNOWPLOW ...................................................... 227 Connected Services Stolen Vehicle
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION ..............................256
Before Plowing ...........................................228 Assistance FAQs .......................................303
Snowplow Prep Package Model System Overview .......................................256 Connected Services Remote Vehicle
Availability ..................................................228 Safety And General Information ...............258 Start FAQs ................................................. 303
Over The Road Operation With Snowplow UCONNECT MODES ............................................259 Connected Services Remote Horn &
Attached .....................................................229 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................259 Lights FAQs ................................................ 304
Operating Tips............................................229 Radio Mode ...............................................259 Connected Services Account FAQs........... 304
General Maintenance................................229 Media Mode ..............................................268 Data Collection & Privacy..........................306
Phone Mode ..............................................271
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED .................. 307 SAFETY TIPS .......................................................369 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................ 392
Off-Road Pages Status Bar .......................307 Transporting Passengers ..........................369 Two-Wheel Drive Models...........................393
Vehicle Dynamics.......................................308 Transporting Pets ......................................369 Four-Wheel Drive Models..........................393
Accessory Gauge........................................308 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ......394
Pitch & Roll.................................................308 The Vehicle ................................................369 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
Suspension ................................................309 Periodic Safety Checks You Should (EARS) ................................................................ 394
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.... 309 Make Outside The Vehicle ........................371 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 394
Regulatory And Safety Information...........309 Exhaust Gas ..............................................371
Carbon Monoxide Warnings......................372 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SAFETY
SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE
SAFETY FEATURES ............................................ 310
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ENGINE ............................................................... 395
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................310 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS........................373 Maintenance Plan ..................................... 395
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...311 ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ....373 SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE .. 399
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ........................ 318 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING .......................377 Maintenance Plan — Diesel Fuel Up To
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — Preparations For Jacking...........................377 B5 Biodiesel ..............................................400
If Equipped ................................................318 Jack Location .............................................378 Additional Maintenance — B6 To B20
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Removal Of Jack And Tools.......................378 Biodiesel.....................................................403
Mitigation — If Equipped............................324 Removing The Spare Tire ..........................380 ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 404
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Jacking Instructions...................................381 3.6L Engine With Stop/Start ....................404
(TPMS) ........................................................327 To Stow The Flat Or Spare ........................384 5.7L Engine Without Stop/Start ............... 405
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .................. 334 Reinstalling The Jack And Tools ...............385 5.7L Engine With Stop/Start.....................406
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....334 JUMP STARTING ................................................386 3.0L Diesel Engine .................................... 407
Important Safety Precautions ...................334 Preparations For Jump Start.....................386 Checking Oil Level ..................................... 408
Seat Belt Systems .....................................335 Jump Starting Procedure ..........................387 Adding Washer Fluid .................................408
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...342 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – Maintenance-Free Battery ....................... 409
Child Restraints..........................................355 IF EQUIPPED ......................................................389 Pressure Washing......................................409
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .........................389
MANUAL PARK RELEASE..................................390
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............................391
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .................................. 409 TIRES....................................................................443 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Engine Oil — Gas Engine ...........................410 Tire Safety Information..............................443
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ................ 467
Engine Oil Filter..........................................410 Tires — General Information .....................449
BRAKE SYSTEM ................................................ 467
Engine Air Cleaner Filter............................411 Tire Types ...................................................454
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter — Spare Tires — If Equipped .........................455
Diesel Engine ............................................412 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .....................456 SPECIFICATIONS................................................ 467
Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter Snow Traction Devices ..............................458 Torque Specifications ............................... 467
Replacement — Diesel Engine ..................413 Tire Rotation Recommendations .............460 FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE
Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION ENGINE ............................................................... 468
Fuel — Diesel Engine .................................414 UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..................460 3.6L Engine ...............................................468
Intervention Regeneration Strategy — Treadwear ..................................................460 5.7L Engine................................................ 469
Message Process Flow (Diesel Engine)....414 Traction Grades .........................................461 Reformulated Gasoline ............................. 469
Diesel Exhaust Fluid ..................................415 Temperature Grades .................................461 Materials Added To Fuel ...........................469
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................415 STORING THE VEHICLE......................................461 Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends .....................469
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................417 BODYWORK ........................................................461 Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Body Lubrication ........................................418 Vehicles ...................................................... 470
Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......461
Windshield Wiper Blades ..........................418 CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ..470
Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........462
Exhaust System ........................................420 Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Preserving The Bodywork..........................462
Cooling System .........................................421 Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline.................. 470
INTERIORS .........................................................464
Charge Air Cooler — Inter-Cooler (Diesel Fuel System Cautions................................470
Seats And Fabric Parts ..............................464
Engine)........................................................424 FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE ....... 471
Plastic And Coated Parts...........................465
Brake System ............................................425 Diesel Fuel Specifications.........................471
Leather Surfaces .......................................465
Automatic Transmission ...........................426 Biodiesel Fuel Requirements....................472
Glass Surfaces ..........................................466
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle FLUID CAPACITIES ............................................ 474
Fluid Level .................................................426 ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................ 475
Transfer Case ............................................427 CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............... 478
FUSES .........................................................427
BULB REPLACEMENT ................................437
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE WARRANTY INFORMATION ..............................481

MOPAR® PARTS ................................................481
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................481
YOUR VEHICLE .................................................. 479
In The 50 United States And
Prepare For The Appointment...................479
Washington, D.C. .......................................481
Prepare A List.............................................479
In Canada...................................................481
Be Reasonable With Requests .................479
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .........................482
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............................. 479
General Information ..........................................482
FCA US LLC Customer Center ...................479
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ...........480
Mexico ........................................................480
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............480
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....................480
Service Contract ........................................480
10
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer, congratulations on the purchase of your new Ram vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and
high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and
maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the
two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited
for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your
driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome
the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Ú page 234.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC
offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications
carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help
ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content
introduced throughout the Owner's Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement
of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Ram best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and
care about your satisfaction.
11
SYMBOLS KEY VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or
special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/ 1
WARNING! which if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. body builders. US residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section
2.1.C. Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of
An unsafe practice which may result in personal
CAUTION! the Warranty Information. Such equipment includes video monitors, DVD/
injury or damage to the vehicle.
Blu-Ray™, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and
A suggestion which will improve installation, service on these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
NOTE: operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the
result in damage.
conversion/camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier vehicle. For any additional instructions, please contact your conversion/
TIP:
use of the product or functionality. camper manufacturer.
PAGE REFERENCE To obtain dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle, refer
ARROW Follow this reference for additional information to the Body Builder’s Guide at https://www.ramtrucks.com/
on a particular feature. ram-commercial/body-builders-guide.html.
FOOTNOTE VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic. WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures
that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains
CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle.
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
12
SYMBOL GLOSSARY Red Warning Lights

Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
Battery Charge Warning Light
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the Ú page 128
definition of each symbol Ú page 104.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Warning Lights Ú page 128
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 126
Ú page 128
Air Bag Warning Light

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 126
Ú page 128
Brake Warning Light

Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
Ú page 126
Ú page 129
Hood Open Warning Light

Tailgate Open Warning Light
Ú page 127
Ú page 129
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped

Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
Ú page 127
Ú page 129
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light

Ú page 128
13
Red Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights

Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning
Equipped Light — If Equipped
1
Ú page 129 Ú page 131
Door Open Warning Light Service LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped

Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped

Yellow Warning Lights
Ú page 131
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning
Light — If Equipped Low Fuel Warning Light
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light — If
Equipped Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
Ú page 129
Ú page 131
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL) Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light Rear Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light — If
Ú page 130 Equipped
Ú page 132
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning
Light — If Equipped Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
— If Equipped
Ú page 130
Ú page 132
14
Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Indicator Lights

Service Stop/Start System Warning Light Cargo Light On Indicator Light
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 133
Ú page 133
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light — If
Ú page 133 Equipped
Ú page 133
Air Suspension Normal Height Indicator Light —
Yellow Indicator Lights
If Equipped
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light —
Ú page 134
If Equipped
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height Indicator
Ú page 133
Light — If Equipped
Air Suspension Payload Protection Indicator
Ú page 134
Ú page 133 Entry/Exit Indicator Light — If Equipped
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light — If Ú page 134
Equipped
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising Indicator
Ú page 133 Light — If Equipped
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light Ú page 134
Ú page 133
15
Yellow Indicator Lights Yellow Indicator Lights

Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering Indicator
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped 1
Ú page 135
Ú page 134
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light Green Indicator Lights

Ú page 134
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 135
Ú page 134
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped Target Detected Indicator Light — If Equipped
ECO Mode Indicator Light

4WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 135
Ú page 134
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 135
Ú page 134
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator Light — LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
If Equipped Ú page 137
Ú page 134
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Wait To Start Light — If Equipped Ú page 136
Ú page 135
16
Green Indicator Lights White Indicator Lights

Turn Signal Indicator Lights Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 136
Ú page 137
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped
With A Premium Instrument Cluster LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light

Blue Indicator Lights
Ú page 136
High Beam Indicator Light
4WD AUTO Indicator Light — If Equipped Ú page 137
Ú page 136
White Indicator Lights

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 136
Cruise Control Ready Indicator

Ú page 136
Speed Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped

With Base/Midline Instrument Cluster Display
Ú page 136
17
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS 1 — Unlock
KEY F OB 2 — LED Light
2
3 — Lock
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
4 — Tailgate Lowering
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter-N-Go (if equipped), and 5 — Remote Start
Remote Start (if equipped). The key fob allows 6 — PANIC
you to lock or unlock all doors, tailgate, and the 7 — Emergency Key
RamBox (if equipped) as well as activate the 8 — Air Suspension
Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately
66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need to be In case the ignition switch does not change with
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. The the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
key fob also contains an emergency key, which is or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery
stored in the rear of the key fob. can be verified by referring to the instrument
NOTE: cluster, which will display directions to follow.
 The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if NOTE:
the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, A low key fob battery condition may be indicated
laptop, or other electronic device. This may by a message in the instrument cluster display,
result in poor performance. or by the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key
 If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless fob light no longer illuminates from key fob
Charging Pad, the key fob may not be found if button pushes, then the key fob battery requires
it is placed within 15 cm (150 mm) of the pad replacement.
Ú page 77.
 With the ignition in the ON position and the
vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE Key Fob
commands are disabled.
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Tailgate The following conditions must be met for the NOTE:
Push and release the unlock button on the key vehicle to lower remotely: More information on air suspension is provided
fob once to unlock the driver’s door, or, twice  The vehicle must not already be in Entry/Exit later in this manual Ú page 165.
within five seconds to unlock all doors, the (Park) ride height. Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
tailgate and the RamBox (if equipped). To lock all
 The vehicle battery must be fully charged. The replacement battery model is one CR2450
the doors and the tailgate, push the lock button
battery.
once.  All doors must be closed.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals NOTE:
 The key fob must be out of the vehicle.
will flash and the illuminated entry system will  Customers are recommended to use a
be activated. When the doors are locked, the NOTE:
battery obtained from Mopar. Aftermarket
turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp. Ensure the vehicle is clear of all objects, pets,
coin battery dimensions may not meet the
and people prior to remote lowering. original OEM coin battery dimensions.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the
first push of the unlock button. The horn chirp Canceling Remote Lowering  Perchlorate Material — special handling may
when the lock button is pushed can be
Vehicle lowering can be cancelled at anytime. apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
programmed on/off within Uconnect Settings ouswaste/perchlorate for further informa-
When vehicle lowering is cancelled, the vehicle
Ú page 237. tion.
will raise up to the next defined level and lock
Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of The out the remote lowering feature until the
 Do not touch the battery terminals that are
Vehicle) — If Equipped ignition has been cycled ON/OFF.
on the back housing or the printed circuit
For easy entry and loading, your To cancel vehicle lowering, push the key fob air board.
vehicle can be lowered by pushing the suspension lowering button one time during the
 Do not replace the coin battery if the LED on
key fob air suspension lowering button lowering process. When vehicle lowering is
the key fob above the top row buttons blinks
two times. When air suspension cancelled, the horn will chirp two times and the
lowering is requested using the key fob, the when a button is pressed. The coin battery
turn signal lamps will flash four times. Once
vehicle will send a series of chirps and flashes to should last a minimum of three years with
raising is completed, the horn will chirp one
alert the customer that the operation has begun normal vehicle usage.
time.
and will continue these alerts until it successfully
lowers.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
1. Remove the emergency key (1) by pushing edge than the left side gap. Pry open the
the emergency key release button (2) on right side, and remove the back cover.
the side of the key fob, and pulling the
4. Remove the battery by using your thumb to
emergency key out with your other hand.
slide the battery downward and back
toward the key ring. 2
Key Fob Battery Replacement

6. To assemble the key fob case, line up the
top edge of the back cover with the top of
the fob, and press the edges into the
Emergency Key Removal interlocking hinges until all edges snap
1 — Emergency Key together with no large visual gaps.
Key Fob Battery Location
2 — Emergency Key Release Button 7. Reinsert the emergency key until it locks
NOTE: into place.
2. Hold the key fob with the button side facing When replacing the battery, ensure the (+) sign
down, and locate the small rectangular gap on the battery is facing upward. Avoid touching NOTE:
on the left side between the housing and the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may The key fob battery should only be replaced by
the back cover of the key fob. Use a small cause battery deterioration. If you touch a qualified technicians. If the battery requires
screw driver (or similar tool) to pry open the battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol. replacement, see an authorized dealer.
left side of the fob cover while applying
pressure until the cover snaps open. 5. Replace the battery by using your thumb to
push down and slide the battery under the
3. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the small lip on the top edge of the opening.
key fob, which is positioned further to the
Programming And Requesting Additional electronics. A blank key fob is one that has attempted to start the engine with an invalid key
Key Fobs never been programmed. fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to
Programming the key fob may be performed by start the engine but there is an issue with the
NOTE:
an authorized dealer. vehicle electronics, the engine will start and
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
shut off after two seconds.
NOTE: serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer Ú page 482. If the vehicle security light turns on during
 Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
cannot be re-purposed and reprogrammed to SENTRY KEY longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
another vehicle. is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
 Only key fobs that are programmed to the unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
an authorized dealer.
vehicle electronics can be used to start and engine. The system does not need to be armed
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
CAUTION!
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
programmed to any other vehicle. The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
compatible with some aftermarket remote
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
WARNING! starting systems. Use of these systems may
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
 Always remove the key fobs from the Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed
security protection.
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
vehicle unattended. the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key All of the key fobs provided with your new
fob obtained from another vehicle. vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
 For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN electronics Ú page 482.
place the ignition in the OFF mode. position, the vehicle security light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of that there is a problem with the electronics. In
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone
IGNITION SWITCH OFF START/STOP ignition button and push to

operate the ignition switch.
 The engine is stopped
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
 Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking,
This feature allows the driver to operate the alarm, etc.) are still available
ignition switch with the push of a button as long 2
as the key fob is in the passenger compartment. ACC
The START/STOP ignition button has several  Engine is not started
operating modes that are labeled and will
 Some electrical devices are available (e.g.
illuminate when in position. These modes are
power sunroof, power windows etc.)
OFF, ACC, ON/RUN, and START.
ON/RUN
 Driving position Back Up Starting Method
 All the electrical devices are available (e.g. WARNING!

climate controls, heated seats, etc.)  When exiting the vehicle, always remove
START the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
 The engine will start (when foot is on the
brake)  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
NOTE:
Keyless Push Button Ignition If the ignition switch does not change the mode  Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
1 — OFF tended is dangerous for a number of
by pushing the button, the key fob may have a
2 — ACC (Accessory) reasons. A child or others could be seriously
low or depleted battery. In this situation, a back
3 — ON/RUN or fatally injured. Children should be
up method can be used to operate the ignition
warned not to touch the parking brake,
switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
The push button ignition can be placed in the brake pedal or the gear selector.
emergency key) of the key fob against the
following modes: (Continued)
prevent the Keyless Enter-N-Go system from NOTE:

WARNING! (Continued) starting the vehicle. Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the may reduce this range.
 Engine starting procedure Ú page 140.
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a  When opening the driver's door and the igni- WARNING!
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go tion is in the ON/RUN position (engine not
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate  Do not start or run an engine in a closed
running), a chime will sound to remind you to
power windows, other controls, or move the garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
place the ignition in the OFF position. In addi-
vehicle. contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
tion to the chime, the message “Ignition or
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
 Do not leave children or animals inside Accessory ON” will display in the cluster.
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
death. (GASOLINE) 
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
This system uses the key fob to start door locks or other controls could cause
CAUTION! the engine conveniently from outside serious injury or death.
the vehicle while still maintaining
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for security. The system has a range of
thieves. Always remove key fob from the HOW TO USE R EMOTE S TART
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the Push and release the Remote Start button on
vehicle unattended. Remote start is used to defrost windows in cold
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
weather and to reach a comfortable climate in
vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will
NOTE: all ambient conditions before the customer
flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if
enters the vehicle.
 The key fob may not be detected by the programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
vehicle Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start
located next to a mobile phone, laptop or mode for a 15 minute cycle.
other electronic device; these devices may Pushing the remote start button a third time
block the key fob’s wireless signal and shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, All of the following conditions must be met
insert the key into the ignition, and turn to the before the engine will remote start:
WARNING!
ON/RUN position.  Gear selector in PARK  Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
NOTE:  Doors closed contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
 With Remote Start, the engine will only run odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is 2
 Hood closed
for 15 minutes. poisonous and can cause serious injury or
 Hazard switch off death when inhaled.
 Remote Start can only be used twice.
 Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not  Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
 If an engine fault is present or fuel level is pushed) tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down door locks or other controls could cause
in 10 seconds.  Battery at an acceptable charge level serious injury or death.
 The parking lights will turn on and remain on  PANIC button not pushed
during Remote Start mode. TO EXIT R EMOTE START M ODE
 Fuel meets minimum requirement
 For security, power window and power To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote
 System not disabled from previous remote Start system, either push and release the
sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled
start event unlock button on the key fob to unlock the
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode.  Vehicle Security system not active doors, or unlock the vehicle using Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the door
 The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN  Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated handles, and disarm the vehicle security system
position before the Remote Start sequence (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the
can be repeated for a third cycle. 15 minute cycle, press the brake pedal and
push and release the START/STOP ignition
button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off adjust the settings depending on ambient Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If
with another push and release of the Remote conditions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems Equipped
Start button on the key fob, or if the engine is — If Equipped” in the next section for detailed  In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or
allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle. operation. below, the climate settings will default to
Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the climate controls will resume the
REMOTE START C OMFORT SYSTEMS — maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
previously set operations (temperature, blower I F E QUIPPED vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
control, etc.). When remote start is activated, the front and
rear defrost will automatically turn on in cold  In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C)
NOTE:
to 78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be
weather. The heated steering wheel and driver
 To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the based on the last settings selected by the
heated seat feature will turn on if programmed
system will disable for two seconds after driver.
in the comfort menu screen within Uconnect
receiving a valid Remote Start request.
Settings Ú page 237. In warm weather, the  In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or
 For vehicles equipped with the Keyless driver vented seat feature will automatically above, the climate settings will default to
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the turn on when the remote start is activated and MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start is programmed in the comfort menu screen. on.
Button” will display in the instrument cluster The vehicle will adjust the climate control
display until you push the START/STOP igni- For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
settings depending on the outside ambient
tion button. control settings, see Ú page 60.
temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If NOTE:
REMOTE START F RONT DEFROST These features will stay on through the duration
Equipped
ACTIVATION — IF E QUIPPED of remote start, or until the ignition is placed in
The climate controls automatically adjust to an the ON/RUN position. The climate control
When remote start is active, and the outside
optimal temperature and mode, dependent on settings will change, and exit the automatic
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the outside ambient temperature. When the defaults, if manually adjusted by the driver
the system will automatically activate front
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the while the vehicle is in remote start mode. This
defrost for 15 minutes or less. The time is
climate controls will resume their previous includes turning the climate controls off using
dependent on the ambient temperature. Once
settings. the OFF button.
the timer expires, the system will automatically
REMOTE START W INDSHIELD W IPER REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) HOW TO USE R EMOTE S TART
DE-I CER ACTIVATION — IF E QUIPPED This system uses the key fob to start All of the following conditions must be met
When the Remote Start system is active and the the engine conveniently from outside before the engine will remote start:
outside ambient temperature is less than 33°F the vehicle while still maintaining  Gear selector in PARK
(0.6°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will security. The system has a range of 2
activate. Exiting remote start will its resume approximately 300 ft (91 m).  Doors closed
previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper  Hood closed
NOTE:
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will
continue.  Obstructions between the vehicle and the  Hazard switch off
key fob may reduce this range.
REMOTE START A BORT M ESSAGE  Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
 The Remote Start system will wait for the pressed)
The following messages will display in the
Wait To Start indicator light Ú page 135 to Battery at an acceptable charge level
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to 
extinguish before cranking the engine. This
remote start, or exits remote start prematurely:
allows time for the engine pre-heat cycle to  PANIC button not pushed
 Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open pre-heat the cylinder air, and is normal in
 Fuel meets minimum requirement
cold weather. For further information on the
 Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Wait To Start indicator light and the pre-heat  System not disabled from previous remote
 Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low cycle see . start event
 Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold  Vehicle Security system not active
 Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired  Water In Fuel indicator light is not illuminated
 Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to  Wait To Start indicator light is not illuminated
Reset
 Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illumi-
The message will stay active until the ignition is nated
placed in the ON/RUN position Ú page 482.
WARNING! TO ARM THE SYSTEM  Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock
the door Ú page 28.
 Do not start or run an engine in a closed Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:  Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
disarm the system.
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is 1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is in the OFF position. NOTE:
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
 For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry,  The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
death when inhaled.
make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition disarm the Vehicle Security system. Use of
 Keep key fobs away from children. Opera- system is OFF. the door key cylinder when the system is
tion of the Remote Start System, windows, armed will sound the alarm when the door is
door locks or other controls could cause 2. Perform one of the following methods to
opened.
serious injury or death. lock the vehicle:
 Push the lock button on the interior  The Vehicle Security system remains armed
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED power door lock switch with the driver when the power tailgate (if equipped) is
and/or passenger door open. opened using the tailgate button on the key
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle fob.
doors, hood, tailgate, and the Keyless Enter-N-Go  Push the lock button on the exterior
— Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the Passive Entry door handle with a valid key  If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to
Vehicle Security system is armed, interior fob available in the same exterior zone unlock the tailgate, the Vehicle Security
switches for door locks and tailgate release are Ú page 28. system is disarmed and the rest of the
disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle doors will remain locked unless
Vehicle Security system will provide the following  Push the lock button on the key fob. “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is selected in the
audible and visible signals: Passive Entry settings.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
 The horn will pulse  When the Vehicle Security system is armed,
TO DISARM T HE S YSTEM the interior power door lock switches will not
 The turn signals will flash unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed
 The vehicle security light in the instrument using any of the following methods:
cluster will flash
 Push the unlock button on the key fob.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to

protect your vehicle. However, you can create
DOORS WARNING!
conditions where the system will give you a false MANUAL D OOR L OCKS  For personal security and safety in the
alarm. If one of the previously described arming event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors
The power door locks can be manually locked
sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security before you drive as well as when you park
system will arm regardless of whether you are in
from inside the vehicle by using the door lock
and leave the vehicle. 2
knob. To lock each door, push the door lock
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle  When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
knob on each door trim panel downward. To
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this the keyless ignition is in the OFF mode,
unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system. remove the key fob from the vehicle and
handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim lock your vehicle.
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle panel upward. If the lock knob is down when the  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
Security system will remain armed when the door is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, with access to an unlocked vehicle.
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, before closing the door. tended is dangerous for a number of
disarm the Vehicle Security system. reasons. A child or others could be seriously
NOTE:
or fatally injured. Children should be
REARMING O F T HE SYSTEM Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
Vehicle Security system.
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is brake pedal or the gear selector.
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the
will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, five
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
seconds between cycles, and up to eight cycles
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
if the trigger remains active. The Vehicle vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
Security system will then rearm itself. in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you
lock the doors using the manual door lock.
Door Lock Knob
POWER D OOR L OCKS — IF EQUIPPED If the door lock switch is pushed while the you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s)
ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's without having to push the key fob lock or
The power door lock switches are located on door is open, the doors will not lock. unlock buttons.
each front door panel. Push the switch to lock or
unlock the doors. If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened NOTE:
from inside the vehicle without first unlocking
 Passive Entry may be programmed on or off
the door. The door may be unlocked manually
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 237.
by raising the lock knob.
 The key fob may not be detected by the
POWER S IDE STEPS — I F EQUIPPED vehicle Passive Entry system if it is located
The Power Side Steps will extend a step for next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other elec-
easier entry and exit of the vehicle. tronic device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
When configured for “Auto” mode, the Power Passive Entry system from locking/unlocking
Side Steps will deploy when any of the doors are the vehicle.
opened, or when the deploy setting is activated
Power Door Lock Switches  Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated
through the touchscreen. When configured for
approach (low beams, license plate lamp,
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the “Store” mode, the steps will not deploy unless
position lamps) for whichever time duration
keys are found inside the vehicle when the door the setting is selected manually through the is set between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds.
lock button on the front door panel is used to “Controls” menu within the touchscreen. Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two
lock the door. This will occur for two attempts. If the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h), or flashes of the turn signal lamps.
Upon the third attempt, the doors will lock even if the retract setting is selected within Uconnect  If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
if the key is inside. Settings Ú page 237, the steps will retract. snowing on the Passive Entry door handle,
NOTE: KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, resulting in a slower response time.
laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless
E NTRY
 If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
signal may get blocked, and the driver’s door The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
may not unlock automatically. the vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless vehicle will re-lock and (if equipped) will arm
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry. This feature allows the Vehicle Security system.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side  All doors will unlock when the front  When the tailgate transitions from open to
passenger door handle is grabbed regardless closed and remote start is active.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
of the driver’s door unlock preference
(1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to When any of these situations occur, after all
setting.
unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
handle will unlock the driver door automatically. Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob 2
Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock (FOBIK-Safe) inside the vehicle, the vehicle will unlock and
all doors and the tailgate automatically. alert the customer.
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your NOTE:
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
with an automatic door unlock feature which valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors
position. when any of the following conditions are true:
There are five situations that trigger a
 The doors are manually locked using the door
FOBIK-Safe search in any passive entry vehicle:
lock knobs.
 A lock request is made by a valid Passive
 Three attempts are made to lock the doors
Entry key fob while a door is open.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock using the door panel switch and then the
 A lock request is made by the Passive Entry doors are closed.
NOTE: door handle while a door is open.
 There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside
 If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is  A lock request is made by the door panel the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive
programmed all doors will unlock when you switch while the door is open. Entry door handle.
grab hold of the front driver’s door handle.
You can select between “Unlock Driver Door  When the Vehicle Security system is in To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Tailgate
1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” pre-arm or armed status and the tailgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within the Uconnect Settings Ú page 237. transitions from opened to closed.
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handles,
pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock
the vehicle.
NOTE: AUTOMATIC UNLOCK D OORS ON E XIT —

 After pushing the door handle button, you I F E QUIPPED
must wait two seconds before you can lock or The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry with power door locks after the following
door handle. This is done to allow you to sequence of actions:
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle without the vehicle unlocking. 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
feature is enabled.
 If Passive Entry is disabled using the
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock Uconnect settings, the key protection 2. All doors are closed.
described in "Frequency Operated Button
NOTE: Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/ 3. The transmission gear selector was not in
DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the functional. PARK, then is placed in PARK.
door handle lock button. This could unlock the 4. Any door is opened.
door(s).  The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — IF
 The LED light on the key fob will not blink EQUIPPED
if the key fob battery is low or fully
depleted, but a low key fob battery condi- The auto door lock feature default condition is
tion will still support the Passive Entry enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
system functionality. When the key fob automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
battery is low, the instrument cluster will 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature
display a message indicating that the key is enabled/disabled in the Uconnect Settings
fob battery is low Ú page 17 Ú page 237.
Ú page 482.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
CHILD-P ROTECTION DOOR LOCK using the outside door handle even though open a door with the internal handle. Once the
the inside door lock is in the unlocked posi- Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged,
SYSTEM — R EAR D OORS
tion. it is impossible to open the doors from inside
To provide a safer environment for small the vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be
children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors  After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock Lock system, always test the door from the 2
system. inside to make certain it is in the unlocked
position.
STEERING WHEEL
To use the system, open each rear door, use a TILT/TELESCOPING S TEERING COLUMN
flat blade screwdriver, and rotate the dial to the  After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
lock or unlock position. When the system on a system, always test the door from the inside This feature allows you to tilt the steering
door is engaged, that door can only be opened to make certain it is in the locked position. column upward or downward. It also allows you
by using the outside door handle even if the  For emergency exit with the system engaged, to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
inside door lock is in the unlocked position. pull up on the door lock knob (unlocked posi- tilt/telescoping lever is located on the steering
tion), roll down the window, and open the column, below the multifunction lever.
door with the outside door handle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside door
handle when the Child Protection Door Locks
are engaged.
Child Lock Control
NOTE: Tilt/Telescoping Lever
NOTE: Always use this device when carrying children. To unlock the steering column, push the control
 When the Child-Protection Door Lock system After engaging the child lock on both rear doors, downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
is engaged, the door can be opened only by check for effective engagement by trying to column, move the steering wheel upward or
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the operator turns it off. The heated steering
the steering column, pull the steering wheel wheel may not turn on when it is already warm. WARNING! (Continued)
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock The heated steering wheel control button is  Do not place anything on the steering wheel
the steering column in position, push the located within the climate or controls screen of that insulates against heat, such as a
control upward until fully engaged. the touchscreen. blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
WARNING!  Press the heated steering wheel button wheel heater to overheat.
once to turn the heating element on.
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while  Press the heated steering wheel button a DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
driving or driving with the steering column second time to turn the heating element off. This feature allows the driver to save up to two
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
NOTE: different memory profiles for easy recall
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
The engine must be running for the heated through a memory switch. Each memory profile
warning may result in serious injury or death.
steering wheel to operate. saves desired position settings for the following
features:
HEATED S TEERING WHEEL — IF For information on use with the Remote Start
 Driver’s seat
EQUIPPED system, see Ú page 24.
 Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (on/off) (if
The steering wheel contains a heating element WARNING! equipped)
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the  Adjustable pedals (if equipped)
temperature setting. Once the heated steering skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-  Side mirrors
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys- NOTE:
ical conditions must exercise care when Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each
using the steering wheel heater. It may can be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
(Continued)
The driver memory settings switch is located on 1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN NOTE:
the driver door, next to the door handle, and position (do not start the engine). Before programming your key fob you must
consists of three buttons: select the “Personal Settings Linked to Key
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
 The set (S) button, which is used to activate Fob” feature through the Uconnect system
preferences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside
the memory save function. Ú page 237.
mirrors, adjustable pedals (if equipped), 2
 The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to and radio station presets). To program your key fob, perform the following:
recall either of two pre-programmed memory 3. Push the set (S) button on the memory 1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
profiles. switch, and then push the desired memory position.
button (1 or 2) within five seconds. The
2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2.
instrument cluster display will display which
memory position has been set. 3. Once the profile has been recalled, push
and release the set (S) button on the
NOTE: memory switch.
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle
in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to 4. Push and release button (1) or (2)
recall a memory profile. accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2)
will display in the instrument cluster.
LINKING A ND U NLINKING T HE K EY F OB
5. Push and release the lock button on the key
Memory Switch T O MEMORY
fob within 10 seconds.
PROGRAMMING T HE M EMORY FEATURE Your key fob can be programmed to recall one
of two saved memory profiles by pushing the NOTE:
To create a new memory profile, perform the Your key fob can be unlinked to your memory
unlock button on the key fob.
following: settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed
NOTE: by pushing the unlock button on the key fob
Saving a new memory profile will erase the within 10 seconds.
selected profile from memory.
MEMORY POSITION R ECALL WARNING! (Continued)

Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
NOTE:  Do not allow people to ride in any area of Both front seats are adjustable forward or
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in your vehicle that is not equipped with seats rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle
PARK, a message will display in the instrument and seat belts. In a collision, people riding is located under the seat cushion at the front
cluster display. in these areas are more likely to be seri- edge of each seat.
ously injured or killed.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or
two, push the desired memory button number  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
(1 or 2) or the unlock button on the key fob and using a seat belt properly.
linked to the desired memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the MANUAL A DJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS)
memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. — IF EQUIPPED
When a recall is canceled, the driver seat will
stop moving. A delay of one second will occur WARNING!
before another recall can be selected.
 Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
SEATS is dangerous. The sudden movement of the Manual Seat Adjustment Bar
seat could cause you to lose control. The While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint seat belt might not be adjusted properly
System of the vehicle. and slide the seat forward or rearward. Release
and you could be injured. Adjust the seat the bar once you have reached the desired
only while the vehicle is parked. position. Then, using body pressure, move
WARNING!
 Do not ride with the seatback reclined so forward and rearward on the seat to be sure
 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, that the shoulder belt is no longer resting that the seat adjusters have latched.
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, against your chest. In a collision you could
people riding in these areas are more likely slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
to be seriously injured or killed. even fatally injured. Use the recliner only
(Continued) when the vehicle is parked.
WARNING!
 Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or 2
death.
 Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result Manual Recline Lever Center Portion Of Front Bench Seat
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment  Do not stand or lean in front of the seat
The recline lever is located on the outboard side while actuating the handle. The seatback
of the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward may swing forward and hit you causing
slightly, lift the lever, lean back to the desired injury.
position and release the lever. To return the  To avoid injury, place your hand on the seat-
seatback to its normal upright position, lean back and actuate the handle, then position
forward and lift the lever. Release the lever the seatback in the desired position.
once the seat back is in the upright position.
Center Portion Folded Forward
Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
The seat is divided into three segments. The
outboard seat portions are each 40% of the
total width of the seat. If equipped, the back of
the center portion (20%) easily folds down to
provide an armrest/center storage
compartment.
MANUAL A DJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS) NOTE:

This feature is not available if vehicle is
WARNING! equipped with rear bench seat.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the

WARNING!
top of the seatback. This could impair
visibility or become a dangerous projectile in Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
a sudden stop or collision. the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death. Power Seat Switches
The recliner handle is located on the front of the 1 — Power Seat Switch
rear outboard seat cushions. To adjust the seat 2 — Power Seatback Switch
back, lift upward on the handle, and slide the POWER ADJUSTMENT (F RONT SEATS) —
seat bottom forward. The lower portion of the I F E QUIPPED Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
seat back will tilt rearward. When you reach the
Some models may be equipped with eight-way The seat can be adjusted both forward and
desired position, release the handle.
power driver and passenger seats. The power rearward by using the power seat switch. The
seat switches are located on the outboard side seat will move in the direction of the switch.
of the driver and passenger seat cushions. Release the switch when the desired position
There are two power seat switches that are has been reached.
used to control the movement of the seat
cushion and the seatback.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down by using the power seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle Locations
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down

WARNING! (Continued)
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
up or down using the power seat switch. The  Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
front of the seat cushion will move in the that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
direction of the switch. Release the switch when against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result 2
the desired position has been reached.
in serious injury or death.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
CAUTION!
forward or rearward by using the power seat Power Lumbar Switch
switch. The seat will move in the direction of the Do not place any article under a power seat
switch. Release the switch when the desired or impede its ability to move as it may cause Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
position is reached. damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may This feature provides automatic driver’s seat
become limited if movement is stopped by an positioning to enhance driver mobility when
WARNING! obstruction in the seat’s path. entering and exiting the vehicle.
 Adjusting a seat while driving may be The distance the driver’s seat moves depends
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving on where you have the driver’s seat positioned
could result in loss of control which could Vehicles equipped with power driver or when you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
cause a collision and serious injury or passenger seats may also be equipped with position.
death. power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is
located on the outboard side of the power seat.  When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the
 Seats should be adjusted before fastening Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar OFF position, the driver’s seat will move
the seat belts and while the vehicle is support. Push the switch rearward to decrease about 2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the
parked. Serious injury or death could result driver’s seat position is greater than or equal
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or
from a poorly adjusted seat belt. to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
downward on the switch will raise and lower the
(Continued) position of the support. stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the ignition into the
ACC or ON/RUN position.
 When you remove the key fob from the igni- HEATED S EATS — IF E QUIPPED Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
tion, the driver’s seat will move to a position The front heated seats control buttons are
0.3 inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop WARNING! located within the Uconnect system. You can
if the driver’s seat position is between gain access to the control buttons through the
0.9 inches and 2.7 inches (22.7 mm and  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic climate screen and the controls screen.
67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat
will return to its previously set position when illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-  Push the heated seat button once to turn
you place the ignition to the ACC or ON/RUN tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys- the HI setting on.
position. ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns  Push the heated seat button a second
 The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled even at low temperatures, especially if time to turn the MED setting on.
when the driver’s seat position is less than used for long periods of time.
0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear  Push the heated seat button a third time
 Do not place anything on the seat or seat- to turn the LO setting on.
stop. At this position, there is no benefit to
back that insulates against heat, such as a
the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat  Push the heated seat button a fourth time
Easy Entry.
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has to turn the heating elements off.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry been overheated could cause serious
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each burns due to the increased surface NOTE:
memory setting profile Ú page 32. temperature of the seat.  Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
NOTE: felt within two to five minutes.
For information on use with the Remote Start
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or  The engine must be running for the heated
system, see Ú page 24.
disabled through the programmable features in seats to operate.
the Uconnect system Ú page 237.
 The level of heat selected will stay on until
the operator changes it.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped VENTILATED S EATS — I F EQUIPPED Rear Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the two rear outboard seats If equipped, the two outboard rear seats will
may be equipped with heated seats. There are
Front Ventilated Seats have ventilated seats. The rear ventilated seat
two heated seat switches that allow the rear The ventilated seats are equipped with fans control switches are located on the rear of the
passengers to operate the seats independently. that can be controlled through the climate and center console.
control screen in the Uconnect system. The fans 2
The heated seat switches for each heater are There are two ventilated seat switches that
located on the rear of the center console. operate at three speeds, HI, MED and LO.
allow the rear passengers to operate the seats
There are two heated seat switches that allow  Press the ventilated seat button once to independently. The fans operate at three
the rear passengers to operate the seats choose HI. speeds: HI, MED, and LO. Push the ventilated
independently. You can choose from HI, MED, seat buttons to toggle through the speeds, or to
LO, or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator lights  Press the ventilated seat button a second turn the feature off.
in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. time to choose MED.
NOTE:
 Push the heated seat button once to turn  Press the ventilated seat button a third The engine must be running for the ventilated
the HI setting on. time to choose LO. seats to operate.
 Push the heated seat button a second  Press the ventilated seat button a fourth PLASTIC G ROCERY BAG RETAINERS
time to turn the MED setting on. time to turn the ventilation off.
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery
 Push the heated seat button a third time NOTE: bag handles are attached to the underside of
to turn the LO setting on. The engine must be running for the ventilated the rear seat cushion. To access these hooks,
seats to operate. lift the rear seat cushion upward.
 Push the heated seat button a fourth time
to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
HEAD R ESTRAINTS Front Head Restraints To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the
Your vehicle is equipped with front four-way top of the head restraint toward the front of the
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk vehicle as desired and release. To adjust the
of injury by restricting head movement in the driver and passenger head restraints.
head restraint rearward, pull the top of the head
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the restraint to the forward most position and
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint head restraint. To lower the head restraint, release. The head restraint will return to the
is located above the top of your ear. push the adjustment button, located at the rear most position.
base of the head restraint, and push downward
WARNING! on the head restraint.
 All occupants, including the driver, should NOTE:
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s The head restraints should only be removed by
seat until the head restraints are placed in qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
their proper positions in order to minimize If either of the head restraints require removal,
the risk of neck injury in the event of a see an authorized dealer.
crash.
 Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly Forward Adjustment
adjusted or removed could cause serious NOTE:
injury or death in the event of a collision. If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench
seat, the center head restraint is not adjustable
NOTE: or removable.
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back Head Restraint Adjustment Button Location
of your head.
WARNING! UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION

 All occupants, including the driver, should I NTRODUCING V OICE RECOGNITION
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key 2
the risk of neck injury in the event of a Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
crash. control your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR)
system.
 Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a Release Button
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious WARNING!
injury or death in the event of a collision. Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
Rear Head Restraints or death in a collision. Always make sure the
The outboard head restraints are outboard head restraints are in their upright
non-adjustable, but can be folded down for positions when the seat is to be occupied.
improved rearward visibility. Push the button on
the outboard side of the head restraint to The center head restraint is not adjustable or Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
release. To return the head restraint to its removable.
upright position, push up on the head restraint
NOTE:
until it locks back into place.
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
If any of the head restraints require removal,
see an authorized dealer.
For child restraint tethering Ú page 334.
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in

the Apps menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen,
you have the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not,
you have a Uconnect 4C with 8.4-inch display
system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
 “Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
 “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
 “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
Voice Recognition system’s status.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display

GET S TARTED For Uconnect system support, call

1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
The VR button is used to activate /deactivate week) or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
your Voice Recognition system. DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF 2
 Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of EQUIPPED
noise that may impact recognition. The adjustable pedals system is designed to
 Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume allow a greater range of driver comfort for
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
while facing straight ahead. steering wheel tilt and seat position. This
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And feature allows the brake and accelerator pedals
 Each time you give a Voice Command, first Send Or Receive A Text to move toward or away from the driver to
push the VR button, wait until after the beep, 2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin provide improved position with the steering
then say your Voice Command. Radio, Media, Navigation, And Climate Functions wheel.
3 — Push The Hang-up Button To End A Call
 You can interrupt the help message or The adjustable pedal switch is located on the
system prompts by pushing the VR button ADDITIONAL I NFORMATION instrument panel, below the headlight switch.
and saying a Voice Command from the
current category. © 2020 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc
Ú page 482.
 Further small adjustments may be necessary

to find the best possible seat/pedal position.
MIRRORS
 For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
I NSIDE REARVIEW M IRROR
Settings Ú page 32, you can use your key fob Manual Mirror — If Equipped
or the memory switch on the driver’s door
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
pre-programmed positions.
center on the view through the rear window.
WARNING! Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
Adjustable Pedals Switch reduced by moving the small control under the
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is mirror to the night position (toward the rear of
 The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition
moving. You could lose control and have an the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
placed in the OFF position.
accident. Always adjust the pedals while the while set in the day position (toward the
 The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is parked. windshield).
vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Cruise
Control system or Adaptive Cruise Control
system is on. The following messages will CAUTION!
appear in the instrument cluster display if the Do not place any article under the adjustable
pedals are attempted to be adjusted when pedals or impede its ability to move, as it may
the system is locked out: “Adjustable Pedal cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal
Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or travel may become limited if movement is
“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In
stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable
Reverse”.
pedal's path.
NOTE:
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
 Always adjust the pedals to a position that
allows full movement of the pedal.
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped 3 — Left Scroll Button

CAUTION!
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, 4 — Right Scroll Button
left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to To avoid damage to the mirror during clean-
ing, never spray any cleaning solution directly Push the menu button next to the on/off control
center on the view through the rear window.
onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a to access the following mirror options:
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. 2
 Brightness
glare from vehicles behind you.
Digital Rearview Mirror — If Equipped  Tilt
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high  Pan (if equipped)
disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE to definition, wide and unobstructed view of the
improve the driver’s rear view. road behind while driving. Use the left and right buttons to scroll through
menu options.
To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, push the
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned
on/off control lever on the bottom of the mirror When not in use, pull the on/off control back
on or off through the touchscreen.
forward. toward the steering wheel to return the mirror to
the regular Automatic Dimming Mirror.
NOTE:
The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective
during night time driving in low light applica-
tions.
Automatic Dimming Mirror

Digital Rearview Mirror
1 — On/Off Control
2 — Menu Button
Illuminated Vanity Mirror

WARNING!
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors and lift the cover. Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much
on side convex mirrors could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object.
Use your inside mirror when judging the size
or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
“Slide-On-Rod” Extender mirror.
NOTE:
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
The sun visor can also be extended while the
sun visor is against the windshield for additional All outside mirrors are hinged and may be
Lift Cover For Illuminated Mirror moved either forward or rearward to resist
sun blockage through the front of the vehicle.
damage. The hinges have three detent
“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If
Equipped OUTSIDE MIRRORS positions:
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the  Full forward position
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor center of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve
 Full rearward position
to block out the sun. the optimal view.
 Normal position
1. Fold down the sun visor. NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with puddle lamps
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip. CAUTION!
under the outside mirrors, they can be turned
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window. off through the Uconnect system Ú page 237. It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the
full rearward position to resist damage when
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun entering a car wash or a narrow location.
blockage.
OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING The power mirror controls consist of mirror The switch for the power folding mirrors is
MIRRORS — IF E QUIPPED select buttons and a four-way mirror control located between the power mirror switches
switch. To adjust a mirror, push the mirror select L (left) and R (right). Push the switch once and
The driver’s outside mirror and if equipped, the button for the mirror that you want to adjust. the mirrors will fold in, push the switch a second
passenger’s outside mirror, will automatically Using the mirror control switch, push on any of time and the mirrors will return to the normal
dim for glare from vehicles behind you. This the four arrows for the direction that you want driving position. 2
feature is controlled by the inside automatic the mirror to move. If the mirror is manually folded after a powered
dimming mirror. The mirrors will automatically
cycle, a potential extra button push is required
adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror
to get the mirrors back to the normal driving
adjusts.
position. If the mirror does not fold
POWER M IRRORS automatically, check for ice or dirt build up at
the pivot area, which can cause excessive drag.
The power mirror switch is located on the
driver's side door trim panel.
Power Mirror Movement

Power mirror preselected positions can be
controlled by the optional Driver Memory
Settings feature Ú page 32.
POWER F OLDING O UTSIDE M IRRORS
Power Folding Mirror Switch
FOR STANDARD AND TRAILER T OW — IF
Power Mirror Controls EQUIPPED
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Right Mirror Selection
The power folding mirrors can be folded
rearward and unfolded into the normal driving
3 — Left Mirror Selection
position.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors HEATED M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED

You may need to reset the power folding mirrors These mirrors are heated to melt frost
if the following occurs: or ice. This feature will be activated
 The mirrors are accidentally blocked while whenever you turn on the rear window
folding. defroster (if equipped) Ú page 60.
 The mirrors are accidentally manually TILT SIDE MIRRORS I N REVERSE — IF

folded/unfolded (by hand or by pushing the EQUIPPED
power folding mirror switch).
This feature provides automatic outside mirror
Trailer Towing Position
 The mirrors come out of the unfolded posi- positioning which will assist with the driver’s
tion. NOTE: ground visibility. The outside mirrors will move
Fold the trailer towing mirrors prior to entering slightly downward from the present position
 The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal
an automated car wash. when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The
driving speeds.
outside mirrors will then return to the original
A small blindspot mirror is located next to the
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and position when the vehicle is shifted out of
main mirror and can be adjusted manually.
unfold them by pushing the button (this may REVERSE. If the vehicle is equipped with Driver
require multiple attempts). This resets them to Memory Settings, this feature will be linked to
their normal driving position. the programmable settings.
TRAILER TOWING MIRRORS — IF NOTE:
E QUIPPED The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect system
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable Ú page 237.
mirror head to provide a greater vision range
when towing extra-wide loads. To change
position inboard or outboard, the mirror head
should be rotated (flipped in or out). Blindspot Mirror
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER  To operate HomeLink®, push and release

any of the programmed HomeLink® buttons.
ERASING ALL THE H OMELINK®
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED C HANNELS
These buttons will activate the devices they
are programmed to with each press of the To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
corresponding HomeLink® button.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN 2
 The HomeLink® indicator light is located position.
above the center button.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or
HOMELINK® until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
For efficient programming and accurate NOTE:

transmission of the radio frequency signal, it is Erasing all channels should only be performed
HomeLink® Buttons recommended that a new battery be placed in when programming HomeLink® for the first
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is time. Do not erase channels when programming
 HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
being programmed to the HomeLink® system. additional buttons.
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates, Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are I DENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
lighting, or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles trying to program your HomeLink® button to. R OLLING C ODE O R N ON-R OLLING C ODE
12 Volt battery. Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the DEVICE
garage before you begin programming. Before programming a device to one of your
 The HomeLink® buttons that are located in
the overhead console or sunvisor designate It is recommended that you erase all the HomeLink® buttons, you must determine
the three different HomeLink® channels. channels of your HomeLink® before you use it whether the device has a rolling code or
for the first time. non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices NOTE: Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using
NOTE:
good indicator is its manufacturing date. this procedure. You do not need to erase all
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
Typically, devices manufactured after 1995 channels when programming additional
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
have rolling codes. A device with a rolling code buttons.
final step 1.
will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button 1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
located where the antenna is attached to the 1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
position.
device. The button may not be immediately garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
visible when looking at the device. The name 2. Place the garage door opener transmitter button. This can usually be found where
and color of the button may vary slightly by 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the the hanging antenna wire is attached to
manufacturer. HomeLink® button you wish to program, the garage door opener motor. Firmly push
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
NOTE: light in view. button.
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device. 3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you 2. Return to the vehicle and push the
want to program while you push and hold programmed HomeLink® button three
Non-rolling Code Devices the garage door opener transmitter button times (holding the button for two seconds
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will you are trying to replicate. each time). If the garage door opener motor
not have a rolling code. These devices will also operates, programming is complete.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. the HomeLink® indicator light. The 3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
PROGRAMMING H OMELINK® TO A HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly to confirm that the garage door opener
and then rapidly. Once this happens, motor operates. If the garage door opener
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
release both buttons. motor does not operate, repeat the final
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to steps for the rolling code procedure.
activate your garage door opener motor, follow NOTE:
the steps below: Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
non-rolling code final steps.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final PROGRAMMING H OMELINK® TO A want to program the HomeLink® button to has
Steps MISCELLANEOUS D EVICE a Rolling Code, or Non-rolling Code.
1. Push and hold the programmed 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
The procedure on how to program HomeLink®
HomeLink® button and observe the without starting the engine.
to a miscellaneous device follows the same
HomeLink® indicator light. If the procedure as programming to a garage door 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® 2
HomeLink® indicator light stays on opener Ú page 50. Be sure to determine if the button until the HomeLink® Indicator light
constantly, programming is complete. device has a rolling code, or non-rolling code begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button before beginning the programming process. release the button.
to confirm that the garage door opener NOTE: 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
motor operates. If the garage door opener Canadian radio frequency laws require trans- Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
motor does not operate, repeat the steps mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several Garage Door Opener” Ú page 50, and
from the beginning. seconds of transmission, which may not be long follow all remaining steps.
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
WARNING! during programming. Similar to this Canadian CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to P ROGRAMMING
 Your motorized door or gate will open and
time-out in the same manner. The procedure For programming transmitters in Canada/
close while you are programming the
may need to be performed multiple times to United States that require the transmitter
universal transceiver. Do not program the
successfully pair the device to your HomeLink® signals to “time-out” after several seconds of
transceiver if people or pets are in the path
of the door or gate. buttons. transmission.
 Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage REPROGRAMMING A S INGLE Canadian radio frequency laws require
or confined area while programming the HOMELINK® B UTTON transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle several seconds of transmission – which may
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is has been previously trained, without erasing all signal during programming. Similar to this
poisonous when inhaled and can cause you the channels, follow the procedure below. Be Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
and others to be severely injured or killed. sure to determine whether the new device you designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the

cycling process to prevent possible overheating
NOTE: EXTERIOR LIGHTS
 If the indicator light stays on constantly,
of the garage door or gate motor.
programming is complete and the garage
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. door/device should activate when the Home- The headlight switch is located on the left side
Link button is pressed. of the instrument panel. This switch controls the
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to operation of the headlights, parking lights,
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the  To program the two remaining HomeLink
automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument
HomeLink button you wish to program while buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
panel light dimming, cargo light/trailer spotter
keeping the HomeLink indicator light in button. DO NOT erase the channels.
lights (if equipped), and fog lights (if equipped).
view.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink device for programming, plug it back in at this
button, while you press and release time.
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
two seconds until HomeLink has (Canadian/Gate Operator)
successfully accepted the frequency signal.
The indicator light will flash slowly and then To reprogram a channel that has been
rapidly when fully trained. previously trained, follow these steps:
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
flash rates. When it changes, it is 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink Headlight Switch
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds button until the indicator light begins to 1 — Rotate Headlight Control
or longer in rare cases. The garage door flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the 2 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
may open and close while you are button. 3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
programming.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with 4 — Push Cargo Light Switch
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink “Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” 5 — Push Fog Light Switch
button and observe the indicator light. step 2 and follow all remaining steps
Ú page 482.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight MULTIFUNCTION L EVER  If a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is the same side of the vehicle will turn off for
on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate The multifunction lever is located on the left the duration of the turn signal activation.
light and instrument panel lights are also turned side of the steering column. Once the turn signal is no longer active, the
on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the DRL lamp will illuminate.
headlight switch back to the O (off) position. 2
 If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running
CAUTION! Lights can be turned on and off using the
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, Uconnect system Ú page 237.
solvents, steel wool or other abrasive
materials to clean the lenses. HIGH/LOW B EAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the
NOTE: instrument panel to switch the headlights to
 Your vehicle is equipped with plastic head- Multifunction Lever high beams. Pulling the multifunction lever
light and fog light (if equipped) lenses that back will turn the low beams on.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS)
are lighter and less susceptible to stone AUTOMATIC HIGH B EAM HEADLAMP
breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on
scratch resistant as glass and therefore whenever the engine is running, and the low CONTROL — I F EQUIPPED
different lens cleaning procedures must be beams are not on. The lights will remain on until The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
followed. the ignition is placed in the OFF or ACC position, system provides increased forward lighting at
or the parking brake is engaged. night by automating high beam control through
 To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid NOTE: the use of a camera mounted on the inside
wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, rearview mirror or a windshield mounted
wash with a mild soap solution followed by  For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime camera. These cameras detect vehicle specific
rinsing. Running Lights will automatically deactivate light and automatically switch from high beams
when the front fog lights are turned on. to low beams until the approaching vehicle is
out of view.
NOTE: FLASH-TO-P ASS AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS W ITH W IPERS

 The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control You can signal another vehicle with your If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic
can be turned on or off by selecting “ON” headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction Headlights, it also has this
under “Auto Dim High Beams” within your lever toward you. This will cause the high beam customer-programmable feature. When your
Uconnect Settings Ú page 237, as well as headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the headlights are in the automatic mode and the
turning the headlight switch to the AUTO posi- lever is released. engine is running, they will automatically turn
tion. on when the wiper system is on. This feature is
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — I F EQUIPPED programmable through the Uconnect system
 Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will This system automatically turns the headlights Ú page 237.
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer on or off according to ambient light levels. To If your vehicle is equipped with the Rain Sensing
to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch Wiper system Ú page 59, and it is activated,
obstructions on the windshield or camera to the AUTO position. the headlights will automatically turn on after
lens will cause the system to function improp- When the system is on, the Headlight Delay the wipers complete five wipe cycles within
erly. feature is also on. This means the headlights approximately one minute, and they will turn off
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place approximately four minutes after the wipers
 If the windshield or Automatic High Beam
Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the completely stop.
mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper automatic headlights off, turn the headlight
NOTE:
performance. See a local authorized dealer. switch out of the AUTO position.
When your headlights come on during the
NOTE: daytime, the instrument panel lights will auto-
 To opt out of the Advanced Auto High Beam
The engine must be running before the head- matically dim to the lower nighttime intensity.
Sensitivity Control (default) and enter
lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
Reduced High Beam Sensitivity Control (not
recommended), toggle the high beam lever PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL L IGHTS
6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
placing the ignition in the ON position. The To turn on the parking lights and instrument
system will return to the default setting upon panel lights, rotate the headlight switch
placing the ignition in the OFF position. clockwise. To turn off the parking lights, rotate
the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
HEADLIGHT DELAY FOG LIGHTS — I F EQUIPPED If the fog lights are off, one of the fog lights will
illuminate depending on the direction in which
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight The fog lights are turned on by rotating the the vehicle is turning. This will provide
delay feature will leave the headlights on for up headlight switch to the parking light or headlight increased visibility while turning, depending on
to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the position and pushing in the fog light button on the angle of the steering wheel.
ignition is placed in the OFF position while the the headlight switch. 2
headlight switch is on, and then the headlight TURN SIGNALS
switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be Move the multifunction lever up or down to
cancelled by either turning the headlight switch activate the turn signals. The arrows on each
on then off, or by placing the ignition in the ON side of the instrument cluster flash to show
position. proper operation.
NOTE: NOTE:
 This feature can be programmed through the If either light remains on and does not flash, or
Uconnect system Ú page 237. there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-
tive outside light bulb.
 The headlight delay feature is automatically Fog Light Button
activated if the headlight switch is left in the
The fog lights will operate only when the parking
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
AUTO position when the ignition is placed in
lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
the OFF position.
on low beam. An indicator light located in the without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
LIGHTS-O N R EMINDER instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog signal will flash three times then automatically
lights are on. The fog lights will turn off when the turn off.
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights
button is pushed a second time, when the
are left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF
headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or
position, the vehicle will chime when the
the high beam is selected.
driver’s door is opened.
CARGO LIGHTS/TRAILER SPOTTER The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will
LIGHTS W ITH B ED L IGHTS — IF turn on for approximately 30 seconds when a
key fob unlock button is pushed, as part of the
EQUIPPED Illuminated Entry feature.
The cargo light, bed lights, and trailer spotter When these lights are activated using the
lights are turned on by pushing the cargo light button on the headlight switch, the trailer
button located on the lower half of the headlight spotter lights will remain illuminated when the
switch. vehicle transmission is in PARK, NEUTRAL, or
REVERSE. The trailer spotter lights will turn off
Cargo Lights when the vehicle transmission is placed in
When the vehicle is stationary, these lights can DRIVE.
also be turned on using the switch located just
NOTE:
inside the pickup box, on the lower part of the
The cargo light will automatically turn off if the
bed light lens. A telltale will illuminate in the
vehicle is shifted into NEUTRAL or DRIVE, and
instrument cluster display when these lights are
will turn back on when the vehicle is shifted into
on. Pushing the switch a second time will turn
PARK or REVERSE. The bed lights are not
the lights off.
affected by gear selection.
Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch
NOTE:
For vehicles shipped to or sold in the states of
California or Mississippi, the cargo, bed, and
mirror spotter lights will not work while the
vehicle is in motion. In every other state, the
cargo and mirror spotter lights will turn off when
the vehicle is in motion, but the bed light will
remain on. In all states, including California and
Mississippi, if a bed camera is deactivated, the
Bed Light Switch (Without RamBox) bed lights will turn back on.
BATTERY SAVER courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a  Push round puck lens on/off (if equipped
door is open and the interior lights are on, and with Dual Pane Sunroof)
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior the Dome Defeat button on the overhead
lights to protect the life of your vehicle’s battery. NOTE:
console is pressed, the interior lights will turn off.
The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
After 10 minutes, if the ignition is OFF and any
door is left open or the dimmer control is Front Map/Reading Lights the switch is pushed a second time, so be sure 2
The overhead console lights can also be they have been turned off before exiting the
rotated all the way up to the dome light on
operated individually as reading lights by vehicle. If the interior lights are left on after the
position, the interior lights will automatically
pushing the corresponding buttons. ignition is turned off, they will automatically turn
turn off.
off after 10 minutes.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is
Dimmer Control
ON. The dimmer controls are inboard and adjacent
to the headlight switch located on the left side
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is of the instrument panel.
placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the
headlights are turned on and left on for eight
minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off. Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
INTERIOR LIGHTS 1 — Reading Light On/Off Buttons
2 — Dome Defeat Button
COURTESY LIGHTS 3 — Dome ON Button
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the
Three types of rear courtesy/reading lights are
doors are opened or the Dome ON button is Dimmer Controls
available for your vehicle.
pushed on the overhead console. If your vehicle 1 — Ambient Light Control
is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry and the  Push button on/off
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
unlock button is pushed on the key fob, the  Push lens on/off
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating The illuminated entry system will not operate if WINDSHIELD WIPER O PERATION
the right dimmer control upward will increase the Dome Defeat button on the overhead
the brightness of the instrument panel lights. console is pushed. Intermittent Wipers
Rotating the left dimmer control will adjust the The intermittent feature of this system was
NOTE:
interior and ambient light levels when the designed for use when weather conditions
If your vehicle is equipped with Illuminated
headlights are on. make a single wiping cycle, with a variable
Approach lights under the outside mirrors, they
pause between cycles, desirable. For maximum
NOTE: will also be turned off by pushing the Dome
delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
The dimming of the touchscreen is program- Defeat button.
upward to the first detent.
mable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 237. WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The delay interval decreases as you rotate the
knob until it enters the low continual speed
The windshield wiper/washer controls are
I LLUMINATED ENTRY position. The delay can be regulated from a
located on the multifunction lever on the left
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles,
side of the steering column. The front wipers are
key fob to unlock the doors or open any door. to a cycle every one second. The delay intervals
operated by rotating a switch, located on the
will double in duration when the vehicle speed
This feature also turns on the approach lamps end of the lever.
is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
located beneath the outside mirrors (if
equipped). Windshield Washers
The lights will fade to off after approximately To use the windshield washer, push the washer
30 seconds, or they will immediately fade to off knob, located on the end of the multifunction
once the ignition switch is placed in the ON/ lever, inward and hold. Washer fluid will be
RUN position from the OFF position. sprayed and the wiper will operate for two to
three cycles after the washer knob is released.
The front courtesy overhead console and door
courtesy lights will not turn off if the Dome ON If the washer knob pushed while in the delay
button on the overhead console is pushed. The range, the wiper will operate for several
overhead and door courtesy lights will turn off Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever seconds after the washer knob is released. It
after 10 minutes to protect the battery. will then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected. If the washer knob is
pushed while in the off position, the wiper will NOTE: NOTE:
turn on and cycle approximately three times The mist feature does not activate the washer
 The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
after the wash knob is released. pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
when the wiper switch is in the low or
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer on the windshield. The wash function must be
high-speed position.
system in cold weather, select a solution or used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.  The Rain Sensing feature may not function 2
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information properly when ice, or dried salt water is
For information on wiper care and replacement,
can be found on most washer fluid containers. present on the windshield.
see Ú page 418.
 Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
WARNING! RAIN SENSING W IPERS — I F EQUIPPED silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor-
Sudden loss of visibility through the wind- This feature senses rain or snowfall on the mance.
shield could lead to a collision. You might not windshield and automatically activates the
 The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
see other vehicles or other obstacles. To wipers. Rotate the end of the multifunction
and off using the Uconnect system
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during lever to one of four detent positions to activate
Ú page 237.
freezing weather, warm the windshield with this feature.
the defroster before and during windshield The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted The Rain Sensing system has protection
washer use. with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay features for the wiper blades and arms, and will
position one is the least sensitive, and wiper not operate under the following conditions:
Mist delay detent position four is the most sensitive.  Low Ambient Temperature — When the igni-
Wiper delay position three should be used for tion is first placed in the ON position, the Rain
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or
Sensing system will not operate until the
spray from a passing vehicle is needed, push normal rain conditions.
wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
the washer knob, located on the end of the Positions one and two can be used if the driver greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside
multifunction lever, inward briefly and release. desires less wiper sensitivity. Position four can temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
The wipers will cycle one time and automatically be used if the driver desires more sensitivity.
shut off. Place the wiper switch in the O (off) position
when not using the system.
 Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL NOTE:

the ignition is ON, and the automatic transmis- Icons and descriptions can vary based upon
DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS vehicle equipment.
sion is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the wiper
switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
MAX A/C Button
3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is moved Press and release the MAX A/C button
out of the NEUTRAL position. on the touchscreen to change the
current setting to the coldest output
 Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles of air. The MAX A/C indicator
equipped with Remote Start system, Rain illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the
Sensing wipers are not operational when the button again will cause the MAX A/C operation
vehicle is in the remote start mode. to exit.
CLIMATE CONTROLS Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Auto- NOTE:
matic Temperature Controls The MAX A/C button is only available on the
The Climate Control system allows you to
regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction touchscreen.
of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The A/C Button
controls are located on the touchscreen (if
Press and release this button on the
equipped), on the sides of the touchscreen or
touchscreen, or push the button on
on the instrument panel below the radio.
the faceplate to change the current
setting. The A/C indicator illuminates
when A/C is on.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display Automatic Tem-

perature Controls
Recirculation Button speed and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button on the recommended for efficiency. Press and release the Rear Defrost
touchscreen, or push the button on You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways: button on the touchscreen, or push
the faceplate, to change the system and release the button on the
 Press and release this button on the touch-
between Recirculation mode and faceplate, to turn on the rear window
screen. 2
outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the  Push the button on the faceplate. equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation illuminates when the rear window defroster is
Toggling this function will cause the system to
can be used when outside conditions, such as on. The rear window defroster automatically
switch between manual mode and automatic
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are turns off after 15 minutes.
mode Ú page 65.
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes.
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the Front Defrost Button CAUTION!
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that Failure to follow these cautions can cause
Press and release the Front Defrost
could create fogging on the inside of the damage to the heating elements:
button on the touchscreen, or push
windshield. The A/C can be deselected
and release the button on the  Use care when washing the inside of the
manually without disturbing the mode control
faceplate, to change the current rear window. Do not use abrasive window
selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation
airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front cleaners on the interior surface of the
mode may make the inside air stuffy and
Defrost indicator illuminates when Front window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield washing solution, wiping parallel to the
mode is not recommended.
and side window demist outlets. When the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
Auto Button defrost button is selected, the blower level may after soaking with warm water.
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
Set your desired temperature and  Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
temperature settings for best windshield and
press AUTO. AUTO will achieve and abrasive window cleaners on the interior
side window defrosting and defogging. When
maintain your desired temperature by surface of the window.
toggling the front defrost mode button, the
automatically adjusting the blower
climate system will return to the previous  Keep all objects a safe distance from the
setting. window.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And SYNC Button Faceplate

Down Buttons Press the SYNC button on the The blower speed increases as you turn the
These buttons provide the driver and passenger touchscreen to toggle the SYNC blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
with independent temperature control. feature on/off. The SYNC indicator blower setting. The blower speed decreases as
illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC you turn the blower control knob
Push the red button (or rotate knob if
synchronizes the passenger temperature counterclockwise.
equipped) on the faceplate or
setting with the driver temperature setting.
touchscreen, or press and slide the Touchscreen
Changing the passenger’s temperature setting
temperature bar towards the red Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
while in SYNC will automatically exit this
arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer setting and the large blower icon to increase the
feature.
temperature settings. blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
Push the blue button (or rotate knob if NOTE: pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
equipped) on the faceplate or The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
touchscreen, or press and slide the screen. Mode Control
temperature bar towards the blue Select Mode by pressing one of the
Blower Control
arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler Mode buttons on the touchscreen, or
Blower Control regulates the amount pushing the Mode button on the
temperature settings.
of air forced through the climate faceplate, to change the airflow
NOTE: control system. There are seven distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode
blower speeds available. Adjusting can be adjusted so air comes from the
 The numbers within the temperature display
the blower will cause automatic mode to switch instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
will only appear if the system is equipped
to manual operation. The speeds can be outlets, and demist outlets.
with an automatic climate control system.
selected using either the blower control knob on
 Up and down buttons are only available on the faceplate or the buttons on the
vehicles equipped with a 12-inch display. touchscreen.
Panel Mode Floor Mode MANUAL C LIMATE C ONTROL

Air comes from the outlets in the Air comes from the floor outlets. A DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS
instrument panel. Each of these slight amount of air is directed
outlets can be individually adjusted to through the defrost and side window
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of demister outlets.
2
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate Mix Mode
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel Air is directed through the floor,
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust defrost, and side window demister
the amount of airflow from these outlets. outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra
Bi-Level Mode heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
Air comes from the instrument panel maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Manual Temperature
outlets and floor outlets. A slight the windshield. Controls
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister Climate Control OFF Button MAX A/C Setting
outlets. Press and release the OFF button on Set the temperature control knob to
the touchscreen, or push the OFF the MAX A/C setting to change the
NOTE: button on the faceplate (if equipped)
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi- current setting to the coldest output
to turn the Climate Control on/off. of air. Moving the temperature control
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. knob away from the MAX A/C setting causes the
MAX A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button can be used when outside conditions, such as Rear Defrost Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air smoke, odors, dust, or humidity are present. Push and release the Rear Defrost
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator Recirculation can be used in all modes except Control button to turn on the rear
illuminates when A/C is on. for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if window defroster and the heated
conditions exist that could create fogging on the outside mirrors (if equipped). The
NOTE: inside of the windshield. The A/C can be Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear
deselected manually without disturbing the window defroster is on. The rear window
 For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is
mode control selection. Continuous use of the defroster automatically turns off after
in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain Recirculation mode may make the inside air 15 minutes.
active to prevent fogging of the windows. stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode is not recommended. CAUTION!
 If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Failure to follow these cautions can cause
side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase
Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost damage to the heating elements:
blower speed if needed.
mode to improve window cleaning operation.
 If your air conditioning performance seems Recirculation is disabled automatically if this  Use care when washing the inside of the
lower than expected, check the front of the mode is selected. Attempting to use rear window. Do not use abrasive window
A/C condenser (located in front of the radi- Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED cleaners on the interior surface of the
ator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. in the control button to blink and then turn off. window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front washing solution, wiping parallel to the
of the radiator and through the condenser. Front Defrost Setting heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
Turn the mode control knob to the after soaking with warm water.
Recirculation Button Front Defrost mode setting. Air comes  Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
Push the Recirculation button to from the windshield and side window abrasive window cleaners on the interior
change the system between demist outlets. When the defrost surface of the window.
recirculation mode and outside air button is selected, the blower level may  Keep all objects a safe distance from the
mode. The Recirculation indicator and increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum window.
the A/C indicator illuminate when the temperature settings for best windshield and
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation side window defrosting and defogging.
Temperature Control Panel Mode Mix Mode

Temperature Control regulates the temperature Air comes from the outlets in the Air is directed through the floor,
of the air forced through the climate system. instrument panel. Each of these defrost, and side window demister
The temperature increases as you outlets can be individually adjusted to outlets. This setting works best in cold
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of or snowy conditions that require extra
turn the temperature control knob 2
clockwise. the center outlets and outboard outlets can be heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
moved up and down or side to side to regulate maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
The temperature decreases as you airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel the windshield.
turn the temperature control knob located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
counterclockwise. the amount of airflow from these outlets.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE C ONTROL
(ATC) — I F EQUIPPED
Blower Control Bi-Level Mode
Blower Control regulates the amount Air comes from the instrument panel Automatic Operation
of air forced through the climate outlets and floor outlets. A slight 1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
control system. There are seven amount of air is directed through the the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
blower speeds available. The blower defrost and side window demister Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
speed increases as you turn the blower control outlets. Panel.
knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. 2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would
The blower speed decreases as you turn the NOTE:
like the system to maintain by adjusting the
blower control knob counterclockwise. Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi- driver and passenger temperature control
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel buttons. Once the desired temperature is
Mode Control outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. displayed, the system will achieve and
Turn the mode control knob to adjust automatically maintain that comfort level.
airflow distribution. The airflow
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A 3. When the system is set up for your comfort
distribution mode can be adjusted so
slight amount of air is directed level, it is not necessary to change the
air comes from the instrument panel
through the defrost and side window settings. You will experience the greatest
outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist efficiency by simply allowing the system to
outlets. demister outlets.
function automatically.
NOTE: Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After proper amount, type, and concentration of
the beep, say one of the following commands: coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation
 It is not necessary to move the temperature
“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees” mode during Winter months is not
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system 
recommended, because it may cause window
automatically adjusts the temperature, “Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
 fogging.
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible. Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may Vacation/Storage
only be used to adjust the interior temperature For information on maintaining the Climate
 The temperature can be displayed in US or
of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to Control system when the vehicle is being stored
Metric units by selecting the US/Metric
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if for an extended period of time, see
customer-programmable feature within
equipped. Ú page 461.
Uconnect Settings Ú page 237.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
OPERATING T IPS Window Fogging
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the NOTE: Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
blower fan will remain on low until the engine Refer to the chart at the end of this section for mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
warms up. The blower will increase in speed suggested control settings for various weather windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
and transition into Auto mode. conditions. increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long
Manual Operation Override Summer Operation periods, as fogging may occur.
This system offers a full complement of manual The engine cooling system must be protected
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide Outside Air Intake
ATC display will be turned off when the system proper corrosion protection and to protect Make sure the air intake, located directly in
is being used in the manual mode. against engine overheating. OAT coolant front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
CLIMATE VOICE R ECOGNITION (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and Winter Operation air distribution box, they could plug the water
keep everyone comfortable while you keep To ensure the best possible heater and drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
moving ahead. defroster performance, make sure the engine intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
cooling system is functioning properly and the
Cabin Air Filter  Activation By Remote Start Operation

CONTROL
The Climate Control system filters out dust and When the Remote Start is activated and the
WEATHER
SETTINGS
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized outside ambient temperature is less than
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to Operate in
33°F (0.6°C) the windshield wiper de-icer is
have it replaced when needed. Cool Sunny (Bi-Level Mode)
activated. Upon exiting Remote Start, the 2
climate control functions will resume their position.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped previous operation except, if the de-icer is Set the mode control
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control active, the de-icer timer and operation will to (Floor Mode)
Cool & Humid
system may automatically adjust airflow to continue. position and turn on
Conditions
maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will (A/C) to keep
be maintained upon return to an engine running Operating Tips Chart
windows clear.
condition. CONTROL Set the mode control
WEATHER
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped SETTINGS to the (Floor
Set the mode control Mode) position. If
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating
to (Panel Mode), Cold Weather windshield fogging
element located at the base of the windshield.
(A/C) on, and starts to occur, move
It operates automatically once the following the control to the
conditions are met: Hot Weather And blower on high. Roll
Vehicle Interior Is Very down the windows for (Mix Mode) position.
 Activation By Front Defrost Hot a minute to flush out
The wiper de-icer activates automatically the hot air. Adjust the
during a cold weather manual start with full controls as needed to
defrost, and when the ambient temperature achieve comfort.
is below 33°F (0.6°C). Turn (A/C) on and
 Activation By Rear Defrost set the mode control
Warm Weather
to the (Panel
The wiper de-icer activates automatically
Mode)position.
when the Rear Defrost is operating and the
ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT If equipped with a covered upper glove

compartment, push the release button to open.
STORAGE To open the lower glove compartment, pull the
Glove Compartment release handle.
The glove compartment is located on the WARNING!

passenger side of the instrument panel and
features both an upper and lower storage area. Do not operate this vehicle with a glove
compartment in the open position. Driving
with the glove compartment open may result
Center Storage Compartment
in injury in a collision.
WARNING!
Door Storage  This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated
Front Door Storage — If Equipped on the armrest could be seriously injured
Storage areas are located in the door trim during vehicle operation, or a collision. Only
panels. use the center seating position when the
armrest is fully upright.
Rear Door Storage — If Equipped
Glove Compartment  In a collision, the latch may open if the total
Storage compartments are located in both the weight of the items stored exceeds about
1 — Upper Glove Compartment Release Button (If driver and passenger rear door trim panels.
Equipped)
10 lbs (4.5 kg). These items could be
Center Storage Compartment — If thrown about endangering occupants of
2 — Upper Glove Compartment
the vehicle. Items stored should not exceed
3 — Lower Glove Compartment Equipped
a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
The center storage compartment is located
between the driver and passenger seats. The
storage compartment provides an armrest and
contains both an upper and lower storage area.
Pull on the upper handle on the front of the With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower Premium Center Console — If Equipped
armrest to raise the cover. The upper storage handle to open the lower storage bin. The lower The premium center console is equipped with
area contains a USB power outlet that can be bin contains a power inverter. There is also a two front storage bins located in front of the
used to power small electrical devices. “fill line” located along the rear inside wall of the center storage compartment. These storage
lower bin. Contents above the “fill line” may bins may be equipped with tandem doors. Push
interfere with cupholder placement if equipped 2
the front bin to access the cupholders, or push
with a premium center console. the rear bin to access the coin holder/small
storage bin.
Center Storage Compartment

1 — Upper Console Handle
2 — Lower Console Handle
Forward Portion Of Lower Storage Bin
1 — Wireless Charging Pad Center Console Tandem Doors— If Equipped
2 — Power Inverter 1 — Push Front Bin Access
3 — Storage Area 2 — Push Rear Bin Access
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
Upper Storage USB Outlet result in injury in a collision.
Overhead Sunglass Storage

At the front of the overhead console, a
compartment is provided for the storage of one
pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the door latch to
open the compartment.
Tandem Doors Open Position Front Bench Seat Storage

1 — Front Bin Open With the seatback in the upright position, lift the
2 — Rear Bin Open center seat bottom to access additional storage
underneath the seat.
Push the release button at the front of the
cupholder bin to slide tray rearward to access
the front lower storage bin, or forward to access
the rear lower storage bin. Overhead Sunglass Door
Front Bench Seat Storage — If Equipped

If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench
seat, storage can be found by folding down the
center seat back. A console storage area and
cupholders are available.
Below Seat Bottom Storage
Push Release Button To Slide Tray

There is a storage drawer located in the lower Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — If
center of the instrument panel. It can be Equipped
released by pushing the access button above it. In-floor storage bins are located in front of the
Pull drawer outward to the fully open position. second row seats and can be used for extra
storage. The storage bins have removable liners 2
that can be easily removed for cleaning.
To open the in-floor storage bin, lift upward on
the handle of the latch and open the lid.
Rear Console Latch Location
Seatback Storage
Located in the back of both the driver and
passenger front seats are pockets that can be
Storage Drawer Access Button used for storage.
Rear Console Storage — If Equipped
The center portion of the 40/20/40 rear seat
will fold forward for rear seat cupholders and a
storage compartment. Lift up on the console In-Floor Storage Bin Latch
latch to access the storage compartment.
Driver’s Side Seatback Storage

NOTE: NOTE:
The front seat may have to be moved forward to The maximum load limit for each hook is 250 lbs
fully open the lid. (113 kg).
Storage Under Rear Seat — If Equipped

To access the storage under the rear seats,
unlatch the lock mechanism in the center of the
seat base by rotating it to either side, and fold
the front of the seat base forward.
Fully Extended Storage Area
NOTE:
The rear seats do not need to be folded up to
Opened Storage Bin access this feature.
Each storage bin also contains two hooks for USB/AUX C ONTROL
securing cargo. These hooks should be used to
secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving. Located on the center stack, just below the
instrument panel, is the main media hub. There
are four total USB ports: Two Mini-USBs (Type C)
Folding Down Front Of Seat Base and two Standard USBs (Type A). There is also
1 — Lock Mechanism an AUX port located in the middle of the USB
2 — Front Of Seat Base Ports.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB Port
Flip the inside of the base upward into the
may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
upright position, locking into place, creating and
features, if equipped. For further information,
extended storage area.
refer to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in
the Owner’s Manual Supplement.
In-Floor Storage Bin Hooks
NOTE: and when a phone device is plugged into the

Two devices can be plugged in at the same smaller and larger USB ports:
time, and both ports will provide charging capa-  “A new device is now connected. Previous
bilities. Only one port can transfer data to the connection was lost”.
system at a time. A pop-up will appear and allow
you to select the device transferring data.  “(Phone Name) now connected. Previous 2
connection was lost”.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type
A USB port and another device is plugged into  “Another device is in use through the same
the Type C USB port, a message will appear and USB port. Please disconnect the first device
allow you to select which device to use. Rear USB Ports to use the second device”.
1 — Rear Media USB Ports
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
2 — Rear Charge Only USB Ports
cause the connection to a previous device to be
The third and fourth USB ports are located lost.
behind the center console, above the power If equipped, your vehicle may also contain a
inverter. One of these USBs ports are charge USB port located on the top tray of the vehicles
only. center console.
Applicable to only Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With If equipped, two Mini-USB ports (Type C), two
8.4-inch Display, and Uconnect 4C NAV With Standard USB ports (Type A), and one AUX port
12-inch Display radios, different scenarios are may be located to the left of the center stack,
Center Stack USB/AUX Media Hub listed below when a non-phone device is just below the climate controls.
1 — USB Port #1 plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports,
2 — AUX Port
3 — USB Port #2
ELECTRICAL P OWER OUTLETS CAUTION! (Continued)

The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet can
 Power outlets are designed for accessory
provide power for in-cab accessories designed
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
for use with the standard “cigarette lighter” the power outlets as this will damage the
style plug. The 12 Volt power outlets and 5 Volt outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of
(2.5 Amp) USB Port (Charge Only) have a cap the power outlet can cause damage not
attached to the outlet indicating “12V DC”, covered by your New Vehicle Limited
together with either a key symbol, battery Warranty.
symbol, or USB symbol.
Center Console USB/AUX Media Hub An auxiliary power outlet can be found in the
A key symbol indicates that the ignition must be
1 — Standard USB Type A Ports tray on top of the center stack. This power outlet
in the ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to
2 — Mini-USB Type C Ports only works when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
provide power. The battery symbol indicates
3 — AUX Port or ACC position.
that the outlet is connected to the battery, and
Some USB ports support media and charging. can provide power at all times.
You can use features, such as Apple CarPlay®,
Android Auto™, Pandora®, and others while
CAUTION!
charging your phone.  Do not exceed the maximum power of 160
Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160
NOTE: Watts (13 Amps) power rating is exceeded,
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may the fuse protecting the system will need to
cause the connection to a previous device to be be replaced.
lost.
(Continued)
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Power Outlet — Top Of Center Stack
Owner’s Manual Supplement or visit
UconnectPhone.com.
WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued)

To avoid serious injury or death:  After the use of high power draw accesso-
 Only devices designed for use in this type of ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient 2
outlet.
length of time to allow the generator to
 Do not touch with wet hands. recharge the vehicle's battery.
 Close the lid when not in use and while
Power Outlet Fuse Locations driving the vehicle. POWER I NVERTER — IF E QUIPPED
1 — F54 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Battery  If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an A 115 Volt (400 Watts Maximum) inverter may
Fed Position electric shock and failure. be located inside the center console towards
2 — F54 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Ignition the right hand side. This inverter can power
Fed Position cellular phones, electronics and other low
CAUTION!
3 — F48 Fuse 10 A Red Port Power or Rear USB power devices requiring power up to 400 Watts.
(Charge Only)  Many accessories that can be plugged in Certain high-end video game consoles exceed
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even this power limit, as will most power tools.
When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
unplug any equipment as to not drain the Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
battery of the vehicle. All accessories connected vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to the outlet(s) should be removed or turned off to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.  Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will
discharge the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
(Continued) Center Console Power Inverter Outlet
There is also a second 115 Volt (400 Watts NOTE: To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the
Maximum) power inverter located on the rear of 400 Watts is the maximum for the inverter, not device. The outlet turns off when the device is
the center console. This inverter can power each outlet. If three outlets are in use, 400 Watts unplugged.
cellular phones, electronics and other low is shared amongst the devices plugged in.
NOTE:
power devices requiring power up to 400 Watts.
If equipped with a front bench seat, there may
Certain high-end video game consoles exceed  The Center Stack Power Inverter is only avail-
be a 115 Volt (400 Watts Maximum) inverter
this power limit, as will most power tools. able on vehicles equipped with a front bench
located to the right of the center stack, just
All power inverters are designed with built-in seat.
below the climate controls. This inverter can
overload protection. If the power rating of power cellular phones, electronics and other  The power inverter only turns on if the ignition
400 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter low power devices requiring power up to is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
shuts down. Once the electrical device has 400 Watts. Certain high-end video game
been removed from the outlet the inverter consoles exceed this power limit, as will most  Due to built-in overload protection, the power
should reset. inverter shuts down if the power rating is
power tools.
exceeded.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
 Do not insert any objects into the recepta-
cles.
 Do not touch with wet hands.
 Close the lid when not in use.
Rear Center Console Power Inverter Outlet Center Stack Power Inverter  If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
WIRELESS C HARGING PAD — I F The wireless charging pad is equipped with an

E QUIPPED anti-slip mat, an adjustable cradle to hold your
mobile phone in place, and an LED indicator
light.
NOTE: 2
Using a phone case may interfere with wireless
charging.
CAUTION!
Power Window Switches
The key fob should not be placed on the The passenger door windows can also be
charging pad or within 15 cm (150 mm) of it. operated by using the single window controls on
Wireless Charging Pad Doing so can cause excessive heat buildup the passenger door trim panel. The window
and damage to the fob. Placing the fob in controls will operate only when the ignition is in
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi
close proximity of the charging pad blocks the the ACC or ON/RUN position.
wireless charging pad located inside of the
fob from being detected by the vehicle and
center console. This charging pad is designed to To open the window part way (manually), push
prevents the vehicle from starting.
wirelessly charge your Qi enabled mobile the window switch down briefly and release.
phone. Qi is a standard that allows wireless
charging of your mobile phone. WINDOWS NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi POWER W INDOWS for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed
wireless charging. If the phone is not equipped in the OFF position. Opening either front door
The window controls on the driver's door control
with Qi wireless charging functionality, an will cancel this feature. The time is program-
all the door windows.
aftermarket sleeve or a specialized back plate mable within Uconnect Settings Ú page 237.
can be purchased from your mobile phone
provider or a local electronics retailer. Please
see your phone’s owner’s manual for further
information.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection

WARNING! WARNING!
Lift the window switch up for a short period of
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. time and release; the window will go up There is no anti-pinch protection when the
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle window is almost closed. To avoid personal
automatically.
or in a location accessible to children, and do injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped To stop the window from going all the way up fingers and all objects from the window path
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/ during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the before closing.
RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unat- switch briefly.
tended children, can become entrapped by
To close the window part way, lift the window RESET AUTO-U P
the windows while operating the power win-
switch briefly and release it when you want the
dow switches. Such entrapment may result in Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window to stop.
serious injury or death. window probably needs to be reset. To reset
If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto-Up:
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES 1. Pull the window switch up to close the
go back down. Remove the obstacle and use
Auto-Down Feature the window switch again to close the window. window completely and continue to hold
The driver and front passenger door power the switch up for an additional two seconds
NOTE: after the window is closed.
window switches have an Auto-Down feature. Any impact due to rough road conditions may
Push the window switch down for a short period trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly 2. Push the window switch down firmly to open
of time, then release, and the window will go during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the the window completely and continue to hold
down automatically. switch lightly and hold to close the window the switch down for an additional two
To stop the window from going all the way down manually. seconds after the window is fully open.
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
WINDOW L OCKOUT SWITCH POWER S LIDING REAR WINDOW — I F MANUAL S LIDING REAR WINDOW — I F
The window lockout switch on the driver's door EQUIPPED EQUIPPED
trim panel allows you to disable the window The switch for the power sliding rear window is A locking device in the center of the window
controls on the rear passenger doors. To located on the overhead console. Push the helps to prevent entry from the rear of the
disable the window controls, push and release switch rearward to open the glass. Pull the vehicle. Squeeze the lock to release the 2
the window lockout button (the indicator light switch forward to close the glass. window.
on the button will turn on). To enable the
window controls, push and release the window
lockout button again (the indicator light on the
button will turn off).
Rear Window Switch Manual Rear Window Lock
Window Lockout Switch

WIND B UFFETING POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED WARNING!

Wind buffeting can be described as the
SINGLE P ANE POWER S UNROOF — IF  Never leave children unattended in a
perception of pressure on the ears or a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle E QUIPPED
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows The power sunroof switches are located on the the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain overhead console between the courtesy/ children. Do not leave the ignition of a
open or partially open positions. This is a normal reading lights. vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
occurrence and can be minimized. If the in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, particularly unattended children, can
open the front and rear windows together to become entrapped by the power sunroof
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs while operating the power sunroof switch.
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof Such entrapment may result in serious
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any injury or death.
window.
 In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
Power Sunroof Switches make sure all passengers are also properly
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof secured.
2 — Venting Sunroof
 Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
Opening And Closing The Sunroof NOTE: Sunshade Operation

Express Open/Close If the sunshade is in the closed position when The sunshade can be opened manually.
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated However, the sunshade will open automatically
Push the switch rearward and release it within the sunshade will automatically open to the half
one-half second and the sunroof will open as the sunroof opens.
open position prior to the sunroof opening.
automatically from any position. The sunroof NOTE: 2
will open fully and stop automatically. Pinch Protect Feature The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
Push the switch forward and release it within This feature will detect an obstruction in the open.
one-half second and the sunroof will close opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the Ignition Off Operation
automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. sunroof is detected, the sunroof will The power sunroof switch will remain active for
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if up to approximately 10 minutes after the
During Express Open or Express Close ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
this occurs.
operation, any other movement of the sunroof Opening either front door will cancel this
switch will stop the sunroof. NOTE: feature.
Manual Open/Close If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect NOTE:
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch will disable and the sunroof must be closed in Ignition Off time is programmable through the
rearward to full open. Manual Mode. Uconnect system Ú page 237.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch Sunroof Maintenance
Venting Sunroof — Express
in the forward position.
Push and release the Vent button within one Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
Any release of the switch during open or close half second and the sunroof will open to the to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, and and clear out any debris that may have
sunroof will remain in a partially opened it will occur regardless of sunroof position. collected in the tracks.
position until the switch is operated and held During Express Vent operation, any other
again. actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
DUAL P ANE POWER S UNROOF — IF WARNING!

Opening And Closing The Sunroof
E QUIPPED The sunroof has two programmed automatic
 Never leave children unattended in a stops for the sunroof open position; a comfort
The power sunroof switches are located on the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked stop position and a full open position. The
overhead console between the courtesy/ vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near comfort stop position has been optimized to
reading lights. the vehicle, or in a location accessible to minimize wind buffeting.
children. Do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go Express Open/Close
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, Push the switch rearward and release it within
particularly unattended children, can one-half second and the sunroof will open
become entrapped by the power sunroof automatically from any position. The sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch. will open fully and stop automatically.
Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death. Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
 In a collision, there is a greater risk of being automatically from any position. The sunroof
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. will close fully and stop automatically.
Power Sunroof Switches You could also be seriously injured or killed.
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof Always fasten your seat belt properly and During Express Open or Express Close
2 — Venting Sunroof make sure all passengers are also properly operation, any other movement of the sunroof
3 — Opening/Closing Sunshade secured. switch will stop the sunroof.
 Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
Manual Open/Close If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch cannot be closed beyond the half open position. Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward,
rearward to full open. Pushing the sunshade close switch when the the sunshade will open to the half open position
sunroof is open/vented and the sunshade is at and stop automatically. Push and hold the
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch half open position will first automatically close
in the forward position. sunshade switch again and the sunshade will 2
the sunroof prior to the sunshade closing. open to the full open position.
Any release of the switch during open or close Express Open/Close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The Push and hold the switch forward and the
sunroof will remain in a partially opened Push the sunshade switch rearward and sunshade will close and stop at full closed
position until the switch is operated and held release it within one-half second, the sunshade position.
again. will open to the half open position and stop Releasing the switch while the sunshade is in
automatically. Push and release the switch motion will stop the sunshade in a partially open
NOTE: again from the half open position and the position.
If the sunshade is in the closed position when sunshade will open to the full open position and
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated stop automatically. Pinch Protect Feature
the sunshade will automatically open to the half This feature will detect an obstruction in the
Push the sunshade switch forward and release
open position prior to the sunroof opening. opening of the sunroof during Express Close
it within one-half second and the sunshade will
Opening And Closing The Power Sunshade close automatically. operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
The sunshade has two programmed positions: During Express Open or Express Close
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
half open and full open positions. When operation, any other actuation of the sunroof
this occurs.
operating the sunshade from the closed switches will stop the sunshade in a partially
position, the sunshade will always stop at the open position. NOTE:
half open position regardless of express or If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
manual open operation. The switch must be result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
actuated again to continue on to full open will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
position. Manual Mode.
Venting Sunroof — Express Sunroof Maintenance 2. Reach into the opening beneath the center
Push and release the Vent button within one Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth of the hood and push the safety latch lever
half second and the sunroof will open to the to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for to the left to release it, before raising the
vent position. This is called “Express Vent” and and clear out any debris that may have hood.
it will occur regardless of sunroof position. collected in the tracks.
During Express Vent operation, any movement
of the switch will stop the sunroof. HOOD
NOTE: TO OPEN THE H OOD
If the sunshade was not already open, it will
To open the hood, two latches must be
automatically open prior to the roof opening to
released.
the vent position.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below
Ignition Off Operation the steering wheel at the base of the
The power sunroof switch will remain active for instrument panel. Safety Latch Location
up to approximately 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect system Ú page 237.
Hood Release Lever Location

TO CLOSE THE H OOD TAILGATE NOTE:

The optional Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Ú page 97
Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from
OPENING may prevent electronic tailgate release. The
the point where the props no longer hold the Tonneau Cover must be removed or folded up
hood open. The tailgate may be opened by pushing the
before releasing the tailgate.
tailgate release pad located on the tailgate 2
WARNING! door. CLOSING
Be sure the hood is fully latched before The tailgate damper strut will lower the tailgate To close the tailgate, push it upward until both
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully to the open position (if equipped). sides are securely latched.
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
Electronic Tailgate Release — If Equipped LOCKING TAILGATE
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or The key fob may be equipped with an
The tailgate can be locked using the key fob
death. electronic release feature for the
lock button.
tailgate, allowing hands-free tailgate
opening. To activate, push and MULTIFUNCTION T AILGATE — I F
CAUTION! release the Tailgate Release button on the key E QUIPPED
fob twice within five seconds. The tailgate door
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the The 60/40 multifunction tailgate has two swing
will unlatch, and slowly lower into the open
hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at doors to allow for closer access to the pickup
position.
the front center of the hood to ensure that box with the doors open.
both latches engage. If equipped, a button on the center overhead
console inside the vehicle can be used to Opening
release the tailgate. An indicator light may also The tailgate must be latched closed to open the
signal when the tailgate is open. swing doors. Push the paddle down, then pull
For the tailgate to lower, the vehicle must be the release handle beneath the tailgate
stationary and in PARK or NEUTRAL. lowering handle. This opens the 60 split door.
Closing
CAUTION!
Always close the 40 split door first, then close
the 60 split door. The swing doors must be  Always check both swing doors are latched
securely latched before the tailgate can be before starting vehicle.
lowered.  Vehicle damage may occur if doors are not
securely latched.
NOTE:
 When the swing doors are open, the TAILGATE REMOVAL
maximum load placed on a door cannot To remove the tailgate, follow the instructions
60 Split Door Release Handle exceed 180 lbs (82 kg). below:
Once the 60 split swing door is opened, pull the
 Pull back on the swing doors firmly after 1. Open the tailgate to a 45° angle.
release handle on the inboard side of the
closing to ensure they are securely latched.
40 split door to open.
2. Lift up on the right side of the tailgate, lifting
WARNING! it off of the pivot.
To prevent serious injury or death:

 Always keep hands away from the hinge
sides of the swing doors and where the
doors meet when opening and closing the
doors. Your hand or someone else’s hand
could be pinched.
 Never operate the vehicle with the swing
40 Split Door Release Handle doors open.
 Never hang from or sit on the swing doors. Lift Right Side Off Of Pivot
3. Without latching, rotate the tailgate to 4. Let the tailgate rest on the support cables
nearly closed. Then, while providing support while having the tailgate naturally slide
to the tailgate, slide it slowly to the right, forward on the bumper.
removing the tailgate from the left pivot.
NOTE: 2
Rest the tailgate on the bumper so that the
entire tailgate is secure and supported.
WARNING!
Connector Bracket Location
For vehicles equipped with a multifunction
tailgate, the tailgate weighs 115 lbs (52 kg)
and should be removed by at least two
people. Injury to the customer or damage to Tailgate Only Supported By Cables
the tailgate may occur if one person tries to
5. Remove the connector bracket from the sill
remove the multifunction tailgate.
by pushing inward in the locking tab.
Locking Tab
Slide Tailgate To The Right

6. Disconnect the wiring harness by pushing 7. Connect the body side plug (provided in the
on the two release tabs, ensuring the glove compartment) to the body side wiring
connector bracket does not fall into the sill. harness and insert the bracket back into
the sill.
Tailgate Plugs (Two Pieces)

1 — Large Plug
2 — Small Plug
Connected Wiring Harness 9. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket
1 — First Release Tab Body Side Plug (One Piece) against the forward-facing surface of the
2 — Second Release Tab 8. Connect the tailgate plugs (provided in the tailgate. This will prevent damaging the
glove compartment) to the tailgate wiring connector and bracket when storing or
harness to ensure that the terminals do not reinstalling the tailgate.
corrode.
Disconnected Body Side Harness

10. Raise the tailgate slightly, and remove the

support cables by releasing the lock tang
WARNING!
from the pivot. To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is
deadly, the exhaust system on vehicles
NOTE:
equipped with “Cap or Slide-In Campers”
Make sure tailgate is supported by you and/or a
should extend beyond the overhanging 2
second person when removing support cables.
camper compartment and be free of leaks.
BED STEP — I F E QUIPPED

Bed Step Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
1 — Bed Step
extendable bed step on the driver’s side of the
tailgate to provide easier entry and exit into the 2 — Foot Tab
truck bed.
To extend the bed step, place your foot on the
protruding foot tab located on the left edge of
the bed step, and push rearward. A small
Locking Tang amount of force will release the spring load, and
extend the bed step out and away from the
11. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle. tailgate.
NOTE: NOTE:
Once the spring load is overcome, the bed step
 Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck
will extend out quickly, so be sure to stand in a
pickup box.
position that will avoid coming into contact with
 If the tailgate is closed with the wire harness Bed Step Location the step as it extends.
disconnected, the tailgate can only be
opened by removing the inside panel and
unlatching the locking mechanism manually.
PICKUP BOX You can carry wide building materials (sheets of

plywood, etc.) by building a raised load floor.
The pickup box has many features designed for Place lumber across the box in the indentations
utility and convenience. provided above the wheel housings and in the
bulkhead dividers to form the floor.
WARNING!
 The pickup box is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who
Bed Step (Extended) should sit in seats and use seat belts.
To stow the bed step back under the tailgate,  Care should always be exercised when
push the bed step forward with your foot until operating a vehicle with unrestrained
the bed step is retracted by the spring load. cargo. Vehicle speeds may need to be
Pick Up Box Features reduced. Severe turns or rough roads may
WARNING! 1 — Upper Load Floor Indents cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo that
Do not attempt to stow the bed step with your 2 — Bulk Head Dividers may result in vehicle damage. If wide
hands. The low clearance space between the 3 — Cleats
building materials are to be frequently
bed step and the rear bumper as the bed step carried, the installation of a support is
returns to the stowed position could result in NOTE: recommended. This will restrain the cargo
injury to your hands or fingers. If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack or and transfer the load to the pickup box
Headache Rack at the front of the Pickup Box, floor.
you must use Mopar Box Reinforcement (Continued)
Brackets that are available from an authorized
dealer.
BED RAIL T IE-D OWN SYSTEM — I F Each cleat must be located and tightened down
E QUIPPED in one of the detents, along either rail, in order
 If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs to keep cargo properly secure.
(272 kg) of material suspended above the
CAUTION! To move the cleat to any position on the rail,
wheelhouse, supports must be installed to turn the nut counterclockwise, approximately
transfer the weight of the load to the pickup The maximum load per cleat should not 2
three turns. Then pull out on the cleat and slide
box floor or vehicle damage may result. The exceed 250 lbs (113 kg), or 500 lbs (227 kg)
it to the detent nearest the desired location.
use of proper supports will permit loading up total per rail, and the angle of the load on
Make sure the cleat is seated in the detent and
to the rated payload. each cleat should not exceed 45 degrees
tighten the nut.
above horizontal, or damage to the cleat or
 Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward
cleat rail may occur.
in an accident causing serious or fatal
injury.
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of
the bed that can be used to assist in securing
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the cargo.
inner side bulkheads of the box in front of and
behind both wheel housings. Place wooden
boards across the box from side to side to
create separate load compartments in the
pickup box.
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the Adjustable Cleat Assembly
lower sides of the pickup box that can sustain 1 — Utility Rail Detent
loads up to 1,000 lbs (450 kg) total. 2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
Adjustable Cleats
Cleat Removal (Standard Box Rail)

To remove the cleats from the utility rail, slide
the cleat forward to access the cut out at the
end of the box rail, then remove the cleat.
End Cap Screw Location With Tonneau Cover Pull End Cap Away From Rail
Cleat Removal (Without Tonneau Cover)
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED
Remove the end cap by pushing upward on the
release button located beneath the end cap The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box
while pulling the cap away from the rail. The storage and cargo management system
Slide Cleat Forward To Remove consisting of three features:
cleat can now be removed by sliding it off the
Cleat Removal (With Tonneau Cover) end of the rail.  Cargo storage bins
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove
 Cargo divider
the end cap screw located in the center of the
end cap, using a #T30 Torx head driver.  Bed rail tie-down system Ú page 91
Remove the end cap and slide the cleat off the
NOTE:
end of the rail.
Bed rail tie-down system is also available for
vehicles not equipped with a RamBox.
End Cap Release Button Without Tonneau Cover

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING RAMBOX RAMBOX CARGO STORAGE BINS To open a storage bin with the RamBox
unlocked, push and release the button located
Push and release the lock or unlock button on Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of on the lid. The RamBox lid will open upward to
the key fob to lock and unlock all doors, the the pickup box. The cargo storage bins provide allow hand access. Lift the lid to fully open.
tailgate and the RamBox Ú page 17. To unlatch watertight, lockable, illuminated storage for up
the storage bin manually, insert the emergency to 150 lbs (68 kg) of evenly distributed cargo. NOTE: 2
key into the keyhole and turn clockwise. Always RamBox will not open when the button is
return the key to the upright (vertical) position pushed if the RamBox is locked.
before removing it from the keyhole.
CAUTION!
 Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and
latched before moving or driving vehicle.
 Loads applied to the top of the bin lid
should be minimized to prevent damage to
the lid and latching/hinging mechanisms. RamBox Cargo Storage Bins
 Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due
to heavy/sharp objects placed in bin that CAUTION! RamBox Button And Keyhole Lock
shift due to vehicle motion. In order to mini- Failure to follow the following items could 1 — Keyhole Lock
mize potential for damage, secure all cargo cause damage to the vehicle: 2 — Button
to prevent movement and protect inside
surfaces of bin from heavy/sharp objects  Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins
with appropriate padding. is properly secured.
 Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 lbs
(68 kg) per bin.
NOTE: The Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch is

CAUTION! Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo only found on vehicles equipped with a
Leaving the lid open for extended periods of dividers. These accessories (in addition to other RamBox. The switch only controls on/off
time could cause the vehicle battery to dis- RamBox accessories) are available from Mopar. operation of the power outlet in the RamBox; it
charge. If the lid is required to stay open for does not control on/off operation of the power
If equipped, a 115 Volt (400 Watts Maximum)
extended periods of time, it is recommended outlets located inside the cabin of the vehicle.
inverter may be located inside the RamBox of
that the bin lights be turned off manually
your vehicle. The inverter can be turned on by
using the on/off switch.
the Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch
The interior of the RamBox will automatically located to the left of the steering wheel. The
illuminate when the lid is opened. The timing RamBox inverter can power cellular phones,
can be adjusted within Uconnect Settings electronics and other low power devices
Ú page 237. requiring power up to 400 Watts. Certain
high-end video game consoles exceed this
Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs power limit, as will most power tools.
(to allow water to drain from bins). To remove
plug, pull up on the edge. To install, push plug
downward into drain hole. Instrument Panel Power Inverter Switch
RAMBOX SAFETY WARNING
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
 Always close the storage bin covers when
RamBox Power Inverter your vehicle is unattended.
(Continued)
RamBox Drain Plug Removal

To install the bed divider into a divider position,

WARNING! (Continued) perform the following:
 Do not allow children to have access to the
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked
storage bins. Once in the storage bin, young
using the vehicle key and rotate the center
children may not be able to escape. If
trapped in the storage bin, children can die
handle vertically to release the divider side 2
from suffocation or heat stroke. gates.
 In an accident, serious injury could result if

the storage bin covers are not properly
latched. Emergency Release Lever
 Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin BED DIVIDER — IF EQUIPPED
covers open.
The bed divider has two functional positions:
 Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.  Divider Position
 Do not use a storage bin latch as a  Storage Position

tie-down. Center Handle And Lock
Divider Position
The divider position is intended for managing 1 — Center Handle Lock
RamBox Emergency Release Lever 2 — Handle
your cargo and assisting in keeping cargo from
As a security measure, an Emergency Release moving around the bed. There are 11 divider 3 — Unlocked Position
Lever is built into the storage bin cover latching slots along the bed inner panels which allow for 4 — Locked Position
mechanism. various positions to assist in managing your
In the event of an individual being locked inside cargo.
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be
opened from inside of the bin by pulling on the
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage
bin cover latching mechanism.
2. With the side gates open, position the

divider so the outboard ends align with the
intended slots in the sides of the bed.
Side Gates Closed Storage Position

5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel The outboard ends should be positioned in front
into place. of the cargo tie-down loops.
Aligning Gate To Slots
Storage Position
3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the The storage position for the bed divider is at the
outboard ends are secured into the front of the truck bed which maximizes the bed
intended slots of the bed. cargo area when not in use.
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to To install the bed divider into the storage
secure the side gates in the closed position. position, perform the same steps as you would
for the divider position, except position the
divider fully forward in the bed against the front
panel. Cargo Tie-Down Loop
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED

CAMPER APPLICATIONS The Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover can be installed on
the truck bed to protect your gear and cargo.
Certain truck models are not recommended for
slide-in campers. To determine if your vehicle is TONNEAU C OVER COMPONENTS 2
excluded, please refer to the “Consumer
Information Truck-Camper Loading” document
available online at ramtrucks.com. For safety
reasons, follow all instructions in this
document. Tonneau Cover Latch Components
1 — Handle
WARNING! 2 — Slide Locking Lever
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is 3 — Locating Bumper
deadly, the exhaust system on vehicles 4 — Truck Flange Bead
equipped with “Cap or Slide-In Campers” 5 — Latch Bumper
Folded Tonneau Components 6 — J Hook
should extend beyond the overhanging
1 – Stowage Strap
camper compartment and be free of leaks.
2 – Tonneau Bumper Folded
NOTE:
When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a
vehicle, an alternate Center High Mounted Stop
Light (CHMSL) must be provided.
TRI-F OLD TONNEAU COVER F OLDING

FOR DRIVING O R R EMOVAL
To remove the Tonneau Cover use the following
steps:
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear pair of
Tonneau Cover latches located on the
underside of the Cover.
Position One (Front Latches Latched And Stowage Slide Locking Lever Inward
Straps Secured)
2. Slide the locking lever toward the inside of
the truck bed to release the J Hook and pull
the handle downward into the released
position.
Location Of Rear Latches
Position Two (Front And Rear Latches Latched)

1 — Panel 1
2 — Panel 2
3 — Panel 3 Unlatching Latch
Released Position Stowed Position Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together

NOTE:
When folding the second and third panels, the
sections MUST be held together to avoid
damage to the cover material. Fold the panel
gently. Do not allow the panels to drop under
their own weight.
Hold The Bumper And Push The Handle Up Lift Panel 3 And Fold Onto Panel 2
3. Holding the bumper, push the fully released 4. Lift up on Panel 3 and fold it onto Panel 2.
latch to the center and push up. Push the
handle firmly, locking it into the stowed
position. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the
opposite side latch.
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
5. Lift up on the second and third panel and NOTE:

fold them onto the first panel. Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded
completely, and the stowage straps are
engaged, before removing.
CAUTION!
The folded tonneau cover must be latched by
both front latches and both front stowage
straps or damage to the tonneau cover or
vehicle may occur. Damage could occur while Slide Locking Lever Inward
driving. 7. Slide the locking lever toward the inside of
Stowage Strap Clipped the truck bed to release the J Hook and pull
the handle downward into the released
6. Unsnap the stowage strap and clip. Repeat position.
for both straps to prevent the tonneau cover
panels from unfolding.
Fully Folded Tonneau Cover

NOTE:
The vehicle can be driven with the tonneau in
the folded position or can be completely Unlatching Latch
Position One (Front Latches Latched And Stowage removed.

Straps Secured)
TRI-F OLD TONNEAU COVER

I NSTALLATION
To install the Tonneau Cover follow these steps:
1. Position the Tonneau Cover on the truck 2
bed and center using the locating
bumpers.
2. Locate the front pair of Tonneau Cover
Released Position latches on the underside of the Cover. Slide Slide Locking Lever Towards Inside Of Truck
the locking lever toward the inside of the
truck bed and release the latch from the
stowed position, and pull the handle
downward into the released position. Do
this for both the left and right side.
Hold The Bumper And Push The Handle Up Unlatching Latch

8. Holding the bumper, push the fully released
latch to the center and push up. Push the
handle firmly, locking it into the stowed
position. Repeat Steps 2 & 3 for the Location of Front Latches
opposite side latch.
9. With two people, remove the cover.
NOTE:
Make sure the bumper is in front of the truck
flange bead.
Released Position Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage

3. Swing the J Hook from the handle and push NOTE:
the handle to the center and up, ensuring When folding the second and third panels, the
that the J Hook is under the truck flange. sections MUST be held together to avoid
Pull Handle Downward
Push up on the handle firmly, locking it into damage to the cover material. Fold the panel
the latched position. 4. Pull down on the handle to ensure the Slide gently. Do not allow the panels to drop under
Locking Lever is fully engaged. Do this for their own weight.
both the left and right side.
5. Unclip the stowage straps, and re-snap
them to the bow.
6. Unfold the Tonneau Cover to the second
panel position.
J Hook Under Truck Flange

1 — Front Of Truck
Second Panel Position
2 — J Hook
NOTE: 9. Pull down on the handle to ensure the Slide 10. Gently pull up on all four corners of the
Unfold the panel gently, and do not allow the Locking Lever is fully engaged. Do this for Tonneau Cover to ensure that it is properly
panels to drop under their own weight. both the left and right side. latched.
7. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover. NOTE:
Also check to ensure the bumper is forward of CAUTION! 2
CAUTION! the bead on the underside of the truck flange. It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the
The vehicle cannot be driven when the Ton- Make sure that the Tonneau Cover is positioned Tonneau Cover is properly installed on the
neau Cover is in the second panel position. fully forward, so that the bumper clears the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure can
bead. result in detachment of the Tonneau Cover
from the vehicle and/or damage to the vehi-
cle/Tonneau Cover.
TRI-F OLD TONNEAU C OVER C LEANING

For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover, use
Mopar Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and Mopar
Leather & Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.
Position Two (Fully Unfolded)

Pull Up On Tonneau Cover Corners
8. Repeat steps 2 through 3 for the rear pair of
latches.
104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE
Gasoline Base / Midline Instrument Cluster

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT C LUSTER 5. Speedometer

DESCRIPTIONS — GASOLINE  Indicates vehicle speed.
1. Tachometer 6. Fuel Gauge

 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
per minute (RPM x 1000). fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/
RUN position.
2. Voltmeter 3
 The fuel pump symbol points to the
 When the vehicle is in the RUN state, the
gauge indicates the electrical system side of the vehicle where the fuel door
Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
voltage. The pointer should stay within is located.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
the normal range if the battery is 2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen 7. Temperature Gauge
charged. If the pointer moves to either
 The pointer shows engine coolant
extreme left or right and remains there  The display always show one of the main
temperature. The pointer positioned
during normal driving, the electrical menu item after ignition on.
within the normal range indicates that
system should be serviced.
4. Oil Pressure Gauge the engine cooling system is operating
NOTE:  The pointer should always indicate the oil satisfactorily.
In vehicles equipped with Stop/Start, a reduced pressure when the engine is running. A  The pointer will likely indicate a higher
voltage may be present during an Autostop. continuous high or low reading under temperature when driving in hot weather,
3. Instrument Cluster Display normal driving conditions may indicate a up mountain grades, or when towing a
lubrication system malfunction. Imme- trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
 When the appropriate conditions exist, diate service should be obtained from an the upper limits of the normal operating
this display shows the instrument cluster authorized dealer.
range.
display messages Ú page 114.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with Stop/Start, an oil
pressure indication of zero is normal during an
Autostop.
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING! CAUTION!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. Driving with a hot engine cooling system
You or others could be badly burned by steam could damage your vehicle. If the
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over and
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
overheats Ú page 423. conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE
Gasoline Premium Instrument Cluster Display

PREMIUM I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER 3. Speedometer

WARNING!
DESCRIPTIONS — GASOLINE  Indicates vehicle speed.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
1. Tachometer 4. Fuel Gauge You or others could be badly burned by steam
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
per minute (RPM x 1000). fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/ authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
RUN position. overheats Ú page 423.
2. Instrument Cluster Display
 When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster side of the vehicle where the fuel door CAUTION!
display messages Ú page 114. is located.
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
5. Temperature Gauge could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over and
 The pointer shows engine coolant
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
temperature. The pointer positioned
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
within the normal range indicates that
back into the normal range. If the pointer
the engine cooling system is operating
remains on the “H,” turn the engine off
satisfactorily.
immediately and call an authorized dealer for
 The pointer will likely indicate a higher service.
temperature when driving in hot weather,
up mountain grades, or when towing a
Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls the upper limits of the normal operating
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen range.
 The display always show one of the main

menu item after ignition on.
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL
Diesel Base / Midline Instrument Cluster

BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT C LUSTER WARNING!

DESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
1. Tachometer You or others could be badly burned by steam
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
per minute (RPM x 1000). authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats Ú page 423.
2. Engine Coolant Temperature
 This gauge shows the engine coolant
temperature. The gauge pointer will likely WARNING!
Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
show higher temperatures when driving Driving with a hot engine cooling system 1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
in hot weather, up mountain grades, or in could damage your vehicle. If the 2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
heavy stop and go traffic. If the red temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and
Warning Light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air  The display always show one of the main
safely bring the vehicle to a stop, and conditioner turned off until the pointer drops menu item after ignition on.
turn off the engine. DO NOT operate the back into the normal range. If the pointer
vehicle until the cause is corrected. remains on the “H”, turn the engine off 4. Oil Pressure Gauge
immediately and call an authorized dealer for  The pointer should always indicate some
service. oil pressure when the engine is running.
A continuous high or low reading under
3. Instrument Cluster Display normal driving conditions may indicate a
lubrication system malfunction. Imme-
 When the appropriate conditions exist,
diate service should be obtained from an
this display shows the instrument cluster
authorized dealer.
display messages Ú page 114.
5. Speedometer 7. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge  The DEF gauge may also not immediately
 Indicates vehicle speed.  The DEF Gauge displays the actual level update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF line
of Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank.
6. Fuel Gauge heater will possibly warm up the DEF fluid
DEF is required to maintain normal
and allow the gauge to update after a period
 The gauge shows the level of fuel in the vehicle operation and emissions compli-
of run time. Under very cold conditions, it is
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in ance. If something is wrong with the
possible that the gauge may not reflect the
the ON/RUN position. gauge, a DEF Warning Message or
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) will be
new fill level for several drives. 3
displayed Ú page 123.  Outside temperature can affect DEF
side of the vehicle where the fuel door
consumption. In cold conditions, 12°F
is located. NOTE: (-11°C) and below, the DEF gauge needle
 The gauge may take up to five seconds to can stay on a fixed position and may not
update after adding a gallon or more of move for extended periods of time. This is a
Diesel Exhaust Fluid to the DEF tank. If you normal function of the system.
have a fault related to the DEF system, the
gauge may not update to the new level. See
an authorized dealer for service.
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL
Diesel Premium Instrument Cluster

PREMIUM I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER 3. Speedometer capacity in the tank above the Full mark
that’s not represented in the gauge. You may
DESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL  Indicates vehicle speed.
not see any movement in the reading – even
1. Tachometer 4. Fuel Gauge after driving up to 2,000 miles in some
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions cases.
 The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
per minute (RPM x 1000). fuel tank when the ignition switch is in  The gauge may take up to five seconds to
the ON/RUN position. update after adding a gallon or more of DEF
2. Instrument Cluster Display
to the DEF tank. If you have a fault related to 3
 When the appropriate conditions exist, the DEF system, the gauge may not update to
this display shows the instrument cluster side of the vehicle where the fuel filler
the new level. See an authorized dealer for
display messages Ú page 114. door is located.
service.
5. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
 The DEF gauge may also not immediately
 The DEF Gauge displays the actual level update after a refill if the temperature of the
of Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF line
DEF is required to maintain normal heater will possibly warm up the DEF fluid
vehicle operation and emissions compli- and allow the gauge to update after a period
ance. If something is wrong with the of run time. Under very cold conditions, it is
gauge, a DEF Warning Message or possible that the gauge may not reflect the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) will be new fill level for several drives.
displayed Ú page 123.
 Outside temperature can affect DEF
Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location NOTE: consumption. In cold conditions, 12°F
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls (-11°C) and below, the DEF gauge needle
 The DEF tank on these vehicles is designed can stay on a fixed position and may not
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
with a large amount of full reserve. So the move for extended periods of time. This is a
 The display always show one of the main level sensor will indicate a full reading even normal function of the system.
menu item after ignition on. before the tank is completely full. To put it
another way, there’s additional storage
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER D ISPLAY  Fuel Economy (show/hide)
Your vehicle will be equipped with an CONTROLS  Stop/Start — If Equipped

instrument cluster display, which offers useful The instrument cluster display features a driver  Trip Info (show/hide)
information to the driver. With the ignition in the interactive display that is located in the
OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will instrument cluster.  Trailer Tow (show/hide) — If Equipped
activate the display for viewing, and display the
 Audio (show/hide)
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your
instrument cluster display is designed to display  Messages
important information about your vehicle’s
 Screen Set Up
systems and features. Using a driver interactive
display located on the instrument panel, your The system allows the driver to select
instrument cluster display can show you how information by pushing the following instrument
systems are working and give you warnings cluster display control buttons located on the
when they are not. The steering wheel mounted left side of the steering wheel.
controls allow you to scroll through the main
menus and submenus. You can access the Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
specific information you want and make 1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
selections and adjustments. 2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
The instrument cluster display menu items may

consist of the following:
 Speedometer
 Vehicle Info
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
 Off-Road — If Equipped
 Driver Assist (show/hide) — If Equipped
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:  Within each submenu layer, the up and 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
down arrow buttons will allow the user to ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
Using the up or down arrow button allows
select the item of interest. ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not
you to cycle through the Main Menu Items.
start the engine).
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:  Pushing the OK button makes the selection
and a confirmation screen will appear 2. Push and release the down arrow button
Using the left or right arrow button allows (returning the user to the first page of the to scroll downward through the main menu
you to cycle through the submenu items of the submenu). to “Vehicle Info.”
Main menu item. 3
 Pushing the left arrow button will exit each 3. Push and release the right arrow button
NOTE: submenu layer and return to the main menu. to access the ”Oil Life” screen.
 Holding the up / down or left /
right arrow buttons will loop the user OIL L IFE R ESET 4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life.
through the currently selected menu or Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil If conditions are met, the gauge and
options presented on the screen. change indicator system. The “Oil Change numeric display will update to show 100%.
 Main menu and submenus wrap for contin- Required” message will display in the If conditions are not met a pop up message
uous scrolling. instrument cluster display for five seconds after of “To reset oil life engine must be off with
a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next ignition in run” will be displayed (for five
 Upon returning to a main menu, the last scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil seconds), and the user will remain at the Oil
submenu screen viewed within that main change indicator system is duty cycle based, Life screen.
menu will be displayed. which means the engine oil change interval may
fluctuate, dependent upon your personal 5. Push and release the up or down
OK Button:
driving style. arrow button to exit the submenu screen.
For Digital Speedometer:
Unless reset, this message will continue to NOTE:
 Pushing the OK button changes units (mph or display each time you place the ignition in the If the indicator message illuminates when you
km/h). ON/RUN position. To turn off the message start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
For Screen Setup: temporarily, push and release the OK or arrow system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
buttons. To reset the oil change indicator
OK button allows user to enter menu and procedure.
 system (after performing the scheduled
submenus. maintenance), refer to the following procedure:
DISPLAY M ENU ITEMS  Oil Life  Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (If
 Battery Voltage — If Equipped Equipped): displays front and rear or rear
Push and release the up or down arrow only axle locker graphic, and sway bar
button until the desired selectable menu icon is  Gauge Summary — If Equipped connection graphic with text message
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. (connected or disconnected).
 Coolant Temp
Speedometer  Trans Temp  Pitch And Roll
Push and release the up or down arrow  Oil Temp  Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle
button until the speedometer menu item is
 Oil Pressure in the graphic with the angle number on
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
the screen.
Push and release the OK button to cycle the  Engine Hours
display between mph and km/h. NOTE:
Off-Road When vehicle speed becomes too high to
Vehicle Info Push and release the up or down arrow display the pitch and roll, “- -” will display in
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Off-Road menu icon is displayed place of the numbers, and the graphic will be
button until the Vehicle Info menu icon is in the instrument cluster display. Push and greyed out. A message indicating the necessary
displayed in the instrument cluster display. release the left or right arrow button to speed for the feature to become available will
Push and release the left or right arrow scroll through the information submenus. also display.
button to scroll through the information
 Drivetrain
submenus and push and release the OK button Driver Assist — If Equipped
to select or reset the resettable submenus.  Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical The Driver Assist menu displays the status of
 Tire Pressure Monitor System and numerical value of calculated the ACC and LaneSense systems.
average front wheel angle from the
 Air Suspension — If Equipped Push and release the up or down arrow
steering wheel orientation.
button until the Driver Assist menu is displayed
 Coolant Temperature — If Equipped  Transfer Case Lock Status: displays in the instrument cluster display.
 Trans Temperature (Automatic only) “Lock” graphic only during 4WD High,
 Oil Temperature 4WD High Part Time, 4WD Low status.
 Oil Pressure — If Equipped

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature The ACC screen may display once again if any  Current Fuel Economy
The instrument cluster display displays the ACC activity occurs, which may include any of
 Average Fuel Economy
current Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system the following:
settings. The information displayed depends on  Distance Setting Change  Range To Empty
ACC system status. Trip Info
 System Cancel
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off Push and release the up or down arrow
button (located on the steering wheel) until one  Driver Override
button until the Trip menu item is highlighted in 3
of the following displays in the instrument  System Off the instrument cluster display. Push and
cluster display: release the right or left arrow button to
 ACC Proximity Warning enter the submenus of Trip A and Trip B. The
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
 ACC Unavailable Warning Trip A or Trip B information will display the
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read following:
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.” LaneSense — If Equipped
 Distance
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready The instrument cluster display displays the
current LaneSense system settings. The  Average Fuel Economy
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will information displayed depends on LaneSense  Elapsed Time
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.” system status and the conditions that need to
be met Ú page 137. Push and hold OK button to reset all
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on information.
the steering wheel) and the following will display Fuel Economy
in the instrument cluster display: Stop/Start — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
ACC SET button until the Fuel Economy menu item is Push and release the up or down arrow
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. button until the Stop/Start icon/title is
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
the instrument cluster Ú page 179. Push and hold the OK button to reset Average
Fuel Economy. The screen will display the Stop/Start status.
Trailer Tow Audio Settings

Push and release the up or down arrow Push and release the up or down arrow Head-Up Display (HUD)
button until the Trailer Tow menu item is button until the Audio Menu icon/title is
NOTE:
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
The HUD feature Settings are available at any
Push and release the right or left arrow This menu will display the audio source
vehicle speed.
button to cycle through the following trailer tow information, including the Song name, Artist
information: name, and audio source with an accompanying Push and release the up or down arrow
 Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold graphic. button until the Settings Menu icon/title is
the OK button to reset the distance. Phone Call Status highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the left or right arrow
 Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM): When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status button until the HUD Menu icon/title is
pop-up will display on the screen. The pop-up highlighted in the instrument cluster
 Braking Output will remain until the phone is answered or display.Push and release the OK button to enter
 Trailer Type ignored. HUD. Use the up or down arrow button to
 ITBM Gain NOTE: select a setting, then push and release the OK
The call status will temporarily replace the button to adjust the setting.
 Trailer Light Check: Push and hold the OK
previous media source information displayed  ON/OFF
button to begin the Trailer Light Test
on the screen. When the pop-up is no longer
sequence Ú page 225.  Content and Layout
displayed, the display will return to the last used
 Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring: The Instru- screen.  Simple: Speed, Speed Limit
ment Cluster Display will display the Trailer
Tire Pressure for a connected trailer with Stored Messages  Standard: Speed, Speed Limit, Naviga-
sensors that match the active trailer profile. Push and release the up or down arrow tion
When a low tire is present, the low tire value button until the Messages Menu item is  Advanced: Speed, Speed Limit, Naviga-
will be displayed in red, and the affected low highlighted. This feature shows the number of tion, Driver Assist (ACC/Cruise, Lane-
tire will have a red glow. “Trailer Tire Low“ will stored warning messages. Push and release the Sense, Highway Assist/Highway Assist+),
be displayed on the center bottom of the right or left arrow button to cycle through Gear
Instrument Cluster Display screen. stored messages.
 Custom 1: Speed, Speed Limit Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items  Trip A Distance
 Custom 2: Speed, Speed Limit, Naviga- Push and release the up or down arrow  Trip B Distance
tion button until the Settings Menu Icon/Title is  Trailer Trip – If Equipped
 Custom 3: Speed, Speed Limit, Naviga- highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to enter the  Trailer Brake – If Equipped
tion, Driver Assist (ACC/Cruise, Lane-
Sense, Highway Assist/Highway Assist+) sub-menus and follow the prompts on the  Oil Pressure – If Equipped
screen as needed. The Settings feature allows
Custom 4: Speed, Speed Limit, Naviga-  Coolant Temp – If Equipped 3
 you to change what information is displayed in
tion, Driver Assist (ACC/Cruise, Lane- the instrument cluster as well as the location  Oil Temperature – If Equipped
Sense, Highway Assist/Highway Assist+), that information is displayed.
Gear  Battery Voltage – If Equipped
NOTE:
 Display Height  Transmission Temperature – If Equipped
The Settings feature is only available when the
 Brightness vehicle speed is less than 5 mph.  Oil Life – If Equipped
Upper Left Upper Center

NOTE:
The HUD basic settings (Brightness, Display  None  None
Height and Non Custom layouts), are controlled
 Compass  Compass
through the Settings Screen in the Instrument
Cluster Ú page 114.  Outside Temp  Outside Temp
 Time  Time
 Range To Empty  Range To Empty
 Average Econ  Average Econ
 Current Econ  Current Econ

 Trip A Distance  Oil Temperature – If Equipped  Oil Life

 Trip B Distance  Battery Voltage – If Equipped  Menu Icon
 Trailer Trip – If Equipped  Transmission Temperature – If Equipped Lower Left – If Equipped
 Audio  Oil Life – If Equipped  None
 Speedometer Left Side – If Equipped  Compass
 Menu Title  None  Outside Temp
Upper Right  Range To Empty  Time
 None  Average Econ  Range To Empty
 Compass  Oil Temp  Average Econ
 Outside Temp  Transmission Temp  Current Econ
 Time  Coolant Temp  Trip A Distance
 Range To Empty  Oil Life  Trip B Distance
 Average Econ  Menu Icon  Trailer Trip
 Current Econ Right Side – If Equipped  Trailer Brake
 Trip A Distance  None  Oil Pressure
 Trip B Distance  Range To Empty  Coolant Temperature
 Trailer Trip – If Equipped  Average Econ  Oil Temperature
 Trailer Brake – If Equipped  Oil Temp  Battery Voltage
 Oil Pressure – If Equipped  Transmission Temp  Transmission Temperature
 Coolant Temp – If Equipped  Coolant Temp  Oil Life
Lower Right – If Equipped Favorite Menus Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
 None  Speedometer
 Cancel
 Compass  Vehicle Info
 Restore
 Outside Temp  Driver Assist (show/hide) – If Equipped
 Time  Fuel Economy (show/hide) DIESEL P ARTICULATE F ILTER (DPF)
 Range To Empty  Trip Info (show/hide)
MESSAGES 3
This engine meets all required diesel engine
 Average Econ  Stop/Start
emissions standards. To achieve these
 Current Econ  Trailer Tow (show/hide) emissions standards, your vehicle is equipped
with a state-of-the-art engine and exhaust
 Trip A Distance  Audio (show/hide) system. These systems are seamlessly
 Trip B Distance  (Stored) Messages integrated into your vehicle and managed by
the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM
 Trailer Trip  Screen Setup manages engine combustion to allow the
 Trailer Brake Current Gear exhaust system’s catalyst to trap and burn
Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input
 Oil Pressure  Off or interaction on your part.
 Coolant Temperature  On
WARNING!
 Oil Temperature Odometer
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
 Battery Voltage  No Decimal Point park over materials that can burn, such as
 Transmission Temperature  Decimal Point grass or leaves, and those items that come
into contact with your exhaust system. Do not
 Oil Life park or operate your vehicle in areas where
your exhaust system can contact anything
that can burn.
Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to  Exhaust System — Regeneration In Process  Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced See
additional maintenance required on your Exhaust Filter XX% Full — This message indi- Dealer — This message indicates the PCM
vehicle or engine. Refer to the following cates that the DPF is self-cleaning. Maintain has derated the engine to limit the likelihood
messages that may be displayed on your your current driving condition until regenera- of permanent damage to the after-treatment
instrument cluster: tion is completed. system. If this condition is not corrected and
a dealer service is not performed, extensive
 Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at  Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed
exhaust after-treatment damage can occur.
Highway Speeds to Remedy — This message — This message indicates that the DPF
To correct this condition it will be necessary
will be displayed in the instrument cluster if self-cleaning is completed. If this message is
to have your vehicle serviced by an autho-
the exhaust particulate filter reaches 80% of displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in
rized dealer.
its maximum storage capacity. Under condi- alerting you of this condition.
tions of exclusive short duration and low NOTE:
speed driving cycles, your diesel engine and  Exhaust Service Required — See Dealer Now
Failing to follow the oil change indicator,
exhaust after-treatment system may never — This messages indicates regeneration has
changing your oil and resetting the oil change
reach the conditions required to cleanse the been disabled due to a system malfunction.
indicator by 0 miles remaining will prevent the
filter to remove the trapped PM. If this At this point the engine Powertrain Control
diesel exhaust filter from performing it's
occurs, the “Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Module (PCM) will register a fault code, the
cleaning routine. This will shortly result in a
Drive at Highway Speeds to Remedy” instrument panel will display a MIL light.
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) and reduced
message will be displayed in the instrument engine power. Only an authorized dealer will be
cluster display. If this message is displayed, CAUTION! able to correct this condition.
you will hear one chime to assist in alerting See an authorized dealer, as damage to the
you of this condition. By simply driving your exhaust system could occur soon with CAUTION!
vehicle at highway speeds for up to continued operation.
20 minutes, you can remedy the condition in See an authorized dealer, as damage to the
the particulate filter system and allow your exhaust system could occur soon with
diesel engine and exhaust after-treatment continued operation.
system to cleanse the filter to remove the
trapped PM and restore the system to normal
operating condition.
DISPLAYS  Service DEF System See Dealer  Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi Refill DEF
— This message will display when DEF driving
When the appropriate conditions exist, the  Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer
range is less than 200 miles. It is also
instrument cluster display displays the following displayed at 150 miles and 100 miles. DEF
 Engine Will Not Restart in XXX mi Service DEF
messages: fluid top off is required within the displayed
See Dealer
 System Setup Unavailable – Vehicle Not in mileage. The message will be displayed in the
Park  Engine Will Not Restart Service DEF System instrument cluster display during vehicle
See Dealer start up with an updated distance mileage, 3
 System Setup Unavailable – Vehicle in and it will be accompanied by a single chime.
Motion DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID (DEF) Starting at 100 miles, remaining range will
 Exhaust Filter Full Safely Drive at Highway
WARNING MESSAGES be continuously displayed while operating
Speeds To Remedy Your vehicle will begin displaying warning the vehicle. Chimes will also accompany the
messages when the DEF level reaches a driving 75, 50 and 25 mile remaining distances. The
 Exhaust Filter XX% Full – Power Reduced See DEF Low telltale will be on continuously until
range of approximately 500 miles (800 km). If
Dealer DEF fluid is topped off.
the following warning message sequence is
 Exhaust Service Required – See Dealer Now ignored, your vehicle may not restart unless DEF  Engine Will Not Restart Refill DEF — This
is added with in the displayed mileage shown in message will display when the DEF driving
 Exhaust System – Filter XX% Full Service the cluster message. range is less than one mile, DEF fluid top off
Required See Dealer
 Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi DEF Low is required or the engine will not restart. The
 Exhaust System – Regeneration In Process Refill Soon — This message will display when message will be displayed in the instrument
Exhaust Filter XX% Full DEF driving range is less than 500 miles, DEF cluster display during vehicle start up, and it
fluid top off is required within the displayed will be accompanied by a single chime. The
 Exhaust System – Regeneration Completed DEF Low telltale will be illuminated continu-
mileage. The message will be displayed in the
 Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi DEF Low cluster during vehicle start up with the ously until DEF fluid tank is filled with a
Refill Soon current allowed mileage and accompanied by minimum of two gallons of DEF.
a single chime. The remaining mileage can
 Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi Refill DEF
be pulled up anytime in the “Messages” list
 Engine Will Not Restart Refill DEF within the instrument cluster display.
DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID (DEF) FAULT dealer and have your vehicle serviced imme- displayed when under 1 mile until engine will
diately. If not corrected in 30 miles, vehicle not start and each time the vehicle is started,
WARNING MESSAGES
will enter the “Engine Will not restart in XXX and will be continuously displayed. The
There are different messages which are mi Service DEF See dealer” warning stage message will be accompanied by a single
displayed if the vehicle detects that the DEF and message. chime. Your Malfunction Indicator Light will
system has been filled with a fluid other than be continuously illumined. We highly recom-
DEF, has experienced component failures, or  Engine Will Not Restart in XXX mi Service DEF
mend you drive to the nearest authorized
See Dealer — This message is first displayed
when tampering has been detected. dealer if the message appears while engine
if the fault detected is not serviced after
is running.
When the DEF system needs to be serviced the 50 miles of operation. It is also displayed at
following warnings will display: 150 miles, 125 miles and 100 miles. System  Engine Will Not Start Service DEF System See
 Service DEF System See Dealer — This service is required within the displayed Dealer — This message will display when the
message will display when the fault is initially mileage. The message will be displayed fault detected is not serviced after the Engine
detected and each time the vehicle is during vehicle start up with an updated will not restart Service DEF System See
started. The message will be accompanied by distance mileage, and it will be accompanied Dealer message is displayed on the next
a single chime and the Malfunction Indicator by a single chime. Starting at 100 miles, subsequent restart. Your engine will not start
Light. We recommend you drive to the remaining range will be continuously unless your vehicle is serviced by an autho-
nearest authorized dealer and have your displayed while operating the vehicle. rized dealer. The message will be accompa-
vehicle serviced immediately. If not corrected Chimes will also accompany the 75, 50 and nied by a single chime. Your Malfunction
in 50 miles, vehicle will enter the “Engine Will 25 mile remaining distances. We recom- Indicator Light will be continuously illumi-
not restart in XXX mi Service DEF See dealer” mend you drive to the nearest authorized nated. If the message appears and you can
warning stage and message. dealer and have your vehicle serviced imme- not start the engine, we recommend having
diately. your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized
 Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer — This dealer immediately.
message will display if the DEF system has  Engine Will Not Restart Service DEF System
detected the incorrect fluid has been intro- See Dealer — This message will display if DEF
duced to the DEF tank. The message will be system issue detected is not serviced during
accompanied by a single chime. We recom- the allowed period. Your engine will not
mend you drive to your nearest authorized restart unless your vehicle is serviced by an
authorized dealer. This message will be
BATTERY SAVER O N/BATTERY S AVER electrical charge at a rate that the charging the capability of charging system. The
system cannot sustain. charging system is still functioning properly.
MODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL L OAD
REDUCTION ACTIONS — I F EQUIPPED NOTE:  Turning on all possible vehicle electrical
loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent  The charging system is independent from interior lights, overloaded power outlets
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional load reduction. The charging system +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports) during
monitoring of the electrical system and status performs a diagnostic on the charging certain driving conditions (city driving,
of the vehicle battery. system continuously. towing, frequent stopping). 3
In cases when the IBS detects charging system  If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it  Installing options like additional lights,
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are may indicate a problem with the charging upfitter electrical accessories, audio
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions system Ú page 128. systems, alarms and similar devices.
will take place to extend the driving time and
distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing The electrical loads that may be switched off (if  Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
power to or turning off non-essential electrical equipped), and vehicle functions which can be by long parking periods).
loads. affected by load reduction:
 The vehicle was parked for an extended
Load reduction is only active when the engine is  Heated Seats / Vented Seats / Heated Wheel
period of time (weeks, months).
running. It will display a message if there is a  Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
risk of battery depletion to the point where the  The battery was recently replaced and was
vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply,  HVAC System not charged completely.
or will not restart after the current drive cycle.  115 Volts AC Power Inverter System  The battery was discharged by an electrical
When load reduction is activated, the message load left on when the vehicle was parked.
 Audio and Telematics System
“Battery Saver On Some Systems May Have  The battery was used for an extended period
Reduced Power” will appear in the instrument Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or with the engine not running to supply radio,
cluster. more of the following conditions: lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appli-
These messages indicate the vehicle battery  The charging system cannot deliver enough ances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles
has a low state of charge and continues to lose electrical power to the vehicle system and similar devices.
because the electrical loads are larger than
What to do when an electrical load reduction tive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
action message is present (“Battery Saver On” and driving pattern did not help to identify the unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
or “Battery Saver Mode”) cause. turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the
During a trip:
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
 Reduce power to unnecessary loads if continuously and a chime will sound
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
possible: Ú page 334.
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
 Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte- message and/or acoustic signal when
Air Bag Warning Light
rior). applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be This warning light will illuminate to
 Check what may be plugged in to power indicate a fault with the air bag, and
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to
outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB will turn on for four to eight seconds
the information contained in the Owner’s
ports. as a bulb check when the ignition is
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully
 Check HVAC settings (blower, tempera- in all cases. Always refer to the information in placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
ture). this chapter in the event of a failure indication. position. This light will illuminate with a single
All active telltales will display first if applicable. chime when a fault with the air bag has been
 Check the audio settings (volume). detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
The system check menu may appear different
After a trip: based upon equipment options and current If the light is either not on during startup, stays
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and on, or turns on while driving, have the system
 Check if any aftermarket equipment was inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical may not appear.
possible.
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and RED WARNING LIGHTS
review specifications if any (load and Ignition Brake Warning Light
Off Draw currents). Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light This warning light monitors various
 Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, This warning light indicates when the brake functions, including brake fluid
driving time and parking time). driver or passenger seat belt is level and parking brake application. If
unbuckled. When the ignition is first the brake light turns on it may
 The vehicle should have service performed if placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the message is still present during consecu-
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a NOTE: the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System The light may flash momentarily during sharp detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
reservoir. cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
If the light remains on when the parking brake conditions. The vehicle should have service The light also will turn on when the parking
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at performed, and the brake fluid level checked. brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is ON/RUN position.
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system necessary.
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
NOTE: 3
This light shows only that the parking brake is
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock WARNING! applied. It does not show the degree of brake
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is application.
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
remain on until the condition has been Hood Open Warning Light
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the This warning light will illuminate when
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
vehicle checked immediately. the hood is ajar/open and not fully
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
closed.
felt during each stop.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake NOTE:
The dual brake system provides a reserve
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of single chime.
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when Equipped
the ABS system is required.
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be This light will flash at a fast rate for
dropped below a specified level.
checked by turning the ignition switch from the approximately 15 seconds when the
The light will remain on until the cause is vehicle security system is arming, and
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
corrected. then will flash slowly until the vehicle
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless is disarmed.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Oil Pressure Warning Light vehicle is safely and completely stopped and
Light This warning light will illuminate to the transmission is placed in the PARK position.
This warning light warns of an indicate low engine oil pressure. If the The light should turn off. If the light remains on
overheated engine condition. If the light turns on while driving, stop the with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
engine coolant temperature is too vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as usually be drivable; however, see an authorized
high, this indicator will illuminate and possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A dealer for service as soon as possible.
a single chime will sound. If the temperature chime will sound when this light turns on. NOTE:
reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is This light may turn on if the accelerator and
sound for four minutes or until the engine is corrected. This light does not indicate how brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
able to cool, whichever comes first. much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over must be checked under the hood.
running, immediate service is required and you
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/ may experience reduced performance, an
Oil Temperature Warning Light
C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is vehicle may require towing. The light will come
vehicle. If the temperature reading does not on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
return to normal, turn the engine off high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
immediately and call for service Ú page 389. a bulb check. If the light does not come on
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
Battery Charge Warning Light temperature to return to normal levels. during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
This warning light will illuminate when
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running, Light
there may be a malfunction with the This warning light will illuminate to
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer indicate a problem with the ETC
as soon as possible. system. If a problem is detected while
the vehicle is running, the light will
This indicates a possible problem with the
either stay on or flash depending on the nature
electrical system or a related component.
of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Transmission Temperature Warning Light Door Open Warning Light
Warning Light — If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when a
This warning light will turn on when This warning light will illuminate to door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
there's a fault with the EPS system warn of a high transmission fluid
Ú page 174. temperature. This may occur with
NOTE:
strenuous usage such as trailer
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single
WARNING! towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
chime. 3
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
others. Service should be obtained as soon light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
as possible.
Warning Light — If Equipped
WARNING! This warning light will illuminate to
Tailgate Open Warning Light
If you continue operating the vehicle when indicate a fault in the ACC system.
This warning light will illuminate when Contact an authorized dealer for
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
the tailgate is open. service Ú page 179.
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light — If
NOTE: exhaust components and cause a fire.
Equipped
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime. This light will illuminate when a fault is
CAUTION! detected with the air suspension
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light system.
Continuous driving with the Transmission
This warning light will illuminate when Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
the Trailer Brake has been eventually cause severe transmission
disconnected. damage or transmission failure.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active

WARNING!
Warning Light (MIL) Warning Light — If Equipped
The MIL is a part of an Onboard A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as This warning light will indicate when
Diagnostic System called OBD II that referenced above, can reach higher the ESC system is Active. The ESC
monitors engine and automatic temperatures than in normal operating Indicator Light in the instrument
transmission control systems. This conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive cluster will come on when the ignition
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is slowly or park over flammable substances is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This position, and when ESC is activated. It should go
the bulb does not come on when turning the could result in death or serious injury to the out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the driver, occupants or others. Light comes on continuously with the engine
condition checked promptly. running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this warning light remains on after
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing CAUTION!
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
be serviced if the light stays on through several
to the vehicle control system. It also could authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the the problem diagnosed and corrected.
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
towing.  The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
damage and power loss will soon occur.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash cator Light come on momentarily each time
Immediate service is required.
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
ON/RUN position.
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
converter damage. The vehicle should be This warning light will illuminate to  The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as indicate the Electronic Park Brake is sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
possible if this occurs. not functioning properly and service is sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
required. Contact an authorized
 This light will come on when the vehicle is in
dealer. an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
Warning Light — If Equipped Warning. placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
This warning light indicates the ESC is vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
off. Warning Light pressure label, you should determine the
The warning light switches on and a proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or message is displayed to indicate that
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
the tire pressure is lower than the
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring 3
if it was turned off previously. recommended value and/or that slow
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
Service LaneSense Warning Light — If pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
Equipped is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
not be guaranteed.
This warning light will illuminate when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
the LaneSense system is not Should one or more tires be in the condition should stop and check your tires as soon as
operating and requires service. mentioned above, the display will show the possible, and inflate them to the proper
Please contact an authorized dealer. indications corresponding to each tire. pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If CAUTION! and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
Equipped Do not continue driving with one or more flat reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
This warning light will illuminate when tires as handling may be compromised. Stop may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
the windshield washer fluid is low. the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and ability.
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
immediately using the dedicated tire repair proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
Low Fuel Warning Light kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
When the fuel level is less than a ¼ as possible. even if under-inflation has not reached the level
tank, and the Distance to Empty is to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
less than 50 miles, this light will turn Each tire, including the spare (if provided), pressure telltale.
on and remain on until fuel is added. should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
CAUTION! driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS The TPMS has been optimized for the original system is not functioning and service is
malfunction indicator is combined with the low equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures required as soon as possible. However, the
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects and warning have been established for the conventional brake system will continue to
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for tire size equipped on your vehicle. operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning
approximately one minute and then remain Undesirable system operation or sensor Light is not also on.
continuously illuminated. This sequence will damage may result when using replacement If the ABS light does not turn on when the
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as equipment that is not of the same size, type, ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
long as the malfunction exists. When the and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause RUN position, have the brake system inspected
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire by an authorized dealer.
may not be able to detect or signal low tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become Rear Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light — If
occur for a variety of reasons, including the inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire Equipped
installation of replacement or alternate tires or sealant it is recommended that you take your This warning light will illuminate to
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your indicate when a rear axle locker fault
from functioning properly. Always check the sensor function checked. has been detected.
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
that the replacement or alternate tires and Light Light — If Equipped
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function This warning light monitors the ABS. This warning light will illuminate to
properly. The light will turn on when the ignition indicate a fault in the FCW System.
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ Contact an authorized dealer for
RUN position and may stay on for as service Ú page 324.
long as four seconds.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator when TOW/HAUL mode is selected.
This warning light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start system is not
This indicator light illuminates to Cargo Light — If Equipped
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized indicate that Forward Collision This indicator light will illuminate
dealer for service. Warning is off. when the cargo light is activated by
pushing the cargo light button on the 3
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped Air Suspension Payload Protection headlight switch.
This warning light will illuminate to Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate to Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light
signal a fault with the 4WD system. If
the light stays on or comes on during indicate that the maximum payload — If Equipped
driving, it means that the 4WD system may have been exceeded or load This light will illuminate when the air
is not functioning properly and that service is leveling cannot be achieved at its suspension system is set to the
required. We recommend you drive to the current ride height. Protection Mode will Off-Road 1 setting Ú page 165.
nearest service center and have the vehicle automatically be selected to “protect” the air
suspension system, air suspension adjustment
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light
serviced immediately.
is limited due to payload. — If Equipped
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light This light will illuminate when the air
This warning light will illuminate to Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light — If suspension system is set to the
indicate the Cruise Control System is Equipped Off-Road 2 setting Ú page 165.
not functioning properly and service is This indicator light will illuminate to
required. Contact an authorized indicate when Trailer Merge Assist
dealer. has been activated Ú page 318.
Air Suspension Normal Height Indicator Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
Light— If Equipped Indicator Light— If Equipped speed. Low range provides a greater gear
This light will illuminate when the air This light will blink and alert the driver reduction ratio to provide increased torque at
suspension system is set to the that the vehicle is changing to a lower the wheels Ú page 161.
Normal setting Ú page 165. ride height. 4WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light This light alerts the driver that the
Indicator Light— If Equipped vehicle is in the 4WD High mode. The
This light indicates when the rear axle
front and rear driveshafts are
This light will illuminate when the air lock has been activated.
mechanically locked together forcing
suspension system is set to the the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
Aerodynamic setting. speed.
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Entry/Exit Indicator Light— If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is automatically lowered from mode, and the front and rear 4WD power transfer case is in the
ride height position downward for driveshafts are mechanically locked NEUTRAL mode and the front and rear
easy entry and exit of the vehicle together forcing the front and rear wheels to driveshafts are disengaged from the
Ú page 165. rotate at the same speed. powertrain.
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising 4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator
Indicator Light— If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the Light — If Equipped
This light will blink and alert the driver vehicle is in the 4WD Low mode. The The Low DEF Indicator will illuminate
that the vehicle is changing to a front and rear driveshafts are if the vehicle is low on Diesel Exhaust
higher ride height. mechanically locked together forcing Fluid (DEF) Ú page 211.
Wait To Start Light — If Equipped Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
CAUTION!
This indicator light will illuminate for Target Detected Indicator Light — If
approximately two seconds when the The presence of water in the fuel system Equipped
ignition is turned to the RUN position. circuit may cause severe damage to the
This light will turn on when the ACC is
Its duration may be longer based on injection system and irregular engine
SET and there is no target vehicle
colder operating conditions. Vehicle will not operation. If the indicator light is illuminated,
detected Ú page 179.
initiate start until telltale is no longer displayed contact an authorized dealer as soon as
Ú page 146. possible to bleed the system. If the above ECO Mode Indicator Light 3
indications come on immediately after This light will turn on when ECO Mode
NOTE: refuelling, water has probably been poured is active.
The “Wait To Start” telltale may not illuminate if into the tank: switch the engine off
the intake manifold temperature is warm immediately and contact an authorized
enough. dealer. Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate
GREEN INDICATOR L IGHTS when the park lights or headlights are
The “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” will
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With turned on.
illuminate when there is water
detected in the fuel filter. If this light Target Light — If Equipped LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
remains on, DO NOT start the vehicle This will display when the ACC is set The LaneSense indicator light
before you drain the water from the fuel filter to and a target vehicle is detected illuminates solid green when both
prevent engine damage, and please see an Ú page 179. lane markings have been detected
authorized dealer.
and the system is “armed” and ready
to provide visual and torque warnings if an
unintentional lane departure occurs
Ú page 199.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If WHITE INDICATOR L IGHTS
This indicator light will illuminate Equipped With Premium Instrument
when the front fog lights are on. Cluster Display Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light
— If Equipped
This light will turn on when the cruise
control is set Ú page 177. This light will illuminate when the
Turn Signal Indicator Lights vehicle equipped with ACC has been
When the left or right turn signal is turned on but not set Ú page 179.
activated, the turn signal indicator will Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If
flash independently and the Cruise Control Ready Indicator
Equipped
corresponding exterior turn signal This indicator light will illuminate
This indicator light will illuminate
lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the cruise control is ready, but
when the Stop/Start function is in
when the multifunction lever is moved down not set Ú page 177.
“Autostop” mode Ú page 175.
(left) or up (right).
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If
4WD AUTO Indicator Light — If Equipped
NOTE: Equipped With Base/Midline Instrument
This light alerts the driver that the
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
Cluster Display
 vehicle is in the four-wheel drive auto
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either mode, and the front axle is engaged, This light will turn on when the cruise
turn signal on. but the vehicle's power is sent to the control is set Ú page 177.
rear wheels. Four-wheel drive will be
 Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. automatically engaged when the vehicle senses
a loss of traction Ú page 161.
 If equipped with fog lamps, the fog lamp on
the side of the activated turn signal will also
illuminate to provide additional light when
turning.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light BLUE INDICATOR L IGHTS If any of these systems require service, the OBD
— If Equipped II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator
High Beam Indicator Light Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes
This indicator shows when the HDC
feature is turned on. The lamp will be This indicator light will illuminate to and other information to assist your service
on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can indicate that the high beam technician in making repairs. Although your
only be armed when the transfer case headlights are on. With the low beams vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
is in the “4WD LOW” position and the vehicle activated, push the multifunction towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
speed is less then 20 mph (32 km/h). If these lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to soon as possible. 3
conditions are not met while attempting to use turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to CAUTION!
flash on/off. turn off the high beams. If the high beams are  Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary cause further damage to the emission
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario. control system. It could also affect fuel
When the LaneSense system is ON, economy and driveability. The vehicle must
but not armed, the LaneSense ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II be serviced before any emissions tests can
indicator light illuminates solid white. Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated be performed.
This occurs when only left, right, or Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This  If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
neither lane line has been detected. If a single system monitors the performance of the running, severe catalytic converter damage
lane line is detected, the system is ready to emissions, engine, and transmission control and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
provide only visual warnings if an unintentional systems. When these systems are operating service is required.
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
Ú page 199. performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC S YSTEM EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
(OBD II) CYBERSECURITY MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a NOTE:
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
connection port to allow access to information to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
related to the performance of your emissions start this test over.
emissions control system. Failure to pass could
controls. Authorized service technicians may prevent vehicle registration. 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
need to access this information to assist with the ON position, you will see the
the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and For states that require an Inspection
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol
emissions system Ú page 236. and Maintenance (I/M), this check
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
verifies the Malfunction Indicator
WARNING! Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II things will happen:
 ONLY an authorized service technician system is ready for testing.
should connect equipment to the OBD II  The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
connection port in order to read the VIN, Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The and then return to being fully illuminated
diagnose, or service your vehicle. OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted engine. This means that your vehicle's
 If unauthorized equipment is connected to
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II OBD II system is not ready and you
the OBD II connection port, such as a
system should be determined not ready for the should not proceed to the I/M station.
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
 Be possible that vehicle systems,  The MIL will not flash at all and will
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, remain fully illuminated until you place
including safety related systems, could
which you can use prior to going to the test the ignition in the off position or start the
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system engine. This means that your vehicle's
could occur that may result in an acci-
is ready, you must do the following: OBD II system is ready and you can
dent involving serious injury or death.
proceed to the I/M station.
 Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should

see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready. 3
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the
I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
140
STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!
GASOLINE ENGINE  Do not leave the key fob in or near the  Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil- complete stop, then shift the automatic
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and dren, and do not leave the ignition of a transmission into PARK and apply the
fasten your seat belt. vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go parking brake.
The starter should not be operated for more in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could  Always make sure the ENGINE START/STOP
than 10-second intervals. Waiting a few operate power windows, other controls, or button is in the OFF mode, key fob is
seconds between such intervals will protect the move the vehicle. removed from the vehicle and vehicle is
starter from overheating.  Do not leave children or animals inside locked.
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
WARNING! heat build-up may cause serious injury or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving
 When leaving the vehicle, always make death. children in a vehicle unattended is
sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle DIESEL ENGINE or others could be seriously or fatally
and lock the vehicle. Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, injured. Children should be warned not to
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
with access to an unlocked vehicle. seat belts. gear selector.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- (Continued)
The starter is allowed to crank for up to
tended is dangerous for a number of
25-second intervals. Waiting a few minutes
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
between such intervals will protect the starter
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, from overheating.
brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
as the primary method by which the driver shifts

WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) the vehicle into PARK.
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the  If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” The conditions under which AutoPark will
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil- remains on, DO NOT START engine before engage are outlined on the following pages.
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a you drain the water from the fuel filter to
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go avoid engine damage Ú page 412. WARNING!
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION  Driver inattention could lead to failure to
move the vehicle. place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
Start the engine with the transmission in PARK
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
 Do not leave children or animals inside position. Apply the brake before shifting into any by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is 4
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior driving range. indicated in the instrument cluster display
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
NOTE: and near the gear selector. If the “P” indi-
death.
cator is blinking, your vehicle is not in
 This vehicle is equipped with a transmission PARK. As an added precaution, always
NOTE: shift interlocking system. The brake pedal apply the parking brake when exiting the
Engine start up in very low ambient temperature must be pressed to shift out of PARK. vehicle.
could result in evident white smoke. This condi-
 If equipped with an 8-speed transmission,  AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
tion will disappear as the engine warms up.
starting the vehicle in NEUTRAL is not designed to replace the need to shift your
possible unless the Manual Park Release has vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system
CAUTION! been activated Ú page 390. and should not be relied upon as the
 The engine is allowed to crank as long as primary method by which the driver shifts
25 seconds. If the engine fails to start AUTOPARK the vehicle into PARK.
during this period, please wait at least two AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
minutes for the starter to cool before placing the vehicle in PARK should the
repeating start procedure. situations on the following pages occur. It is a
(Continued) back up system and should not be relied upon
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns  Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
WARNING!
 Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
AutoPark will engage when all of these If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h),
conditions are met:  Driver’s door is ajar the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
 Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and  Brake pedal is not pressed (1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
an 8-speed transmission position can roll. As an added precaution,
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
 Vehicle is not in PARK Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument always apply the parking brake when exiting
cluster. the vehicle.
 Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
NOTE:
 Ignition switched from RUN to ACC 4WD LOW — If Equipped
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
NOTE: displayed in the instrument cluster, causing the AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, the “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear” vehicle in 4WD LOW.
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will message to not be seen. In these cases, the The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be
change to ACC mode. After 30 minutes the igni- gear selector must be returned to “P” to select displayed in the instrument cluster.
tion switches to OFF automatically, unless the desired gear.
Additional customer warnings will be given
driver turns the ignition switch OFF. If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the when all of these conditions are met:
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits vehicle may AutoPark.
 Vehicle is not in PARK
the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed
may AutoPark. is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.  Driver’s door is ajar
AutoPark will engage when all of these The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to  Vehicle is in 4WD LOW range
conditions are met: Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
 Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
an 8-speed transmission (1.9 km/h). chime will continue until you shift the vehicle
 Vehicle is not in PARK into PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle 3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
is in PARK by looking for the "P" in the fails to start, the starter will disengage engine will remain running. Never leave a
instrument cluster display and near the gear automatically after 10 seconds. vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could
selector. As an added precaution, always apply roll.
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle. 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push the NOTE:
TIP START F EATURE button again. If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the
Do not press the accelerator. Cycle the ignition ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
switch briefly to the START position and release To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/
with the vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h),
it. The starter motor will continue to run and will STOP Button
the engine will shut off and the ignition will
automatically disengage when the engine is remain in the ACC position. If vehicle speed 4
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
running. and release the ENGINE START/STOP drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the vehicle
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION button. The ignition will return to the OFF may AutoPark Ú page 141.
mode.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
ignition switch with the push of a button, as long 2. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
as the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go key ENGINE START/STOP button must be held NEUTRAL Position)
fob is in the passenger compartment. for two seconds or three short pushes in a The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
NORMAL STARTING USING ENGINE row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes:
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition
START/STOP B UTTON — GASOLINE ignition will remain in the ACC mode until modes without starting the vehicle and use the
ENGINE the gear selector is in PARK and the button accessories, follow these directions:
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE is pushed twice to the OFF mode.
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
START/STOP Button 3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
once with the vehicle speed above 5 mph to place the ignition to the ACC mode.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing (8 km/h), the instrument cluster will display
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a ignition button/key once the engine is running
second time to place the ignition to the RUN WARNING! (Continued) smoothly.
mode.  Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle If the engine shows no sign of starting after a
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an 10 second period of engine cranking with the
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
automatic transmission cannot be started accelerator pedal held to the floor, wait 10 to
third time to return the ignition to the OFF
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
mode. catalytic converter and once the engine has
procedure.
started, ignite and damage the converter
If Engine Fails To Start
and vehicle. NORMAL STARTING USING ENGINE
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the “Normal Starting” procedure, it  If the vehicle has a discharged battery, START/STOP B UTTON — D IESEL
may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all booster cables may be used to obtain a E NGINE
the way to the floor and hold it there while the start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be Observe the instrument panel telltales when
engine is cranking. This should clear any excess starting the engine.
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 386.
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
NOTE:
The starter motor will engage automatically, run
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this CAUTION!
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the To prevent damage to the starter, do not the accelerator pedal.
brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at
the “Normal Starting” procedure. a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
again. START/STOP Button
WARNING!
1. The transmission must be in PARK (P).
 Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid If the engine has been flooded, it may start to
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an run, but not have enough power to continue 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
attempt to start the vehicle. This could running when the ignition button/key is pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
result in flash fire causing serious personal released. If this occurs, continue cranking with once.
injury. the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the
(Continued) floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the
NOTE: To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/ the engine will shut off and the ignition will
A delay of the start, up to five seconds is STOP Button remain in the ACC position. If vehicle speed
possible under very cold conditions. The "Wait drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the vehicle
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
to Start" telltale will be illuminated during the may AutoPark Ú page 141.
and release the ENGINE START/STOP
pre-heat process. When the engine “Wait To
button. The ignition will return to the OFF ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Start” light goes off the engine will automati-
mode. Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
cally crank.
NEUTRAL Position)
2. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the
CAUTION! ENGINE START/STOP button must be held The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes:
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains
for two seconds or three short pushes in a 4
row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition
on, DO NOT START the engine before you modes without starting the vehicle and use the
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The
drain the water from the fuel filter to avoid accessories, follow these directions:
ignition will remain in the ACC mode until
engine damage Ú page 412.
the gear selector is in PARK and the button 1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle is pushed twice to the OFF mode.
fails to start, the starter will disengage 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the to place the ignition to the ACC mode.
automatically after 25 seconds. ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the once with the vehicle speed above 5 mph 3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
engine prior to the engine starting, push the (8 km/h), the instrument cluster will display second time to place the ignition to the RUN
button again. a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the mode.
engine will remain running. Never leave a
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
NOTE: vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could
third time to return the ignition to the OFF
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm roll.
mode.
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal. NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
with the vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h),
COLD WEATHER OPERATION (B ELOW WARNING! (Continued)

 Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.
–22°F O R −30°C)  Engine Oil Pressure telltale is not illuminated.
 When leaving the vehicle, always make
To ensure reliable starting at these sure the wireless ignition node is in the  Voltmeter operation:
temperatures, use of an externally powered “OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the
electric engine block heater (available from an vehicle and lock the vehicle. The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
authorized dealer) is recommended. various engine temperatures. This is caused by
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or the glow plug heating system. The number of
AFTER S TARTING with access to an unlocked vehicle. cycles and the length of the cycling operation is
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- controlled by the engine control module. Glow
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and
tended is dangerous for a number of plug heater operation can run for several
it will decrease as the engine warms up.
reasons. A child or others could be seriously minutes, once the heater operation is complete
STARTING FLUIDS — DIESEL E NGINE or fatally injured. Children should be the voltmeter needle will stabilize.
ONLY
brake pedal or the gear selector. COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS
The engine is equipped with a glow plug
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F
preheating system. If the instructions in this
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil- (0°C) may require special considerations. The
manual are followed, the engine should start in
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a following charts suggest these options:
all conditions and no type of starting fluid
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
should be used. in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
WARNING! move the vehicle.
 Do not leave children or animals inside
heat build up may cause serious injury or
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE
death. Observe the following when the diesel engine is
(Continued) operating.
 All message center lights are off.
Fuel Operating Range

NOTE:
Use “Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuels (ULSD)” ONLY.
Fuel Operating Range Chart

*Number 1 ULSD Fuel should only be used where extended arctic conditions below (0°F/-18°C) exist.
NOTE: Winter Front Cover Engine Warm-Up

 Use of Climatized ULSD Fuel or Number Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is
1 ULSD Fuel results in a noticeable decrease cold. When starting a cold engine, bring the
in fuel economy. engine up to operating speed slowly to allow the
oil pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up.
 Climatized ULSD Fuel is a blend of Number
2 ULSD and Number 1 ULSD Fuels which If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operate
reduces the temperature at which wax crys- the engine at moderate speeds for five minutes
tals form in fuel. before full loads are applied.
 The fuel grade should be clearly marked on ENGINE IDLING

the pump at the fuel station. Avoid prolonged idling, long periods of idling
Winter Front Cover
may be harmful to your engine because
 The engine requires the use of ULSD Fuel. A Winter front or cold weather cover can be
Use of incorrect fuel could result in engine combustion chamber temperatures can drop so
used in ambient temperatures below 32°F low that the fuel may not burn completely.
and exhaust system damage Ú page 471. (0°C), especially during extended idle Incomplete combustion allows carbon and
 If Climatized or diesel Number 1 ULSD Fuel is conditions. This cover is equipped with four varnish to form on piston rings, cylinder head
not available, and you are operating below flaps for managing total grille opening in varying valves, and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned
(20°F/-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions, ambient temperatures. If a Winter front or cold fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the oil
Mopar Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or weather cover is to be used the flaps should be and causing rapid wear to the engine.
equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling in the full open position to allow air flow to the
(see Fuel Operating Range Chart). cooling module and automatic transmission oil STOPPING THE ENGINE
cooler. When ambient temperatures drop below After full load operation, idle the engine for a
Engine Oil Usage 0°F (-17°C) the four flaps need to be closed. A few minutes before shutting it down. This idle
For the correct engine oil viscosity Ú page 475. suitable cold weather cover is available from a period will allow the lubricating oil and coolant
Mopar dealer. to carry excess heat away from the
turbocharger. Refer to the following chart for
proper engine shutdown.
Idle Time (min.) Before Engine

Driving Condition Load Turbocharger Temperature
Shutdown
Stop and Go Empty Cool None
Stop and Go Medium 0.5
Highway Speeds Medium Warm 1.0
City Traffic Maximum GCWR 1.5
Highway Speeds Maximum GCWR 2.0
Uphill Grade Maximum GCWR Hot 2.5 4
NOTE: NOTE: Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed
Under certain conditions the engine fan will run Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is Parts
after the engine is turned off. These conditions corrected. This light does not show how much All engine failures give some warning before the
are under high load and high temperature oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be parts fail. Some important observations are:
conditions. checked under the hood.
 Engine misfiring or vibrating severely
Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil
CAUTION!  Sudden loss of power
Pressure
If the low oil pressure warning light turns on If oil pressure falls to less than normal  Unusual engine noises
while driving, stop the vehicle and shut down readings, shut the engine off immediately.
Failure to do so could result in immediate and  Fuel, oil or coolant leaks
the engine as soon as possible. A chime will
sound when the light turns on. severe engine damage.  Sudden change, outside the normal operating
range, in the engine operating temperature
 Excessive smoke
 Oil pressure drop
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED To ensure reliable starting at these

temperatures, use of an externally powered
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
electric engine block heater (available from an to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
authorized dealer) is recommended. acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
The engine block heater cord is routed under should be avoided.
the hood on the passenger side of the vehicle The engine oil installed in the engine at the
next to the engine coolant reservoir. factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
WARNING! anticipated climate conditions under which
Remember to disconnect the engine block vehicle operations will occur. For the
heater cord before driving. Damage to the recommended viscosity and quality grades
Engine Block Heater Cord Location 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause Ú page 475.
The engine block heater warms engine coolant electrocution.
and permits quicker starts in cold weather. CAUTION!
Connect the heater cord to a ground-fault Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
interrupter protected 110–115 Volt AC ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire GASOLINE ENGINE result.
extension cord.
A long break-in period is not required for the NOTE:
For diesel engines, its use is recommended for engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in A new engine may consume some oil during its
environments that routinely fall below -10°F your vehicle. first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
(-23°C). It should be used when the vehicle has
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles tion. This should be considered a normal part of
not been running for long periods of time and
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
should be plugged in two hours prior to start. Its
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are Please check your oil level with the engine oil
use is required for cold starts with temperatures
desirable. indicator often during the break in period. Add
under -20°F (-28°C).
oil as required.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — anticipated climate conditions under which

vehicle operations will occur. For the
The parking brake switch is located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering
DIESEL ENGINE recommended viscosity and quality grades wheel (below the headlamp switch).
The diesel engine does not require a break-in Ú page 475.
period due to its construction. Normal operation NOTE:
is allowed, providing the following NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS
recommendations are followed: MUST NEVER BE USED.
 Warm up the engine before placing it under
load. PARKING BRAKE
4
 Do not operate the engine at idle for ELECTRIC P ARK B RAKE (EPB)
prolonged periods.
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers
 Observe vehicle oil pressure and tempera- simple operation, and some additional features Electric Park Brake Switch
ture indicators. that make the parking brake more convenient
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on
and useful.
 Check the coolant and oil levels frequently. the switch momentarily. You may hear a slight
The parking brake is primarily intended to sound from the back of the vehicle while the
 Vary throttle position at highway speeds prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked. parking brake engages. Once the park brake is
when carrying or towing significant weight. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the fully engaged, the BRAKE telltale light in the
NOTE: parking brake is applied. Also, be certain to instrument cluster and an indicator on the
Light duty operation such as light trailer towing leave the transmission in PARK. switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake
or no load operation will extend the time before You can engage the parking brake in two ways: pedal while you apply the parking brake, you
the engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel may notice a small amount of brake pedal
 Manually, by applying the parking brake movement. The parking brake can be applied
economy and power may be seen at this time.
switch. even when the ignition switch is OFF but the
The engine oil installed in the engine at the BRAKE telltale light will not illuminate, however,
 Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type it can only be released when the ignition is in
Brake feature in the customer programmable
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with the ON/RUN mode.
features section of the Uconnect settings.
NOTE: NOTE:
The EPB fault light will illuminate if the EPB When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the WARNING! (Continued)
switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in front wheels toward the curb on a downhill  Do not leave the key fob in or near the
either the released or applied position. The light grade and away from the curb on an uphill vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
will extinguish upon releasing the switch. grade. Apply the parking brake before placing dren, and do not leave a vehicle equipped
the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the RUN mode. A child could operate power
the transmission locking mechanism may make
parking brake will automatically engage windows, other controls, or move the
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
whenever the transmission is placed into PARK. vehicle.
If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice
a small amount of brake pedal movement while
WARNING!  Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
the parking brake is engaging.  Never use the PARK position as a substi- gaged before driving; failure to do so can
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the lead to brake failure and a collision.
The parking brake will release automatically
parking brake fully when parked to guard  Always fully apply the parking brake when
when the ignition is ON, the transmission is in
against vehicle movement and possible leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and
DRIVE or REVERSE, the driver seat belt is
injury or damage. cause damage or injury. Also be certain to
buckled, and an attempt is made to drive away.
 When exiting the vehicle, always remove leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to
To release the parking brake manually, the do so may allow the vehicle to roll and
the key fob from the ignition and lock your
ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN mode. cause damage or injury.
vehicle.
Put your foot on the brake pedal, then push the
parking brake switch down momentarily. You  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
may hear a slight whirring sound from the back with access to an unlocked vehicle. CAUTION!
of the vehicle while the parking brake Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
disengages. You may also notice a small tended is dangerous for a number of
with the parking brake released, a brake
amount of movement in the brake pedal. Once reasons. A child or others could be seriously
system malfunction is indicated. Have the
the parking brake is fully disengaged, The or fatally injured. Children should be
brake system serviced by an authorized
BRAKE telltale light in the instrument cluster warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector. dealer immediately.
and the LED indicator on the switch will
extinguish. (Continued)
If exceptional circumstances should make it In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB The parking brake will automatically engage if
necessary to engage the parking brake while system, a yellow EPB fault light will illuminate. all of the following conditions are met:
the vehicle is in motion, maintain upward This may be accompanied by the BRAKE telltale  The vehicle is at a standstill.
pressure on the EPB switch for as long as light flashing. In this event, urgent service of the
engagement is desired. The BRAKE telltale light EPB system is required. Do not rely on the  There is no attempt to press the brake pedal
will illuminate, and a continuous chime will parking brake to hold the vehicle stationary. and accelerator pedal.
sound. The rear stop lamps will also be
Auto Park Brake  The seat belt is unbuckled.
illuminated automatically while the vehicle
remains in motion. The Electric Park Brake (EPB) can be  The driver door is open.
programmed to be applied automatically
To disengage the parking brake while the SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by 4
whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and the
vehicle is in motion, release the switch. If the pushing the EPB switch while the driver door is
automatic transmission is placed in PARK. Auto
vehicle is brought to a complete stop using the open. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will
Park Brake is enabled and disabled by
parking brake, when the vehicle reaches be enabled again once the vehicle reaches
customer selection through the customer
approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is turned to
programmable features section of the Uconnect
brake will remain engaged. the OFF position and back to ON again.
Settings Ú page 245.
WARNING! Any single Auto Park Brake application can be Brake Service Mode
bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the We recommend having your brakes serviced by
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
release position while the transmission is an authorized dealer. You should only make
engaged, or repeated use of the parking
placed in PARK. repairs for which you have the knowledge and
brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious
damage to the brake system. Be sure the the right equipment. You should only enter
SafeHold
parking brake is fully disengaged before Brake Service Mode during brake service.
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake Brake (EPB) system that will engage the parking When servicing your rear brakes, it may be
failure and a collision. brake automatically if the vehicle is left necessary for you or your technician to push the
unsecured while the ignition is in ON/RUN. rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the
Electric Park Brake (EPB) system, this can only
be done after retracting the EPB actuator.
Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done

easily by entering the Brake Service Mode
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)
through the Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. You can be badly injured working on or  The transmission may not engage PARK if
This menu based system will guide you through around a motor vehicle. Do only that service the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator work for which you have the knowledge and vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
in order to perform rear brake service. the right equipment. If you have any doubt PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
about your ability to perform a service job, position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
Service Mode has requirements that must be
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
met in order to be activated:
completely stopped, and the PARK position
 The vehicle must be at a standstill. is properly indicated, before exiting the
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION vehicle.
 The parking brake must be unapplied.
You must press and hold the brake pedal while  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
 The transmission must be in PARK or shifting out of PARK. NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
NEUTRAL. idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
WARNING! the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
While in Service Mode, the EPB fault lamp will
flash continuously while the ignition is ON.  Never use the PARK position as a substi- erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the could lose control of the vehicle and hit
When brake service work is complete, the someone or something. Only shift into gear
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
following steps must be followed to reset the when the engine is idling normally and your
to guard against vehicle movement and
park brake system to normal operation: foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
possible injury or damage.
 Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill. (Continued)
 Your vehicle could move and injure you and
 Press the brake pedal with moderate force. others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
 Apply the EPB Switch. PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
(Continued)
the transmission in PARK. This system also

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) locks the transmission in PARK whenever the
 Unintended movement of a vehicle could  Do not leave the key fob in or near the ignition is in the OFF mode.
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
NOTE:
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when
while the engine is running. Before exiting a ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
vehicle, always come to a complete stop, operate power windows, other controls, or the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the
then apply the parking brake, shift the move the vehicle. engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni- is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode) before exiting the vehicle.
CAUTION! 4
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
securing the vehicle against unwanted  Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
movement. after the vehicle has come to a complete
I NTERLOCK SYSTEM
 When exiting the vehicle, always make sure stop. This vehicle is equipped with a Brake
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) system that
 Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
vehicle. above idle speed. unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or  Before shifting into any gear, make sure running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
with access to an unlocked vehicle. your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
tended is dangerous for a number of I GNITION PARK INTERLOCK from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
reasons. A child or others could be seriously vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
or fatally injured. Children should be This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
warned not to touch the parking brake, Interlock which requires the transmission to be
brake pedal or the transmission gear in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
selector. OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid
(Continued) inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
EIGHT-S PEED AUTOMATIC The electronically-controlled transmission

T RANSMISSION adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
The transmission is controlled using a rotary The transmission electronics are
electronic gear selector located on the self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on
instrument panel. The transmission gear range a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is
(PRND) is displayed both above the gear a normal condition, and precision shifts will
selector and in the instrument cluster. To select develop within a few hundred miles
a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector. (kilometers).
You must press the brake pedal to shift the
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE Electronic Transmission Gear Selector
transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds). Gear Ranges
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such Do not press the accelerator pedal when
the brake pedal when shifting between these
as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gears.
selector to the appropriate detent. Select the gear range.
DRIVE range for normal driving. The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. NOTE:
NOTE: Manual downshifts can be made using the After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
In the event of a mismatch between the gear Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control. to allow the selected gear to engage before
selector position and the actual transmission Pressing the GEAR-/GEAR+ switches (on the accelerating. This is especially important when
gear (for example, driver selects PARK while steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position will the engine is cold.
driving), the position indicator will blink continu- select the highest available transmission gear,
ously until the selector is returned to the proper PARK (P)
and will display that gear limit in the instrument
position, or the requested shift can be cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc Ú page 159. Some This range supplements the parking brake by
completed. models will display both the selected gear limit, locking the transmission. The engine can be
and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode. started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake

before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward  Your vehicle could move and injure you and  Unintended movement of a vehicle could
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
curb on an uphill grade. move the transmission gear selector out of all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make while the engine is running. Before exiting a
NOTE: sure the transmission is in PARK before vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the exiting the vehicle. then apply the parking brake, shift the
transfer case is in a drive position. transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
 The transmission may not engage PARK if
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
When exiting the vehicle, always: the vehicle is moving. Always bring the 4
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
 Apply the parking brake. securing the vehicle against unwanted
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
 Shift the transmission into PARK. position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) movement.
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is  When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
 Turn the engine off.
completely stopped, and the PARK position the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
 Remove the key fob from the vehicle. is properly indicated, before exiting the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle. vehicle.
WARNING!  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
 Never use the PARK position as a substi- NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than with access to an unlocked vehicle.
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel- tended is dangerous for a number of
to guard against vehicle movement and erate quickly forward or in reverse. You reasons. A child or others could be seriously
possible injury or damage. could lose control of the vehicle and hit or fatally injured. Children should be
someone or something. Only shift into gear warned not to touch the parking brake,
(Continued)
when the engine is idling normally and your brake pedal or the transmission gear
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. selector.
(Continued) (Continued)
 With brake pedal released, verify that the

WARNING! (Continued) gear selector will not move out of PARK. CAUTION!
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
REVERSE (R)
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil- other reason with the transmission in
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the This range is for moving the vehicle backward. NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has damage.
operate power windows, other controls, or come to a complete stop.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 231.
move the vehicle. NEUTRAL (N)
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 392.
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
CAUTION! prolonged periods with the engine running. DRIVE (D)
Apply the parking brake and shift the This range should be used for most city and
 DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, transmission into PARK if you must exit the highway driving. It provides the smoothest
as this can damage the drivetrain. vehicle. upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
 Before moving the transmission gear WARNING! upshifts through all forward gears.
selector out of PARK, you must start the
engine, and also press the brake pedal. Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off When frequent transmission shifting occurs
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector the ignition to coast down a hill. These are (such as when operating the vehicle under
could result. unsafe practices that limit your response to heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
changing traffic or road conditions. You might traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
The following indicators should be used to lose control of the vehicle and have a a heavy trailer), select TOW/HAUL mode or use
ensure that you have properly engaged the collision. the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
transmission into the PARK position: to select a lower gear range Ú page 159. Under
 Look at the transmission gear position these conditions, using a lower gear range will
display and verify that it indicates the PARK improve performance and extend transmission
position (P), and is not blinking. life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F In the event of a momentary problem, the NOTE:
[-30°C] or below), transmission operation may transmission can be reset to regain all forward Even if the transmission can be reset, we
be modified depending on engine and gears by performing the following steps: recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
transmission temperature as well as vehicle at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
NOTE:
speed. Normal operation will resume once the rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
In cases where the instrument cluster message
transmission temperature has risen to a assess the condition of your transmission. If the
indicates the transmission may not re-engage
suitable level. transmission cannot be reset, an authorized
after engine shutdown, perform this procedure
dealer service is required.
Transmission Limp Home Mode only in a desired location (preferably, at an
Transmission function is monitored authorized dealer). Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
4
electronically for abnormal conditions. If a 1. Stop the vehicle. The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
condition is detected that could result in allows the driver to limit the highest available
transmission damage, Transmission Limp 2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if gear when the transmission is in DRIVE and ERS
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the possible. If not, shift the transmission to mode is not active. For example, if you set the
transmission may operate only in certain gears, NEUTRAL. transmission gear limit to FOURTH gear, the
or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may transmission will not shift above FOURTH gear
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
be severely degraded and the engine may stall. (except to prevent engine overspeed), but will
engine turns off.
In some situations, the transmission may not shift through the lower gears normally.
re-engage if the engine is turned off and 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds. You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) at any vehicle speed. When the transmission
5. Restart the engine.
may be illuminated. A message in the gear selector is in DRIVE, the transmission will
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the operate automatically, shifting between all
more serious conditions, and indicate what problem is no longer detected, the available gears. Tapping the - button (on the
actions may be necessary. transmission will return to normal steering wheel) will activate ERS mode, display
operation. the current gear in the instrument cluster, and
set that gear as the top available gear. Once in
ERS mode, tapping the - or + button will change
the top available gear.
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate
Select TOW/HAUL mode when driving in in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/
conditions such as: driving in hilly areas, towing HAUL mode has been activated. Pushing the
a trailer, carrying a heavy load, etc. This mode switch a second time restores normal
will improve performance and reduce the operation. Normal operation is always the
potential for transmission overheating or failure default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is
due to excessive shifting. desired, the switch must be pushed each time
the engine is started.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) WARNING!

1 — Shift Up (+) Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when
2 — Shift Down (–) driving in icy or slippery conditions. The
increased engine braking can cause the rear
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the + wheels to slide, and the vehicle to swing
button until the gear limit display disappears around with the possible loss of vehicle con-
from the instrument cluster. trol, which may cause an accident possibly
resulting in personal injury or death.
WARNING! TOW/HAUL Switch
Do not downshift for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery surface. The drive wheels
could lose their grip and the vehicle could
skid, causing a collision or personal injury.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel
economy benefits as the front axle is not WARNING!
EQUIPPED engaged in 2WD.  You or others could be injured or killed if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the
FOUR-P OSITION E LECTRONICALLY  Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH) —
transfer case in the N (Neutral) position
S HIFTED TRANSFER CASE — I F This range provides torque to the front drive-
without first fully engaging the parking
shaft (engages four-wheel drive) which allows
EQUIPPED front and rear wheels to spin at the same
brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) posi-
tion disengages both the front and rear
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is speed. This provides additional traction for
drive shaft from the powertrain, and will
operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer loose or slippery road surfaces only.
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the trans-
Case Switch), located on the instrument panel. mission is in PARK. The parking brake
4
 Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW) —
This range provides low speed four-wheel should always be applied when the driver is
drive. It maximizes torque (increased torque not in the vehicle.
over 4WD HIGH) to the front driveshaft;  The transmission may not engage PARK if
allowing front and rear wheels to rotate at the the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
same speed. This range provides additional vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
traction and maximum pulling power for PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
loose or slippery road surfaces only. Do not position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in this range. without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
 N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the completely stopped, and the PARK position
front and rear driveshafts from the power- is properly indicated, before exiting the
Four-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case
train. To be used for flat towing behind vehicle.
This electronically shifted transfer case
another vehicle Ú page 231.
provides four mode positions:
 Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD) — This
range is for normal street and highway
driving on dry hard surfaced roads. Driving
NOTE: 3. When the shift is complete, the indicator

light for the selected position will stop
WARNING!
 The 4WD High and 4WD Low positions are
flashing and remain on. Always engage the parking brake when
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces
powering down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD
only. Driving in the 4WD High and 4WD Low If the transfer case does not shift into the Warning Light” is illuminated. Not engaging
positions on dry, hard surfaced roads may desired position, one or more of the following the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll
cause increased tire wear and damage to the events may occur: which may cause personal injury or death.
driveline components.
1. The indicator light for the current position
 The transfer case N (Neutral) button is located will remain on. NOTE:
in the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
pushed by using a ballpoint pen or similar 2. The newly selected position indicator light front or rear wheels are spinning. This could
object. The transfer case N (Neutral) position will continue to flash. cause damage to driveline components.
is to be used for recreational towing only
3. If the transfer case will not shift, a message When operating your vehicle in 4WD Low, the
Ú page 231.
will appear on the cluster stating the 4WD engine speed is approximately three times that
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights shift has canceled. of the 2WD or 4WD High positions at a given
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights NOTE: road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
(4WD High and 4WD Low) are located in the Before retrying a selection, make certain that all engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
instrument cluster and indicate the current and the necessary requirements for selecting a new Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
desired transfer case selection. When you transfer case position have been met. To retry depends on tires of equal size, type and
select a different transfer case position, the the selection, push the current position, wait circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
indicator lights will do the following: five seconds, and retry selection. tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.
1. The current position indicator light will turn The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the Because four-wheel drive provides improved
off. electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
light remains on after engine start up or turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
2. The selected position indicator light will
illuminates during driving, it means that the than road conditions permit.
flash until the transfer case completes the
four-wheel drive system is not functioning
shift.
properly and that service is required.
Shifting Procedure  Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH) —

 If any of the requirements to select a new This range provides torque to the front drive-
transfer case position have not been met, shaft (engages four-wheel drive) which allows
then the transfer case will not shift. The posi- front and rear wheels to spin at the same
tion indicator light for the previous position speed. This provides additional traction for
will remain on and the newly selected posi- loose or slippery road surfaces only.
tion indicator light will continue to flash until  Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW) —
all the requirements for the selected position This range provides low speed four-wheel
have been met. drive. It maximizes torque (increased torque
 If all the requirements to select a new Five-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case over 4WD HIGH) to the front driveshaft; 4
transfer case position have been met, then This electronically shifted transfer case allowing front and rear wheels to rotate at the
the current position indicator light will turn off provides five mode positions: same speed. This range provides additional
and the selected position indicator light will traction and maximum pulling power for
 Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD) — This
flash until the transfer case completes the loose or slippery road surfaces only. Do not
range is for normal street and highway
shift. When the shift is complete, the position exceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in this range.
driving on dry hard surfaced roads. Driving
indicator light for the selected position will the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel  N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the
stop flashing and remain on. economy benefits as the front axle is not front and rear driveshafts from the power-
engaged in 2WD. train. To be used for flat towing behind
FIVE-P OSITION ELECTRONICALLY another vehicle Ú page 231.
S HIFTED TRANSFER CASE — I F  Four-Wheel Drive Automatic High Range
(4WD AUTO) — This range sends power to the
EQUIPPED
front wheels automatically when the vehicle
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is senses a loss of traction. This range may be
operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer used during varying road conditions.
Case Switch), which is located on the
instrument panel.
positions on dry hard surfaced roads may If the transfer case does not shift into the
WARNING! cause increased tire wear and damage to the desired position, one or more of the following
 You or others could be injured or killed if driveline components. events may occur:
you leave the vehicle unattended with the
 The transfer case N (Neutral) button is 1. The indicator light for the current position
transfer case in the N (Neutral) position
located in the center of the 4WD Control will remain on.
without first fully engaging the parking
Switch and is pushed by using a ballpoint pen
brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) posi- 2. The newly selected position indicator light
or similar object. The transfer case N
tion disengages both the front and rear will continue to flash.
(Neutral) position is to be used for recre-
drive shaft from the powertrain, and will
ational towing only Ú page 231. 3. If the transfer case will not shift, there will
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the trans-
mission is in PARK. The parking brake Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights be a cluster message stating the 4WD shift
should always be applied when the driver is has canceled.
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
not in the vehicle.
(4WD High, 4WD Low, and 4WD Auto) are NOTE:
 The transmission may not engage PARK if located in the instrument cluster and indicate Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the the current and desired transfer case selection. the necessary requirements for selecting a new
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to When you select a different transfer case transfer case position have been met. To retry
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear position, the indicator lights will do the the selection, push the current position, wait
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) following: five seconds, and retry selection.
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position 1. The current position indicator light will turn The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the
is properly indicated, before exiting the off. electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this
vehicle. light remains on after engine start up or
2. The selected position indicator light will
illuminates during driving, it means that the
flash until the transfer case completes the
NOTE: four-wheel drive system is not functioning
shift.
properly and that service is required.
 The 4WD High and 4WD Low positions are 3. When the shift is complete, the indicator
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces light for the selected position will stop
only. Driving in the 4WD High and 4WD Low flashing and remain on.
Shifting Procedure
WARNING!
 If any of the requirements to select a new
Always engage the parking brake when transfer case position have not been met,
powering down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD then the transfer case will not shift. The posi-
Warning Light” is illuminated. Not engaging tion indicator light for the previous position
the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll will remain on and the newly selected posi-
which may cause personal injury or death. tion indicator light will continue to flash until
all the requirements for the selected position
NOTE: have been met.
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
 If all the requirements to select a new Air Suspension Switch 4
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could 1 — Off-Road 2 Indicator (Customer Selectable)
transfer case position have been met, then
cause damage to driveline components. the current position indicator light will turn off 2 — Off-Road 1 Indicator (Customer Selectable)
When operating your vehicle in 4WD Low, the and the selected position indicator light will 3 — Normal Ride Height Indicator (Customer Se-
engine speed is approximately three times that flash until the transfer case completes the lectable)
of the 2WD, 4WD Auto or 4WD High positions shift. When the shift is complete, the position 4 — Aero Mode Indicator (Customer Selectable)
at a given road speed. Take care not to indicator light for the selected position will 5 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator (Customer Select-
overspeed the engine and do not exceed stop flashing and remain on. able)
25 mph (40 km/h).
ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER AIR  Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the stan-
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles dard position of the suspension and is meant
depends on tires of equal size, type and SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED for normal driving.
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
DESCRIPTION  Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle
tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.
The air suspension system provides full time approximately 1 inch (26 mm)) – This posi-
Because four-wheel drive provides improved tion should be the primary position for all
load leveling capability along with the benefit of
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe off-road driving until Off-Road 2 (OR2) is
being able to adjust vehicle height by using the
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster needed. A smoother and more comfortable
toggle switch.
than road conditions permit. ride will result. To enter OR1, push the
height selector switch up once from the NRH  Speed thresholds for raising the vehicle only
position while the vehicle speed is below CAUTION! apply if Automatic Aero Mode is enabled.
35 mph (56 km/h). When in the OR1 posi- If the vehicle is in OFFROAD1 or OFFROAD2
To enter Aero Mode manually push the height
tion, if the vehicle speed remains between setting, be aware of your surroundings, you
40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) selector switch down once from NRH at any
may not have the clearance required for
for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle vehicle speed. To return to NRH push the
certain areas and vehicle damage may occur.
speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the height selector switch up once while vehicle
vehicle will be automatically lowered to  Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately speed is less than 56 mph (90 km/h).
NRH. Off-Road 1 may not be available due to 0.6 inch [15 mm]) – This position provides NOTE:
vehicle payload, an instrument cluster improved aerodynamics by lowering the Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through
message will be displayed when this occurs vehicle. The vehicle will automatically enter vehicle settings in the instrument cluster
Ú page 114. Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains display Ú page 114 or through your Uconnect
between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph Radio if equipped Ú page 237.
 Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approx- (106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if
imately 2 inches (51 mm)) – This position is the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h).  Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approxi-
intended for off-roading use only where The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode mately 2 inches (51 mm)) – This position
maximum ground clearance is required. To if the vehicle speed remains between 30 mph lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry
enter OR2, push the height selector switch up (48 km/h) and 35 mph (56 km/h) for greater and exit as well as lowering the rear of the
twice from the NRH position or once from the than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls vehicle for easier loading and unloading of
OR1 position while vehicle speed is below below 30 mph (48 km/h). cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the
20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR2, if the height selector switch down once from the
vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) NOTE:
NRH while the vehicle speed is below 33 mph
the vehicle height will be automatically (53 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes below
 The vehicle will automatically enter Aero
lowered to OR1. Off-Road 2 may not be avail- 15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height will
Mode when the vehicle speed remains
able due to vehicle payload, an instrument begin to lower. If the vehicle speed remains
between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph
cluster message will be displayed when this between 15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph
(106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or
occurs Ú page 114. (40 km/h) for greater than 60 seconds, or the
if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph
(106 km/h). vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the
Entry/Exit change will be canceled. To return
to Normal Height Mode, push the height This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern AIR SUSPENSION MODES
selector switch up once while in Entry/Exit or which keeps the headlights from incorrectly
drive the vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h). shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the The air suspension system has multiple modes
Entry/Exit mode may not be available due to vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first to protect the system in unique situations. The
vehicle payload, an instrument cluster and then the front. When lowering the vehicle, engine should be running to change between
message will be displayed when this occurs the front will move down first and then the rear. Air Suspension Modes.
Ú page 114. Automatic AERO Mode
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed
NOTE: that the air suspension system operates briefly; To improve aerodynamics, the air suspension
Entry/Exit mode may be achieved using your this is normal. The system is correcting the system has a feature which will put the vehicle
key fob for easier entry/loading Ú page 17. position of the vehicle to ensure a proper into AERO height automatically Ú page 114. 4
appearance. Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through
CAUTION! To assist with changing a spare tire, the air vehicle settings in the Uconnect Radio (if
When in ENTRY/EXIT setting, be aware of your suspension system has a feature which allows equipped) Ú page 237.
surroundings, you may not have the the automatic leveling to be disabled Tire Jack Mode
clearance required for certain areas and Ú page 114.
To assist with changing a tire, the air
vehicle damage may occur. NOTE: suspension system has a feature which allows
If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all the automatic leveling to be disabled
The system requires that the ignition be in the
enabling/disabling of air suspension features Ú page 237.
ON/RUN position or the engine running for all
must be done through the radio Ú page 237.
user requested changes. When lowering the Transport Mode
vehicle, all of the doors must be closed. If a door
WARNING! For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the
is opened at any time while the vehicle is
road, the air suspension system has a feature
lowering, the change will not be completed until The air suspension system uses a high which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit height
the open door(s) is closed. pressure volume of air to operate the system. and disable the automatic load leveling system
To avoid personal injury or damage to the Ú page 237.
system, see an authorized dealer for service.
Wheel Alignment Mode OPERATION height selector switch can be pushed up

Before performing a wheel alignment, this multiple times, each push will raise the
mode must be enabled Ú page 237. requested level by one position up to a
maximum position of OR2 or the highest
Protection Strategy position allowed based on current conditions
In order to “protect” the air suspension system, (i.e. vehicle speed, etc).
the vehicle will disable load leveling as required Pushing the height selector down once will
(suspension overloaded, battery charge low, move the suspension one position lower from
etc.). Load leveling will automatically resume as the current level, assuming all conditions are
soon as system operation requirements are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine
met. See an authorized dealer if system does running, doors closed, speed below threshold,
not resume. Air Suspension Switch etc). The height selector switch can be pushed
NOTE: The indicator lamps 1 through 5 will illuminate down multiple times, each push will lower the
For towing with air suspension Ú page 214. to show the current position of the vehicle. requested level by one position down to a
Flashing indicator lamps will show a position minimum of Entry/Exit Mode or the lowest
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ISPLAY which the system is working to achieve. When position allowed based on current conditions
MESSAGES raising, if multiple indicator lamps are flashing, (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)
the highest flashing indicator lamp is the Automatic height changes will occur based on
When the appropriate conditions exist, a position the system is working to achieve. When
message will appear in the instrument cluster vehicle speed and the current vehicle height.
lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing, the The indicator lamps and instrument cluster
display Ú page 114. lowest solid indicator lamp is the position the display messages will operate the same for
An audible chime will be heard whenever a system is working to achieve. automatic changes and user requested
system error has been detected. Pushing the height selector up once will move changes.
See an authorized dealer for system service if the suspension one position higher from the
normal operation does not resume. current position, assuming all conditions are
met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine
running, speed below threshold, etc). The
 Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 5, 4, 3,  Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be

2 and 1 will be illuminated when the vehicle illuminated. Transport Mode is disabled by
is in OR2. driving the vehicle.
 Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 5, 4,  Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 5 and 1 will
3 and 2 will be illuminated when the vehicle be illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by
is in OR1. driving the vehicle.
 Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps  Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 3,
5, 4 and 3 will be illuminated when the 4, and 5 will be illuminated. Wheel Alignment
vehicle is in this position. Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle. Rebel Air Suspension Controls 4
 Aero Mode – Indicator lamps 5 and 4 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in this posi-
ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER AIR 1 — Off-Road Indicator (Customer selectable)
2 — Normal Ride Height Indicator (Customer se-
tion. SUSPENSION SYSTEM (REBEL MODELS lectable)
 Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 5 will be ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED 3 — Aerodynamic Height Indicator (Customer Se-
lectable)
illuminated when the vehicle is in Entry Exit
Mode. Entry/Exit mode can be requested up DESCRIPTION 4 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator (Customer select-
able)
to 33 mph (53 km/h). If vehicle speed is The air suspension system provides full time
reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph load leveling capability along with the benefit of  Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the stan-
(24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will flash and being able to adjust vehicle height by using the dard position of the suspension and is meant
indicator lamp 5 will remain solid until toggle switch. for normal driving.
Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at which point
indicator lamp 4 will turn off.  Off-Road (OR) (Raises the vehicle approxi-
mately 1 inch (26 mm)) – This position is
intended for off-roading use only where
maximum ground clearance is required. To
enter OR, push the height selector switch up
once from the NRH position while vehicle
speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While in
OR, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph NOTE: below 15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height
(40 km/h) the vehicle height will be automat- will begin to lower. If the vehicle speed
ically lowered to NRH. Off-Road may not be  The vehicle will automatically enter Aero remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and
available due to vehicle payload, an instru- Mode when the vehicle speed remains 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than
ment cluster display message will be shown between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph 60 seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds
when this occurs Ú page 114. (106 km/h) for greater than 25 mph (40 km/h) the Entry/Exit change will
20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds be canceled. To return to Normal Height
66 mph (106 km/h). Mode, push the height selector switch up
CAUTION!
 Speed thresholds for raising the vehicle only twice while in Entry/Exit or drive the vehicle
If the vehicle is in Off-Road setting, be aware over 15 mph (24 km/h). Entry/Exit mode
apply if Automatic Aero Mode is enabled.
of your surroundings, you may not have the may not be available due to vehicle payload,
clearance required for certain areas and  To enter Aero Mode manually push the height an instrument cluster display message will
vehicle damage may occur. selector switch down once from NRH at any be shown when this occurs Ú page 114.
vehicle speed. To return to NRH push the
 Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approxi- height selector switch up once while vehicle
mately 0.6 inches (15 mm)) – This position CAUTION!
speed is less than 56 mph (90 km/h).
provides improved aerodynamics by When in ENTRY/EXIT setting, be aware of your
lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will auto-  Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled surroundings, you may not have the
matically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle through vehicle settings on your Uconnect clearance required for certain areas and
speed remains between 62 mph (100 km/h) Radio. vehicle damage may occur.
and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than  Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approxi-
20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds mately 3 inches (73 mm)) – This position The system requires that the ignition be in the
66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will return lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry ON/RUN position or the engine running for all
to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed and exit as well as lowering the rear of the user requested changes. When lowering the
remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and vehicle for easier loading and unloading of vehicle, all of the doors must be closed. If a door
35 mph (56 km/h) for greater than cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the is opened at any time while the vehicle is
20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls height selector switch down twice from the lowering, the change will not be completed until
below 30 mph (48 km/h). NRH while the vehicle speed is below 33 mph the open door(s) is closed.
(53 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes
This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern AIR SUSPENSION MODES Protection Strategy
which keeps the headlights from incorrectly In order to “protect” the air suspension system,
shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the The Air Suspension system has multiple modes
to protect the system in unique situations: the vehicle will disable load leveling as required
vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first (suspension overloaded, battery charge low,
and then the front. When lowering the vehicle, AERO Mode etc.). Load leveling will automatically resume as
the front will move down first and then the rear. To improve aerodynamics, the air suspension soon as system operation requirements are
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed system has a feature which will put the vehicle met. See an authorized dealer if system does
that the air suspension system operates briefly; into AERO height automatically Ú page 114. not resume.
this is normal. The system is correcting the Tire Jack Mode NOTE:
position of the vehicle to ensure a proper 4
To assist with changing a tire, the air For towing with air suspension Ú page 214.
appearance.
suspension system has a feature which allows
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air the automatic leveling to be disabled
I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER D ISPLAY
suspension system has a feature which allows Ú page 237. MESSAGES
the automatic leveling to be disabled
Ú page 237. Transport Mode When the appropriate conditions exist, a
message will appear in the instrument cluster
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the
NOTE: display Ú page 114.
road, the air suspension system has a feature
If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all
which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit height An audible chime will be heard whenever a
enabling/disabling of air suspension features
and disable the automatic load leveling system system error has been detected.
must be done through the radio Ú page 237.
Ú page 237. See an authorized dealer for system service if
WARNING! Wheel Alignment Mode normal operation does not resume.
The air suspension system uses a high Before performing a wheel alignment, this
pressure volume of air to operate the system. mode must be enabled Ú page 237.
To avoid personal injury or damage to the
system, see an authorized dealer for service.
OPERATION maximum position of OR or the highest position  Aero Mode – Indicator lamps 4 and 3 will be
allowed based on current conditions (i.e. illuminated when the vehicle is in this posi-
vehicle speed, etc). tion.
Pushing the height selector switch down once  Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 4 will be
will move the suspension one position lower illuminated when the vehicle is in Entry Exit
from the current level, assuming all conditions Mode. Entry/Exit mode can be requested up
are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine to 33 mph (53 km/h). If vehicle speed is
running, doors closed, speed below threshold, reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph
etc). The height selector switch can be pushed (24 km/h) indicator lamp 3 will flash and
down multiple times, each push will lower the indicator lamp 4 will remain solid until
requested level by one position down to a Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at which point
Air Suspension Switch minimum of Entry/Exit Mode or the lowest indicator lamp 3 will turn off.
The indicator lamps 1 through 4 will illuminate position allowed based on current conditions
 Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be
to show the current position of the vehicle. (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)
illuminated. Transport Mode is disabled by
Flashing indicator lamps will show a position Automatic height changes will occur based on driving the vehicle.
which the system is working to achieve. When vehicle speed and the current vehicle height.
raising or lowering, the flashing indicator lamp The indicator lamps and instrument cluster  Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 4 and 1 will
is the position the system is working to achieve. be illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by
display messages will operate the same for
driving the vehicle.
Pushing the height selector switch up once will automatic changes and user requested
move the suspension one position higher from changes.  Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 2,
the current position, assuming all conditions  Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 4, 3, 2, 3, and 4 will be illuminated. Wheel Alignment
are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine and 1 will be illuminated when the vehicle is Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.
running, speed below threshold, etc). The in OR1.
height selector switch can be pushed up
multiple times, each push will raise the  Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps
requested level by one position up to a 4, 3, and 2 will be illuminated when the
vehicle is in this position.
AXLE LOCK SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED CAUTION!

Operating the locker in 2WD, 4WD AUTO, and
4WD LOCK/HIGH, the locker can be engaged up
This vehicle is equipped with an electronically  Do not lock the rear axle on hard surfaced to 20 mph (32 km/h). While driving with the
locking rear differential. When engaged, this roads. The ability to steer the vehicle is locker engaged, if speed exceeds 25 mph
differential locks the axle shafts forcing the reduced and damage to the drivetrain may (40 km/h), the locker will automatically
wheels to spin at an equal rate. The locking of occur when the axle is locked on hard disengage, but will automatically reengage at
the rear differential should only be engaged surfaced roads. 20 mph (32 km/h).
during low-speed, extreme off-road situations
 Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle NOTE:
where one wheel is likely to not be in contact
is stuck and the tires are spinning. You can Left to right wheel speed difference may be
with the ground. It is not recommended to drive
the vehicle with the differentials locked on
damage drivetrain components. Lock the necessary to allow the rear axle to fully lock. If 4
rear axle before attempting situations or the indicator light is flashing after selecting the
pavement due to the reduced ability to turn and
navigating terrain, which could possibly rear axle lock mode, drive the vehicle in a turn
speed limitations.
cause the vehicle to become stuck. or on loose gravel to expedite the locking action.
The locking rear axle is controlled by the AXLE The axle locker could become torque locked
LOCK button. due to side to side loads on the rear axle.
Under normal driving conditions, the rear axle Driving slowly while turning the steering wheel
should be unlocked. from a left hand turn to a right hand turn or
driving in REVERSE for a short distance may be
During the command to lock the rear axle, the required to release the torque lock and unlock
indicator light will flash until the axle is locked. the axles.
After the lock command has been successfully
executed, the light will remain on solid. To unlock the rear axle; push the AXLE LOCK
Axle Lock Button button. The AXLE LOCK indicator light will go out
Operating in 4WD LOW the locker can be
when the rear axle is unlocked.
engaged up to 40 mph (64 km/h) and will
remain engaged throughout the 4WD LOW
speed range.
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL — IF WARNING!

If the steering icon is displayed and the “POWER
STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is
EQUIPPED When servicing vehicles equipped with a displayed on the instrument cluster screen, this
The limited-slip differential provides additional limited-slip or locking differential never run indicates an over temperature condition in the
traction on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, the engine with one rear wheel off the ground power steering system. Once driving conditions
particularly when there is a difference between since the vehicle may drive through the rear are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a
the traction characteristics of the surface under wheel remaining on the ground and result in few moments until the icon and message turn
the right and left rear wheels. During normal unintended movement. off Ú page 114.
driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit If the steering icon is displayed and the
performs similarly to a conventional differential. Care should be taken to avoid sudden “SERVICE POWER STEERING – ASSIST OFF”
On slippery surfaces, however, the differential accelerations when both rear wheels are on a message is displayed the instrument cluster
delivers more of the driving effort to the rear slippery surface. This could cause both rear screen, this indicates the vehicle needs to be
wheel having the better traction. wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide taken to the dealer for service Ú page 114.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in
a turn. NOTE:
during slippery driving conditions. With both
Even if the power steering assistance is no
rear wheels on a slippery surface, a slight
application of the accelerator will supply
POWER STEERING 
longer operational, it is still possible to steer
maximum traction. When starting with only one ELECTRIC P OWER STEERING the vehicle. Under these conditions there will
rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, be a substantial increase in steering effort,
slight momentary application of the parking The electric power steering system will provide especially at low speeds and during parking
brake may be necessary to gain maximum increased vehicle response and ease of maneuvers.
traction. maneuverability. The power steering system
adapts to different driving conditions.  If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
If the steering icon is flashing, it indicates that
the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power
steering assistance.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINES AUTOSTOP MODE POSSIBLE R EASONS T HE E NGINE D OES
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every N OT AUTOSTOP
normal customer engine start. It will remain in Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
This feature offers improved fuel economy by STOP/START NOT READY until you drive
shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders many safety and comfort conditions to see if
forward with a vehicle speed greater than they are fulfilled. In following situations, the
during light load and cruise conditions. The 2 mph (3 km/h). At that time, the system will
system is automatic with no driver inputs or engine will not Autostop:
go into STOP/START READY.
additional driving skills required.  Driver’s seat belt is not buckled
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
NOTE: Must Occur:  Driver’s door is not closed
This system may take some time to return to full
4
1. The system must be in STOP/START READY  The vehicle is on a steep grade
functionality after a battery disconnect.
state. A STOP/START READY message will  Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED be displayed in the instrument cluster acceptable cabin temperature has not been
within the Stop/Start section Ú page 114. achieved
The Stop/Start function is developed to save
fuel and reduce emissions. The system will stop 2. The vehicle must be completely stopped.  HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if blower speed
the required conditions are met. Releasing the 3. The transmission gear selector must be in
brake pedal or shifting out of DRIVE will DRIVE and the brake pedal pressed.  Engine has not reached normal operating
automatically restart the engine. temperature
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
Vehicles equipped with eTorque contain a move to the zero position and the stop/start  Engine temperature too high
heavy duty motor generator and an additional telltale will illuminate indicating you are in an
 The battery is charging
hybrid electric battery to store energy from Autostop. While in an Autostop, the Climate
vehicle deceleration for use on engine startup Controls system may automatically adjust  The transmission is not in DRIVE
after a stop as well as providing launch torque airflow to maintain cabin comfort. Customer
assist. settings will be maintained upon return to an  Hood is open
engine running condition.  Transfer case is in 4WD LOW
 TOW/HAUL mode is selected  Transfer case is in 4WD LOW TO MANUALLY TURN OFF T HE S TOP
 Accelerator pedal input  The emissions system override is present S TART S YSTEM
 Excessive 12 Volt loads  A Stop/Start system error present
It may be possible to operate the vehicle several Conditions That Force An Automatic Shift To
consecutive times in extreme conditions and Park While In Autostop Mode
not meet all criteria to enable an Autostop state. The engine will not start automatically and the
TO START T HE E NGINE WHILE IN transmission will be placed in PARK if:
AUTOSTOP MODE  The driver door is open and brake pedal
released
While in DRIVE, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is  The driver door is open and the driver seat
Stop/Start OFF Switch
pressed and the transmission will automatically belt is unbuckled
reengage upon engine restart. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
 The engine hood has been opened switch bank). The light on the switch will
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start illuminate. The “STOP/START OFF” message
Automatically While In Autostop Mode  A Stop/Start system error present
will appear in the instrument cluster display and
The engine will start automatically when: The engine may then be restarted by moving the the autostop mode will be disabled
transmission shift selector out of PARK (e.g. to Ú page 114.
 The transmission selector is moved from
DRIVE) or, in some cases, only by a KEY START.
DRIVE to REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or PARK NOTE:
The instrument cluster will display a SHIFT OUT
 To maintain cabin temperature near the OF PARK message, or a STOP/START KEY The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to
HVAC settings START REQUIRED message, to indicate which the ON mode every time the ignition is turned
action is required Ú page 114. OFF and back ON.
 HVAC is set to full defrost mode
 12 Volt demand requires engine restart
 Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP NOTE: 4 — RES/Resume

S TART S YSTEM In vehicles equipped with ACC, if an ACC 5 — SET (-)/Decel
distance is not set, Fixed Speed Cruise Control
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. NOTE:
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn Always be aware of the mode selected. In order to ensure proper operation, the Cruise
off. Control system has been designed to shut down
CRUISE C ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED if multiple Cruise Control functions are operated
SYSTEM M ALFUNCTION at the same time. If this occurs, the Cruise
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start accelerator operations at speeds greater than Control system can be reactivated by pushing
system, the system will not shut down the the Cruise Control on/off button and resetting
20 mph (32 km/h). 4
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” the desired vehicle set speed.
message will appear in the instrument cluster The Cruise Control buttons are located on the
display Ú page 126. right side of the steering wheel.
WARNING!
The system will need to be checked by an Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
authorized dealer. system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED conditions, and you could lose control and
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
(ACC) system: icy, snow-covered or slippery.
 Cruise Control for cruising at a constant
preset speed. To Activate
Cruise Control Buttons Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) for maintaining 1 — CANC/Cancel
a set distance between you and the vehicle Control. The cruise indicator light in the
2 — SET (+)/Accel instrument cluster display will illuminate. To
ahead using Fixed Speed Cruise Control to
3 — On/Off turn the system off, push the on/off button a
automatically adjust the preset speed.
second time. The cruise indicator light will turn To Vary The Speed Setting To Accelerate For Passing
off. The system should be turned off when not in To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed While the Cruise Control is set, press the
use. accelerator to pass as you would normally.
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
WARNING! return to the set speed.
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when
U.S. Speed (mph) Using Cruise Control On Hills
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once The transmission may downshift on hills to
faster than you want. You could lose control will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each maintain the vehicle set speed.
and have an accident. Always ensure the subsequent tap of the button results in an
NOTE:
system is off when you are not using it. adjustment of 1 mph.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up
 If the button is continually pushed, the set and down hills. A slight speed change on
To Set A Desired Speed speed will continue to adjust until the button moderate hills is normal.
Turn the Cruise Control on. is released, then the new set speed will be
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
established.
When the vehicle has reached the desired occur so it may be preferable to drive without
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and Metric Speed (km/h) Cruise Control.
release. Release the accelerator and the
 Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. WARNING!
NOTE: Each subsequent tap of the button results in Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady an adjustment of 1 km/h. system cannot maintain a constant speed.
speed and on level ground before pushing the Your vehicle could go too fast for the
 If the button is continually pushed, the set
SET (+) or SET (-) button. conditions, and you could lose control and
speed will continue to adjust until the button
have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
is released, then the new set speed will be
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
established.
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
To Resume Speed ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — I F  Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the perfor-
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES EQUIPPED
button and release. Resume can be used at any mance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the Forward Collision Warning system.
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
driving convenience provided by Cruise Control
 Fixed Speed Cruise Control alone (an ACC
To Deactivate while traveling on highways and major
roadways. However, it is not a safety system distance not set) will not detect vehicles
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the
(cancel) button, or normal brake pressure while and not designed to prevent collisions. The
mode selected.
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Cruise Cruise Control function performs differently
Ú page 177.
Control system without erasing the set speed WARNING! 4
from memory. ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control
engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions  Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
The following conditions will also deactivate the
without the constant need to reset your speed. nience system. It is not a substitute for
Cruise Control system without erasing the set active driver involvement. It is always the
speed from memory: ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing
camera designed to detect a vehicle directly driver’s responsibility to be attentive of
 Vehicle parking brake is applied ahead of you to maintain a set speed. road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
 Stability event occurs NOTE: ahead; and, most importantly, brake opera-
 Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE tion to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
 If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, under all road conditions. Your complete
 Engine overspeed occurs ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration attention is always required while driving to
(not to exceed the original set speed) auto- maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition matically to maintain a preset following
in the OFF position, erases the set speed from Failure to follow these warnings can result
distance, while matching the speed of the in a collision and death or serious personal
memory. vehicle ahead. injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

 The ACC system: You should switch off the ACC system:
 Does not react to pedestrians,  When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
oncoming vehicles, and stationary snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a driving situations (i.e., in highway construc-
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). tion zones).
 Cannot take street, traffic, and weather  When entering a turn lane or highway off
conditions into account, and may be ramp; when driving on roads that are
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
limited upon adverse sight distance winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
conditions. have steep uphill or downhill slopes. 1 — Distance Setting Increase
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
 Does not always fully recognize  When towing a trailer up or down steep
3 — Distance Setting Decrease
complex driving conditions, which can slopes.
result in wrong or missing distance  When circumstances do not allow safe Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
warnings. driving at a constant speed. The instrument cluster display will show the
 Will bring your vehicle to a complete current ACC system settings. The information it
stop while following a vehicle ahead Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation displays depends on ACC system status.
and hold your vehicle for approximately The buttons on the right side of the steering Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
three minutes in the stop position. If the wheel operate the Adaptive Cruise Control button until one of the following appears in the
vehicle ahead does not start moving system. instrument cluster display:
within three minutes the parking brake
will be activated, and the ACC system Adaptive Cruise Control Off
will be cancelled. When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
(Continued) “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)  When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is low speeds
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will 20 mph (32 km/h).  When there is a stationary vehicle in front of
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.” When the system is turned on and in the ready your vehicle in close proximity
Adaptive Cruise Control Set state, the instrument cluster display will read  ESC Full Off mode is active
“ACC Ready.”
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is
When the system is off, the instrument cluster To Activate/Deactivate
pushed, the display will read “ACC SET.”
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the (ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
Off.” 4
instrument cluster display. instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
The ACC screen may display once again if any of NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following To turn the system off, push and release the
the following ACC activity occurs: Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
conditions:
 System Cancel again. At this time, the system will turn off and
 When in 4WD Low the instrument cluster display will show
 Driver Override
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
 When the brakes are applied
 System Off
 When the parking brake is applied WARNING!
 ACC Proximity Warning
 When the automatic transmission is in PARK, Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
 ACC Unavailable Warning REVERSE or NEUTRAL system on when not in use is dangerous. You
The instrument cluster display will return to the could accidentally set the system or cause it
 When the vehicle speed is below the to go faster than you want. You could lose
last display selected after five seconds of no minimum speed range
ACC display activity. control and have a collision. Always leave the
 When the brakes are overheated system off when you are not using it.
 When the driver’s door is open at low speeds

To Set A Desired ACC Speed If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below To Cancel
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button 20 mph (20 km/h). Speed Cruise Control systems:
and release. The instrument cluster display will NOTE:  The brake pedal is applied
show the set speed. Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).  The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without If either system is set when the vehicle speed is  The Anti-Lock Brake system (ABS) activates
an ACC distance set. To change between the above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall  The trailer brake is applied manually (if
different modes, push the ACC on/off button be the current speed of the vehicle. equipped)
which turns the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise NOTE:  The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
Control on/off button will result in turning on position
 Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal
(changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
can cause the vehicle to continue to accel-  The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the Control System (ESC/TCS) activates
WARNING! message “ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE” will
display in the instrument cluster display.  The vehicle parking brake is applied
In the Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the
system will not react to vehicles ahead. In  If you continue to accelerate beyond the set  The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
addition, the proximity warning does not speed while an ACC distance is also set, the  The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
activate and no alarm will sound even if you system will not be controlling the distance
are too close to the vehicle ahead since between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.  The braking temperature exceeds normal
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor The vehicle speed will only be determined by range (overheated)
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be the position of the accelerator pedal.
sure to maintain a safe distance between The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be system:
aware which mode is selected.  Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
 Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off NOTE: U.S. Speed (mph)

The system will turn off and clear the set speed  While in ACC mode when the vehicle comes  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
in memory if: to a complete stop longer than two seconds, will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
 The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off the system will cancel. The driver will have to subsequent tap of the button results in an
button is pushed apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a adjustment of 1 mph.
standstill.  If the button is continually pushed, the set
 The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed  ACC cannot be resumed if there is a speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in ments until the button is released. The new
 The ignition is placed in the OFF position close proximity. set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
4
 4WD Low is engaged
WARNING! Metric Speed (km/h)
To Resume
The Resume function should only be used if  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
(resume) button and then remove your foot
a set speed that is too high or too low for Each subsequent tap of the button results in
from the accelerator pedal. The instrument
prevailing traffic and road conditions could an adjustment of 1 km/h.
cluster display will display the last set speed.
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
Resume can be used at any speed above too sharply for safe operation. Failure to  If the button is continually pushed, the set
20 mph (32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed follow these warnings can result in a collision speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h
Cruise Control is being used. and death or serious personal injury. increments until the button is released. The
new set speed is reflected in the instrument
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph cluster display.
(0 km/h) when ACC is active. To Vary The Speed Setting
NOTE:
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When you override and push the SET (+) button
After setting a speed, you can increase the set or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed will be the
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or current speed of the vehicle.
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
When An ACC Distance Is Also Set: Setting The Following Distance In ACC To increase the distance setting, push the
 When you use the SET (-) button to decel- The specified following distance for Adaptive Distance Increase button and release. Each
erate, if the engine’s braking power does not Cruise Control (ACC) can be set by varying the time the button is pushed, the distance setting
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set distance setting between four bars (longest), increases by one bar (longer).
speed, the brake system will automatically three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one To decrease the distance setting, push the
slow the vehicle. bar (short). Using this distance setting and the Distance Decrease button and release. Each
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the time the button is pushed, the distance setting
 The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a
distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance decreases by one bar (shorter).
full stop when following the vehicle in front. If
setting displays in the instrument cluster
your vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
display.
standstill, after two seconds the driver will maintain the set speed. If a slower moving
either have to push the RES (resume) button, vehicle is detected in the same lane, the
or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage instrument cluster displays the ACC Set With
the ACC to the existing set speed. Target Detected Indicator Light, and the system
adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain
 The ACC system maintains set speed when
the distance setting, regardless of the set
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed.
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
climbing uphill or descending downhill. This until:
is normal operation and necessary to main- Distance Settings  The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
tain set speed. When driving uphill and down- 1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars) above the set speed.
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking 2 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
temperature exceeds normal range (over- 3 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)  The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
heated). view of the sensor.
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
 The distance setting is changed.
 The system disengages.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; This additional acceleration is triggered when
however, the driver can always apply the brakes the driver utilizes the left turn signal and will
WARNING!
manually, if necessary. only be active when passing on the left hand When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
side. must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
NOTE:
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC Operation At Stop Failure to follow these warnings can result in
ACC system applies the brakes. If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a a collision and death or serious personal
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC standstill while following the vehicle in front, injury.
predicts that its maximum braking level is not your vehicle will resume motion without any
diver intervention if the vehicle in front starts
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this Display Warnings And Maintenance 4
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the moving within two seconds.
instrument cluster display and a chime will If the vehicle in front does not start moving “Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
sound while ACC continues to apply its within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a Warning
maximum braking capacity. standstill, the driver will either have to push the The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator Sensor” warning will display and also a chime
NOTE:
pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set will indicate when conditions temporarily limit
The “BRAKE!” Screen in the instrument cluster
speed. system performance.
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the NOTE: This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
Forward Collision Warning system is applying After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
the brakes autonomously. standstill for approximately three consecutive may also become temporarily blinded due to
minutes, the parking brake will be activated, obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
Overtake Aid cases, the instrument cluster display will display
and the ACC system will be cancelled.
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
engaged, and following a vehicle, the system While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, Sensor” and the system will deactivate.
will provide an additional acceleration up to the if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver
door is opened, the parking brake will be The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.
activated, and the ACC system will be cancelled. Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice
and snow, or tunnels with reflective tiles). The  Do not attach or install any accessories near “Clean Front Windshield” Warning
ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left the sensor, including transparent material. The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the Doing so could cause an ACC system failure Front Windshield” warning will display and also
radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in or malfunction. a chime will indicate when conditions
its path this warning may temporarily occur. temporarily limit system performance. This
When the condition that deactivated the system
NOTE: is no longer present, the system will return to most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise resume function by simply reactivating it. system may also become temporarily blinded
Control is still available. due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on
NOTE: windshield, driving directly into the sun and fog
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver on the inside of glass. In these cases, the
 If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
should examine the sensor. It may require instrument cluster display will show “ACC/FCW
Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without
sensor is located in the camera in the center of and the system will have degraded
any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
the windshield, on the forward side of the have the radar sensor realigned at an autho- performance.
rearview mirror. rized dealer. This message can sometimes be displayed
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is while driving in adverse weather conditions. The
 Installing a snow plow, front-end protector,
important to note the following maintenance ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle
an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is
items: has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
not recommended. Doing so may block the
 Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully clear sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation. when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
the windshield. objects in its path this warning may temporarily
occur.
 Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system
malfunction or failure and require a sensor
realignment.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver Precautions While Driving With ACC Offset Driving
should examine the windshield and the camera ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
located on the back side of the inside rear view NOTE:
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of  Aftermarket add-ons such as snow plows, lift vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
an obstruction. kits, and brush/grille bars can hinder module not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
When the condition that created limited performance. Ensure the radar/camera has The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
functionality is no longer present, the system no obstructions in the field of view. line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
will return to full functionality. brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
 Height modifications can limit module perfor-
NOTE: mance and functionality.
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean 4
 Do not put stickers or easy passes over the
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently
camera/radar field of view.
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the  Any modifications to the vehicle that may
windshield and forward facing camera obstruct the field of view of the radar/camera
inspected at an authorized dealer. are not recommended.
Service ACC/FCW Warning In certain driving situations, ACC may have

detection issues. In these cases, ACC may
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to Offset Driving Condition Example
Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service stay alert and may need to intervene. The
following are examples of these types of Turns And Bends
Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC situations: When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
functionality. Although the vehicle is still system may decrease the vehicle speed and
Towing A Trailer acceleration for stability reasons, with no
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try ACC while towing a trailer is recommended only vehicle in front detected. Once the vehicle is out
activating ACC again later, following an ignition with an Integrated Trailer Brake Controller. of the curve the system will resume your original
cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized Aftermarket trailer brake controllers will not set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
dealer. activate the trailer brakes when ACC is braking. functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
ACC Hill Example Lane Changing Example
Lane Changing Narrow Vehicles

Turn Or Bend Example ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
completely in the lane in which you are edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
Using ACC On Hills
traveling. In the lane changing example below, detected until they have moved fully into the
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed, lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's vehicle ahead.
vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC
steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in
limited. the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to
the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example

Stationary Objects And Vehicles maneuver). If your vehicle is equipped with the  The automatic braking function may not be
ACC does not react to stationary objects and automatic braking function, the vehicle brakes applied fast enough for obstacles that move
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not may be automatically applied and released toward the rear of the vehicle from the left
react in situations where the vehicle you are when the vehicle is in REVERSE if the system and/or right sides.
following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead detects a possible collision with an obstacle.
 The automatic braking function can be
is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and NOTE: enabled/disabled from the Customer
ready to apply the brakes if necessary Programmable Features section of the
Ú page 482.  The driver can disable the automatic braking Uconnect system.
function by turning ParkSense off via the
ParkSense switch. The driver can also over-  ParkSense will retain its last known configu- 4
ride automatic braking by changing the gear ration state for the automatic braking func-
or by pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its tion through ignition cycles.
capacity during the braking event.
 Trailer hitch ball assembly may cause false
 Automatic brakes will not be available if the braking events if left attached after towing.
vehicle is in 4WD Low.
The automatic braking function is intended to
 Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions
is not available. with detected obstacles when backing up in
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example REVERSE gear.
 Automatic brakes will not be available if there
is a faulted condition detected with the Park- NOTE:
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST Sense Park Assist system or the Braking
The system is provided to assist the driver
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED System.

and not to substitute the driver.
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides  The automatic braking function may only be
visual and audible indications of the distance  The driver must stay in full control of the
applied if the vehicle deceleration is not
between the rear and/or front fascia/bumper vehicle's acceleration and braking and is
enough to avoid colliding with a detected
and a detected obstacle when backing up or responsible for the vehicle's movements.
obstacle.
moving forward (e.g. during a parking
For limitations of this system and usage PARKSENSE SENSORS PARKSENSE DISPLAY
precautions, see Ú page 194.
The four ParkSense sensors (six if equipped The warning display will turn on indicating the
ParkSense will retain the last system state with Active Parksense), located in the front system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view, has been detected.
position. and the four ParkSense sensors, located in the The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
ParkSense can be active only when the gear rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind showing a single arc in the left, right, or center
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of regions based on the obstacle’s distance and
enabled while in one of these gears, the system view. The front sensors can detect obstacles location relative to the vehicle.
will remain active until the vehicle speed is from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or 47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/ If an obstacle is detected in the left, right, or
above. A warning will appear in the instrument bumper. The rear sensors can detect obstacles center regions, the display will show a single arc
cluster display indicating the vehicle is above from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to in the left and/or right regions and the system
ParkSense operating speed. The system will 79 inches (200 cm). These distances depend will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer
become active again if the vehicle speed is on the location, type and orientation of the to the obstacle, the display will show the single
decreased to speeds less than approximately obstacle in the horizontal direction. arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone
6 mph (9 km/h). will change from a single 1/2 second tone to
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY slow, to fast, to continuous.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display Ú page 114. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/
or front fascia/bumper and the detected
obstacle.
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs

1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Solid Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Solid Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert
operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR

Greater than Less than
Rear Distance 79-59 inches 59-47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches
79 inches 12 inches
(inches/cm) (200-150 cm) (150-120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm)
(200 cm) (30cm)
Audible Alert Single 1/2
None Slow Medium Fast Fast Continuous
(Chime) Second Tone
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Solid
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Solid
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Solid
Radio Volume
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Reduced
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT

Front Distance Greater than 47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than 12 inches
(inches/cm) (120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) (30 cm)
Audible Alert (Chime) None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Solid
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Solid
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Solid
Radio Volume Reduced No Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist and the Front or Rear system is disabled, the SYSTEM
audible alert (chime) after approximately three instrument cluster display will show a vehicle
graphic with “OFF” on the corresponding side. During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
seconds when an obstacle has been detected,
This vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long System has detected a faulted condition, the
the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is
as the vehicle is in REVERSE. instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
applied.
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings NOTE: "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
Arc alerts from the enabled ParkSense system, SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are
will interrupt the five second messages, and the FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE
programmable through the Uconnect system
instrument cluster display will show the vehicle 4
Ú page 237. UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message
graphic with the corresponding arcs and “OFF” for five seconds. When the gear selector is
ENABLING A ND D ISABLING F RONT message. moved to REVERSE and the system has
A ND/OR R EAR P ARKSENSE The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be detected a faulted condition, the instrument
on when Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or cluster display will display a "WIPE OFF"
Front ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
requires service. The Front or Rear ParkSense message on the corresponding blocked system
with the Front ParkSense switch.
switch LED will be off when the Front or Rear while the vehicle is in REVERSE. The system will
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled system is enabled. If the Front or Rear continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is
with the Rear ParkSense switch. ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system functioning properly.
When the Front or Rear ParkSense requires service, the Front or Rear ParkSense If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
switch is pushed to disable the switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
system, the instrument cluster display LED will be on. FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
Ú page 114 will show a vehicle cluster display make sure the outer surface and
graphic of the Front or Rear ParkSense on/off the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
state for two seconds. front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear see an authorized dealer.
NOTE:  When you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off,  Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
Water from a car wash or road slush in freezing the instrument cluster display will show a Sense system off if obstacles such as bicycle
weather may also cause sensors to become vehicle graphic of the Front or Rear Park- carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed near
blocked. Sense on/off state for two seconds. Further- the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can
more, once you turn Front or Rear ParkSense result in the system misinterpreting a close
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE off, it remains off until you turn it on again, obstacle as a sensor problem, causing the
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument even if you cycle the ignition. “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
cluster display, see your authorized dealer. REQUIRED” message to be appear in the
 When you move the gear selector to the
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM instrument cluster display.
REVERSE position and Front or Rear Park-
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car Sense is turned off, the instrument cluster  ParkSense should be disabled when the tail-
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or display will show a vehicle graphic with "OFF" gate is in the lowered or open position. A
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. in the corresponding side. This vehicle lowered tailgate could provide a false indica-
graphic will be displayed for as long as the tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle
PARKSENSE SYSTEM U SAGE vehicle is in REVERSE. and could also cause a false braking event.
PRECAUTIONS  ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume  The Rear ParkSense system will automati-
NOTE: of the radio when it is sounding a tone. cally disable when the system detects that a
trailer with trailer brakes has been connected
Ensure that the front and rear fascias/  Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
 to the Integrated Trailer Brake Module.
bumpers are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and taking care not to scratch or damage them.
debris to keep the ParkSense system oper- The sensors must not be covered with ice,  The Front ParkSense system will automati-
ating properly. snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do cally disable if a snow plow has been
so can result in the system not working prop- connected to the vehicle.
 Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra- erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
tions could affect the performance of Park- an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
Sense. bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind or in front of the
fascia/bumper.
parking maneuver selection, the ParkSense

WARNING! CAUTION! Active Park Assist system is capable of
 Drivers must be careful when backing up  ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
even when using ParkSense. Always check unable to recognize every obstacle, perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e.,
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind including small obstacles. Parking curbs driver side or passenger side).
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, might be temporarily detected or not
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and detected at all. Obstacles located above or NOTE:
blind spots before backing up. You are below the sensors will not be detected  The driver is always responsible for
responsible for safety and must continue to when they are in close proximity. controlling the vehicle, responsible for any
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure surrounding objects, and must intervene as
to do so can result in serious injury or
 The vehicle must be driven slowly when 4
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop required.
death. in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
 The system is provided to assist the driver
 Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the driver looks over
and not to substitute the driver.
recommended that the ball mount and his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from  During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM driver touches the steering wheel after being
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury instructed to remove their hands from the
or damage to vehicles or obstacles — IF EQUIPPED steering wheel, the system will cancel, and
because the hitch ball will be much closer The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is the driver will be required to manually
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when intended to assist the driver during parallel and complete the parking maneuver.
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball  The system may not work in all conditions
a proper parking space, providing audible/ (e.g. environmental conditions such as heavy
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending visual instructions, and controlling the steering
on its size and shape, and give a false indi- rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a parking
wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system space that has surfaces that will absorb the
cation that an obstacle is behind the is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
vehicle, and could cause false braking. ultrasonic sensor waves).
maintains control of the accelerator, gear
selector and brakes. Depending on the driver's
 New vehicles from the dealership must have To enable or disable the ParkSense Active Park NOTE:
at least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated Assist system, push the ParkSense Active Park The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
before the ParkSense Active Park Assist Assist switch once (LED turns on). Pushing the allow a maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE
system is fully calibrated and performs accu- switch a second time will disable the system and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be
rately. This is due to the system’s dynamic (LED turns off). completed within eight shifts, the system will
vehicle calibration to improve the perfor- cancel and the instrument cluster display will
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
mance of the feature. instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
turn off automatically for any of the following
conditions: manually.
 The driver must control the vehicle’s brakes.
The automatic emergency braking feature is  Parking maneuver is completed. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
NOT intended to substitute for the driver only operate and search for a parking space
during REVERSE maneuvers.  Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph when the following conditions are present:
(30 km/h) when searching for a parking
ENABLING A ND D ISABLING T HE space.  Gear selector is in DRIVE.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST  The ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
 Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h)
SYSTEM during active steering guidance into the  The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is
The ParkSense Active Park Assist parking space. activated.
system can be enabled and disabled  Steering wheel is touched during active
with the ParkSense Active Park Assist  Driver's door is closed.
steering guidance into the parking space.
switch, located on the switch panel  Tailgate is closed.
below the Uconnect display.  ParkSense Front/Rear Park Assist switch is
pushed.  Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch  Driver's door is opened.  The outer surface and the underside of the
Uconnect display, the ParkSense Active Park front and rear fascias/bumpers are clean
 Tailgate is opened. and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
Assist switch is located above the display.
 Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking obstruction.
System intervention.
NOTE: system will automatically search for a parking

If the vehicle is driven above approximately space on the passenger's side of the vehicle
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster if the turn signal is not activated.
display will instruct the driver to slow down. If
 The driver needs to make sure that the
the vehicle is driven above approximately
selected parking space for the maneuver
18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The
remains free and clear of any obstructions
driver must then reactivate the system by
(e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch.  The driver is responsible to ensure that the
Press OK to Switch to Perpendicular Park selected parking space is suitable for the 4
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active maneuver and free/clear of anything that
Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and may be overhanging or protruding into the
then the LED will turn off if any of the above parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
conditions are not present. from surrounding objects/vehicles).
PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR PARKING  When searching for a parking space, the
S PACE ASSISTANCE OPERATION driver should drive as parallel or perpendic-
ular (depending on the type of maneuver) to
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system
other vehicles as possible.
is enabled, the messages “Active ParkSense
Searching - Push OK To Switch To Perpendicular  The feature will only indicate the last
Park” or “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK detected parking space (example: if passing
Press OK to Switch to Parallel Park
to Switch to Parallel Park” will appear in the multiple available parking spaces, the
instrument cluster display. Push the OK button NOTE: system will only indicate the last detected
on the left side of the steering wheel to change parking space for the maneuver). A parking
your parking space setting. You can switch  When searching for a parking space, use the space is considered invalid after the vehicle
turn signal indicator to select which side of is 32 ft (10 m) or more away from it.
between perpendicular and parallel parking
the vehicle you want to perform the parking
maneuvers.
maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
When an available parking space has been When the vehicle is in the parking position, the
found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will maneuver is complete and the driver will be
be instructed to move forward to position the instructed to check the vehicle's parking
vehicle for a perpendicular or parallel parking position, then shift the vehicle into PARK. The
sequence (depending on the type of maneuver message "Active ParkSense Complete - Check
being performed). Parking Position" will be displayed momentarily.
NOTE:
 It is the driver's responsibility to use the
Move Backward Into Parallel Parking Space brake and accelerator during the semi-auto-
matic parking maneuver.
 It is the driver's responsibility to use the
brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should
check their surroundings and be prepared to
stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or
when driver intervention is required.
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be  When the system instructs the driver to
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and remove their hands from the steering wheel,
remove your hands from the steering wheel. the driver should check their surroundings
When the vehicle comes to a standstill (your Move Backward Into Perpendicular Parking Space and begin to back up slowly.
hands still removed from the steering wheel), The system may instruct several more gear  The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
you will be instructed to place the gear selector shifts (DRIVE and REVERSE), with hands off of allow a maximum of eight shifts between
into the REVERSE position. the steering wheel, before instructing the driver DRIVE and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot
The system may then instruct the driver to wait to check surroundings and complete the be completed within eight shifts, the system
for steering to complete before then instructing parking maneuver. will cancel and the instrument cluster display
to check surroundings and move backward. will instruct the driver to complete the
maneuver manually.
 The system will cancel the maneuver if the When both lane markings are detected and the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) CAUTION! driver drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
during active steering guidance into the  The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is applied), the LaneSense system provides a
parking space. The system will provide a only a parking aid and it is unable to recog- haptic warning in the form of torque applied to
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that nize every obstacle, including small obsta- the steering wheel, as well as a visual warning
tells them to slow down. The driver is then cles. Parking curbs might be temporarily in the instrument cluster display, to prompt the
responsible for completing the maneuver if detected or not detected at all. Obstacles driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
the system is canceled. located above or below the sensors will not
The driver may manually override the haptic
be detected when they are in close prox-
 If the system is canceled during the warning by applying force into the steering
imity.
maneuver for any reason, the driver must wheel at any time. 4
take control of the vehicle.  The vehicle must be driven slowly when
When only a single lane marking is detected
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
and the driver drifts across the lane marking (no
WARNING! system in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom- turn signal applied), the LaneSense system
Drivers must be careful when performing mended that the driver looks over his/her provides a visual warning through the
parallel or perpendicular parking maneuvers shoulder when using the ParkSense Active instrument cluster display to prompt the driver
even when using the ParkSense Active Park Park Assist system. to remain within the lane.
Assist system. Always check carefully behind When only a single lane marking is detected, a
and in front of your vehicle, look behind and
in front of you, and be sure to check for
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED haptic or a torque warning will not be provided.
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, LANESENSE OPERATION NOTE:

obstructions, and blind spots before backing When operating conditions have been met, the
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
up and moving forward. You are responsible
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph hands are on the steering wheel and provide an
for safety and must continue to pay attention
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a audible and visual warning to the driver if
to your surroundings. Failure to do so can
forward looking camera to detect lane markings removed. The system will cancel if the driver
result in serious injury or death.
and measure vehicle position within the lane does not return their hands to the wheel.
boundaries.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR O FF LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE  When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
The LaneSense button is located on The LaneSense system will indicate the current ture situation, the visual warning in the
the switch panel below the Uconnect lane drift condition through the instrument instrument cluster display will show the left
display. cluster display. lane line flashing yellow (on/off). The Lane-
NOTE: When the LaneSense system is on, the lane Sense telltale changes from solid white to
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries flashing yellow.
Uconnect Display screen, the LaneSense button have not been detected and the LaneSense
is located above the display. telltale is solid white.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A
“LaneSense On” message is shown in the
instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button again (LED turns on).
NOTE: Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With Yel-
The LaneSense system will retain the last low Telltale
system state on or off from the last ignition
System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
cycle when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN NOTE:
position. Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected The LaneSense system operates with similar
 When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane- behavior for a right lane departure when only
Sense Telltale is solid white when only the the right lane marking has been detected.
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs on the left side.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines For example: If approaching the left side of For example: If approaching the left side of
Detected the lane the steering wheel will turn to the the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
 When the LaneSense system is on and both right. right.
the lane markings have been detected, the
system is "armed" to provide visual warnings
in the instrument cluster display and a torque
warning in the steering wheel if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs .The lane lines
turn from gray to white and the LaneSense
telltale is solid green. 4
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Lane Line) With Solid Yellow Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With
Telltale Flashing Yellow Telltale
 When the LaneSense system senses the lane
NOTE:
has been approached and is in a lane depar- The LaneSense system operates with similar
ture situation, the left lane line flashes yellow
behavior for a right lane departure.
(on/off). The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale time torque is applied to the steering wheel in
the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
 When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left lane line turns solid
yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid green to solid yellow. At this time
torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
CHANGING LANESENSE S TATUS “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of vehicle is shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s
the screen. After five seconds this note will ignition is placed in the OFF position, or the user
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust disappear. The ParkView Camera is located in presses image defeat “X” to exit out of the
the intensity of the torque warning and the the center of the tailgate handle. camera video display.
warning zone sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late)
that you can configure through the Uconnect Manual Activation Of The Rear View Whenever the Rear View Camera image is
system Ú page 237. Camera: activated through the "Back Up Camera" button
in the Controls menu, and the vehicle speed is
NOTE: greater than, or equal to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a
1. Press the "Controls" button located on the
When enabled the system operates above display timer for the image is initiated. The
 bottom of the Uconnect display.
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph image will continue to be displayed until the
(180 km/h). 2. Press the "Back Up Camera" icon to turn the display timer exceeds 10 seconds.
Rear View Camera system on.
 The warnings are disabled with use of the NOTE:
turn signal. NOTE:  If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has (13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will
 The system will not apply torque to the programmable modes of operation that may be
steering wheel whenever a safety system be displayed continuously until deactivated
selected through the Uconnect system via the touchscreen button "X", the transmis-
engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control Ú page 237.
System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward sion is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is
Collision Warning, etc.). When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE placed in the OFF position.
(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera The touchscreen button "X" to disable display
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA mode is exited and the previous screen

of the camera image is made available ONLY
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you appears. When the vehicle is shifted out of when the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
to see an on-screen image of the rear REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the
camera image will continue to be displayed for When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
unless the following conditions occur: The and its projected back up path based on the
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the steering wheel position. A dashed center line
display screen along with a caution note to
overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/ view. Pressing the icon a second time will return
receiver. Different colored zones indicate the
CAUTION! the view to the standard Back Up Camera
distance to the rear of the vehicle. The following  To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should display.
table shows the approximate distances for each only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is
zone: camera is unable to view every obstacle or
in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera
object in your drive path.
Distance To The Rear delay view will display the standard Back Up
Zones  To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must Camera view. If the vehicle is then returned to
Of The Vehicle
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) able to stop in time when an obstacle is selection will automatically resume.
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft seen. It is recommended that the driver
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain 4
(30 cm - 2 m) look frequently over his/her shoulder when
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
6.5 ft or greater using ParkView.
Green the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
(2 m or greater)
NOTE: If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
WARNING! builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph
Drivers must be careful when backing up rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do (13 km/h).
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up not cover the lens.
NOTE:
Camera. Always check carefully behind your Zoom View
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,  If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind When the Rear View Camera image is being REVERSE, and speed is greater than or equal
spots before backing up. You are responsible displayed, and the vehicle speed is below to 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavail-
for the safety of your surroundings and must 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear, Zoom View able and the icon will appear grey.
continue to pay attention while backing up. is available. By pressing the “magnifying glass”
icon in the upper left of the display screen, the  While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
image will zoom in to four times the standard visible.
death.
AUX CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED Deactivation when enabled through the Uconnect system.
The AUX Camera is deactivated by pressing the The Top View of the vehicle will also show if any
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or two doors are open. The image will be displayed on
AUX Cameras, which display rearview and side “X” in the upper right corner of the touchscreen.
This will return the display back to the the touchscreen along with a caution note
view images from the trailer on the “Check Entire Surroundings”. After five
touchscreen. previously displayed screen.
seconds, this note will disappear. The Surround
Activation NOTE: View Camera system is comprised of four
The AUX Camera is activated by first pressing cameras located in the front grille, rear tailgate
 If the AUX button is pressed and no AUX
the Backup Camera or Surround View Camera and side mirrors.
Camera is connected, the touchscreen will
(if equipped) button on the touchscreen, display a blue screen along with the message NOTE:
followed by the AUX button located in the upper “Camera System Unavailable.” The screen The Surround View Camera system has
left corner of the rearview display. The AUX can be exited out by pressing the “X” in the programmable settings that may be selected
camera can also be activated when the vehicle upper right hand corner. This will return the through the Uconnect system Ú page 237.
is in REVERSE by pressing the AUX button. display back to the previously displayed Press this button on the touchscreen
If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can screen. to enter the Surround View Camera
switch between each camera by pressing the  Zoom View is not available with the AUX menu in the Uconnect system.
AUX1 or AUX2 buttons on the Trailer Camera Camera feature. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the
display. Rear View and Top View is the default view of
 The display will always default to the Trailer
AUX1 Camera Button Camera display (AUX 1). the system.
If the camera delay is turned on, the camera
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF image will display for up to 10 seconds after
AUX2 Camera Button
EQUIPPED shifting out of REVERSE. The camera image will
not display for 10 seconds if the vehicle speed
The Surround View Camera system allows you exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted
to see an on-screen image of the surroundings into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
and the Top View of your vehicle. This occurs position. The “X” button on the touchscreen
whenever the gear selector is in REVERSE or disables the display of the camera image.
If the camera delay is turned off, the camera Top View  The Top View will show which doors are open.
image will close and display the previous screen The Top View will show in the Uconnect system  Open front doors will block the outside
after shifting out of REVERSE. with Rear View and Front View in a split screen image.
If active guidelines are enabled, the lines are display. There are integrated ParkSense arcs in
overlaid on the image in the Rear View to the image at the front and rear of the vehicle. Rear View
illustrate the width of the vehicle. The view will The arcs will change color from yellow to red This is the default view of the system
also include the side view mirrors and its corresponding the distance zones to the in REVERSE and is always paired with
projected back up path based on the steering oncoming object. the Top View of the vehicle with
wheel position. optional active guidelines for the
There are different colored zones to indicate the projected path when enabled. 4
distance to the rear of the vehicle. Refer to the Rear Cross Path View
chart below:
Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key
Distance To The Rear will give the driver a wider angle view
Zone of the rear camera system. The Top
Of The Vehicle
View will be disabled when this is
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
selected.
1 ft - 6.5 ft
Yellow Front View
(30 cm - 2 m)
Surround View Camera View
6.5 ft or greater The Front View will show you what is
Green NOTE: immediately in front of the vehicle
(2 m or greater)
and is always paired with the Top View
 Front tires will be seen in the image when the
Modes Of Operation of the vehicle.
tires are turned.
Standard Rear View can be manually activated
by selecting “Back Up Camera” through the  Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the
Controls menu within the Uconnect system. image will appear distorted.
Front Cross Path View view. Pressing the icon a second time will return Deactivation
Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key the view to the standard Back Up Camera The system is deactivated in the following
will give the driver a wider angle view display. conditions if it was activated automatically:
of the front camera system. The Top When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is  When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
View will be disabled when this is in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera (with camera delay turned on), the camera
selected. delay view will display the standard Back Up image will continue to be displayed for up to
Rear View Camera Camera view. If the vehicle is then returned to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE
REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
Pressing the Back Up Camera soft key selection will automatically resume. (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or
will provide a full screen rear view with
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Zoom View.
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as There is a touchscreen button “X” to disable
NOTE: the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h). the display of the camera image.
If the Rear View Camera view was selected
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available  When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
through the Surround View Camera menu, (with camera delay turned off), the Surround
until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
exiting out of the Rear View screen will return to View Camera mode is exited and the last
REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph
the Surround View menu. If the Back Up Camera known screen appears again.
(13 km/h).
was manually activated through the Controls
menu of the Uconnect system, exiting out of the NOTE: The system is deactivated in the following
display screen will return to the Controls menu. conditions if it was activated manually from the
 If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or Uconnect controls menu via Surround View
Zoom View REVERSE, and speed is greater than or equal button or Back Up Camera button:
to 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavail-
When the Rear View Camera image is being  The “X” button on the display is pressed
able and the icon will appear grey.
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below
8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear, Zoom View  While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be  Vehicle is shifted into PARK
is available. By pressing the “magnifying glass” visible.  Ignition is placed in the OFF position
icon in the upper left of the display screen, the
image will zoom in to four times the standard  Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for
10 seconds
NOTE: Activation  The vehicle is shifted into PARK.

If the Surround View Camera is activated manu- The Forward Facing Camera can be activated in  The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
ally, and the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the following ways:
deactivation methods for automatic activation NOTE:
are assumed.  Pressing the Forward Facing Camera button If the vehicle is in 4WD Low, the Forward Facing
in the Controls screen or Apps menu Camera image will be displayed until the “X”
The camera delay system is turned off manually
 Pressing the Backup Camera or Surround button is pressed or the ignition is placed in the
through the Uconnect settings menu
View Camera button (if equipped) on the OFF position.
Ú page 237.
touchscreen, followed by the AUX button
NOTE: located in the upper left corner of the rear- WARNING! 4
view display
 If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance Drivers must be careful when backing up
builds up on the camera lenses, clean the  Pressing the Forward Facing Camera button even when using the Surround View Camera.
lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft while the vehicle is in REVERSE Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
cloth. Do not cover the lenses. and be sure to check for pedestrians,
Once activated, the camera image will remain animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
 If a malfunction with the system has on as long as the vehicle speed is below 8 mph spots before backing up. You are responsible
occurred, see an authorized dealer. (13 km/h) and the vehicle is not in 4WD Low. for the safety of your surroundings and must
Forward Facing Camera With Tire Lines — If Deactivation continue to pay attention while backing up.
Equipped The Forward Facing Camera is deactivated in Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
the following conditions: death.
The Forward Facing Camera displays a front
view image of the road ahead, along with tire  The vehicle is not in 4WD Low and the vehicle
lines to guide the driver when driving on narrow speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h) for 10
roads. Tire lines can be activated/deactivated seconds.
through the Uconnect settings.
 The “X” button on the display is pressed.
 Pressing the AUX button in the Apps menu NOTE:

CAUTION!
 Pressing the AUX button when the vehicle is  If the AUX button is pressed and no AUX
 To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View
in REVERSE Camera is connected, the touchscreen will
should only be used as a parking aid. The
display a blue screen along with the message
Surround View camera is unable to view If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can
“Camera System Unavailable.” The screen
every obstacle or object in your drive path. switch between each camera by pressing the
can be exited out by pressing the “X” in the
 To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must AUX1 or AUX2 buttons on the Trailer Camera upper right hand corner. This will return the
be driven slowly when using Surround View display. display back to the previously displayed
to be able to stop in time when an obstacle AUX1 Camera Button screen.
is seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when  Zoom View is not available with the AUX
using Surround View. Camera feature.
AUX2 Camera Button
 The display will always default to the Trailer
AUX CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED Camera display (AUX 1).
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or two
AUX Cameras, which display images from the
Deactivation REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE
trailer on the touchscreen. The AUX Camera is deactivated when the
following situations occur:
ENGINE
Activation The capless fuel filler is located on the left side
 The “X” in the upper right corner of the touch- of the vehicle.
The AUX Camera is activated any of the
screen is pressed. This will return the display
following ways: The capless system is sealed by two flapper
back to the previously displayed screen.
 By first pressing the Backup Camera or doors.
Surround View Camera (if equipped) button  The vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h)
on the touchscreen, followed by the AUX for 10 seconds.
button located in the upper left corner of the  The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
rearview display
 The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
5. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds

WARNING! after nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from
 Never have any smoking materials lit in or the nozzle.
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open 6. Remove the fuel filler nozzle.
or the tank is being filled.
7. To close the fuel filler door, push the
 Never add fuel when the engine is running. center-rear edge (3 o’clock position) of the
This is in violation of most state and federal fuel filler door and then release. The fuel
fire regulations and may cause the MIL to filler door will latch closed.
turn on.
 A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into Fuel Filler Door NOTE: 4
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
a portable container that is inside of a 3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe,
fuel filler door from opening. If this occurs,
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place the nozzle opens and holds both flapper
lightly push on the fuel filler door around the
gas containers on the ground while filling. doors while refueling.
perimeter to break the ice build up.
CAUTION! WARNING!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not  Always place container on the ground
“top off” the fuel tank after filling. before filling.
 Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the
1. Put the vehicle in PARK and switch the
container when you are filling it.
ignition off.
 Use only approved containers for flam-
2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler mable liquid.
door (3 o'clock position) and release to Fuel Filler
open.  Do not leave container unattended while
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, filling.
the fuel tank is full.
 A static electric charge could cause a spark
and fire hazard.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE 4. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is
AVOID USING CONTAMINATED FUEL
The capless fuel filler is located on the left side full. Fuel that is contaminated by water or dirt can
of the vehicle. cause severe damage to the engine fuel
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel system. Proper maintenance of the engine fuel
The capless system is sealed by two flapper
door. filter and fuel tank is essential Ú page 409.
doors.
1. Put the vehicle in PARK and switch the
BULK FUEL S TORAGE — D IESEL FUEL
WARNING!
ignition off. If you store quantities of fuel, good
 Never have any smoking materials lit in or maintenance of the stored fuel is also essential.
2. Open the fuel filler door. near the vehicle when the fuel door is open Fuel contaminated with water will promote the
or the tank is being filled. growth of “microbes.” These microbes form
 Never add fuel when the engine is running. “slime” that will clog the fuel filtration system
This is in violation of most state and federal and lines. Drain condensation from the supply
fire regulations and may cause the tank and change the line filter on a regular
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on. basis.
 A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a NOTE:
portable container that is inside of a When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place fuel, air is pulled into the fuel system.
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
If the vehicle will not start Ú page 414.
Diesel Fuel And Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location CAUTION! WARNING!
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not Do not open the high pressure fuel system
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe “top off” the fuel tank after filling. with the engine running. Engine operation
– the nozzle opens and holds the flapper causes high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel
door while refueling. spray can cause serious injury or death.
DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID NOTE:  There is an electric heater inside the DEF
When working with DEF, it is important to know tank that automatically works when neces-
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective that: sary. And if the DEF supply does freeze, the
Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system to meet diesel truck will operate normally until it thaws.
emissions standards required by the  Any containers or parts that come into
Environmental Protection Agency. contact with DEF must be DEF compatible Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Procedure
(plastic or stainless steel). Copper, brass,
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce NOTE:
aluminum, iron or non-stainless steel should
levels of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emitted from For the correct fluid type Ú page 475.
be avoided as they are subject to corrosion
engines that are harmful to our health and the by DEF. 1. Remove cap from Diesel Exhaust Fluid
environment to a near-zero level. A small
(DEF) tank which is located next to the 4
quantity of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is  If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up
completely. diesel fuel filler.
injected into the exhaust upstream of a catalyst
where, when vaporized, converts smog-forming
NOx into harmless nitrogen (N2) and water
ADDING D IESEL EXHAUST FLUID
vapor (H2O), two natural components of the air The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) gauge (located
we breathe. on the instrument cluster) will display the level
of DEF remaining in the tank Ú page 109.
DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID STORAGE
NOTE:
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very
stable product with a long shelf life. If DEF is  Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed,
kept in temperatures between 10° and 90°F load, etc.) will effect the amount of DEF that
(-12° and 32°C), it will last a minimum of one is used in your vehicle.
DEF Filler Cap And Fuel Fill
year. Outside temperature can affect DEF
 1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
DEF may freeze at temperatures at or below consumption. In cold conditions, 12°F 2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
12°F (-11°C). The system has been designed to (-11°C) and below, the DEF gauge may take
operate in this environment. longer to operate as intended. This is a
normal function of the system.
2. Insert DEF fill adapter/nozzle into DEF tank Refilling With Containers
filler neck. CAUTION! (Continued)
Proceed as follows:
NOTE:  DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below
 Check the expiration date. 12ºF (-11ºC). The DEF system is designed
 The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds to work in temperatures below the DEF
to update after adding a gallon or more of  Read the advice for use on the label
before pouring the content of the bottle freezing point, however, if the tank is over-
(DEF) to the DEF tank. If you have a fault filled and freezes, the system could be
related to the DEF system, the gauge may not into the DEF tank.
damaged.
update to the new level. See an authorized  If systems which cannot be screwed in
dealer for service. (e.g. tanks) are used for refilling, after the  When DEF is spilled, clean the area imme-
diately with water and use an absorbent
 The DEF gauge may also not immediately indication appears on the instrument
material to soak up the spills on the ground.
update after a refill if the temperature of the panel display Ú page 114 fill the DEF
DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF line tank with no more than 2 Gallons (8  Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF is
heater will possibly warm up the DEF fluid liters). accidentally added to the diesel fuel tank
and allow the gauge to update after a period as it can result in severe damage to your
 If containers which can be screwed to the
of run time. Under very cold conditions, it is engine, including but not limited to failure
filler are used, the reservoir is full when
possible that the gauge may not reflect the of the fuel pump and injectors.
the DEF level in the container stops
new fill level for several drives. (Continued)
pouring out. Do not proceed further.
Refilling With Nozzles
You can fill up at any DEF distributor. CAUTION!
Proceed as follows:  To avoid DEF spillage, and possible
damage to the DEF tank from overfilling, do
 Insert the DEF nozzle in the filler, start not “top off” the DEF tank after filling.
refilling and stop refilling at the first (Continued)
shut-off (the shut-off indicates that the
DEF tank is full). Do not proceed with the
refilling, to prevent spillage of DEF.
 Extract the nozzle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
below 12°F (-11°C). If your vehicle is not in PAYLOAD
operation for an extended period of time with
temperatures below 12°F (-11°C), the DEF in The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
 Never add anything other than DEF to the
the tank may freeze. Do not overfill the DEF allowable load weight a truck can carry,
tank – especially any form of hydrocarbon
such as diesel fuel, fuel system additives, tank. If the tank is overfilled and freezes, it including the weight of the driver, all
gasoline, or any other petroleum-based could be damaged. passengers, options and cargo.
product. Even a very small amount of these,
Extra care should be taken when filling with GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
less than 100 parts per million or less than
portable containers to avoid overfilling. Keep an The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on
1 oz. per 78 gallons (295 liters) will contam-
eye on the DEF gauge in your instrument the front and rear axles. The load must be
inate the entire DEF system and will require
cluster. You may safely add a maximum of distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR 4
replacement. If owners use a container,
2 gallons (7.6 Liters) when your DEF gauge is of each axle is not exceeded.
funnel or nozzle when refilling the tank, it
reading at the half mark.
should either be new or one that is has only Each axle GAWR is determined by the
been used for adding DEF. Mopar provides
an attachable nozzle with its DEF for this
VEHICLE LOADING components in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
purpose. GROSS V EHICLE WEIGHT RATING Heavier axles or suspension components
3. Stop filling the DEF tank immediately when (GVWR) sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability does not necessarily
any of the following happen: DEF stops The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your increase the vehicle's GVWR.
flowing from the fill bottle into the DEF tank, vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
DEF splashes out the filler neck, or a DEF options and cargo. The label also specifies TIRE SIZE
pump nozzle automatically shuts off. maximum capacities of front and rear Gross The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
4. Reinstall cap onto DEF tank. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Total load must be represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are Replacement tires must be equal to the load
Filling The Def Tank In Cold Climates not exceeded. capacity of this tire size.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic DEF
heating system. This allows the DEF injection
system to operate properly at temperatures
RIM S IZE exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of

the vehicle should then be determined
TRAILER TOWING
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire separately to be sure that the load is properly In this section you will find safety tips and
size listed. distributed over the front and rear axle. information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
I NFLATION P RESSURE Weighing the vehicle may show that the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of either the front or towing a trailer, carefully review this information
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your rear axles has been exceeded but the total load to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full Gross is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must possible.
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
CURB W EIGHT appropriate until the specified weight coverage, follow the requirements and
limitations are met. Store the heavier items recommendations in this manual concerning
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the down low and be sure that the weight is vehicles used for trailer towing.
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, distributed equally. Stow all loose items
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity securely before driving. COMMON T OWING D EFINITIONS
conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
Improper weight distributions can have an The following trailer towing related definitions
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers will assist you in understanding the following
weight values are determined by weighing your
and handles and the way the brakes operate. information:
vehicle on a commercial scale before any
occupants or cargo are added. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
CAUTION!
LOADING The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
The actual total weight and the weight of the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. and tongue weight. The total load must be
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR
best be determined by weighing it when it is it can change the way your vehicle handles. Ú page 213.
loaded and ready for operation. This could cause you to lose control. Also
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a overloading can shorten the life of your
commercial scale to insure that the Gross vehicle.
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) has not been
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the not exceed either front or rear GAWR swaying trailer and automatically applies
weight of all cargo, consumables and Ú page 213. individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
or on the trailer in its “loaded and ready for WARNING!
Weight-Carrying Hitch
operation” condition. It is important that you do not exceed the
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
The recommended way to measure GTW is to maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. driving condition can result if either rating is
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
The entire weight of the trailer must be exceeded. You could lose control of the vehi-
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are
supported by the scale. cle and have a collision. 4
commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
WARNING! Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the
Weight-Distributing Hitch
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
or more, it is recommended to use a weight-dis- hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this A weight-distributing system works by applying
tributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your as part of the load on your vehicle. leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
vehicle. If you use a standard weight-carrying typically used for heavier loads to distribute
Trailer Frontal Area trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
hitch, you could lose control of your vehicle and
cause a collision. The frontal area is the maximum height axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
multiplied by the maximum width of the front of accordance with the manufacturer's directions,
a trailer. it provides for a more level ride, offering more
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) consistent steering and brake control, thereby
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your Trailer Sway Control (TSC) enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
vehicle and trailer when weighed in The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
combination. that can be installed between the hitch receiver sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
and the trailer tongue that typically provides contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) adjustable friction associated with the stability. Trailer sway control and a weight
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front trailer swaying motions while traveling.
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) Recommended Distribution Hitch Adjustment
and may be required depending on vehicle and Towing With Air Suspension — If Equipped
trailer configuration/loading to comply with
GAWR requirements. 1. Verify that the vehicle is at the normal ride
height.
WARNING!
NOTE:
 An improperly adjusted weight distributing The vehicle must remain in the engine run posi-
hitch system may reduce handling, stability tion with all doors closed while attaching a
and braking performance and could result trailer for proper leveling of the air suspension
in a collision. With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct) system.
 Weight distributing systems may not be 2. Position the truck to be ready to connect to
compatible with surge brake couplers. the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle 3. Enable tire jack mode through the
dealer for additional information. instrument cluster or touchscreen radio
settings. Tire jack mode will be canceled
and procedure must be restarted if the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 5mph
(8 km/h).
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch

(Incorrect)
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)

4. Measure the height of the top of the front 6. Measure the height of the top of the front 9. The truck can now be driven.
wheel opening on the fender to ground; this wheel opening on the fender to ground; this
is height H1. is height H2. Measurement Example Height
7. Install and adjust the tension in the weight Example (mm)
distributing bars per FCA recommendations H1 925
so that the height of the front fender is H2 946
approximately (H2-H1)/3+H1 (about 1/3
the difference between H2 and H1 above H2-H1 21
normal ride height [H1]). (H2-H1)/3 7
(H2-H1)/3 + H1 932
4
8. Use the instrument cluster or touchscreen
radio settings and switch off tire jack mode.
NOTE:
Make sure the truck returns to normal ride
Measuring Height (H) For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
height. Perform a visual inspection of the
with tow haul mode engaged.
trailer and weight distributing hitch to
5. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the
confirm FCA recommendations have been
weight distribution bars connected.
met.
TRAILER HITCH TYPE AND M AXIMUM T RAILER W EIGHT

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight a given factory equipped trailer hitch type can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting
the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight

Hitch Type Max. Trailer Weight / Max. Tongue Weight
Class III Bumper Hitch - 1500 Model 6,000 lbs (2,721 kg) / 500 lbs (226 kg)
Class IV - 1500 Model 12,750 lbs (5,783 kg) / 1,275 lbs (578 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (M AXIMUM

installed on your vehicle. TRAILER WEIGHT R ATINGS)
Class III Bumper Hitch Access
NOTE:
Remove the cap with a trim stick or screw driver For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
to access the Class III hitch attachment. weight ratings) refer to the following website
NOTE: addresses:
Be careful not to scratch the bumper step pad.  ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
Class III Bumper Hitch Access  ramtruck.ca (Canada)

 rambodybuilder.com
TRAILER AND TONGUE W EIGHT the maximum combined weight of occupants Upon completion this the feature will be
and cargo for your vehicle. available to activate.
TRAILER REVERSE S TEERING CONTROL NOTE:

The 90 degree turns could be in either the left
Trailer Reverse Steering Control (TRSC) is a or right direction.
feature that will allow the driver to back up a
trailer using a knob located on the center stack.
The feature works by the user first hooking up a
trailer and then performing the calibration
maneuvers. 4
Weight Distribution CAUTION!
Consider the following items when computing Always observe the position of the trailer and
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: surroundings using the camera and mirrors to
 The tongue weight of the trailer. avoid damage to the truck or trailer.
Trailer Reverse Steering Control Calibration
 The weight of any other type of cargo or Calibration: 1 — Straight 100 ft (30 m)
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
First bring the vehicle and trailer to a complete 2 — Intersection turn with radius 50-65 ft
 The weight of the driver and all passengers. stop in a large open area, place the vehicle in (15-20 m) in either direction
PARK and push the TRSC button located above 3 — Straight 50 ft (15 m)
NOTE: the knob in the center stack. 4 — Intersection turn with radius 50-65 ft
Remember that everything put into or on the (15-20 m) in either direction
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, To calibrate a trailer, the driver must drive
forward 100 ft (30 m). Then perform a 90 5 — Straight 50 ft (15 m)
additional factory-installed options or
degree turn and return to a straight position for 6 — Straight 65 ft (20 m), making sure to align ve-
dealer-installed options must be considered as hicle/trailer to path center line
part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to 65 ft (20 m). Perform another 90 degree turn,
followed by another 65 ft (20 m) straight drive. 7 — Feature is active, turn knob left or right to
the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for back the trailer up
Once calibrated the driver can shift to PARK, Instrument Cluster Messages: Other reasons the feature may cancel:
push the button on top of the TRSC knob and  “Drive forward to calibrate trailer” will display  The driver overrides steering by placing
activate the feature. The knob is then turned when a trailer is not calibrated and the hands on the steering wheel.
either to the left or right depending on what vehicle is at standstill while the button is
direction the driver wants the trailer to go.  Trailer tracking is lost.
pushed.
 “Calibrating trailer” will display when the  If the trailer angle becomes excessive, the
trailer is not calibrated and the vehicle is brakes apply bringing the vehicle to a stop
moving while the button is pushed. and then applying the parking brake.
 Trailer steering button is pushed while active.
 “To activate trailer steering shift to P” will
display when the trailer is calibrated success-  Vehicle speed goes over 8 mph (12 km/h).
fully and the vehicle is not in PARK.
 Driver door is open and seat belt is
 “Trailer Steering ready, shift to reverse” will unbuckled.
display when the button is pushed, trailer is
calibrated and the vehicle is in PARK.  Transmission shifted to PARK.
Trailer Reverse Steering Control Knob
 “Trailer steering active” will display after the Trailer Memory
NOTE:
When steering the trailer with the knob, remove driver shifts to REVERSE and indicates the The trailer steering system can remember up to
hands from the steering wheel. feature is active. five trailers, so recalibration will not be
 “Trailer Steering Unavailable” will display if necessary.
There is also a holdover state where if during an
active trailer steering maneuver, the driver there is a fault in the system preventing acti- To store a trailer to memory, calibrate the trailer
shifts to NEURAL or DRIVE to straighten the vation, the driver’s door is open, the driver’s and then allow the vehicle to be off for a period
trailer, the driver may shift back to REVERSE seat belt is unbuckled, or the tailgate is open. of time. The next time the vehicle is started,
and not need to reactivate the feature. However place the vehicle in DRIVE and drive a short
the feature will cancel after 10 seconds or when distance. The trailer system can then be
the vehicle speed reaches 8 mph (12 km/h). activated.
NOTE: TOWING REQUIREMENTS WARNING!

Trailers may look different during day and night
conditions. In such cases, the trailer may need To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle  Make certain that the load is secured in the
to recalibrate. drivetrain components, the following guidelines trailer and will not shift during travel. When
are recommended. trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
Some trailers (such as boat trailers) will need to dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
recalibrate while loaded and unloaded. CAUTION! difficult for the driver to control. You could
NOTE:  Do not tow a trailer at all during the first lose control of your vehicle and have a colli-
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is sion.
 The system may not detect a trailer in low driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
light conditions. In sunny conditions, the
 When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do 4
be damaged. not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
performance may be degraded as shadows
 Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) loading can cause a loss of control, poor
pass over the trailer.
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over performance or damage to brakes, axle,
 The driver is always responsible for safe oper- 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
ation of truck and trailer. at full throttle. This helps the engine and chassis structure or tires.
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the  Safety chains must always be used
 The driver is always in control of the truck as
heavier loads. between your vehicle and trailer. Always
well as the trailer and is responsible for
controlling the throttle and brakes. connect the chains to the hook retainers of
Perform the maintenance listed in the
the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under
 The system may not function when the Scheduled Servicing section for the proper
the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
camera lens is blocked, blurred (covered with maintenance intervals Ú page 395. When for turning corners.
water, snow, ice, dirt, etc) and will not work towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or
(Continued)
unless the tailgate is upright and fully GCWR ratings.
latched.
 Proper tire inflation pressures are essential

WARNING! (Continued) to the safe and satisfactory operation of your WARNING!
 Vehicles with trailers should not be parked vehicle.  Do not connect trailer brakes to your
on a grade. When parking, apply the vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
 Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the load your brake system and cause it to fail.
pressures before trailer usage.
tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For You might not have brakes when you need
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the  Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire them and could have an accident.
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, damage before towing a trailer.  Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
block or "chock" the trailer wheels. ping distance. When towing, you should
 Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
 GCWR must not be exceeded. capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR allow for additional space between your
and GAWR limits. vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
 Total weight must be distributed between
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the  For further information Ú page 443.
following four ratings are not exceeded:
 GVWR Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes CAUTION!
 Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs
 GTW
system or vacuum system of your vehicle (453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
 GAWR with that of the trailer. brakes and they should be of adequate
 Tongue weight rating for the trailer  An electronically actuated trailer brake capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
hitch utilized. controller is required when towing a trailer accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake
with electronically actuated brakes. When pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Tires towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
 Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a surge actuated brake system, an electronic
compact spare tire. brake controller is not required.
 Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)  Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
when towing while using a full size spare tire. over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
Integrated Trailer Brake Module — If The user interface consists of the following: The trailer and the vehicle’s stop lamps will
Equipped GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-) come on when braking normally with the vehicle
Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer brake pedal. Only the trailer stop lamps will
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake come on when the manual brake control lever is
Brake Module (ITBM) for Electric and Electric control power output to the trailer brakes in
Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes. applied.
0.5 increments. The GAIN setting can be
increased to a maximum of 10 or decreased to Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
NOTE:
This module has been designed and verified a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking). This light indicates the trailer electrical
with electric trailer brakes and new EOH GAIN connection status.
systems. Some previous EOH systems may not
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake If no electrical connection is detected after the 4
be compatible with ITBM. ignition is turned on, pushing the GAIN
control for the specific towing condition and
should be changed as towing conditions adjustment button or sliding the manual brake
change. Changes to towing conditions include control lever will display the GAIN setting for
trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and 10 seconds and the “Trailer Brake Status
weather. Indicator Light” will not be displayed.
Manual Brake Control Lever If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left “Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light” will flash.
to activate power to the trailer's electric brakes
independent of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the
manual brake control lever is activated while
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) the brake is also applied, the greater of the two
1 — GAIN (-) Adjustment Button inputs determines the power sent to the trailer
2 — GAIN (+) Adjustment Button brakes.
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
Adjusting GAIN by the ITBM, braking functions will not be 8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer
available), the GAIN setting will illuminate on a dry, level surface at a speed of
NOTE:
and the correct type of trailer must be 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze
This should only be performed in a traffic free
selected from the instrument cluster display the manual brake control lever completely.
environment at speeds of approximately
options.
20–25 mph (30–40 km/h). 9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the squealing tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
steering wheel until “TRAILER TOW” the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the
working condition, functioning normally
appears on the screen. GAIN setting.
and properly adjusted. See your trailer
dealer if necessary. 5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at
to enter “TRAILER TOW”. a point just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical
connections according to the trailer 6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be
manufacturer's instructions. Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen. attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting
of 10.
3. When a trailer is plugged in with electric or 7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP
EOH brakes, the trailer connected message or DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer
should appear in the instrument cluster Brake Type appears on the screen.
display (if the connection is not recognized
Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH

Electric over Hydraulic Electric over Hydraulic
Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes
Trailer Brakes Trailer Brakes
Load *Under 10,000 lbs *Above 10,000 lbs *Under 10,000 lbs *Above 10,000 lbs
*The suggested selection may change depending on the customer preferences for braking performance. Condition of the trailer brakes, driving and road state may also affect the
selection.
Display Messages NOTE: The electrical connections are all complete to

The trailer brake control interacts with the the vehicle but you must connect the harness to
 An aftermarket controller may be available
instrument cluster display. Display messages, a trailer connector. Refer to the following
for use with trailers with air or elec-
along with a single chime, will be displayed illustrations.
tric-over-hydraulic trailer brake systems. To
when a malfunction is determined in the trailer determine the type of brakes on your trailer NOTE:
connection, trailer brake control, or on the and the availability of controllers, check with
trailer Ú page 114. your trailer manufacturer or dealer.  Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
WARNING!  Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
may cause damage to the electrical system connect) into water. 4
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible and electronic modules of the vehicle. See
with the ITBM system may result in reduced your authorized dealer if an aftermarket  Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
or complete loss of trailer braking. There may module is to be installed. area.
be a increase in stopping distance or trailer
instability which could result in personal Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
injury. Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
CAUTION! trailer are required for motoring safety.
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin
with the ITBM system may result in reduced and seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
or complete loss of trailer braking. There may approved trailer harness and connector.
be a increase in stopping distance or trailer
NOTE: Four-Pin Connector
instability which could result in damage to
your vehicle, trailer, or other property. Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s 1 — Ground
wiring harness. 2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
The following exterior lights will remain on for The sequence will only activate if the following
the entirety of the sequence: conditions are met:
 Park/Running Lamps  Vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow
Package
 Side Marker Lamps (if equipped)
 Vehicle is in PARK
 License Lamp
 Vehicle is not in motion
 Signature Lamp (if equipped)
 Ignition in ACC or RUN
 Low Beams
Seven-Pin Connector  Remote start is inactive
1 — Battery  Fog Lamps (if equipped)
2 — Backup Lamps
 Brakes are not applied
 Daytime Running Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn  Left turn signal is not applied
4 — Electric Brakes During this time the following lights will
sequence, each activating for three seconds:  Right turn signal not applied
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn 1. Brake and CHMSL (third brake light)  Hazard switch is not applied
7 — Running Lamps
2. Left turn signal The sequence will cancel if any of the following
Trailer Light Check conditions occur:
3. Right turn signal
This feature will run the trailer lights through a  Brakes are applied
4. Reverse Lamps
sequence to check the trailer light function. It is  Vehicle is shifted from PARK
available in the Instrument Cluster under the 5. High Beam
Trailer Tow menu Ú page 118.  Vehicle is no longer stationary
This light check sequence will continue for a
When activated the feature will enable all of the  Left turn signal activated from stalk
total of two minutes.
exterior lights sequentially for up to two minutes
 Right turn signal is activated from stalk
for time to walk around and verify functionality.
 Hazard switch is activated extend transmission life by reducing excessive NOTE:

shifting and heat build up. This action will also The vehicle must remain in the engine running
 Any button on the key fob is pushed
provide better engine braking. position while attaching a trailer for proper
 Ignition button is pushed leveling of the air suspension system.
Tow/Haul Mode
 High Beam stalk position is changed To reduce potential for automatic transmission SNOWPLOW
Sequence is canceled in the instrument overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when
 Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a
cluster driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear
factory installed option. These packages
range (using the (ERS) shift control) on more
include components necessary to equip your
TOWING TIPS severe grades.
vehicle with a snowplow. 4
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and Cruise Control — If Equipped NOTE:
backing up the trailer in an area located away Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
 Before installation of a snowplow it is highly
from heavy traffic. loads. recommended that the owner/installer obtain
Automatic Transmission  When using the Cruise Control, if you experi- and follow the recommendations contained
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. ence speed drops greater than 10 mph within the current Body Builders Guide. See an
The transmission controls include a drive (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back authorized dealer, installer or snowplow manu-
strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing. to cruising speed. facturer for this information. There are unique
However, if frequent shifting does occur while in electrical systems that must be connected to
 Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with properly ensure operator safety and prevent
DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL mode or select a lower
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency. overloading vehicle systems.
gear range (using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control). Air Suspension System
NOTE: To aid in attaching/detaching the trailer from
Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower the vehicle, the air suspension system can be
gear range (using the ERS shift control) while used Ú page 165.
operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions will improve performance and
WARNING! SNOWPLOW PREP PACKAGE MODEL NOTE:

AVAILABILITY Detach the snowplow when transporting
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could passengers.
adversely affect performance of the airbag For Information about snowplow applications
visit www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to
system in a collision. Do not expect that the
Body Builders Guide. specifications at the factory without
airbag will perform as described earlier in this
consideration for the weight of the plow. Front
manual.
1. The maximum number of occupants in the end toe-in should be checked and reset if
truck should not exceed two. necessary at the beginning and end of the
CAUTION! snowplow season. This will help prevent uneven
2. The total GVWR, Front GAWR or the Rear
tire wear.
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if GAWR should never be exceeded.
exterior lamps are not properly installed. The blade should be lowered whenever the
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the vehicle is parked.
addition of options or passengers, etc.
BEFORE PLOWING Maintain and operate your vehicle and
 Check the hydraulic system for leaks and The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow equipment following the
proper fluid level. snowplow system, all aftermarket accessories, recommendations provided by the specific
driver, passengers, options, and cargo, must snowplow manufacturer.
 Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper not exceed either the Gross Vehicle Weight
tightness. (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR) ratings.
 Check the runners and cutting edge for These weights are specified on the Safety
excessive wear. The cutting edge should be Compliance Certification Label on the driver's
¼ to ½ inches (6 cm to 1.2 cm) above ground side door opening.
in snow plowing position.
 Check that snowplow lighting is connected
and functioning properly.
OVER THE ROAD O PERATION W ITH GENERAL MAINTENANCE  Vehicles with automatic transmissions
should use 4WD Low when plowing deep or
S NOWPLOW ATTACHED Snowplows should be maintained in heavy snow for extended periods of time to
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and accordance with the plow manufacturer's avoid transmission overheating.
causes the engine to operate at higher than instructions.
normal temperatures. Therefore, when  Do not shift the transmission unless the
Keep all snowplow electrical connections and
transporting the plow, angle the blade engine has returned to idle and wheels have
battery terminals clean and free of corrosion.
stopped. Make a practice of stepping on the
completely and position it as low as road or
When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and brake pedal while shifting the transmission.
surface conditions permit. Do not exceed
drivetrain damage, the following precautions
40 mph (64 km/h). The operator should always
should be observed: 4
maintain a safe stopping distance and allow
adequate passing clearance.  Operate with transfer case in 4WD Low when
plowing small or congested areas where
OPERATING T IPS speeds are not likely to exceed 15 mph
Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in 4WD
(32 km/h) should be maximum operating High.
speed. The operator should be familiar with the
area and surface to be cleaned. Reduce speed
and use extreme caution when plowing
unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND A NOTHER V EHICLE
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models
See Instructions
 Transmission in PARK
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
 Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
 Tow in forward direction
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE: axles (not to the body). Failure to follow these using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow
instructions may cause fault codes to be set dolly, follow this procedure:
 When towing your vehicle, always follow and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
applicable state and provincial laws. Contact NOTE:
state and provincial Highway Safety offices RECREATIONAL TOWING — T WO-W HEEL If vehicle is equipped with air suspension,
for additional details. DRIVE MODELS ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
 Vehicles equipped with Active-Level Four DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the 1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
Corner Air Suspension must be placed in drivetrain will result. following the dolly manufacturer's
Transport mode before tying them down instructions.
(from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive
Ú page 165. If the vehicle cannot be placed models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
in Transport mode (for example, engine will OFF the ground. This may be accomplished
3. Apply the parking brake. Place the
not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly,

following the dolly manufacturer's
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)
instructions.  DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing  Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
with only one set of wheels on the ground released, and remains released, while
5. Turn the ignition OFF. (front or rear) will cause severe transmis- being towed.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed sion and/or transfer case damage. Tow
 Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
for towing, to secure the front wheels in the with all four wheels either ON the ground, or
requirements can cause severe transmis-
straight position. OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
sion and/or transfer case damage.
 Tow only in the forward direction. Towing Damage from improper towing is not
CAUTION! this vehicle backwards can cause severe covered under the New Vehicle Limited 4
damage to the transfer case. Warranty.
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage  Before recreational towing, the transfer  Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft
from improper towing is not covered under case must be in N (Neutral). To be certain because fluid will leak from the transfer
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral), case, causing damage to internal parts.
perform the procedure outlined under
 Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on
RECREATIONAL TOWING — “Shifting Into N (Neutral)”. Internal trans-
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face
mission damage will result, if the transfer
F OUR-W HEEL DRIVE MODELS case is not in N (Neutral) during towing.
bar will be damaged.
NOTE:  The transmission must be in PARK for

The transfer case must be shifted into N recreational towing.
(Neutral) for recreational towing. The transmis- (Continued)
sion must be shifted into PARK for recreational
towing. Refer to the following for the proper
transfer case N (Neutral) shifting procedure for
your vehicle.
Shifting Into N (Neutral) 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on 6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
Use the following procedure to prepare your level ground, with the engine running.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds
vehicle for recreational towing. Apply the parking brake.
and ensure that there is no vehicle
2. Press and hold the brake pedal. movement.
WARNING!
3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. The 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 with the transmission
You or others could be injured or killed if you
driver's door must be closed (or the driver's in DRIVE.
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
seat belt buckled) so that the transmission
case in the N (Neutral) position without first 9. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Apply
will remain in NEUTRAL when the brake
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer the parking brake. Turn off the engine. For
pedal is released.
case N (Neutral) position disengages both the vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go, push and
front and rear driveshafts from the power- NOTE: hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until
train and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, the engine shuts off. The transmission will
the transmission is in PARK. The parking ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height. automatically select PARK when the engine
brake should always be applied when the is turned off.
driver is not in the vehicle. 4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case N 10. Turn the ignition off.
(Neutral) button (at the center of the
11. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
CAUTION! transfer case switches). The N (Neutral)
suitable tow bar.
indicator light will illuminate, and remain lit,
It is necessary to follow these steps to be cer- when the shift to N (Neutral) is complete. 12. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but
tain that the transfer case is fully in N (Neu- After the shift is completed and the N do not start the engine.
tral) before recreational towing to prevent (Neutral) light stays on, release the N
damage to internal parts. (Neutral) button. 13. Release the parking brake.
5. Release the parking brake. 14. Turn the ignition OFF.

NOTE: Shifting Out Of N (Neutral) 11. Release the parking brake.

 Steps 2 and 3 are requirements that must be Use the following procedure to prepare your 12. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release
met before pushing the N (Neutral) button, vehicle for normal usage: the brake pedal, and check that the vehicle
and must continue to be met until the shift has 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, operates normally.
been completed. If any of these requirements leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
are not met before pushing the N (Neutral) NOTE:
button or are no longer met during the shift, 2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
 Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be
the N (Neutral) indicator light will flash contin-
3. Start the engine. Apply the parking brake. met before pushing the button to shift out of
uously until all requirements are met or until
Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. N (Neutral), and must continue to be met
the N (Neutral) button is released. 4
until the shift has been completed. If any of
 The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for 4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push these requirements are not met before
a shift to take place and for the position indi- and hold the recessed transfer case N pushing the button or are no longer met
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is (Neutral) button (at the center of the during the shift, the N (Neutral) indicator light
not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not transfer case switches). will flash continuously until all requirements
take place and no position indicator lights will are met or until the button is released.
5. When the N (Neutral) indicator light turns
be on or flashing. off, release the N (Neutral) button.  The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for
 A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light a shift to take place and for the position indi-
6. Turn the engine off. The transmission will
indicates that shift requirements have not cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is
automatically select PARK when the engine
been met. not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not
is turned off.
take place and no position indicator lights will
 If the vehicle is equipped with air suspension, be on or flashing.
7. Release the brake pedal.
the engine should be started and left running
for a minimum of 60 seconds (with all the 8. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.  A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light
doors closed) at least once every 24 hours. indicates that shift requirements have not
This process allows the air suspension to 9. Press and hold the brake pedal. been met.
adjust the vehicle’s ride height to compen- 10. Start the engine.
sate for temperature effects.
DRIVING TIPS Flowing/Rising Water

DRIVING ON S LIPPERY SURFACES WARNING!  Driving through standing water limits your
Do not drive on or across a road or path vehicle’s braking capabilities, which
Acceleration increases stopping distances. Therefore,
where water is flowing and/or rising (as in
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away after driving through standing water, drive
other slippery surfaces may cause the driving the road or path's surface and cause your slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal
wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further- several times to dry the brakes.
phenomenon occurs when there is a difference more, flowing and/or rising water can carry  Failure to follow these warnings may result
in the surface traction under the rear (driving) your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
wheels. warning may result in injuries that are serious your passengers, and others around you.
or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
WARNING! around you.
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is CAUTION!
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sud- Shallow Standing Water  Always check the depth of the standing
den pulling of the rear wheels. You could lose water before driving through it. Never drive
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
control of the vehicle and possibly have a col- through standing water that is deeper than
through shallow standing water, consider the
lision. Accelerate slowly and carefully when- the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the
following Cautions and Warnings before doing
ever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, vehicle.
so.
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).  Determine the condition of the road or the
WARNING! path that is under water and if there are any
DRIVING THROUGH WATER  Driving through standing water limits your
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Driving through water more than a few inches/ vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not
centimeters deep will require extra caution to exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving  Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when
ensure safety and prevent damage to your through standing water. driving through standing water. This will
vehicle. (Continued) minimize wave effects.
(Continued)
If you must back down a hill, back straight down  Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
CAUTION! (Continued) using REVERSE gear. Never back down in These things could be a fire hazard. They
 Driving through standing water may cause NEUTRAL or diagonally across the hill. might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo- axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids terrain, shift to low gear and drive steadily.  After extended operation in mud, sand,
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for Apply the accelerator slowly to avoid spinning water, or similar dirty conditions, have the
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is
the wheels. radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake
milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of linings, and axle yokes inspected and
through standing water. Do not continue to
driving. cleaned as soon as possible.
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
4
contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by
After Driving Off-Road WARNING!
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Off-road operation puts more stress on your Abrasive material in any part of the brakes
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After may cause excessive wear or unpredictable
 Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine going off-road, it is always a good idea to check
can cause it to lock up and stall out, and braking. You might not have full braking
for damage. That way you can get any problems
cause serious internal damage to the power when you need it to prevent a collision.
taken care of right away and have your vehicle
engine. Such damage is not covered by the If you have been operating your vehicle in
ready when you need it.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and
 Completely inspect the underbody of your cleaned as necessary.
OFF-R OAD D RIVING TIPS vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.  If you experience unusual vibration after
Care should be taken when attempting to climb driving in mud, slush or similar conditions,
steep hills or driving diagonally across a hill or  Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
check the wheels for impacted material.
slope. If natural obstacles force you to travel clean as required.
Impacted material can cause a wheel imbal-
diagonally up or down a hill, choose a mild angle  Check threaded fasteners for looseness, ance and freeing the wheels of it will correct
and keep as little side tilt as possible. Keep the particularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo- the situation.
vehicle moving and make turns slowly and nents, steering, and suspension. Retighten
cautiously. them, if required, and torque to the values
specified in the Service Manual.
236
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your WARNING! (Continued)
For detailed information about your Uconnect
4C/4C NAV with 8.4-inch Display system or your systems or to reduce the potential risk of  As always, if you experience unusual
Uconnect 4C NAV with 12-inch Display system, unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual vehicle systems. nearest authorized dealer immediately.
Supplement. The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
NOTE:
NOTE: your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
Uconnect screen images are for illustration most recent version of vehicle software (such as  FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft- Uconnect software) is installed. directly regarding software updates.
ware for your vehicle.  To help further improve vehicle security and
WARNING! minimize the potential risk of a security
CYBERSECURITY  It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
breach, vehicle owners should:
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and  Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
may be equipped with both wired and wireless possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems
are breached. It may be possible that vehicle (US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to (Canadian Residents) to learn about
send and receive information. This information systems, including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control available Uconnect software updates.
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly. could occur that may result in an accident  Only connect and use trusted media
involving serious injury or death. devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain USBs, CDs).
security features to reduce the risk of  ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD)
into your vehicle if it came from a trusted Privacy of any wireless and wired
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle communications cannot be assured. Third
systems and wireless communications. Vehicle source. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if parties may unlawfully intercept information and
software technology continues to evolve over private communications without your consent.
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be breached. For further information, refer to “Data Collection
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, (Continued)
Supplement or Ú page 137.
MULTIMEDIA 237
UCONNECT SETTINGS CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE F EATURES For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, the
Uconnect 4/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display, and
The Uconnect system uses a combination of Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the Press the Apps button, then press the
instrument panel. These buttons allow you to Settings button on the touchscreen to display
access and change the Customer the menu setting screen. In this mode the
Programmable Features. Many features can Uconnect system allows you to access
vary by vehicle. programmable features.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below NOTE:
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition,  Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
settings may vary. 5
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll  All settings should be changed with the igni-
through menus and change settings. Push the tion in the ON/RUN position.
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting. When making a selection, only press one button
at a time to enter the desired menu. Once in the
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen desired menu, press and release the preferred
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate. setting “option” until a check mark appears
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to next to the setting, showing that setting has
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button been selected. Once the setting is complete,
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on. press the X button on the touchscreen to close
out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display Touchscreen Down Arrow button on the right side of the
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system. And Faceplate Buttons screen will allow you to toggle up or down
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen through the available settings.
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
238 MULTIMEDIA
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system
will display in the chosen language. The available setting is:
Setting Name Description

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The
Language
available languages are English, Français, and Español.
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of
the touchscreen. The available settings are:

This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the
system set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system
Display Mode
automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will
allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme — If Equipped This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
MULTIMEDIA 239

This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable
Keyboard — If Equipped keyboards are ABCDEF Keyboard, QWERTY Keyboard, and AZERTY
Keyboard.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically
Control Screen Timeout
after five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster — If Equipped
Display.
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
Instrument Cluster Display. 5
Fuel Saver Display This setting will enable fuel saver mode in the Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-ups in the Instrument
Ready To Drive Pop-ups — If Equipped
Cluster Display.
240 MULTIMEDIA
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will
display in the instrument cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:

US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L),
Custom
“Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Capacity”
(Gal [US], Gal [UK], or L) units of measurement independently.
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.

This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition
system. The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from
Voice Response Length
the system. The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description
from the system.
This setting will allow you to turn the command list on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the command list. The “With Help” setting will
Show Command List
show the command list and provide a brief description of what the
command does. The “Never” setting will turn the command list off.
MULTIMEDIA 241
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.

This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The
Sync Time With GPS
system will control the time via the GPS location.
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With
GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will
Set Time And Format/Time Format set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to
a 24-hour format.
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be
Set Time Hours off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours.
5
The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must
Set Time Minutes be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the
minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Camera — If Equipped
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
Setting Name Descriptions

This setting will add a timed delay to the surround view camera when
Surround View Camera Delay
shifting out of reverse.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the surround view camera guidelines on or off.
242 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Descriptions

This setting will add a timed delay to the rear backup camera when
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the backup camera active guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the backup camera fixed guidelines on or off.
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings.
These options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To
access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.

This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW
system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the
object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The
“Off” setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting
Forward Collision Warning will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The
“Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and
apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 243

This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will
LaneSense Warning provide lane departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”,
“Medium”, and “Late”.
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback
LaneSense Strength
during a lane departure. The available setting are “Low”, “Medium”, and
“High”.
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected. The “Sound Only” setting will provide an audible chime when
ParkSense
an object is detected. The “Sound and Display” setting will provide both
an audible chime and a visual display when an object is detected. 5
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The
Front ParkSense Volume
available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The
Rear ParkSense Volume
available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turned the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is
detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot
Blind Spot Alert Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the
outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights
on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
This setting will auto detect the length of an attached trailer. The “Auto”
Trailer Length For Blind Spot Alert setting will have the system automatically set the trailer length. The
“Max” setting will always set the length to the maximum 39.5 ft (12 m).
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
244 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will add a timed delay to the rear backup camera when
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.
This setting will raise and lower or stow the power side steps. The
Power Side Step — If Equipped available options are “Automatic” to raise and lower the power side steps
or “Stow” to deactivate the power side steps.
Mirrors & Wipers — If Equipped

When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.

This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position
when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. The available settings
are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the rain sensing auto wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
MULTIMEDIA 245
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options

Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
5
country of the vehicle purchased.

This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
Headlight Off Delay headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available
settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
Headlight Illumination On Approach headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings
are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
Flash Lights With Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
246 MULTIMEDIA

Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
This setting will turn the headlights with the steering wheel. The available
Steering Directed Lights — If Equipped
options are “On” or “Off”.
Doors & Locks

When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.

This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when
Auto Door Locks
the vehicle reaches 12 mph (19 km/h).
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from
Auto Unlock On Exit
the inside.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
Flash Lights With Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the
key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is
Sound Horn With Lock pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button
is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the
Lock button is pushed twice.
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from
Sound Horn With Remote Start
the key fob.
MULTIMEDIA 247

This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key
fob are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All
Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock
button.
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless
Passive Entry — If Equipped
Enter-N-Go) on or off.
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob — If Equipped
have been linked to the key fob.
5
Power Side Steps — If Equipped
When the Power Side Steps button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display setting related to the lowering of the power side steps.

This setting will raise and lower or stow the power side steps. The
Power Side Steps available options are “Automatic” to raise and lower the power side steps
and “Stow” to deactivate the power side steps.
248 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped

When Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort
systems when remote start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.

This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats
(if equipped) or heated steering wheel (if equipped) when the vehicle is
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the
Vehicle Start comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the
Easy Exit Seats
engine is shut off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options

When the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These
settings will only activate when the ignition is set to OFF.

Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine
Engine Off Power Delay is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
MULTIMEDIA 249

This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain
Headlight Off Delay on after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount
of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
This setting will automatically lower the vehicle ride height for easier
Auto Entry/Exit — If Equipped
entry and exit of the vehicle.
Suspension/Air Suspension — If Equipped

When the Suspension/Air Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s air suspension.

5
This setting will sound the horn when the Lower button is pressed on the
Sound Horn With Lower
key fob.
This setting will flash the lights when the Lower button is pressed on the
Flash Lights With Lower
key fob.
This setting will display suspension messages in the Instrument Cluster
Display Suspension Messages Display. The “All” setting will display all available messages. The
“Warnings Only” setting will only display warning messages.
Aero Mode This setting will automatically adjust the vehicle ride height depending on
the vehicle speed.
This setting will disable the air suspension system to assist in changing a
Tire Jack Mode
spare tire.
Transport Mode This setting will disable the air suspension system for flat towing.
250 MULTIMEDIA

This setting must be activated before performing a wheel alignment.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Refer to an authorized dealer for further information.
There are three air suspension modes designed to protect the system in
unique situations. Tire Jack Mode is selected to assist in changing a
Four Corner Air Suspension Modes spare tire. Transport Mode is selected to assist when the vehicle is being
flat bed towed. Wheel Alignment Mode is selected before performing a
wheel alignment. Refer to an authorized dealer for information.
AUX Switches — If Equipped

When the AUX Switches button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the four vehicle AUX switches.

This setting will adjust the type and power source for the four vehicle AUX
switches. There are two types: “Latching” and “Momentary”. The power
source for the AUX switches can either be set to run off the “Battery” or
from the “Ignition”. In addition to setting the type and power source, you
AUX 1-4
can set if the vehicle will recall the previous state at which the AUX
switches were set. The Recalled Last State setting can be set to “On” or
“Off”. Last state conditions are met only if the type is set to Latching and
the power source is set to Ignition.
MULTIMEDIA 251
Trailer Brake/Trailer
When the Trailer Brake/Trailer button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to trailer towing.

Select from Trailer 1, Trailer 2, Trailer 3, and Trailer 4. These trailer
Trailer Select
designations can be used to save different trailer settings.
This setting will set the system to a specific trailer type. The available
Trailer Brake Type options are “Light Electrics”, “Heavy Electric”, “Light
Electric-Over-Hydraulic”, and “Heavy Electric-Over-Hydraulic”.
This setting will personalize the trailer name depending on the type of
trailer you are hauling. Select the trailer name from the following list:
Trailer Name
trailer, boat, car, cargo, dump, equipment, flatbed, gooseneck, horse,
5
livestock, motorcycle, snowmobile, travel, utility, and 5th wheel.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change
the audio location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.

This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/
Balance/Fade back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set
audio location.
This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the
Equalizer
audio.
252 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher
Speed Adjusted Volume setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The
available setting are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound — If Equipped This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through
AUX Volume Offset
the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected
Auto Play
device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external
audio device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.

This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the instrument
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
cluster display.
This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb” settings menu. The settings
Do Not Disturb are Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto Reply Message (custom, default),
and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
MULTIMEDIA 253
SiriusXM® Setup
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can
be used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
Setting Name Selectable Options

This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune
Tune Start
to a music channel using one of the 12 presets.
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel
Channel Skip
list will display of the skipped channels.
5
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM®
Subscription Information
Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Reset/Restore Settings To Default

When the Reset/Restore Settings To Default button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect
system back to its default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.

This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
Restore Settings
default.
Reset App Drawer This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all
Clear Personal Data personal data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and
presets.
254 MULTIMEDIA
HEAD-UP DISPLAY (HUD) 2. Select the Custom option by pushing the

Right Arrow button on the steering wheel.
The Head-Up Display layout on the instrument
cluster can be customized through the NOTE:
Uconnect touchscreen. Each customized layout A message will appear on the instrument cluster
can be saved to the Driver Profiles that are display stating “Set Custom Layout in Radio”.
created by the different drivers.
On the Uconnect touchscreen, you can select
This feature is only accessed through the between four different custom layouts: Two
instrument cluster display once the “Custom” icons, Three icons, Four icons, and Five icons.
option is selected through the “Content & Press the Right or Left Arrow buttons, or the
Layout” tab. To begin customizing the HUD dots towards the bottom of the screen, to
layout through the instrument cluster display, change your layout.
follow these steps:
With your desired layout selected, you can drag
1. Through the instrument cluster display, and drop the available icons into the desired
using the Up and Down Arrow buttons on zones to customize the layout of your display.
the steering wheel, select the Content &
Layout option by pressing the OK button on
the steering wheel.
NOTE:
This option will not be available if the vehicle is
going more than 5 mph (8 km/h).
HUD Layout
MULTIMEDIA 255
The following are the available icons that can be customized in the cluster:
Feature Name Icon Description
Speed This icon will show the vehicle’s current speed.
This icon will show the upcoming direction for

Turn-By-Turn — If Equipped
Navigation.
This icon will show the current speed limit of the

Speed Limit
area you are driving in.
5
This icon will show information related to Driver
Driver Assist/Adaptive Cruise Control/Cruise
Assist, Adaptive Cruise Control, Cruise Control,
Control And Lane Sense — If Equipped
and Lane Sense.
This icon will show the current gear the vehicle

Gear
is in.
NOTE:
 After the HUD layout customization is completed, press the Save button located in the upper left corner of the touchscreen, and then the OK button
under the “Save changes?” screen. Once saved, the instrument cluster will display a message “Setting Saved”.
 Press the X button located in the upper right corner of the touchscreen, and then press the Cancel button to exit out of customizing the HUD layout.
Doing this will not retain any information customized in the layout view. The instrument cluster display will return to the layout options screen.
 Pressing any other menu item on the touchscreen, for example “Climate”, will take the user back to whatever screen they were previously on before
accessing the HUD layout Ú page 118.
256 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION NOTE:

Uconnect screen images are for illustration
SYSTEM O VERVIEW purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display

1 — Radio Button
2 — Compass Button
3 — Media Button
4 — Settings Button
5 — Phone Button
6 — More Button
7 — Volume & On/Off
8 — Mute Button
9 — Screen Off Button
10 — Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll Knob
MULTIMEDIA 257
Feature Description
Press the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media
Radio/Media Mode and access the radio functions and external audio sources
Ú page 259.
Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free
Phone
phone system Ú page 271.
Settings Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings Ú page 237.
Push the Enter/Browse button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted
selection on the screen. Rotate the Tune/Scroll rotary knob to scroll
through a list or tune a radio station.
5
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the Mute button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio
system off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume & On/Off
button on the faceplate to turn the system on or off.
Feature Description
Compass Press the Compass button to access the vehicle’s compass.
More Press the More button to access additional options.
258 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY AND GENERAL I NFORMATION  Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. NOTE:
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required, Many features of this system are speed depen-
Safety Guidelines park in a safe location and set the parking dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
brake. use some of the touchscreen features while the
WARNING! vehicle is in motion.
 Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the Failure to do so may cause injury or damage Care And Maintenance
steering wheel. You have full responsibility to the product. See an authorized dealer for
and assume all risks related to the use of the  Do not press the touchscreen with any hard
repair.
Uconnect features and applications in this or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry,
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to  Ensure the volume level of the system is set etc.), which could scratch the surface.
do so. Failure to do so may result in an to a level that still allows you to hear outside
 Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly
accident involving serious injury or death. traffic and emergency vehicles.
on the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the
Please read this manual carefully before using touchscreen.
 The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
the system. It contains instructions on how to tronic device. Do not let young children use  If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
use the system in a safe and effective manner. the system. with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water
 Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
Doing so can result in damage to the solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the
your music or sound system at loud volumes.
touchscreen. solvent manufacturer's precautions and
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
Please read and follow these safety directions Ú page 482.
the system.
precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury
or property damage.  Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
ture away from the system. Besides damage
to the system, moisture can cause electric
shocks as with any electronic device.
MULTIMEDIA 259
UCONNECT MODES The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with

a push button in the center. The function of the
RADIO MODE
STEERING W HEEL AUDIO CONTROLS left-hand control is different depending on Radio Controls
which mode you are in.
The remote sound system controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the The following describes the left-hand control
three and nine o’clock positions. operation in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for
the next available station and pushing the
bottom of the switch will Seek Down for the next
available station.
5
The button located in the center of the left-hand Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
control will tune to the next preset station that
1 — Preset Radio Stations
you have programmed in the radio presets.
2 — All Preset Radio Stations
Remote Sound System Controls Media Mode 3 — Seek Up
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next 4 — Audio Settings
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/ 5 — Station Info
with a push button in the center and controls
Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go 6 — Tune
the volume and mode of the sound system.
Pushing the top of the rocker switch will forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch 7 — Radio Band (AM/FM)
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of goes to the beginning of the current track, or the 8 — Seek Down
the rocker switch will decrease the volume. beginning of the previous track if it is within
eight seconds after the current track begins to
Pushing the center button will make the radio play. Double pressing the bottom button switch
switch between the various modes available will skip to the previous track if it is after eight
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.). seconds into the current track.
260 MULTIMEDIA
The radio is equipped with the following modes: Tune/Scroll Control station or channel when the button on the
 AM Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob touchscreen is released.
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to NOTE:
 FM
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
 SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped) Enter/Browse button to choose a selection. Seek Down button will scan the different
Seek frequency bands at a slower rate.
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to
enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner The Seek Up and Down functions are activated Info — If Equipped
modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pressing the double arrow buttons on the Press the Info button to display information
by pressing the corresponding buttons in Radio touchscreen to the right and left of the radio related to the currently playing song and radio
Mode. station display or by pressing the left steering station.
Volume & On/Off Control wheel audio control button up or down.
Direct Tune
Push the Volume & On/Off control knob to turn Seek Up and Seek Down
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of
on and off the Uconnect system. Press and release the Seek Up or Seek the radio screen to directly tune to a desired
The electronic volume control turns Down button to tune the radio to the next radio station or channel.
continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, available station or channel. During a Seek Up/
Press the available number button on the
without stopping. Turning the Volume & On/Off Down function, if the radio reaches the starting
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired
control knob clockwise increases the volume, station after passing through the entire band
station. Once a number has been entered, any
and counterclockwise decreases it. two times, the radio will stop at the station
numbers that are no longer possible (stations
where it began.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound that cannot be reached) will become
will be set at the same volume level as last Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down deactivated/grayed out.
played.
Press, hold, and then release the Seek Up or Undo
Mute Button Seek Down button to advance the radio You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Push the Mute button to mute or unmute the through the available stations or channels at a Back button on the touchscreen.
system. faster rate. The radio stops at the next available
MULTIMEDIA 261
GO SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If bill at then-current rates until you call
Once the last digit of a station has been Equipped SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See
entered, press “GO”. The Direct Tune screen will SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete
close, and the system will automatically tune to terms at www.siriusxm.com (US) or
that station. www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change.
Radio Voice Commands SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would USA and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is
like to hear. (Subscription or included also available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.) coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite 5
Push the VR button on the steering wheel Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To service area and in AK. © 2020 SiriusXM®
and wait for the beep to say a command. See SiriusXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and
some examples below.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
 “Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM” satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to This functionality is only available for radios
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content. equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
 “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service. receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your outside with a clear view to the sky.
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
push the VR button and say “Help”. The If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might
Manual kit for more information. have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
system provides you with a list of commands.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite
separately after the trial included with the new radio does not receive a signal in underground
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your parking garages or tunnels.
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and
262 MULTIMEDIA
No Subscription When in Satellite Mode:

Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver  The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. lighted.
When the Radio does not have the necessary
 The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the
subscription, the Radio is able to receive the
top of the screen.
Preview channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription  The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed
in the center.
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US visit siriusxm.com/  The Program Information is displayed at the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite
getallaccess or call: 1-800-643-2112 bottom of the Channel Number. Radio
Canada visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/ or call:  The SiriusXM® function buttons are 1 — Browse
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 displayed below the Program Information. 2 — Radio Bands
(French). 3 — Direct Tune
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
4 — Info Button
NOTE: Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
5 — Next Button
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID) In addition to the tuning operation functions
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen. common to all radio modes, the replay, Traffic/ Replay
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the Weather button, and Favorite button functions The replay function provides a means to store
SXM button on the touchscreen. are available in SiriusXM® Mode. and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and
48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is
switched, content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen.
The play/pause, rewind/forward and live
buttons will display at the top of the screen,
along with the replay time.
MULTIMEDIA 263
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Press the Pause/Play button on the

touchscreen to pause the playing of live or
Play/Pause rewound content at any time. Play can be
resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button
again on the touchscreen.
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to
rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen
Rewind
for more than two seconds rewinds the content.
The radio begins playing the content at the point
at which the press is released. 5
Each press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen forwards the content in steps of
five seconds. Forwarding of the content can only
be done when the content is previously
Forward rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live
content. A continuous press of the Forward
button on the touchscreen also forwards the
content. The radio begins playing the content at
the point at which the press is release.
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to
Live Live
resume the playing of live content.
264 MULTIMEDIA
Favorites Browse In SXM Favorites

Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to Press the Favorites button on the Browse
to activate the favorites menu, which will time edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump screen.
out within 20 seconds in absence of user settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit
interaction. Channel List.
the Favorites list and to configure the Alert
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of This Screen contains many submenus. You can Settings, along with providing a list of Channels
the X button. exit submenus to return to a parent menu by currently airing any of the items in the Favorites
The favorites feature enables you to set a pressing the Back arrow. list.
favorite artist or song that is currently playing. All You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the
The radio then uses this information to alert you Press the All button on the Browse Screen. Up and Down arrows located at the right side of
when either the favorite artist or song is being When pressing the All button, the following the screen. Scrolling can also be done by
played at any time by any of the SiriusXM® categories become available: operating the Tune/Scroll knob as well.
Channels.
 Channel List Press the Channel List to display Remove Favorites
The maximum number of favorites that can be all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
stored in the Radio is 50. scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and screen. Press the Delete All button on the
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set Down arrows, located on the right side of the touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or
a favorite artist, press the Favorites button on screen. Scrolling can also be done by oper- press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist ating the Tune/Scroll knob. be deleted.
button on the touchscreen.
 Genre List Press the Genre button on the Alert Settings
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set touchscreen to display a list of Genres. You
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
a favorite song, press the Favorites button on can select any desired Genre by pressing the
Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Song Genre List. The radio tunes to a channel with
allows you to choose from a visual alert or
button on the touchscreen. the content in the selected Genre.
audible and visual alert when one of your
favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
MULTIMEDIA 265
Game Zone Alert Settings The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the and are activated by pressing any of the Preset
of the Browse screen. This feature provides you screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to buttons, located at the top of the screen.
with the ability to select teams, edit the choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon When you are on a station that you wish to save
selection, and set alerts. start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when as a preset, press and hold the numbered
On Air one or more of your selections is airing on any button on the touchscreen for more than two
of the SiriusXM® channels. seconds.
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently Tune Start The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and Tune Start begins playing the current song from Radio Modes.
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the the beginning when you tune to a music For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
radio to that channel. channel using one of the 12 presets. This
feature occurs the first time the preset is
A set of four presets will appear on the screen. 5
Add/Delete — If Equipped Press the All button to view all saved presets. To
selected during that current song. remove a saved preset, a new preset must be
Press the Add/Delete button on the
touchscreen to activate the League Scroll list. Setting Presets saved over the old one.
Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all
teams within the league will appear, then you
can select a team by pressing the
corresponding box. A check mark appears for all
teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or
press the Trash Can icon next to the selection to Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets
be deleted.
266 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main
menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.

1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
4 — Surround Sound
5 — Loudness
6 — AUX Volume Offset
7 — Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
MULTIMEDIA 267
Audio Setting Description

Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio
between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front
Balance/Fade
speakers. Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right buttons or press and drag
the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Press the + or – buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or
Equalizer decrease each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”,
and “3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with
Speed Adjusted Volume
variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed 5
increases to compensate for normal road noise.
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every
Surround Sound — If Equipped
direction as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This
AUX Volume Offset alters the AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between
plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media
Auto Play — If Equipped device is connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is
turned on. Press Off to turn the setting off.
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped the driver or passenger door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay
selected time has expired.
268 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA M ODE the desired mode button on the touchscreen. On the Uconnect 3 with 5-inch Display, if you
USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the Media insert a USB device with the ignition ON, the unit
Operating Media Mode sources available. When available, you can will switch to USB Mode and begin to play. The
select the Browse button on the touchscreen to display will show the track number and index
be given these options: time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at
 Now Playing the start of track 1.
 Artists Bluetooth® Mode

Overview
 Albums
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth®
 Genres Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth®
 Songs device, containing music, to the Uconnect
system.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode  Playlists
1 — Seek Down Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
 Folders be paired to the Uconnect Phone to
2 — Seek Up
communicate with the Uconnect system.
3 — Additional Functions For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media
4 — Info Mode is entered by pushing the Media button On the Uconnect 3 with 5-inch Display, push the
5 — Pause/Play located on the faceplate. Media button located on the faceplate. Once in
6 — Source Media Mode, press the Source button on the
Types of Media Modes touchscreen and select the Bluetooth® button
7 — Browse
Ú page 271.
USB Mode
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the
button located on the faceplate. Overview
Bluetooth® button on the left side of the
USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB touchscreen or under the Source Select/Select
Audio Source Selection device into the USB Port, or by pressing the Source button (if equipped).
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Media button on the faceplate and then
Source Select button on the touchscreen and selecting the USB button.
MULTIMEDIA 269
AUX Mode Seek Up / Seek Down button on the touchscreen on the left side of the
Overview screen. The center of the browse window shows
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
items and its sub-functions, which can be
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
scrolled through by pressing the Up and Down
AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio device. Press and release the Seek Down
buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob can
jack into the AUX port or pushing the Media button on the touchscreen to return to the
also be used to scroll.
button on the faceplate and then selecting the beginning of the current selection, or to return
Source button and then the AUX button. to the beginning of the previous selection if the On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, rotate
USB device is within the first three seconds of the Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the through and select a desired track on the
the current selection.
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX Port. If you device. Press the Exit button on the
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the
touchscreen if you wish to cancel the Browse
the radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next
function. 5
and begin to play. selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the Media Mode
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., current selection, or return to the beginning of touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) the previous selection if the Bluetooth® device USB.
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device is within the first second of the current
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on
selection.
Volume button, Volume/Mute rotary knob, or the touchscreen to select the desired audio
Browse source: Bluetooth®.
the On/Off rotary knob, or with the volume of
the attached device. In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to display the browse window. In touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
NOTE: USB Mode, the left side of the browse window AUX.
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio displays a list of ways you can browse through
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the contents of the USB device. If supported by
the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set the device, you can browse by Folder, Artist,
too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired
the radio unit to play the music on the device.
270 MULTIMEDIA
Repeat Info Media Voice Commands

In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Info Uconnect offers connections via USB,
touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality. button on the touchscreen to display the Bluetooth®, and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice
The Repeat button on the touchscreen is current track information. Press the Info or X operation is only available for connected USB
highlighted when active. The Radio will continue button on the touchscreen a second time to and AUX devices.
to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as cancel this feature.
Push the VR button located on the steering
the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button Tracks wheel. After the beep, say one of the following
again to enter Repeat All. The radio will continue
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Tracks commands and follow the prompts to switch
to play all the current tracks, repeatedly, as long
button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up your media source or choose an artist.
as the repeat function is active. To cancel
Repeat, press the Repeat button a third time. with the Song List. The song currently playing is  “Change source to Bluetooth®”
indicated by an arrow and lines above and
Shuffle below the song title. When in the Tracks List  “Change source to AUX”
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the screen you can rotate the Tune/Scroll knob to  “Change source to USB”
touchscreen to play the selections on the USB highlight a track (indicated by the line above
device in random order to provide an interesting and below the track name) and then push the  “Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the Enter/Browse knob to start playing that track. Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device
off. supports this feature, press the Tracks button Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
Audio on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
Song List. The currently playing song is device. Your Voice Command must match
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the
indicated by a red arrow and lines above and exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre
Audio button Ú page 259.
below the song title. information is displayed.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the
pop-up.
MULTIMEDIA 271
PHONE MODE Screen Activated Features For Uconnect customer support:

 Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.  US visit UconnectPhone.com or call
Overview
877-855-8400
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,  Viewing and Calling contacts from Phone-
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system. books displayed on the touchscreen.  Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
It allows you to dial a phone number with your 800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
 Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so
mobile phone. 800-387-9983
they are easily accessible on the Main Phone
The feature supports the following: screen. Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as
Voice Activated Features  Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent
you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Call logs.
 mute the system's microphone for private
Smith Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”). conversation.
 Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS 5
 Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your Messages.
incoming SMS messages. WARNING!
 Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for
easy access to connect to them quickly. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
 Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to NOTE: and assume all risks related to the use of the
incoming calls/text messages. Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging Uconnect features and applications in this
 Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”). via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
properly. do so. Failure to do so may result in an
 Calling Back the last incoming call number
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted accident involving serious injury or death.
(“Call Back”).
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
 Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming will automatically mute your radio when using The Phone feature is driven through your
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed the Uconnect Phone. Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”). Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
 Searching Contacts phone number (“Search global standard that enables different
for John Smith Mobile”). electronic devices to connect to each other
272 MULTIMEDIA
without wires or a docking station. Ensure you Phone Operation  For each feature explanation in this section,
phone is turned on with Bluetooth® active and only the compound command form of the
has been paired to the Uconnect system. Up to Operation voice command is given. You can also break
10 mobile phones or audio devices are allowed Voice commands can be used to operate the the commands into parts and say each part
to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu of the command when you are asked for it.
paired) mobile phone and one audio device can structure. Voice commands are required after For example, you can use the compound
be used with the system at a time. most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two command form voice command “Search for
general methods for how Voice Command John Smith,” or you can break the compound
Phone Button
works: command form into two voice commands:
The Phone button on your steering wheel is “Search Contacts” and when asked, “John
used to get into the Phone Mode and make 1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls, Smith mobile”. Phone works best when you talk in a normal
view phonebook, etc. When you press the conversational tone, as if speaking to
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your someone sitting a few feet/meters away from
system to guide you to complete the task.
signal to give a command. you.
Voice Command Button You will be prompted for a specific command Natural Speech
and then guided through the available options.
The Voice Command button on your steering Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a
 Prior to giving a voice command, one must Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR)
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you
wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen” engine.
are already in a call or want to make another
prompt or another prompt.
call. Natural speech allows the user to speak
 For certain operations, compound commands in phrases or complete sentences.
The button on your steering wheel is also used
commands can be used. For example, The system filters out certain non-word
to access the Voice Commands for the
instead of saying “Call” and then “John utterances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.”
Uconnect Voice Command features if your
Smith” and then “mobile”, the following The system handles fill-in words such as “I
vehicle is equipped.
compound command can be said: “Call John would like to”.
Smith mobile.”
MULTIMEDIA 273
The system handles multiple inputs in the same Cancel Command

phrase or sentence such as “make a phone At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
call” and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in “Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
the same phrase or sentence, the system menu.
identifies the topic or context and provides the
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do You can also push the VR button or Phone
you want to call?” in the case where a phone button on your steering wheel when the system
call was requested but the specific name was is listening for a command and be returned to
not recognized. the main or previous menu.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
system requires more information from the To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must NOTE:
user, it will ask a question to which the user can pair your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled 5
respond without pushing the Voice Command mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the  You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
button on the steering wheel. process of establishing a wireless connection phone to complete this procedure.
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Help Command 
system.
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you Follow the steps below to pair your phone:
want to know your options at any prompt, say To complete the pairing process, you will need
“Help” following the beep. to reference your mobile phone’s manual. 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete position.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, mobile phone compatibility information.
simply push the Phone button (if active) on your 2. Press the Phone button.
steering wheel and say a command or say
“Help”. All Phone sessions begin with a push of
the VR button or Phone button on the radio
faceplate.
274 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: 5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or Bluetooth® audio device can be connected
 If there are no phones currently connected
Settings button from the Uconnect Phone to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking
main screen. selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
if you would like to pair a mobile phone.
 Press the Paired Phones button. mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
 This pop-up only appears when the user screen, and the Uconnect system will
enters Phone Mode and no other device(s)  Search for available devices on your reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.
have previously been paired. If the system Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone, NOTE:
has a phone previously paired, even if no
select “Uconnect” and accept the For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone is currently connected with the
system, this pop-up will not appear. connection request. phone priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The most recent phone
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. 6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress paired will have the higher priority.
screen while the system is connecting.
4. Search for available devices on your NOTE:
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. 7. When your mobile phone finds the During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.” pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
 Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone. 8. When prompted on the mobile phone, system to access your “messages” and
accept the connection request from “contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
 Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is your contacts with the Uconnect system.
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile Uconnect.
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth® 9. When the pairing process has successfully You can also use the following VR command to
connections. completed, the system will prompt you to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any
choose whether or not this is your favorite screen on the radio:
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone  “Show Paired Phones”
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within NOTE:
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the Software updates on your phone or the
PIN from the pop-up on your mobile phone. range and will connect to the Uconnect
system automatically when entering the Uconnect system may interfere with the Blue-
MULTIMEDIA 275
tooth® connection. If this happens, simply Disconnecting or Deleting A Phone Or Audio 4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
repeat the pairing process. However, first make Device
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
sure to delete the device from the list of phones
Device button on the touchscreen.
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your 6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
phone’s Bluetooth® settings. screen.
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
Audio Device After Pairing
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio sources
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to
screen, press the Settings button located
the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio
to the right of the device name for a
Device within range. If you need to choose a
particular phone or audio device follow these Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
different phone or audio device than the 5
currently connected device or press the
steps: 1 — Disconnect Device Or Disconnect Phone preferred “Connected Phone” from the list.
1. Press the Settings button on the 2 — Make Favorite
3 — Delete Device/Phone 2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
touchscreen.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources 1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
buttons. Settings button.
move to the top of the list.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the 2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will buttons.
screen.
appear; press “Connect Phone”.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings right of the device name for a different Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
screen. phone or audio device than the currently Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
connected device or press the preferred If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone
Connected Phone from the list. has the ability to download contact names and
number entries from the mobile phone’s
276 MULTIMEDIA
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with  Only the phonebook of the currently To Remove A Favorite — If Equipped
Phonebook Access Profile may support this connected mobile phone is accessible.
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites”
feature. Your mobile phone may receive a
 This downloaded phonebook cannot be from the Phone main screen.
pop-up asking for permission for the Uconnect
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
system to access your messages and contacts. 2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon next to the
These can only be edited on the mobile
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts contact you want to remove from your
phone. The changes are transferred and
with the Uconnect system. favorites. This will bring up the options for
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
See the Uconnect website, phone connection. that Favorite contact.
UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones. 3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the
Managing Your Favorites — If Equipped
 To call a name from a downloaded mobile Favorite.
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
phonebook, follow the procedure in the
“Voice Command” in this section. favorites: Phone Call Features
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press The following features can be accessed through
 Automatic download and update of a phone-
the Favorites button on the touchscreen, the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
and then press one of the +Add Favorite available and supported by Bluetooth® on your
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
Contact buttons that appears on the list. mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example,
service plan provides three-way calling, this
after you start the vehicle. 2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
 A maximum of 5,000 contact names with “Contacts” from the Phone main screen, Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
four numbers per contact will be downloaded and then select the appropriate number. for the features that you have.
and updated every time a phone is Press the Down Arrow button next to the
selected number to display the option’s Listed below are the phone options with
connected to the Uconnect Phone.
pop-up. In the pop-up, select “Add to Uconnect:
 Depending on the maximum number of entries Favorites”.  Redial
downloaded, there may be a short delay before
the latest downloaded names can be used. NOTE:  Dial by pressing in the number
Until then, if available, the previously down- If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
loaded phonebook is available for use. remove an existing favorite.
MULTIMEDIA 277
 Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Other phone call features include: These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or  End Call Calls button on the phone main screen.
Call Back)
You can also push the VR button on your
 Hold/Unhold/Resume
 Favorites steering wheel and perform the above
 Swap two active calls operation. For example, say “Show my incoming
 Mobile Phonebook calls”.
Key Pad Number Entry
 Recent Call Log
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
1. Press the Phone button. Currently In Progress
 SMS Message Viewer
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
Call Controls
touchscreen. the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
The touchscreen allows you to control the audio system. Push the Phone button on the
following call features: 3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed. 5
steering wheel, press the Answer button on the
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreen.
touchscreens to enter the number and
press “Dial/Call”.
Recent Calls — If Equipped

You may browse a list of the most recent of each
of the following call types:
 All Calls
 Incoming Calls or Calls Received
1 — Answer  Outgoing Calls or Calls Made Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
2 — Mute/Unmute  Missed Calls 1 — Answer Button
3 — Transfer 2 — Caller ID Box
4 — Ignore
278 MULTIMEDIA
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
Currently In Progress text message, a call, or both when declining an During an active call, press the Hold or Call On
If a call is currently in progress and you have incoming call and send it to voicemail. Hold button on the Phone main screen.
another incoming call, you will hear the same Automatic reply messages can be:
network tones for call waiting that you normally Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
 “I am driving right now, I will get back to you Progress
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
shortly”.
Phone button on the steering wheel, press the You can place a call on hold by pressing the
Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the  Create a custom auto reply message up to Hold button on the Phone main screen, then
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold 160 characters. dial a number from the keypad (if supported by
and answer the incoming call. your mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or
NOTE:
from the phonebooks.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect touchscreen while typing a custom message. Toggling Between Calls
system in the market today do not support
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
rejecting an incoming call when another call is
selected so you can still place a second call
in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
an incoming call or ignore it.
NOTE:
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable  Reply with text message is not compatible
notifications from incoming calls and texts, with iPhones®.
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and  Auto reply with text message is only available
hands on the wheel. For your convenience, on phones that support Bluetooth® Message
there is a counter display to keep track of your Access Profile (MAP). Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
missed calls and text messages while Do Not
Disturb is active.
MULTIMEDIA 279
If two calls are in progress (one active and one Call Continuation  Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
on hold), press the Swap Calls button on the Call continuation is the progression of a phone would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
phone main screen. Only one call can be placed call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle meters away from you
on hold at a time. ignition has been switched to OFF.  Ensure that no one other than you is
You can also push the Phone button to toggle speaking during a voice command period
NOTE:
between the active and held phone call.
The call will remain within the vehicle audio  Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Join Calls system until the phone becomes out of range
for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recom-  Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
When two calls are in progress (one active and
mended to press the Transfer button on the  Low Road Noise
one on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls Call
touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
button the Phone main screen to combine all  Smooth Road Surface
calls into a conference call. Advanced Phone Connectivity 5
 Fully Closed Windows
Call Termination Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
 Dry Weather Conditions
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
End Call button on the touchscreen or the transferred from your mobile phone without
Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only WARNING!
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there from your connected mobile phone to the ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
is a call on hold, it will become the new active Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the wheel. You have full responsibility and
call. Transfer button on the Phone main screen. assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
Redial Things You Should Know About Uconnect vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
Push the VR button and after the “Listening” Phone do so. Failure to do so may result in an
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.” accident involving serious injury or death.
Voice Command
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number For the best performance: Even though the system is designed for many
that was dialed from your mobile phone. languages and accents, the system may not
 Always wait for the beep before speaking
always work for some.
280 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and Did You Know: When providing a Voice
It is recommended that you do not store names loudness to a large degree rely on the phone Command, push the Phone button and say
in your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is and network, and not the Uconnect Phone. “Call”, then pronounce the name exactly as it
in motion. Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced appears in your phone book. When a contact
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
Number and name recognition rate is optimized
John Smith work”.
when the entries are not similar. You can say Phone Voice Commands
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero). Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Making and answering hands-free phone calls
Even though international dialing for most is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook Uconnect can announce incoming text
number combinations is supported, some button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your messages. Push the VR button or Phone
shortcut dialing number combinations may not system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for button and say:
be supported. mobile phone compatibility and pairing 1. “Listen” to have the system read an
Audio Performance instructions. incoming text message. (Must have
Audio quality is maximized under: Push the Phone button and wait for the beep compatible mobile phone paired to
to say a command. See some examples below: Uconnect system.)
 Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
 “Call John Smith” 2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
 Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed been read.
 “Dial 123 456 7890”
 Low Road Noise Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
 “Redial” (call previous outgoing phone beep, repeat one of the predefined messag-
 Smooth Road Surface
number) es and follow the system prompts.
 Fully Closed Windows
 “Call back” (call previously answered
 Dry Weather Conditions incoming phone number)
 Operation From The Driver's Seat

MULTIMEDIA 281
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
full implementation of the Message Access Profile Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
RESPONSES (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For steering wheel. After you hear a double beep,
Stuck in details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com. you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
Yes. See you later.
traffic. directions, read text messages, and many other
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
Start without incoming text messages only. For further useful requests.
No. I’ll be late.
me. information on how to enable this feature on Bluetooth® Communication Link
Where are I will be 5 <or your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s®
Okay. Mobile phones may lose connection to the
you? 10, 15, 20, “User Manual”.
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
25, 30, 45, Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not
Are you there 60> minutes connection can generally be re-established by
Call me. compatible with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone
yet? late. equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your is recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON 5
I’ll call you I need See you in 5 voice to send a text message. mode.
later. directions. <or 10, 15, Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
20, 25, 30, Power-Up
I’m on my 45, 60> When used with your Apple® iPhone®
Can’t talk After switching the ignition key from OFF to
way. minutes. connected to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri
right now. either the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a
lets you use your voice to send text messages, language change, you must wait at least
I’m lost. Thanks.
select media, place phone calls and much 15 seconds prior to using the system
NOTE: more. Siri uses your natural language to Ú page 482.
Only use the numbering listed in the provided understand what you mean and responds back
table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose to confirm your requests. The system is
the message. designed to keep your eyes on the road and
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
282 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES — IF WARNING!

Uconnect Phone Customer Support
UconnectPhone.com or for US residents call:
EQUIPPED ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to 1-877-855-8400.
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
I S M Y VEHICLE CONNECTED? on the steering wheel. You have full Canadian residents call: 1-800-465-2001
Vehicles with an Assist and an SOS button are responsibility and assume all risks related to (English) or call: 1-800-387-9983 (French).
connected vehicles. These buttons will be the use of the features and applications in Business Hours
located on either the rearview mirror or this vehicle. Only use the features and
Central Time
overhead console, depending on the vehicle. If applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
these buttons are present in your vehicle, you to comply may result in an accident involving  Monday through Friday – 7:00 am to 10:00 pm
have a connected radio and can take serious injury or death.
 Saturday – 8:00 am to 9:00 pm
advantage of the many connected vehicle
features. NOTE: What Is SiriusXM Guardian™?
For further information about the ASSIST and SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection, SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device
SOS buttons Ú page 373. transmission and use of data from your vehicle in the Uconnect system installed in your vehicle,
Ú page 306. which receives GPS signals and communicates
I NTRODUCTION TO C ONNECTED V EHICLE with the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
SERVICES SiriusXM Guardian™ Contact Information center via wireless and landline
And Business Hours communications networks. Depending on the
One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s
SiriusXM Guardian™/Care type of device in your vehicle, some SiriusXM
Uconnect system is that you can now take
advantage of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected  US residents visit: https://www.driveucon- Guardian™ services require an operable LTE
vehicle services. To unlock the full potential of nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html or call (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network
SiriusXM Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first 1-844-796-4827 compatible with your device. SiriusXM
need to activate SiriusXM Guardian™ services. Guardian™ is available only on equipped
 Canadian residents visit: https://www.siri- vehicles purchased within the continental
usxm.ca/guardian-v1/ or call United States, Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and
1-877-324-9091 Canada.
MULTIMEDIA 283
NOTE:  Send & Go capability with the Uconnect App. 2. Select the Activate Services icon from your
 Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are Use the Uconnect App to easily search, map list of apps.
dependent upon an operative telematics and send your locations directly to your
Uconnect Navigation. 3. For customers in the United States, select
device, a cellular connection, navigation map “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
data, and GPS satellite signal reception, which  The ability to locate your vehicle, when you Guardian™ Customer Care agent who will
can limit the ability to reach the response forget where you parked, using the Vehicle activate services in your vehicle, or select
center or reach emergency support. Finder function of the Uconnect App. “Enter Email” to activate on the web.
 Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the For customers in Canada, enter your email
available everywhere at all times, particularly easy-to-use Uconnect system and SiriusXM address to activate services in your vehicle.
in remote or enclosed areas. Guardian™ services.
 Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Guardian™ that may limit or prevent service Rearview Mirror Or Overhead Console Your new vehicle may come with an included 5
delivery are hills, structures, buildings, trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian™
The ASSIST Button is used for contacting
tunnels, weather, damage to the electrical services starting on the date of vehicle
Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Uconnect
system or other important parts of your purchase. To get started with your trial,
Care, and SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
vehicle, network congestion, civil distur- enrollment in SiriusXM Guardian™ is required.
The SOS Call button connects you directly to
bances, actions of third parties or the govern- The Uconnect 4C/4C NAV includes a trial* of
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care for
ment, Internet failure, and/or the physical SiriusXM Guardian™ services from your date of
location of your vehicle, such as in an under- assistance in an emergency.
purchase.
ground parking structure or under a bridge. Activation * Included trial applies to new vehicles only.
Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
available for all models. Guardian™ in your vehicle, you must activate Features And Packages
SiriusXM Guardian™ provides: your SiriusXM Guardian™ services. After the trial period, you must purchase a
subscription to continue your services by calling
 The ability to remotely lock/unlock and remote 1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
start your vehicle from virtually anywhere by in-vehicle touchscreen.
using the Uconnect App or your computer.
284 MULTIMEDIA
GETTING S TARTED WITH CONNECTED  Download the Uconnect app to your mobile
device.
V EHICLE SERVICES
 Use your Owner Account login and password
Download The Uconnect App to open the app and then set up a PIN.
Once you have activated your services, you’re
only a few steps away from using connected
services.
 For customers in the United States, visit

www.mopar.com, and click the Sign In/
Register button in the upper right-hand
corner to register your account online.
a. Click the Register button
b. Select the correct country and email
address then click “Register”.
Uconnect Mobile App c. You will then receive an email notification

to confirm/verify your newly created
1 — Settings
account.
2 — Vehicle Info
3 —Remote Commands
4 — Location And Send & Go
MULTIMEDIA 285
d. After clicking the email link, it will take c. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confir- service history, find recommended accessories
you to a website and prompt you to mation email will be sent to the provided for your vehicle, watch videos about your
assign your account with a password. email address. vehicle's features, and easily access your
e. Once you have added a password, the d. Press “Continue Activation” from the manuals. It is also where you can manage your
website will direct you to your homepage confirmation email. It may take a short SiriusXM Guardian™ account. This section will
where you can add in your vehicle’s VIN. time before remote services will be avail- familiarize you with the key elements of the
able, but you will be able to log into the website that will help you get the most of your
a. Click the Register button SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
Uconnect App and the owner’s site.
b. Select the correct country and email For customers in the United States, press the
address then click “Register”.  Once on the Remote screen and you have set
up your four-digit PIN, you can begin using Sign In/Register button and enter your email
c. You will then receive an email notification Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle address and password.
to confirm/verify your newly created Start, and activate your horn and lights For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle 5
account. remotely, if equipped. button. Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle
d. After clicking the email link, it will take  Press the Location button on the bottom Health Report”, and “Recalls”. The website will
you to a website and prompt you to menu bar of the app to bring up a map to then prompt you to log-in using your email
assign your account with a password. locate your vehicle or send a location to your address and password.
e. Once you have added a password, the Uconnect Navigation, if equipped.  Edit/Edit Profile:
website will direct you to your homepage  Press the Settings side menu in the upper left To manage the details of your SiriusXM
where you can add in your vehicle’s VIN. corner of the app to bring up app settings and Guardian™ account, such as your contact
 For customers in Canada, register your access the Assist Call Centers. information, password and SiriusXM
account via your vehicle. Guardian™ PIN, click on the Edit/Edit Profile
Using Your Owner’s Site
button to access the details of your account.
a. Press the Apps button in the bottom Your Owner’s Site website
menu bar. https://www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US
b. Press the Activate Services button from Residents), or www.mopar.ca (Canadian
the apps list. Residents) provides you with all the information
you need, all in one place. You can track your
286 MULTIMEDIA
 Connected Services Status: 3. Once there, select “SiriusXM Guardian™” SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
This statement will indicate your SiriusXM where can edit Notification Preferences. Features
Guardian™-equipped vehicle. 4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
 Remote Commands: address to notify you, and you can onboard assistance features located on the
customize the types of messages. rearview mirror or overhead console designed
For vehicles with an active SiriusXM
to enhance your driving experience if you should
Guardian™ subscription, press one of these
icons and enter your four-digit SiriusXM USING S IRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ ever need assistance or support.
Guardian™ Security PIN to remotely start (if Description
SOS Call
equipped), lock/unlock doors or sound the SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in contact
horn and flash the lights. WARNING! with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent
Editing Your Notifications Some SiriusXM Guardian™ services, in the event of an emergency. When the
Notifications are an important element of your including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance connection between the vehicle and the live
SiriusXM Guardian™ account. For example, any Call will NOT work without a network agent is made, your vehicle will automatically
time you use your remote services (such as connection compatible with your device. transmit location information. In the event of a
Remote Door Unlock), you can elect to receive a minor collision, medical or any other emergency,
text message, push notification, and/or E-mail press the SOS button to be connected to a call
Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A
to notify you of the event. To set up the center agent who can send emergency
Button
notifications, please follow these instructions. assistance to your vehicle’s location.
Center Light Status Description NOTE:
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents) Off No call activated Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
and select “Dashboard”, or www.mopar.ca dependent on an operational Uconnect system,
Green Active call in progress
(Canadian Residents), select “My Vehicle” cellular network availability that is compatible
Red System error with the device in your vehicle, and GPS
and then “Dashboard”.
network availability. Not all features of SiriusXM
2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button. Guardian™ are available everywhere at all
times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
MULTIMEDIA 287
How It Works purposes. Through your enrollment in and use These include, but are not limited to, the
of the SiriusXM Guardian™ services, you following factors:
1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator
consent to being recorded.  The ignition key is in OFF position.
light will turn green indicating a call has
been placed. SOS Call System Limitations
 The vehicle’s electrical systems are not
NOTE: Vehicles that have been purchased in the US intact.
and that travel into Mexico and Canada may
 In case the SOS Call button is accidentally have limited services. In particular, responses  The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
pushed, there is a 10-second delay before to SOS calls or other emergency services may disconnected during a vehicle crash.
the SOS call is placed. The system will be unavailable or very limited. Vehicles  The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
verbally alert you that a call is about to be purchased outside the United States and ware is damaged during a vehicle crash.
made. To cancel the SOS Call connection, Canada are unable to receive SiriusXM
push the SOS Call button on the rearview Guardian™ services.  LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) coverage 5
mirror or press the Cancel button on the and/or GPS signals are unavailable or
touchscreen within 10 seconds. If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, obstructed.
any of the following may occur at the time the
 During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth® paired Network congestion.
malfunction is detected: 
phone is disconnected so incoming or
outgoing calls will go through your mobile  The light will continuously be illuminated red.  Weather conditions.
device versus the hands-free system which is
 The screen will display the following message  Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
not available due to the SOS Call.
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please tunnels.
2. Once a connection between the vehicle and a contact your dealer.”
If your vehicle loses battery power for any
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent is An in-vehicle audio message will state
 reason (including during or after an accident)
made, the agent will stay on the line with you. “Vehicle phone requires service. Please the SOS Call System, among other vehicle
NOTE: contact your dealer.” systems, will not operate.
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center may
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
be recorded or monitored for quality assurance
prevent or stop SOS Call system operation.
288 MULTIMEDIA
Requirements
 This feature is available only on vehicles sold
in the US or Canada.  Do not add any aftermarket electrical equip-  Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could
ment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This mean you will not have SOS Call services if
 Vehicle must be properly equipped with the may prevent your vehicle from sending a needed. If the Rearview Mirror Light is illu-
SiriusXM Guardian™ system. Vehicle must be signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid minated, have an authorized dealer service
registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and interference that can cause the SOS Call the SOS Call system immediately.
have an active subscription that includes the system to fail, never add aftermarket equip-
applicable feature.  If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
ment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio,
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/ data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s elec-
 road conditions or location), do not wait for
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection trical system or modify the antennas on your
voice contact from a SiriusXM Guardian™
compatible with your device. vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES POWER
Customer Care agent. All occupants should
FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR
 Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or exit the vehicle immediately and move to a
AFTER AN ACCIDENT), NEITHER THE UCON-
ACC (Accessory) position with a properly func- safe location.
NECT APPS NOR THE SIRIUSXM
tioning electrical system. GUARDIAN™ SERVICES WILL OPERATE.  Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
and regular inspection of your vehicle may
WARNING!  The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
result in vehicle damage, accident or injury.
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the
 Never place anything on or near the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part
vehicle’s LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G of the air bag system is detected. If the Air Bag
(data) and GPS antennas. You could Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and system may not be working properly and the
GPS signal reception, which can prevent SOS Call system may not be able to send a
your vehicle from placing an emergency signal to the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
call. Care center. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illu-
(Continued) minated, have an authorized dealer service
your vehicle immediately.
(Continued)
MULTIMEDIA 289
Remote Commands Press this button to

3 — Vehicle Start
On the Remote Commands screen, you have start your vehicle.
access to several vehicle features that can be 4 — Cancel Vehicle Press this button to
controlled remotely from your mobile device. Start cancel remote start.
These features include locking/unlocking, Press this button to
remote starting, and activating the horn and 5 — Horn & Lights sound the horn and
lights of the vehicle. activate your lights.
Remote Commands lets you send a request to

your vehicle in one of three ways:
 Anywhere using your mobile device and
Uconnect App 5
 From your computer on the Owner’s Site (not
available on all functions)
 Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care (not available on all functions)
Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile
Device And The Uconnect App
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon
on your mobile device.
Remote Commands 2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your
Press this button to SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
1 — Lock
lock your vehicle. same four-digit code established when you
Press this button to
2 — Unlock
unlock your vehicle.
290 MULTIMEDIA
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™ 4. You will then be asked to enter your Remote Door Lock/Unlock
system). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™ SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the Description
Security PIN on the keypad. same four-digit code established when you
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™ The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides
3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the system). Please enter your SiriusXM you the ability to lock or unlock the door on your
command to go through to your vehicle. Guardian™ Security PIN. vehicle without the keys and from virtually any
distance.
4. A message will let you know if the command 5. A message will appear on the screen to let
was received by your vehicle. you know if the command was received by Working Vehicle Conditions
your vehicle.  The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
Using A Remote Command Through Your
Owner’s Site Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care  The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
(for example, in case of an accidental lock-out): tower reception.
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the
username and password you used when 1. Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer  Your mobile device must have a cellular or
activating your SiriusXM Guardian™ Care if you are unable to lock your vehicle Wi-Fi connection.
services in your vehicle. through the Uconnect App or your key fob.
Requirements
NOTE: 2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM
If you forgot your username or password, links  Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Guardian™ Customer Care agent will verify
are provided on the website to help you retrieve SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
your identity by asking for your four-digit
them. SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
2. If you have more than one vehicle 3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™ data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
registered into your Owner’s Site, select the Security PIN, you can ask them to perform a If using the Uconnect App to command your
vehicle you want to send the command to by remote command. vehicle, your device must be compatible and
clicking on its image along the top. be connected to an operable LTE (voice/
NOTE: data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
3. On your dashboard, you will see remote Anyone with access to your PIN may request
commands. Press the desired icon to Remote Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsi-  Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
activate that feature. bility to protect your PIN appropriately. Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
MULTIMEDIA 291
 An ignition cycle is required for some remote This remote function requires your vehicle to be  The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start tower reception.
and Remote Door Lock/Unlock if following a system.
 Your mobile device must have a cellular or
Remote Horn & Lights activation.
You can set up push notifications every time a Wi-Fi connection.
 Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will command is sent to activate or cancel Remote
Start.  If the Panic button has been pressed, the
not be processed if the vehicle is in motion,
vehicle must be started at least once after
the ignition key is on or during an emergency Working Vehicle Conditions alarming the system.
call.
 The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode.
NOTE:
NOTE:
 The vehicle has been started with the key fob The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents
All other remote services should be performed
within the last 14 days. are not authorized for Remote Vehicle Start
via your Owner’s Site or through the Uconnect
App on your compatible device.
services. Contact the Uconnect Care Team for 5
 The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill. assistance
Remote Vehicle Start  The vehicle’s security system has been
Remote Horn & Lights
Description armed and not triggered since the last
vehicle start. Description
The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you
with the ability to start the engine on your It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded
 The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are
vehicle without the keys and from virtually any or noisy parking area by activating the horn and
closed.
distance. Once started, the preset climate lights. It may also help if you need to draw
controls in your vehicle can warm up or cool  The vehicle’s check engine light must be off. attention to your vehicle for any reason.
down the interior.  The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank If you want, you can set up push notifications
You can also send a command to turn off an of fuel, along with oil and battery power. every time a command is sent to turn on the
engine that has been started using Remote horn and lights.
 The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off.
Vehicle Start. After 15 minutes, if you have not
entered your vehicle with the key, the engine  If equipped, the vehicle must have an auto-
will shut off automatically. matic transmission.
292 MULTIMEDIA
Working Vehicle Conditions  Roadside Assist — If you get a flat tire or need How It Works
 The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill. a tow, you’ll be connected to someone who Simply press the ASSIST button in the vehicle
can help anytime.
and you will be presented with your ASSIST
 The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
 Connected Services — Contact the SiriusXM options on the touchscreen. Make your
tower reception.
Guardian™ Customer Care call center to acti- selection by pressing the touchscreen.
 Your mobile device must have a cellular or vate your services, renew after your trial has Requirements
Wi-Fi connection. expired, and for in-vehicle support for your
SiriusXM Guardian™ system or help  This feature is available only on vehicles sold
NOTE: in the US and Canada.
answering any general questions
The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed surrounding your connected services.
to be loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind  Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
the surroundings when using this feature. You  Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
are responsible for compliance with local laws, non-connected Uconnect system features,  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
rules and ordinances in the location of your such as radio and Bluetooth® connections. data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
vehicle when using Remote Horn & Lights.
 Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle.  Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Roadside Assistance Call SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance Guardian™ and have an active subscription
Description Features that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™ With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has  Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or
system feature will contain an ASSIST button in onboard assistance features located on the ACC (Accessory) position with a properly func-
the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM Guardian™ rearview mirror or overhead console designed tioning electrical system.
services have been activated, the ASSIST to enhance your driving experience if you should
button can connect you directly to customer ever need assistance or support.
care call centers. You will be directed to one of
the four services below.
MULTIMEDIA 293
Disclaimers
If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your
vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any
additional roadside assistance service costs
that you may incur. In order to provide SiriusXM
Guardian™ services to you, we may record and
monitor your conversations with Roadside
Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, or
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care, whether
such conversations are initiated through the
SiriusXM Guardian™ services in your vehicle, or
via a landline or mobile device, and may share 5
information obtained through such recording
and monitoring in accordance with regulatory
requirements. You acknowledge, agree and
consent to any recording, monitoring or sharing
of information obtained through any such call
recordings.
Send & Go
Description
The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect App
allows you to search for a destination on your
Vehicle Finder Send & Go Input
mobile device, and then send the route to your
vehicle’s navigation system.
294 MULTIMEDIA
How It Works 4. Confirm your destination inside your vehicle  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
by pressing the Send To Vehicle option on data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
1. Use the Uconnect App to find the compatible with your device.
the pop-up that appears on the radio
destination.
touchscreen.
There are multiple ways to find a destina-
tion. After selecting the “Location” tab at Requirements
the bottom of the App, press the search box
 Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
to browse through one of the categories pro-
Uconnect system and a Uconnect 4C or
vided, or type the name or keyword in the
Uconnect 4C NAV unit.
search box at the top of the App. You can
also select categories such as Favorites or
Contact List.
2. Select your destination from the list that
appears. Location information will then be
displayed on the map.
From this screen, you will be able to: LTE Network Connection
 View the location on a map.  Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
 See the distance from your current loca- that includes the applicable feature.
tion.
 Send the address by selecting “Send to
Vehicle” from the mobile app. Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Connected Service Indicators
1 — Activate Services (Connected Services)
3. Send the destination to the Uconnect 2 — Navigation Button
Navigation in your vehicle. You can also call
the destination by pressing the Call button.
MULTIMEDIA 295
Vehicle Finder 3. You can also select the “Person” icon to see
Description your location.
The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect App 4. Once the vehicle has been located, you can
allows you to find the location of your stationary map a route to your vehicle.
vehicle.
NOTE:
You can also sound the horn and flash the lights
to make finding your vehicle even easier.  You are responsible for using remote
services that sound horn and flash lights in
How It Works accordance with the laws, rules and ordi-
Use the Uconnect App to find the location of nances in effect at the location of your
your vehicle. vehicle.
5
1. Select the “Location” tab at the bottom of  Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
the App. Then, touch the Vehicle icon to dependent on a properly installed and opera-
find your vehicle. tional Uconnect system, cellular network
availability that is compatible with the device
2. Choose how you want to view the in your vehicle, and GPS network availability.
information by pressing the layers button. Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
These options will appear: available everywhere at all times, particularly
in remote or enclosed areas.
Vehicle Finder Layers

1 — Map View
2 — Satellite View
3 — Hybrid View
4 — Show Traffic
5 — View Boundaries
296 MULTIMEDIA
Requirements  Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop activated any time within the first year of new
 Vehicle Finder will not work while vehicle is in or any other portable-enabled media — can vehicle ownership.
motion. connect over your private in-vehicle network.
Use one of these three ways to purchase a
 A high-speed, secured connection lets subscription to the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot:
 Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system. anyone on your private network access the
1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select
Web — great for working and relaxing.
the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot App, and press the
 Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
How To Purchase button and follow the
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection WARNING! instructions.
compatible with your device.
The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi
2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link
 Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Hotspot while driving the vehicle as doing so
Guardian™ and have an active subscription to the AT&T portal to get set up.
may result in an accident involving serious
that includes the applicable feature. injury or death. 3. For existing Connected Car customers:
 Vehicle ignition must have been turned on Press the ASSIST button to be routed to an
within 14 days. Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your AT&T Customer Care agent who will assist
Vehicle you.
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped
How It Works Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you
Description
The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides can change its name and the password by
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that the vehicle passengers with an selecting the Wi-Fi Hotspot App and pressing
connects your device to an LTE (voice/data) or internet access hotspot in the vehicle, the Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot button. You can also
4G (data) network that is ready to go wherever using the radio as an access point. view the connected devices from the app
you are. After you've made your purchase, turn The hotspot will allow Wi-Fi-enabled in-vehicle screen by pressing the View Connected Devices
on your device’s Wi-Fi and connect your devices. devices (such as a laptop or any other button.
 Enables all your passengers to be simultane- portable-enabled media device) to wirelessly
NOTE:
ously connected to the web. connect to the internet. Uconnect offers a
A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not
complimentary 3-month trial period that
 Connect several devices at one time. required in order to purchase and use the 4G
includes 1GB of total data. The trial can be
Wi-Fi Hotspot.
MULTIMEDIA 297
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care Requirements

WARNING! Agent will ask for the stolen vehicle report  Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Always drive safely with your hands on the number (as issued by your local law enforce- Uconnect system.
steering wheel and obey all applicable laws. ment). If you have downloaded the
You have full responsibility and assume all Uconnect App, you can push the “Settings”  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
risks related to the use of the features and menu button on your device, select “Help”, data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
applications in this vehicle. Only use the and then select “SiriusXM Guardian™ Cus- compatible with your device.
features and applications in this vehicle when tomer Care” to make the call.
 Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
it is safe to do so. Failure to comply may result Guardian™ and have an active subscription
3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
in an accident involving in serious injury or that includes the applicable feature.
authenticate that you are the owner of the
death.
vehicle and contact the law enforcement NOTE:
with whom you filed the stolen vehicle Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are 5
Stolen Vehicle Assistance report. available everywhere at all times, particularly in
Description remote or enclosed areas.
4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™ work with your local law enforcement to
Customer Care agent may be able to locate the Monthly Vehicle Health Report
locate the vehicle. You will be contacted by
stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to law enforcement if your vehicle is Description
help recover it. recovered. While the investigation is Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect
How It Works ongoing, you should also contact your service through which a summary of the
insurance company to inform it of the performance of your vehicle’s key systems will
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law situation. be sent to you every month so you can stay on
enforcement as soon as possible. They will top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs. This is
work with you to file a stolen vehicle report. provided as a convenience to you and does not
2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer substitute for regular maintenance to your
Care that your vehicle has been stolen. vehicle.
298 MULTIMEDIA
In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health Vehicle Health Alert NOTE:
Report, the Uconnect system in your vehicle Description Pressing OK or the X button on the pop-up
may collect and transmit vehicle data to screen will dismiss or close the pop-up, and the
SiriusXM Guardian™ and to FCA, such as your Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it In-Vehicle Messages mailbox will display. In the
vehicle’s health and performance, your senses a problem with one of your vehicle’s key Mailbox, you can reopen messages or delete
vehicle’s location, your utilization of the systems. For further information, go to your messages.
features in your vehicle, and other data. Owner’s website.
Amazon Alexa® Skill — If Equipped
This data collection and transmission begins NOTE:
Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to
when you enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will
register and activate services. During this command your vehicle with Amazon Alexa®!
continue even if you cancel your SiriusXM
Guardian™ subscription unless you call process you will be asked to provide an email With Amazon Alexa®, you can connect to your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care and tell address to which the reports will be sent. vehicle and remotely access key services and
them to deactivate your Uconnect Services. features.
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped
Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect
Description
information, located at Navigation, you can send a destination directly
www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/ Your vehicle will send you notifications to to your vehicle using Alexa®.
privacy (US Residents) or remind you when services are needed, or to
If you need assistance, you can always ask
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). alert you of other important information, such
Alexa® for help, or complete a list of commands
as recall notices. When you receive a
For more information on SiriusXM Guardian™ by saying: “Alexa®, ask <brand name> for help
notification through your touchscreen, press OK
private policy, see https://siriusxmcvs.com/ with my car.”
to dismiss the message, or press Call Care to
privacy-policy. speak with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care agent.
MULTIMEDIA 299
Here are a few of the many questions you can 4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted. Here are a few examples of commands:
ask Alexa®:  “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to start my
5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle
 “Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to start my brand> Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT. <vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
6. Log in using your Owner Account  “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my
 “Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my credentials. This will be the same user <vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.” name and password you used when  “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to send
 “Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to send registering for SiriusXM Guardian™ 1000 Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan
1000 Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan Connected Services. to my <vehicle name>.”
to my <vehicle name>.” 7. CONFIRM account to return to the <vehicle  “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> what is the
 “Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel brand> Skill. fuel level of my <vehicle name>.”
level of my <vehicle name>.” 5
You can now begin using the <vehicle brand> To link your Uconnect account with Google
An active subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™ is Skill on Alexa®! Assistant, follow these steps:
required. To use Amazon Alexa®, first, register
for SiriusXM Guardian™ Ú page 283. Google Assistant — If Equipped 1. Download and install the Google Assistant
With the Google Assistant, you can get help and app on your smart phone from the App
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle Store® or Google Play.
keep tabs on your car. The Assistant is available
to Amazon Alexa®:
across your devices, including Android™ 2. After installation, log in to the Google
1. Download the Amazon Alexa® app on your phones, iPhone® devices, or voice-activated Assistant app with your Gmail ID. Verify your
mobile device (Apple® or Android™). speakers, like Google Home. If you need account by pressing the icon in the upper
assistance, ask Google for help, or for a right hand corner.
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to complete list of commands by saying: “Hey
SKILLS. Google, ask <brand name> for help with my 3. Press the Discover button in the bottom left
3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap car.” corner of the screen. Enter the vehicle
Enable. brand name.
300 MULTIMEDIA
4. A prompt will appear to link your Uconnect  Boundary Alert 2. Log onto the app from your smartphone
account. Press “Link Uconnect to Google”. using the username and password you
Receive a notification the moment your
created when you first set up your account.
5. Press “Sign In” and enter the email address vehicle is driven either out of or into a
and password you created when you geographic boundary that you set. 3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are
activated Uconnect services.  Curfew Alert connected through Bluetooth®.
6. Lastly, press “Authorize” to complete the Receive a notification when your car is being 4. The Uconnect app should appear on your
linking process. driven outside of the curfew time. SmartWatch.
Now, you can ask Google Assistant to help you:  Speed Alert Once the app is downloaded on your
 Remotely start the engine, or cancel a Receive a notification whenever your car SmartWatch, you can enjoy these features:
remote start exceeds a speed limit you set.  Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the
 Valet Alert remote lock button in the app and entering
 Send a destination to their vehicle’s built-in
your security PIN.
Uconnect Navigation system Receive a notification if and when your
 Remote start or stop your vehicle.
 Monitor vehicle vitals, such as tire press, fuel vehicle is driven outside a quarter-mile
level and oil life radius of a valet drop-off zone.  View important vehicle stats, such as fuel
level, vehicle location, tire pressure warning,
 And more! SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped and more.
Description For help, refer to the Uconnect YouTube
Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped
SmartWatch Integration puts the Uconnect app channel for SmartWatch Integration.
Description
right on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear.
Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving To get started, follow these steps: Uconnect Market
and give you peace of mind when your loved With Uconnect Market, you can enjoy seamless
ones are out on the road. You can set boundary 1. Download the Uconnect app from the App and secure transactions from the comfort of
limits, monitor driving speed, and pinpoint your Store® or Google Play. your vehicle. Make restaurant reservations,
vehicle’s location any time, any place. Use the place food orders, or pay for other goods and
Uconnect app to set alerts: services right from the vehicle’s touchscreen.
MULTIMEDIA 301
To get started with Uconnect Market on the 8. Enter your phone number, and press “Next”. directed to a SiriusXM Guardian™ agent or held
touchscreen: 9. The system will verifying the phone number. in a queue until an agent is available. If you do
1. Press the Market button in the Uconnect Once verified, Uconnect Market will be not have an active subscription, push the
App drawer. available to use. Press the OK button. ASSIST button and click the Activate button on
the touchscreen to activate services.
2. Press “Get Started”. From the online portal, https://
market.mopar.com/home, you can link loyalty CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQS
3. Press “Text Me A Link” and enter your
phone number to receive a text message accounts and start receiving benefits from them
1. What happens if I accidentally push the SOS
with instructions on how to set up Uconnect while still using Uconnect Market and view your
Call button on the mirror? You have
Market. purchase history.
10 seconds after pushing the SOS Call
NOTE: MANAGE M Y SIRIUSXM G UARDIAN™ button to cancel the call. To cancel the call,
ACCOUNT either push the SOS Call button again, or
If the text message does not come through, 5
press the Resend Text button. It might take a press the Cancel button on the in-vehicle
To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account, touchscreen.
minute to receive the text message.
press the ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call
4. Once you receive the text message, press SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care. 2. What type of information is sent when I use
the link provided. You will be directed to a the SOS Call button from my vehicle?
Sign-in screen. Enter your email and NOTE: Certain vehicle information, such as make
password. You will now be able to use It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or and model, is transmitted along with the
Uconnect Market. turning in your lease, to call SiriusXM last known GPS location.
Guardian™ Care to remove your personal data.
5. If you do not have an account, press 3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You
“Register Now” to create one. CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS can use the SOS Call button to make a call
6. Accept the Uconnect market Terms of if you or someone else needs emergency
For additional information about SiriusXM
Service. assistance.
Guardian™, active subscribers can push the
7. Enter your credit card information, and ASSIST button and then select SiriusXM
press “Next”. Guardian™ Call on your in-vehicle touchscreen
to contact SiriusXM Guardian™. Your call will be
302 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE D OOR The capabilities of these devices allow us to CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & G O
LOCK/UNLOCK FAQ S remotely command your vehicle. Other FAQ S
operating systems may be supported in the
1. How long does it take to unlock or lock the future. 1. How long does it take to send the route and
door? Depending on various conditions, it destination to my vehicle? Depending on
5. Why is the Uconnect App running slow? The
can take up to three minutes or more for various conditions, it can take up to three
Uconnect App relies on a mobile network
the request to get to your vehicle. minutes for the request to get through to
connection from your device to send
your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect commands to your vehicle which must have
App? Your key fob will lock/unlock the door an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G, 4G 2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle?
more quickly, however its range is limited (data), or 5G (data) network connection. If Yes, once you enter your vehicle, and start
and your Uconnect App comes in handy for either your device or your vehicle is in an the engine, the pop-up message stating that
these and other situations. area with below average coverage, it may you have a new route will appear. There is
take longer to log in and send commands. an exit button on the pop-up that will cancel
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device?
the route if selected.
People sometimes lose their mobile CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE
devices, which is why security measures 3. Can I select a different route than the most
have been engineered into the Uconnect
ASSISTANCE FAQ S recent one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once
App. Asking for your username, password 1. What is the phone number for roadside you enter the vehicle, and start the engine,
and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN are assistance call? The phone number is: the pop-up message offers a “Locations”
required for the activation of Remote  US: 1-800-521-2779
option. Once “Locations” is selected, you
services through your mobile device. It is can choose from a list of recently sent
your responsibility to protect your  Canada: 1-800-363-4869 destinations.
passwords and PINs.
2. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™,
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the does it cover towing or other expenses
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App is incurred by using roadside assistance? No,
compatible with most devices with the however your new vehicle may include
Apple® and Android™ operating systems. Roadside Assistance Call services.
MULTIMEDIA 303
CONNECTED S ERVICES V EHICLE F INDER police report is required for you to activate NOTE:
FAQ S this service. You must involve local law Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance
enforcement to have SiriusXM Guardian™ companies, and SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an
1. Can someone else locate my vehicle? Your locate your vehicle. We may also locate the insurance product. You are responsible for
vehicle may be located by anyone who has vehicle for other law enforcement or obtaining insurance coverage for your vehicle
your PIN and access to your account. It is government agencies, subject to a valid and yourself.
your responsibility to guard your PIN court order telling SiriusXM Guardian™ to
accordingly. See the Uconnect and do so. We will also provide the service for CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE V EHICLE
SiriusXM Guardian™ terms of service for FCA entities to locate a vehicle that you S TART FAQ S
more information. have purchased through them.
1. How long does it take to remotely start my
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and 2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered? vehicle? Depending on various conditions,
flash the lights? Depending on various After you provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ it can take three minutes or more for the 5
conditions, it can take three minutes or Customer Care agent with the stolen vehicle request to get through to your vehicle.
more for the request to get through to your report, the agent will work together with law
vehicle. enforcement to try to locate your vehicle. If 2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
your vehicle is recovered, you will be App? Your key fob will remote start your
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I contacted by law enforcement. vehicle more quickly. However its range is
turn them on? If you are close enough to the limited. For example, when you are leaving
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off 3. Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my the stadium after the game, you can use the
the horn and lights by pressing the red insurance rates? Some insurance providers Uconnect App to remote start your vehicle
Panic button. offer lower rates on vehicles equipped with and have the inside of your vehicle
systems that can deter auto theft. When comfortable by the time you get to it.
CONNECTED S ERVICES S TOLEN VEHICLE shopping for insurance, be sure to inform
ASSISTANCE FAQ S the insurance provider of your SiriusXM 3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless
Guardian™ services subscription to find out device? People sometimes lose their
1. Can someone locate my vehicle? To if the insurance provider can offer you a wireless devices, which is why security
enhance your privacy, and the privacy of lower rate. measures have been engineered into the
others using your vehicle, a stolen vehicle Uconnect App. Asking for your username,
304 MULTIMEDIA
password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE H ORN CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT FAQ S
PIN help to ensure that nobody can start & L IGHTS FAQ S
your vehicle if they happen to find your 1. How do I register for my SiriusXM
device. 1. How long does it take to sound my horn and Guardian™ account? There are three ways
flash the lights? Depending on various that you can register your SiriusXM
4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle conditions, it can take three minutes or Guardian™ Account:
using the App? No. Driving your vehicle still more for the request to get through to your  Push the Assist button. A call will be
requires the keys to be in the vehicle. The vehicle. placed to an agent who can assist in
Remote Start feature simply starts the
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect registering your new account.
engine to warm up or cool down the interior
before you arrive. App? Your key fob will sound the horn and  Press the Activate Services icon in the
flash the lights quicker; however its range is Apps menu. Select the button to speak
5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with limited. with an agent, who can assist in regis-
the cancel Remote Vehicle Start command? tering your new account.
No. If the vehicle is in motion, the cancel 3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I
turn them on? If you are close enough to the  Press the Activate Services icon in the
Remote Vehicle Start button will not stop
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off Apps menu. Enter your email on the
the vehicle.
the horn and lights by pressing the red touchscreen and then follow the prompts
6. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Panic button. Otherwise, Remote Horn & from the provided email. You will receive
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been Lights will continue for a maximum of three
an email with an activation link that will
designed to work on most devices with the minutes.
be good for 72 hours. Once you click the
Apple® and Android™ operating systems. 4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the activation link, you will be prompted to fill
The capabilities of these devices allow us to Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been out your information and accept Terms
remotely command your vehicle. Other designed to work on most devices with the and Conditions. Then, you will be directed
operating systems may be supported in the Apple® and Android™ operating systems. to the SiriusXM Guardian™ home page to
future. The capabilities of these devices allow us to complete your profile and demo the
remotely command your vehicle. Other remote services.
operating systems may be supported in the
future.
MULTIMEDIA 305
2. Why do I need an email address? Without be updated online, or by calling SiriusXM your subscription will be automatically
an email address, customers cannot Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in renewed for a term length in accordance
register for SiriusXM Guardian™. Customers your vehicle. To update online: login to your with the service plan that you have selected
need to register so they can subscribe to Owner’s Site, and select Edit Profile > at the then current subscription rate and on
receive additional services and create a SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment Account. every renewal date thereafter, unless you
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN for cancel your subscription by calling SiriusXM
6. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
remote command requests. Guardian™ Care. If you have not added a
profile? Your name, home address, phone
credit card to your account, SiriusXM
3. How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™ number, email address and SiriusXM
Guardian™ will send you an email or letter
security PIN? Set up your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN can be updated
in advance of your expiration date to remind
Guardian™ Security PIN during the online on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your
you that your subscription is ending soon.
registration process. The SiriusXM Owner’s Site then select Edit Profile to edit
Guardian™ Security PIN will be required to your personal information. Make your edits 10. How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™ 5
authenticate you when accessing your and click Save. notification preferences? Contact SiriusXM
account via SiriusXM Guardian™ Call or Guardian™ Customer Care, or go to your
7. Can I try features or packages before I buy
performing any remote services, such as Owner’s Site and then update your
them? Your new vehicle purchase may have
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn & preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™
come with an included trial period for
Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start. customer web portal.
certain Apps and services.
4. What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™ 11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact
8. Can I access every App and service while
security PIN? If you’ve already activated SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care by
driving? No, some applications and services
services and forgot your SiriusXM pushing the ASSIST button on your rearview
are not available while driving. For your own
Guardian™ Security PIN, you can reset the mirror.
safety, it is not possible to use some of the
PIN by selecting Edit Profile on your Owner’s
touchscreen features while the vehicle is in 12. How do I update my credit card
Site.
motion (e.g. key pad). information? Login to your Owner’s Site,
5. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™ and select Edit Profile, then select SiriusXM
9. What happens when my subscription
payment account address? Your SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment Account.
comes up for renewal? If you have added a
Guardian™ Payment Account address can
credit card to your account information,
306 MULTIMEDIA
13. How do I find out how much longer I have on 16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle? DATA C OLLECTION & PRIVACY
my subscription? Contact SiriusXM Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner,
Guardian™ Customer Care. you’ll want to remove your account The Uconnect system collects and transmits
information. This process removes all data which may include information about your
You also can visit your Owner’s Site and vehicle, your vehicle’s health and performance,
choose a subscription to view its expiration personal information, returns the Uconnect
system to its original factory settings, your vehicle’s location, your utilization of the
date. When your subscription is about to ex- features in your vehicle, and other data. The
pire, you will receive an email or letter of no- removes all SiriusXM Guardian™ services
and account information. To remove your collection, use and sharing of this information is
tification. required to provide the SiriusXM Guardian™
account information from the Uconnect
14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the system, contact SiriusXM Guardian™ services and is further described by the
entire subscription? Prorated refunds are Customer Care. Uconnect Privacy Policy, which can be found at
provided from the date of cancellation for www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/
annual plans or longer. Please see the 17. What if I forgot to remove my account privacy (US Residents) or
Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™ Terms & information before I returned my lease www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
Conditions for refunds related to billing vehicle or sold it? Contact SiriusXM This information may be collected by SiriusXM®
plans of other lengths and other circum- Guardian™ Customer Care. Connected Vehicle Services Inc. and shared
stances. with FCA US LLC for the purposes stated in the
18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/
Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle health and
15. Can I cancel a subscription before it data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network
diagnostic information including location data
expires? Yes. If you have an annual connection compatible with my device is
may be used by Uconnect to provide a Vehicle
subscription, your subscription will be temporarily unavailable? The SOS Call and
Health Report to you.
canceled the day you cancel. If you have a ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are
not connected to an operable LTE (voice/ Even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™
monthly subscription, your subscription will
data) or 3G, 4G (data), 5G (data) network. subscription, this vehicle diagnostic health
be canceled on the last day of the month in
Services that required your smartphone information, including location data, may still be
which you choose to cancel.
only direct calls to Roadside Assistance Call transmitted from your vehicle and you may still
may be functioning if you have an operable have a Vehicle Health Report sent to you.
network.
MULTIMEDIA 307
Use of any of the Uconnect Services including 3. Altitude of the vehicle

SiriusXM Guardian™ is deemed to be your
4. Status of Hill Descent Control and Speed in
consent to the collection, use and disclosure of
MPH (km/h)
this information in accordance with the
Uconnect Privacy Policy. If you do not want this
information to be collected, used, or shared,
you must cancel your Uconnect services in their
entirety by contacting us as referenced in the
Uconnect Privacy Policy.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road
Main Menu 5
Pages which display vehicle information related
to the drivetrain, transfer case, and coolant/oil 1 — Uconnect Apps Button
gauges. 2 — Off-Road Pages App
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps
button on the touchscreen, and then select OFF-R OAD P AGES S TATUS BAR Status Bar 2WD/4WD
Off-Road Pages. The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along 1 — Transfer Case Status
the bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in 2 — Latitude/Longitude
each of the three selectable page options. It 3 — Altitude
provides information for the following items: 4 — Hill Descent Control Status
1. Transfer Case Status

2. Latitude/Longitude
308 MULTIMEDIA
VEHICLE DYNAMICS 3 — Steering Angle PITCH & ROLL

4 — Rear Axle Locker Status
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s
information concerning the vehicle’s transfer ACCESSORY G AUGE current pitch (angle up and down) and roll
case and steering angel. (angle side to side) in degrees.The Pitch & Roll
The Accessory Gauge page displays the current gauge provide a visualization of the current
The following information is displayed:
status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil vehicle angle.
1. Status of Transfer Case Temperature, Oil Pressure, Transmission
Temperature, and Battery Voltage.
2. Status of Front Axles — If Equipped
3. Status of the Rear Axles
4. Steering angle in degrees
Pitch & Roll Menu 2WD/4WD

1 — Current Pitch
Accessory Gauge Menu 2WD/4WD 2 — Current Roll
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD
4 — Battery Voltage
1 — Transfer Case Status 5 — Transmission Temperature
2 — Front Axle Locker Status
MULTIMEDIA 309
SUSPENSION RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
The Suspension page displays the current Under certain conditions, the mobile phone standards and recommendations, which reflect
status of the vehicle’s suspension system and being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or the consensus of the scientific community.
the current ride height of the vehicle. The noisy performance from your radio. This
Suspension page will also indicate when the condition may be lessened or eliminated by The radio manufacturer believes the internal
vehicle’s height changes. relocating the mobile phone antenna. This wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your level of energy emitted is far less than the
radio performance does not satisfactorily electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is devices such as mobile phones. However, the
recommended that the radio volume be turned use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
down or off during mobile phone operation situations or environments, such as aboard
when not using Uconnect (if equipped). airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you 5
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
REGULATORY AND SAFETY turning on the wireless radio Ú page 482.
I NFORMATION
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal
Accessory Gauge Menu 2WD/4WD wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
1 — Wheel Articulation frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
2 — Height Status wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
310
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when ABS activates: WARNING! (Continued)
ANTI-L OCK BRAKE S YSTEM (ABS)  ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may  Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
continue to hear for a short time after the diminish their effectiveness and may lead
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability
stop) to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
and brake performance under most braking
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
conditions. The system automatically prevents Brake pedal pulsations
 brake pedal when you need to slow down or
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during
stop.
braking.  A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop  The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
that the ABS is working properly each time the The ABS is designed to function with the it increase braking or steering efficiency
vehicle is started and driven. During this Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. beyond that afforded by the condition of the
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound Modification may result in degraded ABS vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
as well as some related motor noises. performance. afforded.
The ABS is activated during braking when the  The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
system detects one or more wheels are WARNING!
including those resulting from excessive
beginning to lock. Road conditions such as ice,  The ABS contains sophisticated electronic speed in turns, following another vehicle
snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose equipment that may be susceptible to inter- too closely, or hydroplaning.
debris, or panic stops may increase the ference caused by improperly installed or
likelihood of ABS activation(s). high output radio transmitting equipment.  The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
This interference can cause possible loss of must never be exploited in a reckless or
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of dangerous manner that could jeopardize
such equipment should be performed by the user’s safety or the safety of others.
qualified professionals.
(Continued)
SAFETY 311
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Control System (TCS). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and
WARNING!
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when control in various driving conditions. The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer prevent the natural laws of physics from
may stay on for as long as four seconds. Sway Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
(HDC). traction afforded by prevailing road
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock Brake Assist System (BAS) including those resulting from excessive
portion of the brake system is not functioning speed in turns, driving on very slippery
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
and that service is required. However, the surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
braking capability during emergency braking
conventional brake system will continue to a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on. exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
braking situation by sensing the rate and
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system amount of brake application, and then applies which could jeopardize the user's safety or
should be serviced as soon as possible to optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help the safety of others.
restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the reduce braking distances. The BAS 6
ABS Warning Light does not come on when the complements the Anti-Lock Brake System Brake System Warning Light
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
the light repaired as soon as possible. in the best BAS assistance. To receive the when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
benefit of the system, you must apply
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC) mode and may stay on for as long as four
continuous braking pressure during the seconds.
SYSTEM stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake comes on while driving, it indicates that the
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. brake system is not functioning properly and
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
that immediate service is required. If the Brake
Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake
System Warning Light does not come on when
Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
(ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction
312 SAFETY
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)  Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
WARNING! than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
EBD manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road tion.
limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is conditions and driving conditions, influence
 Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll
tion.
axle from entering the Anti-Lock Brake System overs, especially those that involve leaving
(ABS) before the front axle. the roadway or striking objects or other ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
vehicles. The capabilities of an the vehicle path intended by the driver and
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ERM-equipped vehicle must never be compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
The ERM system anticipates the potential for exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner When the actual path does not match the
wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering which could jeopardize the user's safety or intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When the safety of others. appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
ERM determines that the rate of change of the oversteer or understeer condition.
steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are Electronic Stability Control (ESC) The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then ESC enhances directional control and stability located in the instrument cluster will start to
applies the appropriate brake and may also of the vehicle under various driving conditions. flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
reduce engine power to lessen the chance that ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
wheel lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the of the vehicle by applying the brake of the Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is
chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the above active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent conditions. Engine power may also be reduced Indicator Light begins to flash during
wheel lift due to other factors, such as road to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
conditions, leaving the roadway, striking objects apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
or other vehicles. adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
SAFETY 313
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot  Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
prevent the natural laws of physics from maintain your vehicle, may change the will be in this mode. This mode should be used
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase handling characteristics of your vehicle, for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
the traction afforded by prevailing road and may negatively affect the performance modes should only be used for specific reasons
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
as noted in the following paragraphs.
including those resulting from excessive system, suspension, braking system, tire
speed in turns, driving on very slippery type and size or wheel size may adversely Partial Off
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot affect ESC performance. Improperly This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
prevent accidents resulting from loss of inflated and unevenly worn tires may also stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle thresholds for activation, which allows for more
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten- modification or poor vehicle maintenance wheel spin than normally allowed.
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci- that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
system can increase the risk of loss of 6
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck- vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal push the ESC OFF switch and the ESC OFF
less or dangerous manner which could injury and death. Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch
others. ESC Operating Modes and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
(Continued) Depending upon model and mode of operation, NOTE:
the ESC system may have multiple operating For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes,
modes. the push and release of the button will toggle
the ESC modes. Multiple attempts may be
required to return to “ESC On”.
314 SAFETY
NOTE:
WARNING! System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to WARNING! (Continued)
 When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func- “Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a  The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip predetermined speed. When the vehicle speed cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
feature described in the TCS section), has slows below the predetermined speed the from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
been disabled and the “ESC OFF Indicator system will return to ESC “Full Off”. increase the traction afforded by prevailing
Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
Off” mode, the engine power reduction ESC modes may also be affected by drive accidents, including those resulting from
feature of TCS is disabled, and the modes (if equipped). excessive speed in turns, driving on very
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
ESC system is reduced. WARNING! cannot prevent collisions.
 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when  In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode. torque reduction and stability features are ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle And ESC OFF Indicator Light
stability offered by the ESC system is
Full Off — If Equipped The ESC Activation/Malfunction
unavailable. In an emergency evasive
Indicator Light in the instrument
This mode is intended for off-highway or maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
cluster will come on when the ignition
off-road use only and should not be used on any to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
is placed in the ON/RUN mode. It
public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC Off” mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only. should go out with the engine running. If the
features are turned off. To enter the “Full Off”
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
mode, push and hold the ESC OFF switch for five (Continued)
comes on continuously with the engine running,
seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
engine running. After five seconds, a chime will
system. If this light remains on after several
sound, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” message will
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC on
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
again, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch.
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
SAFETY 315
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped Activating HDC
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving Once HDC is enabled it will activate
and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed automatically if driven down a grade of
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also while descending hills during various driving sufficient magnitude. The set speed for HDC is
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to actively controlling the brakes. using the gear shift +/-. The following
flash during acceleration, ease up on the summarizes the HDC set speeds:
accelerator and apply as little throttle as HDC Has Three States:
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and HDC Target Set Speeds
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
driving to the prevailing road conditions. activate).  P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates will not activate.
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
that the Electronic Stability Control  R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
activation conditions are not met, or driver
(ESC) is in a reduced mode.
is actively overriding with brake or throttle  N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
NOTE: application). 6
 D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
 The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come controlling vehicle speed).
on momentarily each time the ignition is  2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
placed in the ON/RUN mode. Enabling HDC
 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but
 Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/  4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
the following conditions must also be met to
RUN mode, the ESC system will be on even if
enable HDC:  5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
it was turned off previously.
 Driveline is in 4WD Low.  6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
 The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the  Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).  7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
 The parking brake is released.  8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.  The driver door is closed.  9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
316 SAFETY
NOTE: Disabling HDC  The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of several seconds, then extinguish when the
target speed selection, but will not affect the driver pushes the HDC switch but enable
the following conditions occur:
gear chosen by the transmission. When actively conditions are not met.
controlling HDC the transmission will shift  The driver pushes the HDC switch.
 The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
appropriately for the driver-selected set speed The driveline is shifted out of the 4WD Low.
 several seconds, then extinguish when HDC
and corresponding driving conditions.
disables due to excess speed.
 The parking brake is applied.
Driver Override
 The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
 The driver door opens.
The driver may override HDC activation with when HDC deactivates due to overheated
throttle or brake application at any time.  The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds. activate again once the brakes have cooled
Deactivating HDC
sufficiently.
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if  The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
any of the following conditions occur: (64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
WARNING!
 The driver overrides HDC set speed with  HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
throttle or brake application. controlling vehicle speed when descending
Feedback To The Driver
 The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) hills. The driver must remain attentive to the
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h). driving conditions and is responsible for
HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers
maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
 The vehicle is on a downhill grade of insuffi- feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
cient magnitude, is on level ground, or is on  The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-
an uphill grade. nate and remain on solid when HDC is
 The vehicle is shifted to PARK. enabled or activated. This is the normal oper-
ating condition for HDC.
SAFETY 317
Hill Start Assist (HSA) Towing With HSA

WARNING!
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver There may be situations where the Hill Start back while towing a trailer.
releases the brake while stopped on an incline, Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for may occur, such as on minor hills or with a WARNING!
a short period. If the driver does not apply the loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA
is not a substitute for active driving  If you use a trailer brake controller with your
throttle before this time expires, the system will trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to and deactivated with the brake switch. If
down the hill as normal. so, there may not be enough brake pres-
other vehicles, people, and objects, and most
The following conditions must be met in order sure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer
importantly brake operation to ensure safe
for HSA to activate: on a hill when the brake pedal is released.
operation of the vehicle under all road
In order to avoid rolling down an incline
 The feature must be enabled. conditions. Your complete attention is always
while resuming acceleration, manually acti-
required while driving to maintain safe control
The vehicle must be stopped. vate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle

of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake
6
 The parking brake must be off. warnings can result in a collision or serious
pedal.
personal injury.
 The driver door must be closed.  HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
 The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade. Disabling And Enabling HSA
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
 The gear selection must match vehicle uphill This feature can be turned on or turned off. To mission in PARK.
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in change the current setting, proceed as follows:
 Failure to follow these warnings can result
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings in a collision or serious personal injury.
REVERSE gear). Ú page 237.
 HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate if
the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL.
318 SAFETY
Ready Alert Braking (RAB) Trailer Sway Control (TSC) AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
braking during emergency braking situations. It excessively swaying trailer and will take the BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — I F
anticipates when an emergency braking appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. EQUIPPED
situation may occur by monitoring how fast the
NOTE: BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the
throttle is released by the driver. The Electronic
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. taillights, to detect highway licensable vehicles
Brake Control System will prepare the brake
Always use caution when towing a trailer and (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that
system for a panic stop.
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda- enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/
Traction Control System (TCS) tions Ú page 214. side of the vehicle.
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
the TCS may apply brake pressure to the power may be reduced and you may feel the
spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power brakes being applied to individual wheels to
to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
(BLD), functions similarly to a limited slip Off” or “Full Off” modes.
differential and controls the wheel spin across a
driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is WARNING!
spinning faster than the other, the system will
apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle Rear Detection Zones
allow more engine torque to be applied to the down, stop at the nearest safe location, and When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning
wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer Light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
enabled even if TCS and Electronic Stability sway. rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
Control (ESC) are in reduced modes. system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
or REVERSE and enters standby mode when the
vehicle is in PARK.
SAFETY 319
The BSM detection zone covers approximately The system may also detect a blockage if the
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft vehicle is operated in areas with extremely low
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside radar returns such as a desert or parallel to a
rear view mirror and extends approximately large elevation drop.
10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle warning light located in the outside mirrors, in
when the vehicle speed reaches approximately addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the and reducing the radio volume Ú page 322.
driver of vehicles in these areas. Radar Sensor Locations
NOTE: If the system detects degraded performance
due to contamination or foreign objects, a
 The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver message will warn you of a blocked sensor and
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are the warning indicators in side view mirrors will
outside the detection zones. 6
be on. The warning indicators will remain
 BSM may experience dropouts (blinking on illuminated until blockage clearing conditions
and off) of the side mirror warning indicator are met. First clear the taillights around the
lamps when a motorcycle or any small object sensors of the blockage. After removing the
remains at the side of the vehicle for blockage, the following procedure can be used
extended periods of time (more than a couple to reset the system: Warning Light Location
of seconds). Cycle the ignition from ON to OFF and then back The BSM system monitors the detection zone
ON. from three different entry points (side, rear,
The vehicle’s taillights, where the radar sensors
front) while driving to see if an alert is
are located, must remain free of snow, ice, and If the blockage message is still present after necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
dirt/road contamination so that the BSM cycling the ignition and driving in traffic, check during these types of zone entries.
system can function properly. Do not block the again for a blockage.
taillights with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.).
320 SAFETY
Entering From The Side

Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Rear Monitoring Overtaking/Approaching

Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
Side Monitoring
vehicle remains in the blind spot for
Entering From The Rear approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
on either side and enter the rear detection zone between the two vehicles is greater than
with a relative speed of less than 30 mph 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not
(48 km/h). illuminate.
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, snow banks, car
washes etc. However, occasionally the system
may alert on such objects. This is normal
operation and your vehicle does not require
service.
SAFETY 321
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that Rear Cross Path (RCP) When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE
are traveling in the opposite direction of the RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing (R), the driver is alerted using both the visual
vehicle in adjacent lanes Ú page 482. out of parking spaces where their vision of and audible alarms, including reducing the
oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed radio volume.
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space NOTE:
until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
RCP system will then have a clear view of the be blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If
cross traffic, and if an oncoming vehicle is the sensors are blocked by other structures or
detected, alert the driver. vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
WARNING!
Opposing Traffic Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a
For information on how Blind Spot Monitoring backup aid system. It is intended to be used 6
functions when pulling a trailer Ú page 322. to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in
a parking lot situation. Drivers must be
WARNING! careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
RCP Detection Zones vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both check for pedestrians, animals, other
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum backing up. Failure to do so can result in
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to serious injury or death.
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn objects moving a maximum of approximately
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
can result in serious injury or death. situations.
322 SAFETY
Blind Spot Modes NOTE: Trailer Merge Assist consists of three sub
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of Whenever an audible alert is requested by the functions:
operation that are available in the Uconnect BSM system, the radio is also muted.  Automatic Trailer Detection
system. When the system is in RCP, the system shall  Trailer Length Detection
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever  Trailer Merge Warning
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
appropriate side view mirror based on a
the RCP state always requests the chime.
detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the Blind Spot Alert Off
system will respond with both visual and When the BSM system is turned off there will be
audible alerts when a detected object is no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM,
present. Whenever an audible alert is RCP, or Trailer Merge Assist systems.
requested, the radio is muted.
NOTE:
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
The BSM system will store the current operating
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/ Blind Spot Zones With Trailer Merge Assist
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a the vehicle is started the previously stored 1 — Vehicle
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror mode will be recalled and used. 2 — Trailer
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert Trailer Merge Assist – If Equipped Automatic Trailer Detection
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible Trailer Merge Assist is a function of the Blind There are two modes of operation for the
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn Spot Monitoring (BSM) system that extends the detection of the trailer length:
signal and detected object are present on the blind spot zone to work while pulling a trailer.
 Automatic Mode — When “Auto Mode” is
same side at the same time, both the visual and
NOTE: selected, the system will use the blind spot
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the
When Trailer Merge Assist is activated, Rear sensors to automatically determine the pres-
audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted. ence and length of a trailer. The presence of
Cross Path is disabled.
SAFETY 323
a trailer will be detected using the blind spot NOTE:

radar within 90 seconds of forward move- During the same ignition cycle, if the vehicle is
ment of the vehicle. The vehicle must be at a standstill for a minimum of 90 seconds, a
moving above 6 mph (10 km/h) to activate new “trailer detection request” is enabled by
the feature. Once the trailer has been the system once the vehicle resumes motion.
detected, the system will default to the
maximum blind spot zone until the length has Maximum length supported by the Trailer Merge
been verified. You will see “Auto” in the Assist feature is 39.5 ft (12 m). Trailer length is
instrument panel cluster . considered the forward most portion of the
trailer hitch to the rearward most portion of the
 Maximum Mode — When “Max Mode” is body, fascia/bumper, or ramp of the trailer. Trailer Length Detection
selected, the system will default to the 1 — Trailer Length
maximum blind spot zone regardless of what Maximum width supported by the Trailer Merge
2 — Trailer Width
size trailer is attached . Assist feature is 8.5 ft (2.59 m). Trailer width is
3 — Trailer Hitch
measured at the widest portion of the trailer
NOTE: and may include wheels, tires, finders, or rails.
Trailer length will be identified and placed into 6
Selected setting is stored when the ignition is
NOTE: one of the following categories:
placed in the OFF position. To change this
setting, it must be selected through the Fifth wheel or gooseneck trailers are not  Trailer length up to 10 ft (3 m) — Blind spot
Uconnect settings Ú page 237. supported by Trailer Merge Assist. zone will be adjusted to 10 ft (3 m) .
Trailer Length Detection NOTE:  Trailer length between 10 ft to 20 ft (3 m to

The ability to detect a trailer may be degraded in 6 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted to
Once the trailer presence has been established, crowded or busy environments. Busy parking 20 ft (6 m) .
the trailer length will be established (by making lots, narrow areas surrounded with trees, or any
a 90 degree turn) and then the trailer length other crowded area may prevent the radar  Trailer length between 20 ft to 30 ft (6 m to
category (example 10-20 ft (3 m to 6 m)) will be sensors from being able to adequately detect 9 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted to
displayed. This can take up to 30 seconds after the trailer. The system will try to detect a trailer 30 ft (9 m) .
completing the turn. at every ignition cycle or 90 seconds of stand-
still.
324 SAFETY
 Trailer length between 30 ft and 39.5 ft (9 m the side mirror warning indicator lamps when potential frontal collision. The warnings and
to 12 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted to a motorcycle or any small object remains at limited braking are intended to provide the
Max distance . the side of the vehicle for extended periods of driver with enough time to react, avoid or
time (more than a couple of seconds). mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
Trailer length is determined within +/- 3 ft (1 m)  Crowded areas such as parking lots, neigh- NOTE:
of actual length. Trailers that are the same size borhoods, etc. may lead to an increased FCW monitors the information from the forward
as the category limit, 10/20/30 ft (3/6/9 m), amount of false alerts. This is normal opera- looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
could be subject to being placed in the category tion. Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
above or below the correct one. forward collision. When the system determines
WARNING! that a forward collision is probable, the driver
Trailer Merge Warning
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an will be provided with audible and visual warn-
Trailer Merge Warning is the extension of the ings as well as a possible brake jerk warning.
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
blind spot function to cover the length of the
zones. The BSM system is not designed to If the driver does not take action based upon
trailer, plus a safety margin, to warn the driver
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. these progressive warnings, then the system
when there is a vehicle in the adjacent lane. The
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM will provide a limited level of active braking to
driver is alerted by the illumination of the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
warning light located in the outside mirror on
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn-
the side the other vehicle is detected on. In
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so ings by braking and the system determines that
addition, an audible (chime) alert will be heard
can result in serious injury or death. the driver intends to avoid the collision by
and radio volume will be reduced Ú page 322.
braking but has not applied sufficient brake
NOTE: FORWARD C OLLISION WARNING (FCW) force, the system will compensate and provide
additional brake force as required.
 The Trailer Merge Alert system DOES NOT WITH MITIGATION — I F EQUIPPED
alert the driver about rapidly approaching If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with
vehicles that are outside the detection zones. below 32 mph (52 km/h), the system may
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
 The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may instrument cluster display), and may apply a provide the maximum braking possible to miti-
experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a gate the potential forward collision. If the
SAFETY 325
Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event  It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To Turning FCW On or Off
stops the vehicle completely, the system will prevent such misuse of the system, after four The FCW button is located in the Uconnect
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds Active Braking events within a key cycle, the display in the control settings Ú page 237.
and then release the brakes. Active Braking portion of FCW will be deacti-
vated until the next key cycle.  To turn the FCW system on, press the forward
collision button once.
 The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW  To turn the FCW system off, press the forward
system should be deactivated to prevent collision button once.
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings. NOTE:
 FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such  When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system
as overhead objects, ground reflections, to warn the driver of a possible collision with
objects not in the path of the vehicle, the vehicle in front.
stationary objects that are far away,
FCW Message oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the  When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the 6
same or higher rate of speed. system from warning the driver of a possible
When the system determines a collision with
collision with the vehicle in front. If the FCW
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,  FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the is set to “off”, “FCW OFF” will be displayed in
the warning message will be deactivated unavailable screens. the instrument cluster display.
Ú page 482.
NOTE: WARNING!  When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”,
this prevents the system from providing
 The minimum speed for FCW activation is Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not limited active braking, or additional brake
3 mph (5 km/h). intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor support if the driver is not braking adequately
can FCW detect every type of potential in the event of a potential frontal collision.
 The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
collision. The driver has the responsibility to
other than vehicles such as guard rails or
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
sign posts based on the course prediction.
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
activation and functionality.
326 SAFETY
 When FCW status is set to “Warning and  Medium FCW Limited Warning
Braking”, this allows the system to warn the If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
 When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
in front using audible/visual warnings and it “Medium” setting and the system status
is “Only Warning”, this allows the system Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
applies autonomous braking. momentarily, there may be a condition that
to warn the driver of a possible collision
 The FCW system state is defaulted to “Full with the vehicle in front using audible/ limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is
On” from one ignition cycle to the next. If the visual warnings. still driveable under normal conditions, the
system is turned off, it will reset to “Full On” active braking may not be fully available. Once
when the vehicle is restarted.  Near the condition that limited the system
 When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the performance is no longer present, the system
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity will return to its full performance state. If the
“Near” setting and the system status is
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status “Only Warning”, this allows the system to problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
are programmable through the Uconnect warn the driver of a possible closer colli-
system Ú page 237. Service FCW Warning
sion with the vehicle in front using
If the system turns off, and the instrument
 Far audible/visual warnings.
cluster displays:
 When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the  This setting provides less reaction time
 ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
“Far” setting and the system status is than the “Far” and “Medium” settings,
“Only Warning”, this allows the system to which allows for a more dynamic driving  Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
warn the driver of a possible more distant experience.
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
collision with the vehicle in front using More dynamic or aggressive drivers that
 Although the vehicle is still drivable under
audible/visual warnings. want to avoid frequent warnings may normal conditions, have the system checked by
 More cautious drivers that do not mind prefer this setting. an authorized dealer.
frequent warnings may prefer this
setting.
SAFETY 327
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) — If NOTE:

WARNING! The PEB system will NOT retain the last setting
Equipped
PEB is a subsystem of the FCW system that Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not selected by the driver after ignition shut down.
provides the driver with audible and visual intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor The system will reset to the default setting when
warnings in the instrument cluster display, and can PEB detect every type of potential colli- the vehicle is restarted.
may apply automatic braking when it detects a sion with a pedestrian. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by con- TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
potential frontal collision with a pedestrian.
trolling the vehicle via braking and steering. (TPMS)
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 37 mph Failure to follow this warning could lead to
(60 km/h), the system may provide braking to TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
mitigate the potential collision with a based on the vehicle recommended cold
pedestrian. If the PEB event stops the vehicle placard pressure.
Turning PEB On Or Off
completely, the system will hold the vehicle at a NOTE:
standstill for two seconds and then release the NOTE: The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
brakes. When the system determines a collision The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows instrument cluster and a chime will sound when 6
with the pedestrian in front of you is no longer the system to warn you of a possible frontal tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
probable, the warning message will be collision with the pedestrian. active road tires. In addition, the instrument
deactivated. cluster will display a graphic showing the pres-
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph display in the controls settings Ú page 237. sure values of each tire with the low tire pres-
(5 km/h). sure values in a different color, or the Uconnect
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian radio will display a TPMS message; when this
Emergency Braking button once. occurs you must increase the tire pressure to
To turn the PEB system back on, push the the recommended cold placard pressure in
Pedestrian Emergency Braking button again. order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
the system, so no warning or active braking will about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
be available in case of a possible frontal means that when the outside temperature
collision with the pedestrian. decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
328 SAFETY
pressure should always be set based on cold Warning Light will turn off once the system
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
CAUTION!
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes  The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
for at least three hours, or driven less than above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The to receive this information. pressures and warning have been estab-
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the lished for the tire size equipped on your
NOTE: vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may sensor damage may result when using
tire sidewall. The tire pressure will also increase
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi replacement equipment that is not of the
as the vehicle is driven — this is normal and
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
there should be no adjustment for this
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning wheels can cause sensor damage.
increased pressure.
Light off.
See Ú page 443 on how to properly inflate the  Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
vehicle’s tires. For example, your vehicle may have a the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
recommended cold (parked for more than three (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and recommended that you take your vehicle to
low-pressure warning limit for any reason, the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), an authorized dealership to have your
including low temperature effects and natural a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will sensor function checked.
pressure loss through the tire Ú page 482. decrease the tire pressure to approximately  After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS This will prevent moisture and dirt from
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause entering the valve stem, which could
or above the recommended cold placard the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi damage the TPMS sensor.
pressure. Once the low TPMS Warning Light (186 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still
illuminates, increase the tire pressure to the be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light
recommended cold placard pressure in order will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the
for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
system will automatically update and the TPMS value.
SAFETY 329
NOTE:  Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System

messages, which display in the instrument
 The TPMS is not intended to replace normal cluster
tire care and maintenance or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.  Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light
 The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure, Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
unless your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Fill Warnings
Alert (TFA) system. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
 Driving on a significantly underinflated tire Tire Pressure Monitoring Display (TPMS) Warning Light will illuminate
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the instrument cluster and a chime
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
uses wireless technology with wheel rim will sound when tire pressure is low in
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
one or more of the four active road tires. In
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
addition, the instrument cluster will display a
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
graphic showing the pressure values of each 6
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire tire with the low tire pressure values in a
 The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
pressure readings to the receiver module. different color. An "Inflate to XX" message will
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using NOTE: also be displayed.
an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if It is particularly important for you to check the
underinflation has not reached the level to tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
Light.
The TPMS consists of the following
 Seasonal temperature changes will affect components:
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.  Receiver module
 Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensors
Low Tire Pressure Display
330 SAFETY
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as display a "SERVICE TPMS SYSTEM" message for A system fault may occur due to an incorrect
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure a minimum of five seconds and then display TPMS sensor location condition. When a system
condition (those in a different color in the dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to fault occurs due to an incorrect TPMS sensor
instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s indicate which sensor is not being received. location, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
recommended cold placard pressure inflation If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will (TPMS) Warning Light will flash on and off for
value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The
Once the system receives the updated tire the system fault no longer exists, the Tire system fault will also sound a chime. In
pressures, the system will automatically Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will addition, the instrument cluster will display a
update, the graphic display in the instrument no longer flash, and the "SERVICE TPMS Tire Pressure Temporarily Unavailable message
cluster will return to its original color, and the SYSTEM" message will no longer display, and a in place of the tire pressure display screen. If
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light pressure value will display in place of the the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) the following: the system fault no longer exists, the “Tire
in order for the TPMS to receive this Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light” will
information.  Signal interference due to electronic devices no longer flash and the tire pressure display
or driving next to facilities emitting the same screen will be displayed showing the tire
NOTE: radio frequencies as the Tire Pressure Moni- pressure values the correct locations.
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may toring System sensors
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi Vehicles With Non-Matching Full Size Spare Or
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard  Installing aftermarket window tinting that Compact Spare
pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Moni- contains materials that may block radio wave
 The non-matching full size spare or compact
toring System Warning Light off. signals
spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.
 Accumulation of snow or ice around the Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
Service TPMS Warning
wheels or wheel housings pressure in the non-matching full size spare
If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure or compact spare tire.
Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will  Using tire chains on the vehicle
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain  If you install the non-matching full size spare
 Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS or compact spare tire in place of a road tire
on solid. The system fault will also sound a sensors
chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will that has a pressure below the low-pressure
SAFETY 331
warning limit, upon the next ignition switch  Once you repair or replace the original road  The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if
cycle, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of an existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if
(TPMS) Warning Light and a “LOW TIRE” the non-matching full size spare or compact the system is in deactivation mode (if
message will remain on and a chime will spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In equipped).
sound. In addition, the graphic in the instru- addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
The system will be activated when a positive
ment cluster will still display a pressure value System (TPMS) Warning Light will turn off and
in a different color and an “Inflate to XX” the graphic in the instrument cluster will increase in tire pressure is detected by the
message. display a new pressure value instead of TPMS while inflating the tire. The ignition must
dashes (--), as long as no tire pressure is be in the RUN mode, with the transmission in
 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes PARK.
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
the four active road tires. The vehicle may NOTE:
Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above It is not required to have the engine running to
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to enter Tire Fill Alert mode.
remain on solid. In addition, the instrument
receive this information.
cluster will display a "SERVICE TPMS The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five Tire Fill Alert 6
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
seconds and then display dashes (--) in place This feature notifies the user when the placard
of the pressure value. When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
tire pressure is attained while inflating or
pressure display screen will be displayed in the
 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a deflating the tire.
instrument cluster.
chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Moni- You may choose to disable or enable the Tire Fill
toring System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash If the hazard lamps do not come on while
Alert feature through use of the Uconnect
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain inflating the tire, the TPMS sensor may be out of
Settings in the radio.
on solid, and the instrument cluster will range preventing the TPMS sensor signal from
display a "SERVICE TPMS SYSTEM" message NOTE: being received. In this case, the vehicle may
for a minimum of five seconds and then need to be moved either forward or backward
 Only one tire can be filled at a time when slightly to exit the null spot.
display dashes (--) in place of the pressure
using the Tire Fill Alert system.
value.
332 SAFETY
Operation: condition falls below 25% of the drivers set With the sensors installed and the trailer near
 The horn will sound once to let the user know pressure or if a system malfunction occurs. The or connected to your Ram truck, initiate the
when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches instrument cluster will display the actual tire pairing process by entering the settings menu in
recommended pressure. pressure or dashes for each of the trailer tires in the radio and selecting trailer. Select the
the correct trailer position, based on trailer desired trailer profile to pair to, open the “Tire
 The horn will sound three times if the tire is configuration. The TTPMS can support up to Pressure” menu, and hit “Setup All Tires”
overfilled and will continue to sound every 12 trailer tires per configured trailer on up to Ú page 237.
five seconds if the user continues to inflate four configurable trailers Ú page 237.
the tire. NOTE:
The vehicle may not be driven until the pairing
 The horn will sound once again when enough process is complete.
air is let out to reach proper inflation level.
 The horn will also sound three times if the tire
is then underinflated and will continue to
sound every five seconds if the user
continues to deflate the tire.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TTPMS) — If Equipped
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
The Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor Pairing
(TTPMS) is a feature that displays the trailer tire
pressure values and warns the driver of a low In order use this feature, the provided tire Trailer Tire Pressure Settings
tire pressure event based on the drivers set pressure sensors must be installed in the
target tire pressure value, through TTPMS desired trailer tires and the sensors must be
settings found in the radio. paired to the truck. If the target trailer requires
more than the provided four sensors, additional
The TTPMS monitors the pressure of each tire
sensors can be purchased at an authorized
and warns the driver through the instrument
Ram dealership.
cluster, when either a low tire pressure
SAFETY 333
fails. Each tire must be successfully paired condition (those in a different color in the
during a single pairing process to receive the instrument cluster graphic) to the customer
success screen. programmed target tire pressure value as
shown at the top of the TTPMS instrument
NOTE:
cluster graphic. Once the tire(s) are inflated, the
If the pairing process times out after three
system will automatically update the graphic
minutes of no communication with a sensor, a
display in the instrument cluster, returning to its
double horn chip will occur indicating the
original color. The vehicle may need to be driven
pairing has failed and a message will display on
for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
the radio indicating the process was unsuc-
in order for the TTPMS to receive the updated
Trailer Tire Pressure Pairing cessful. Under certain circumstances, the
information.
Follow the on screen prompts to select the double horn chirp may continue to happen
number of axles (1 - 3), the number of trailer every three minutes indicating the failed Service TTPMS Warning
tires (2, 4, 6, 8, or 12), and the set trailer tire pairing. If this happens, the horn chirping may If a system fault is detected, the instrument
pressure. The range is selectable anywhere be canceled by cycling the ignition button OFF cluster will display a “Trailer Tire Pressure 6
between 25-125 PSI (172-862 kPa). and then back to RUN position. System Service Required” message for a
Once PSI (kPa) is programmed, the pairing Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure minimum of five seconds.
screen appears. Tire sensors must be paired in Warnings Once the system fault is corrected the "Trailer
order shown. Starting with Tire 1, deflate tire by Tire Pressure System Service Required"
When a tire pressure low in one or more of the
5 PSI (34 kPa) and wait for a horn chirp. It may message will no longer be displayed. The
active road tires is detected, the instrument
take up to three minutes for the chirp to occur, vehicle may need to be driven for up to
cluster will display a message stating “Trailer
indicating that the sensor has paired. Repeat 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
Tire Pressure Low”. The instrument cluster will
process on each tire, in order, until complete. for the TTPMS to receive the trailer tire pressure
then display the TTPMS graphic showing the
Do not exit the pairing screen until process is information.
pressure values of each tire with the low tire
complete. If pairing was unsuccessful, a double
pressure values in a different color.
horn chirp will sound, and a prompt on the
touchscreen will allow you to retry the Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
procedure; “Retry” will only appear when setup possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
334 SAFETY
Trailer Tire Pres sure System Not Configured OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
A “Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured” Some of the most important safety features in
message will be displayed in the instrument vehicle with a rear seat.
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
cluster on the TTPMS instrument cluster 2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
graphic when a trailer number is selected that OCCUPANT R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS vehicle seat belt properly must be secured
has not had trailer tire pressure sensors paired. FEATURES in the appropriate child restraint or
To correct this condition, see Ú page 237. belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
 Seat Belt Systems
Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active seating position Ú page 355.
Trailer  Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags 3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
The “Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
Active Trailer” message will be displayed in the  Child Restraints front passenger seat, move the seat as far
instrument cluster when the trailer sensors back as possible and use the proper child
Some of the safety features described in this
being received by the TTPMS module do not restraint Ú page 355.
section may be standard equipment on some
match the trailer sensors paired to the current
models, or may be optional equipment on 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
trailer number selected. This message will be
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized belt behind them or under their arm.
displayed when the sensors being received
dealer.
completely match the sensors paired to another 5. You should read the instructions provided
trailer number configured in the TTPMS module. I MPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS with your child restraint to make sure that
To correct this condition, the correct trailer Please pay close attention to the information in you are using it properly.
number must be selected in the radio this section. It tells you how to use your restraint 6. All occupants should always wear their lap
Ú page 237. system properly, to keep you and your and shoulder belts properly.
passengers as safe as possible.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
Here are some simple steps you can take to
be moved back as far as practical to allow
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
the front air bags room to inflate.
bag:
SAFETY 335
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If SEAT BELT S YSTEMS Initial Indication
your vehicle has side air bags, and If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
deployment occurs, the side air bags will Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position,
inflate forcefully into the space between a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
occupants and the door and occupants may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
could be injured. equipped with outboard front passenger seat
from home or on your own street.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
be modified to accommodate a disabled
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
person, see Ú page 479 for customer
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen remain on until both outboard front seat belts
service contact information.
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
WARNING! risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the passenger seat is unoccupied.
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger belted at all times. BeltAlert Warning Sequence 6
front air bag can cause death or serious The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
injury to a child 12 years or younger, when the vehicle is moving above a specified
(BeltAlert) vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint. Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
equipped with outboard front passenger seat not active when the outboard front passenger
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
that vehicle. switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
336 SAFETY
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat NOTE:

based on vehicle speed until the driver and If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
WARNING!
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is more severe injuries in a collision. The air
occupants to buckle their seat belts. unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
turn on and remain on until the driver and properly. In some collisions, the air bags
Change Of Status
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if buckled. belt even though you have air bags.
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
Lap/Shoulder Belts  In a collision, you and your passengers can
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning All seating positions in your vehicle are properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
sequence will begin until the seat belts are equipped with lap/shoulder belts. rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
buckled again.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is during very sudden stops or collisions. This be sure you and others in your vehicle are
not active when the outboard front passenger feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt buckled up properly.
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered to move freely with you under normal  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
when an animal or other items are placed on conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
the outboard front passenger seat or when the will lock and reduce your risk of striking the people riding in these areas are more likely
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the to be seriously injured or killed.
recommended that pets be restrained in the vehicle.
rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet  Do not allow people to ride in any area of
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
cargo is properly stowed. and seat belts.
(Continued)
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
SAFETY 337
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat  A lap belt worn too high can increase the  A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt dangerous. Your body could strike the
including the driver, should always wear forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is bones, but across your abdomen. Always increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
also provided at their seating position to wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
minimize the risk of severe injury or death possible and keep it snug. ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
in the event of a crash.  A twisted seat belt may not protect you bones. Wear the seat belt over your
 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could properly. In a collision, it could even cut into shoulder so that your strongest bones will
make your injuries in a collision much you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against take the force in a collision.
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or your body, without twists. If you can’t  A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
you could even slide out of the seat belt. straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it protect you from injury during a collision.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat to an authorized dealer immediately and You are more likely to hit your head in a
belt safely and to keep your passengers have it fixed. collision if you do not wear your shoulder 6
safe, too.  A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
 Two people should never be belted into a buckle will not protect you properly. The lap be used together.
single seat belt. People belted together can portion could ride too high on your body,  A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
crash into one another in a collision, hurting possibly causing internal injuries. Always a collision and leave you with no protection.
one another badly. Never use a lap/ buckle your seat belt into the buckle Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one nearest you. checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
person, no matter what their size.  A seat belt that is too loose will not protect Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
move too far forward, increasing the possi- seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. must be replaced after a collision.
(Continued)
338 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit you hear a “click.”
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the Positioning The Lap Belt
seat belt to go around your lap.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt 6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To on the buckle. The seat belt will automat-
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the ically retract to its stowed position. If
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug necessary, slide the latch plate down the
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
Pulling Out The Latch Plate the seat belt in a collision. fully.
SAFETY 339
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

WARNING!
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.  Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
1. Position the latch plate as close as worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
possible to the anchor point. you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
belt safely and to keep your passengers
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
safe, too.
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate. Adjustable Anchorage  Position the shoulder belt across the
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded slack so that it is comfortable and not
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
webbing. The folded webbing must enter resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
lower position, and if you are taller than
the slot at the top of the latch plate. draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
6
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it anchorage in a higher position. After you  Misadjustment of the seat belt could
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt release the anchorage button, try to move it up reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
is no longer twisted. or down to make sure that it is locked in in a crash.
position.  Always make all seat belt height adjust-
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ments when the vehicle is stationary.
NOTE:
In the driver and outboard front passenger
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
adjusted upward or downward to position the
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
be adjusted in the upward position without
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
and move it up or down to the position that
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
serves you best.
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
340 SAFETY
Seat Belt Extender Seat Belts And Pregnant Women performance of the seat belt by removing slack
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, from the seat belt early in a collision.
even when the webbing is fully extended and the Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if including those in child restraints.
equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized NOTE:
dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. These devices are not a substitute for proper
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
existing seat belt is not long enough. When the belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different properly.
occupant, it must be removed.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
WARNING! Seat Belts and Pregnant Women Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
 ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
cally required in order to properly fit the
the event of an accident is reduced for the must be replaced immediately.
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
Energy Management Feature
distance between the front edge of the a seat belt.
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of Position the lap belt snug and low below the with an Energy Management feature that may
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches. abdomen and across the strong bones of the help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
 Using a Seat Belt Extender when not hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest of a collision. The seat belt system has a
needed can increase the risk of serious and away from the neck. Never place the retractor assembly that is designed to release
injury or death in a collision. Only use the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm. webbing in a controlled manner.
Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not
Seat Belt Pretensioner
long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
store the Seat Belt Extender when not with pretensioning devices that are designed to
needed. remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
SAFETY 341
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors necessary to comfortably wrap around the How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
(ALR) occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
The seat belts in the passenger seating into the buckle until you hear a "click."
belt.
positions are equipped with a Switchable In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still 2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull
used to secure a child restraint system retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. downward until the entire seat belt is
Ú page 364. The figure below illustrates the Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a extracted.
locking feature for each seating position. child restraint is installed in a seating position 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
12 years old and under should always be This indicates the seat belt is now in the
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle Automatic Locking Mode.
with a rear seat.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
WARNING!
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt 6
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in and allow it to retract completely to disengage
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
front air bag can cause death or serious vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
Automatic Locking Retractor — (ALR) Locations including a child in a rear-facing child WARNING!
If the passenger seating position is equipped restraint.
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,  The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If is not working properly when checked
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do according to the procedures in the Service
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound not transport a rear-facing child restraint in Manual.
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to that vehicle.
retract completely in this case and then (Continued)
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
342 SAFETY
Air Bag System Components The ORC contains a backup power supply
WARNING! (Continued) system that may deploy the air bag system even
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
 Failure to replace the seat belt assembly if the battery loses power or it becomes
could increase the risk of injury in colli-  Air Bag Warning Light disconnected prior to deployment.
sions.  Steering Wheel and Column The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
 Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to  Instrument Panel the instrument panel for approximately four to
restrain occupants who are wearing the eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
seat belt or children who are using booster  Knee Impact Bolsters switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
seats. The locked mode is only used to  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
install rear-facing or forward-facing child off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
restraints that have a harness for  Seat Belt Buckle Switch of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
restraining the child.  Supplemental Side Air Bags Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
 Front and Side Impact Sensors
SUPPLEMENTAL R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS comes on again after initial startup.
 Seat Belt Pretensioners
(SRS) The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
 Seat Track Position Sensors illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Some of the safety features described in this
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
section may be standard equipment on some  Occupant Classification System
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
models, or may be optional equipment on
Air Bag Warning Light record the nature of the malfunction. While the
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
The Occupant Restraint Controller air bag system is designed to be maintenance
dealer.
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the free, if any of the following occurs, have an
The air bag system must be ready to protect you authorized dealer service the air bag system
electronic parts of the air bag system
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller immediately.
whenever the ignition switch is in the
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
interconnecting wiring associated with the
is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air
inflate.
Bag System Components:
SAFETY 343
 The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
during the four to eight seconds when the If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. Light is detected, which could affect
 The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the Supplemental Restraint System
the four to eight-second interval. (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light will illuminate on the instrument panel.
 The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit- The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay
tently or remains on while driving. on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
NOTE: chime will sound to alert you that the
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
related gauges are not working, the Occupant and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or 2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not remains on while driving have an authorized
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 126. WARNING! 6
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.  Being too close to the steering wheel or
Front Air Bags instrument panel during front air bag
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder deployment could cause serious injury,
WARNING! belts for both the driver and front passenger. including death. Air bags need room to
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your The front air bags are a supplement to the seat inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
instrument panel could mean you won’t have belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is your arms to reach the steering wheel or
the air bag system to protect you in a mounted in the center of the steering wheel. instrument panel.
collision. If the light does not come on as a The passenger front air bag is mounted in the (Continued)
bulb check when the ignition is first turned instrument panel, above the glove
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
comes on as you drive, have an authorized “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
344 SAFETY
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used

WARNING! (Continued) for more severe collisions. WARNING! (Continued)
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/  Do not put anything on or around the air
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
front air bag can cause death or serious detects whether the driver or front passenger ally. You may damage the air bags and you
injury to a child 12 years or younger, seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch could be injured because the air bags may
including a child in a rear-facing child may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced no longer be functional. The protective
restraint. Front Air Bags. covers for the air bag cushions are
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in designed to open only when the air bags
 This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a are inflating.
front passenger seat track position sensors that
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do Front Air Bags based upon seat position. more severe injuries in a collision. The air
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in This vehicle is equipped with a right front bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
that vehicle. passenger Occupant Classification System properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
(“OCS”) that is designed to provide Passenger deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to even though you have air bags.
Features the occupant’s seated weight input, as
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has determined by the OCS. Front Air Bag Operation
multistage driver and front passenger air bags. Front Air Bags are designed to provide
This system provides output appropriate to the WARNING! additional protection by supplementing the seat
severity and type of collision as determined by  No objects should be placed over or near belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which the air bag on the instrument panel or the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
may receive information from the front impact steering wheel because any such objects collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
sensors (if equipped) or other system could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli- frontal collisions, including some that may
components. sion severe enough to cause the air bag to produce substantial vehicle damage — for
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately inflate. example, some pole collisions, truck
during an impact that requires air bag (Continued) underrides, and angle offset collisions.
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
SAFETY 345
On the other hand, depending on the type and Occupant Classification System (OCS) — ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in Front Passenger Seat the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety deployment based on occupant classification.
that produce a severe initial deceleration. system for this vehicle. It is designed to provide In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output important for the front passenger to be seated
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
damage by themselves are not good indicators determined by the OCS. The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the
of whether or not an air bag should have The Occupant Classification System (OCS) Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS
deployed. consists of the following: may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) that:
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.  Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and  The front passenger seat is unoccupied or
Sensor located in the front passenger seat has very light objects on it; or
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it  Air Bag Warning Light  The front passenger seat is occupied by a 6
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of small passenger, including a child; or
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And
bags. Sensor  The front passenger seat is occupied by a
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is rear-facing child restraint; or
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel located underneath the front passenger seat.  The front passenger is not properly seated or
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags The Sensor is located beneath the passenger his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will period of time.
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate from the Sensor to determine the front
while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger’s most probable classification. The
passenger. OCM communicates this information to the
346 SAFETY
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR Full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and
never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most  Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
WARNING! probable classification. The OCS estimates the comfortably on or near the floor
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in seated weight on the front passenger seat and
 Sitting with their back against the seatback
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger where that weight is located. The OCS
and the seatback in an upright position
front air bag can cause death or serious communicates the classification status to the
injury to a child 12 years or younger, ORC. The ORC uses the classification to
including a child in a rear-facing child determine whether the Passenger Advanced
restraint. Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted.
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a important for the front passenger to be seated
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do Properly seated passengers are:
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.  Sitting upright
 Children 12 years or younger should always  Facing forward Seated Properly

ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
SAFETY 347
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Examples of improper front passenger seating occupant may provide an output signal to the
Adults) include: OCS that is different from the occupant’s
When a lighter weight passenger, including a  The front passenger’s weight is transferred to properly seated weight input, for example:
small adult, occupies the front passenger seat, another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
the OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the rest or instrument panel).
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. This does
 The front passenger leans forward, sideways,
not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
Do not decrease OR increase the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front  The front passenger’s seatback is not in the
passenger seat full upright position.
The front passenger’s seated weight must be  The front passenger carries or holds an
properly positioned on the front passenger seat. object while seated (e.g., backpack, box,
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or etc.). Not Seated Properly
death. The OCS determines the most probable
 Objects are lodged under the front passenger
6
classification of the occupant that it detects.
seat.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s
decreased or increased seated weight, which  Objects are lodged between the front
may result in an adjusted inflation rate of the passenger seat and center console.
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision.
This does not mean that the OCS is working  Accessories that may change the seated
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s weight on the front passenger seat are
seated weight on the front passenger seat may attached to the front passenger seat.
result in a reduced-power deployment of the
 Anything that may decrease or increase the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing
front passenger’s seated weight. Not Seated Properly
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in a full-power The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front probable classification. If an occupant in the
Air Bag. front passenger seat is seated improperly, the
348 SAFETY

 If a child restraint system, child, small teen-  Placing an object on the floor under the
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is front passenger seat may prevent the OCS
seated improperly, the occupant may from working properly, which may result in
provide an output signal to the OCS that is serious injury or death in a collision. Do not
different from the occupant’s properly place any objects on the floor under the
seated weight input. This may result in front passenger seat.
serious injury or death in a collision.
Not Seated Properly  Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument
with the seatback in an upright position, panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to
your back against the seatback, sitting classify the front passenger seat status. A
upright, facing forward, in the center of the malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation
seat, with your feet comfortably on or near of the air bag system.
the floor.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come
 Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back- on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an
passenger seat. Holding an object may authorized dealer for service immediately.
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different than the occupant’s properly The passenger seat assembly contains critical
Not Seated Properly seated weight input, which may result in OCS components that may affect the Passenger
serious injury or death in a collision. Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the
(Continued) OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a
front seat passenger, the OCS components
must function as designed. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If
the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service
SAFETY 349
for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized

dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat
WARNING! WARNING!
accessories may be used.  Unapproved modifications or service proce-  Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
The following requirements must be strictly dures to the passenger seat assembly, its impact bolsters in any way.
related components, seat cover or cushion Do not mount any accessories to the knee
followed: 
may inadvertently change the air bag impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
 Do not modify the front passenger seat deployment in case of a frontal collision. stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
assembly or components in any way. This could result in death or serious injury
to the front passenger if the vehicle is
 Do not use prior or future model year seat Supplemental Side Air Bags
involved in a collision. A modified vehicle
covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
may not comply with required Federal Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
LLC for the specific model being repaired.
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) (SABs)
Always use the correct seat cover and
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
cushion specified for the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Standards (CMVSS).
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
 Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with  If it is necessary to modify the air bag 6
an aftermarket seat cover or cushion. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
system for persons with disabilities,
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
 Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat. contact an authorized dealer.
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
 At no time should any Supplemental AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS
Knee Impact Bolsters trim on the outboard side of the seats.
related component or fastener be modified The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
or replaced with any part except those which knees of the driver and front passenger, and occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
are approved by FCA US LLC. position the front occupants for improved addition to the injury reduction potential
interaction with the front air bags. provided by the seat belts and body structure.
350 SAFETY
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
(SABICs) the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental force to injure occupants if they are not belted
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains are at an even greater risk of injury from a
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. deploying air bag.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.” The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label through side windows in certain side impact
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on events.
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat WARNING!
seam into the space between the occupant and  Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed or other cargo up high enough to block the
and with such a high force that it could injure deployment of the SABICs. The trim
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if covering above the side windows where the
items are positioned in the area where the SAB SABIC and its deployment path are located
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) should remain free from any obstructions.
injury from a deploying air bag. Label Location  In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and do not install any accessory items in your
WARNING!
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
Do not use accessory seat covers or place occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the injury reduction potential provided by the Do not add roof racks that require perma-
the performance could be adversely affected seat belts and body structure. nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
and/or objects could be pushed into you, installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
causing serious injury. into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
SAFETY 351
Side Impacts Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
WARNING!
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint time than it takes to blink your eyes.  Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
Controller (ORC) determines whether the lean against the door or window. Sit upright
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
WARNING! in the center of the seat.
impact event is appropriate, based on the  Occupants, including children, who are up  Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
severity and type of collision. The side impact against or very close to Side Air Bags can be deployment could cause you to be severely
sensors aid the ORC in determining the seriously injured or killed. Occupants, injured or killed.
appropriate response to impact events. The including children, should never lean on or  Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags sleep against the door, side windows, or lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts area where the side air bags inflate, even if The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In they are in an infant or child restraint. to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy  Seat belts (and child restraints where Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
independently; a left side impact deploys the appropriate) are necessary for your protec- wear your seat belt even though you have
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact 6
tion in all collisions. They also help keep Side Air Bags.
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle you in position, away from an inflating Side
damage by itself is not a good indicator of Air Bag. To get the best protection from the NOTE:
whether or not Side Air Bags should have Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
deployed. seat belts properly and sit upright with their trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side backs against the seats. Children must be ment.
collisions, including some collisions at certain properly restrained in a child restraint or
angles, or some side collisions that do not booster seat that is appropriate for the size
impact the area of the passenger compartment. of the child.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
352 SAFETY
Rollover Events Air Bag System Components If A Deployment Occurs

Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are NOTE: The front air bags are designed to deflate
designed to activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni- immediately after deployment.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) tors the internal circuits and interconnecting NOTE:
determines whether deployment in a particular wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
rollover event is appropriate, based on the Components listed below: collisions. This does not mean something is
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) wrong with the air bag system.
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not 
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners If you do have a collision which deploys the air
 Air Bag Warning Light
should have deployed. bags, any or all of the following may occur:
 Steering Wheel and Column
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners  The air bag material may sometimes cause
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover  Instrument Panel abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
sensing system determines if a rollover event pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
may be in progress and whether deployment is  Knee Impact Bolsters abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
appropriate. In the event the vehicle  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags those you might get sliding along a carpet or
experiences a rollover or near rollover event, gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover  Seat Belt Buckle Switch contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
sensing system will deploy the side air bags and nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
 Supplemental Side Air Bags
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the you haven’t healed significantly within a few
vehicle.  Front and Side Impact Sensors days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial  Seat Belt Pretensioners
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants  As the air bags deflate, you may see some
 Seat Track Position Sensors smoke-like particles. The particles are a
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.  Occupant Classification System normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
SAFETY 353
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. Enhanced Accident Response System  Cut off battery power to the:
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. In the event of an impact, if the communication  Engine
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If network remains intact, and the power remains
these particles settle on your clothing, follow intact, depending on the nature of the event,  Electric Motor (if equipped)
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will
cleaning.  Electric power steering
determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the  Brake booster
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another following functions:  Electric park brake
collision, the air bags will not be in place to  Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)  Automatic transmission gear selector
protect you.
 Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if  Horn
WARNING! equipped)
 Front wiper
Deployed air bags and seat belt  Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power  Headlamp washer pump
pretensioners cannot protect you in another 6
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt NOTE:
 Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-
as long as the battery has power or for
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and
15 minutes from the intervention of the
immediately. Also, have the Occupant remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid
Enhanced Accident Response System
Restraint Controller System serviced as well. draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle
 Unlock the power door locks for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and
NOTE: Your vehicle may also be designed to perform fuel tank before resetting the system and
 Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte- any of these other functions in response to the starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
rior trim, but they will open during air bag Enhanced Accident Response System: damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
deployment.  Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the headlights) after an accident, reset the system
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula- by following the procedure described below. If
 After any collision, the vehicle should be you have any doubt, contact an authorized
tion Door
taken to an authorized dealer immediately. dealer.
354 SAFETY
Enhanced Accident Response System Maintaining Your Air Bag System

Reset Procedure
WARNING!  Do not attempt to modify any part of your
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident
Response System functions after an event, the  Modifications to any part of the air bag air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-
ignition switch must be changed from ignition system could cause it to fail when you need dentally or may not function properly if
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully it. You could be injured if the air bag system modifications are made. Take your vehicle
is not there to protect you. Do not modify to an authorized dealer for any air bag
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
the components or wiring, including adding system service. If your seat, including your
compartment and on the ground near the
any kind of badges or stickers to the trim cover and cushion, needs to be
engine compartment and fuel tank before
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper serviced in any way (including removal or
resetting the system and starting the engine.
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do loosening/tightening of seat attachment
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start
not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
after performing the reset procedure, the
body structure, or add aftermarket side dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer
steps or running boards. accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to be inspected and to have the Enhanced to modify the air bag system for persons
Accident Response System reset.  It is dangerous to try to repair any part of with disabilities, contact an authorized
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell dealer.
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
(Continued)
SAFETY 355
Event Data Recorder (EDR) NOTE: Children 12 years or younger should ride
This vehicle is equipped with an event data EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are According to crash statistics, children are safer
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like recorded by the EDR under normal driving when properly restrained in the rear seats
situations, such as an air bag deployment or conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, rather than in the front.
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
understanding how a vehicle’s systems However, other parties, such as law enforce- WARNING!
performed. The EDR is designed to record data ment, could combine the EDR data with the type In a collision, an unrestrained child can
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems of personally identifying data routinely acquired become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds during a crash investigation. force required to hold even an infant on your
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to To read data recorded by an EDR, special lap could become so great that you could not
record such data as: equipment is required, and access to the hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
 How various systems in your vehicle were vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the The child and others could be badly injured or
operating; vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. 6
law enforcement, that have the special
 Whether or not the driver and passenger equipment, can read the information if they
safety belts were buckled/fastened; have access to the vehicle or the EDR. There are different sizes and types of restraints
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing for children from newborn size to the child

CHILD R ESTRAINTS almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
 How fast the vehicle was traveling. at all times, including babies and children. Every make sure you have the correct seat for your
These data can help provide a better state in the United States, and every Canadian child. Carefully read and follow all the
understanding of the circumstances in which province, requires that small children ride in instructions and warnings in the child restraint
crashes and injuries occur. proper restraint systems. This is the law, and Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. to the child restraint.
356 SAFETY
Before buying any restraint system, make sure NOTE:  Canadian residents should refer to Transport
that it has a label certifying that it meets all Canada’s website for additional information:
 For additional information, refer to http:// https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or child-car-seat-safety.html
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
call: 1–888–327–4236
where you will use it.
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Children who are two years old or younger and Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Infants and Toddlers who have not reached the height or weight limits Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
of their child restraint vehicle
Children who are at least two years old or who Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Small Children have outgrown the height or weight limit of their Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
rear-facing child restraint vehicle
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
Larger Children child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
Children Too Large for Child Restraints outgrown the height or weight limit of their
vehicle
booster seat
SAFETY 357
Infant And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
old or until they reach either the height or front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. front air bag can cause death or serious
Two types of child restraints can be used injury to a child 12 years or younger,
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child including a child in a rear-facing child
seats. restraint.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
that vehicle.
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a 6
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used WARNING!
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a Older Children And Child Restraints
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing rear support leg in this vehicle. The floor of Children who are two years old or who have
until they reach the highest weight or height this vehicle is not designed to manage the outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
allowed by their convertible child seat. crash forces of this type of car seat. In a can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
crash, the support leg may not function as it Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
was designed by the car seat manufacturer, seats used in the forward-facing direction are
and your child may be more severely injured for children who are over two years old or who
as a result. have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
(Continued) limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
358 SAFETY
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up 1. Can the child sit all the way back against
to the highest weight or height allowed by the WARNING! (Continued) the back of the vehicle seat?
child seat.  After a child restraint is installed in the
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
All children whose weight or height is above the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use forward or rearward because it can loosen
is still sitting all the way back?
a belt-positioning booster seat until the the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat shoulder between the neck and arm?
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
seat cushion while the child’s back is against 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
restraint.
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning touching the child’s thighs and not the
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning  When your child restraint is not in use,
stomach?
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
belt. LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. whole trip?
WARNING! In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause If the answer to any of these questions was
 Improper installation can lead to failure of serious personal injury. “no”, then the child still needs to use a booster
an infant or child restraint. It could come seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
loose in a collision. The child could be badly shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint Children Too Large For Booster Seats
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
manufacturer’s directions exactly when Children who are large enough to wear the
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
installing an infant or child restraint. shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
(Continued) long enough to bend over the front of the seat
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
when their back is against the seatback, should
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
position the seat belt on the child correctly.
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
SAFETY 359
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which
may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
Combined Weight of
Restraint Type the Child + Child LATCH – Lower
LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + Top
Restraint Seat Belt Only Anchors + Top Tether
Anchors Only Tether Anchor
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Restraint
Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
6
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Restraint
Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
360 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren LATCH Positions For Installing Child
(LATCH) Restraint System Restraints In This Vehicle
Crew Cab Full Bench, Quad Cab Full Bench And 60/40
LATCH Label Split Bench LATCH Positions
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Crew Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The Top Tether Anchorage Symbol Seating Position)
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There Seating Position)
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
SAFETY 361
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
the child restraint?
once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage
system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used restraint.
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child No
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
restraint?
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster
seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the Quad Cab or Crew with Full bench rear seat: Use the seat
inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating No belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center 6
positions? seating position
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
No LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
LATCH anchorage?
seat in the center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Yes
passenger seat? See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
362 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages some rear-facing child restraints will also be
The lower anchorages are round bars equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
that are found at the rear of the seat will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
cushion where it meets the seatback, tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
below the anchorage symbols on the after it is attached to the anchorage.
seatback. They are just visible when you lean Center Seat LATCH
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
All Quad Cabs Or Crew Cab Full Bench Rear
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
Seat: No Lower Center LATCH Anchorages
along the gap between the seatback and seat
Available
cushion. Outboard Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
 Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This posi-
tion is not approved for installing child
seats using the LATCH attachments. You
must use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seating
position.
 Never use the same lower anchorage to
Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side (Example Shown) Center Tether Anchorage Over Head Rest attach more than one child restraint
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will Ú page 363.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
There are tether strap anchorages on each side. Each will have a hook or
located behind each of the rear seats. connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
SAFETY 363
Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat: Center LATCH 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps according to the child restraint
Anchorages Available and on the tether strap of the child seat so manufacturer’s instructions.
If a child restraint installed in the center that you can more easily attach the hooks
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
for the outboard position, do not use that 2. Place the child seat between the lower seat at the belt path. It should not move
outboard position. If a child seat in the center anchorages for that seating position. If the more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or second row seat can be reclined, you may direction.
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that recline the seat and/or raise the head
outboard position. restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
the rear seat can be moved forward and (ALR) Seat Belt:
WARNING! rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to When using the LATCH attaching system to
Never use the same lower anchorage to move it to its rear-most position to make install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
attach more than one child restraint room for the child seat. You may also move that are not being used by other occupants or
the front seat forward to allow more room being used to secure child restraints. An unused
Ú page 363. 6
for the child seat. belt could injure a child if they play with it and
Always follow the directions of the child accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
restraint manufacturer when installing your installing a child restraint using the LATCH
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
the selected seating position.
will be installed as described here. restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, buckled seat belt interferes with the child
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child connect it to the top tether anchorage. See restraint installation, instead of buckling it
Restraint Ú page 366 for directions to attach a tether behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
If the selected seating position has a anchor. through the child restraint belt path and then
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
child restraint rearward and downward into
instructions below. See Ú page 364 to check toys and that they should not play with them.
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
364 SAFETY
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description

WARNING! WARNING! Ú page 341 for additional information on ALR.
 Improper installation of a child restraint to  Improper installation or failure to properly Please see the table below and the following
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of secure a child restraint can lead to failure sections for more information.
the restraint. The child could be badly of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint injured or killed. Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
manufacturer’s directions exactly when  Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s Child Restraints In This Vehicle
installing an infant or child restraint. directions exactly when installing an infant
 Child restraint anchorages are designed to or child restraint.
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no The seat belts in the passenger seating
circumstances are they to be used for adult positions are equipped with a Switchable
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is
items or equipment to the vehicle. designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
Installing Child Restraints Using The necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
Vehicle Seat Belt retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
Child restraint systems are designed to be
and then letting the webbing retract back into ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
SAFETY 365
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
Weight limit of the
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
Child Restraint
attach a forward facing child restraint? recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
Yes restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also
passenger seat?
allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No Head restraints may not be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an
No
the belt path of the child restraint? ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A child seat. You may also move the front
WARNING! (Continued) seat forward to allow more room for the
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor 6
(ALR):  Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s child seat.
directions exactly when installing an infant
Child restraint systems are designed to be 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
or child restraint.
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap the retractor to pass it through the belt path
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
webbing in the belt path.
WARNING! seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/ 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
 Improper installation or failure to properly or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to hear a “click.”
secure a child restraint can lead to failure get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
of the restraint. The child could be badly 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
moved forward and rearward in the
injured or killed. tight against the child seat.
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
(Continued) rear-most position to make room for the
366 SAFETY
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
shoulder part of the belt until you have check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
WARNING!
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the necessary. Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger
back into the retractor. As the webbing Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Front Air Bag can cause death or serious
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This Tether Anchorage injury to a child 12 years or younger, including
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Locking mode. WARNING!
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing The top tether anchorages in this
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull car seat to any location in front of the car vehicle are tether strap loops located
out any webbing. If the retractor is not seat, including the seat frame or a tether between the rear glass and the back
locked, repeat step 5. anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a of the rear seat. There is a tether
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage strap loop located behind each seating position.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to that is approved for that seating position, Follow the steps below to attach the tether strap
tighten the lap portion around the child located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
restraint while you push the child restraint of the child restraint.
See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers
rearward and downward into the vehicle for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the Right Or Left Outboard Seats:
seat. location of approved tether anchorages in 1. Reach between the rear seat and rear
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap your vehicle. glass to access the tether strap loop.
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the 2. Place a child restraint on the seat and
anchorage and tighten the tether strap adjust the tether strap so that it will reach
Ú page 366. over the seat back, through the space
between the head restraint and the seat
9. Test that the child restraint is installed back, through the tether strap loop behind
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child the seat and over to the tether strap loop
seat at the belt path. It should not move
behind the center seat.
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
SAFETY 367
3. Pass the tether strap hook through the Center Seat:

space between the head restraint and the
1. Reach between the rear seat and rear
seat back behind the child seat, through the
glass to access the tether strap loop.
tether strap loop behind the seat and over
to the center tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And

Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
NOTE:
If there are child seats in both of the outboard
Center Tether Strap Loop Location
(left and right) seating positions, the tether 6
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop strap hooks of both child seats should be 2. Place a child restraint on the seat and
connected to the center tether strap loop. This adjust the tether strap so that it will reach
4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap
is the correct way to tether two outboard child over the seat back and headrest, through
loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap
seats. the tether strap loop behind the seat and
according to the child seat manufacturer’s
over to the tether strap loop behind either
instructions.
the right or left outboard seat.
368 SAFETY
3. Pass the tether strap hook over the

headrest behind the child seat, through the
tether strap loop behind the seat and over
to the right or left outboard tether strap
loop.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And At- Outboard And Center Seating Positions Shown
tached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the
Installing Three Child Restraints: child seat manufacturer’s instructions,
tightening the right and left tether straps
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard before the center tether strap.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop rear seat. Route the tether straps following
the directions for right and left seating
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap positions, above.
WARNING!
loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap  An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
according to the child seat manufacturer’s 2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap
lead to increased head motion and
instructions. loop, but do not tighten the straps yet. possible injury to the child. Use only the
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear anchorage position directly behind the child
seat. Route the tether strap following the seat to secure a child restraint top tether
directions for the center seating position, strap.
above.  If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap
slip into the opening between the seat-
loop.
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
SAFETY 369
SAFETY TIPS TRANSPORTING P ETS Air Bag Warning Light

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four
TRANSPORTING P ASSENGERS to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE about and possibly injured, or injure a ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
CARGO AREA. passenger during panic braking or in a collision. position. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
WARNING! the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light
 Do not leave children or animals inside are secured by seat belts.
will illuminate with a single chime when a fault
heat build-up may cause serious injury or SAFETY CHECKS Y OU S HOULD M AKE with the Air Bag System has been detected. It
death. I NSIDE THE VEHICLE will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
 It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo Seat Belts driving, have an authorized dealer service the
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a vehicle immediately.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, 6
collision, people riding in these areas are
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. See Ú page 334 for further information.
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of Do not disassemble or modify the system. Defroster
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and seat belts. Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must and place the blower control on high speed. You
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat be replaced after a collision if they have been should be able to feel the air directed against
and using a seat belt properly. damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt service if your defroster is inoperable.
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
370 SAFETY
Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not  ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR  ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
interfere with the operation of the accelerator, MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before slide into the driver’s side floor area when
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that installing any other floor mat. NEVER install the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
is securely attached using the floor mat or stack an additional floor mat on top of an trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and existing floor mat. pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch  ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your control.
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that  NEVER place any objects under the floor
in other ways. cannot be properly attached and secured to mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be could change the position of the floor mat
WARNING! replaced, only use a FCA approved floor and may cause interference with the accel-
mat for the specific make, model, and year erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
of your vehicle. If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat 
fasteners may cause your floor mat to  ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the re-installed, always properly attach carpet
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch driver’s side floor area. To check for inter- to the floor and check the floor mat
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To ference, with the vehicle properly parked fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: with the engine off, fully depress the accel- Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if ference with the accelerator, brake, or
 ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
present) to check for interference. If your clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
floor mat interferes with the operation of It is recommended to only use mild soap
install your floor mat upside down or turn 
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, and water to clean your floor mats. After
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and cleaning, always check your floor mat has
mat is secured using the floor mat
place the floor mat in your trunk. been properly installed and is secured to
fasteners on a regular basis.
(Continued)  ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
the passenger’s side floor area. by lightly pulling mat.
(Continued)
SAFETY 371
PERIODIC S AFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD EXHAUST GAS The best protection against carbon monoxide
MAKE OUTSIDE T HE V EHICLE entry into the vehicle body is a properly
WARNING! maintained engine exhaust system.
Tires Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, odorless. Breathing it can make you be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or unconscious and can eventually poison you. underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. tips: exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
Check the lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold  Do not run the engine in a closed garage or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
inflation pressure. in confined areas any longer than needed connections could permit exhaust fumes to
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
seep into the passenger compartment. In
Lights  If you are required to drive with the trunk/ addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
Have someone observe the operation of brake liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil 6
lights and exterior lights while you work the windows are closed and the climate control change. Replace as required.
controls. Check turn signal and high beam BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
indicator lights on the instrument panel. NOT use the recirculation mode.
Door Latches  If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
heating or cooling controls to force outside
Fluid Leaks air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
Check area under the vehicle after overnight speed.
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
372 SAFETY
CARBON M ONOXIDE W ARNINGS

WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
 Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
 Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
373
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard
Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When leaving the vehicle to seek assistance,
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to Assist And SOS Buttons
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located operate even though the ignition is placed in the 1 — ASSIST Button
on the upper switch bank just below the radio. OFF position. 2 — SOS Button 7
NOTE: NOTE: If equipped, the overhead console contains an
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch With extended use the Hazard Warning ASSIST and a SOS button.
Uconnect display, the Hazard Warning Flashers Flashers may wear down your battery.
switch is located above the display.
374 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ASSIST Call the cancellation button on the Device Screen.

WARNING! Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to connect you to any one of the following support green LED light on the overhead console.
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands centers: 2. The LED lights located within the ASSIST
on the steering wheel. You have full
 Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or and SOS buttons on the overhead console
responsibility and assume all risks related to
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and will turn green once a connection to a SOS
the use of the features and applications in
you’ll be connected to someone who can operator has been made.
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure help. Roadside Assistance will know what
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and
to do so may result in an accident involving vehicle you’re driving and its location. Addi-
a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call
serious injury or death. tional fees may apply for roadside assis-
system may transmit the following
tance.
important vehicle information to a SOS
NOTE:  SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – operator:
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.  Indication that the occupant placed a
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber Ú page 482.  Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all SOS Call
other vehicle issues.  The vehicle brand
 The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE SOS Call  The last known GPS coordinates of the
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network, which vehicle
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead
comes as a built in function. Other Uconnect
console. 4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
services will only be operable if your SiriusXM
Guardian™ service is active and connected NOTE: operator through the vehicle audio system
to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, to determine if additional help is needed.
network. there will be a ten second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the overhead console or press
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 375
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system

WARNING! will attempt to remain connected with the WARNING! (Continued)
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to SOS operator until the SOS operator termi-  The SOS Call system is embedded into the
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands nates the connection. vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
on the steering wheel. You have full aftermarket electrical equipment to the
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
responsibility and assume all risks related to vehicle’s electrical system. This may
appropriate emergency responders and
the use of the features and applications in prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
provide them with important vehicle
this vehicle. Only use the features and to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
information and GPS coordinates.
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure ference that can cause the SOS Call system
to do so may result in an accident involving to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
serious injury or death. WARNING! (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
 If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous system or modify the antennas on your
NOTE:
road conditions or location), do not wait for vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data voice contact from an Emergency Services POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
Ú page 482 as authorized by the subscriber. Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
 Once a connection is made between the immediately and move to a safe location.
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT 7
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-  Never place anything on or near the OPERATE.
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open a vehicle’s operable network and GPS
voice connection with the vehicle to deter-  Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
antennas. You could prevent operable
mine if additional help is needed. Once the system could cause the air bag system to
network and GPS signal reception, which
SOS operator opens a voice connection with fail when you need it. You could be injured
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator if the air bag system is not there to help
emergency call. An operable network and
should be able to speak with you or other protect you.
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring Call system to function properly.
(Continued)
SOS Call System Limitations  The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
WARNING! disconnected during a vehicle crash
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.  Ignoring the overhead console light could
 LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
SOS or other emergency line operators in Global Positioning Satellite signals are
the overhead console light is illuminated,
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS unavailable or obstructed
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
system calls. Call system immediately.  Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,  The Occupant Restraint Control module facility
any of the following may occur at the time the turns on the air bag Warning Light on the  Operator error by the SOS operator
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of instrument panel if a malfunction in any
each ignition cycle: part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag  LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
Warning Light is illuminated, have an congestion
 The overhead console lights located within
the ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously authorized dealer service the Occupant
 Weather
illuminate red. Restraint Control system immediately.
 Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
 The Device Screen will display the following Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, tunnels
message: “Vehicle device requires service. factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
Please contact an authorized dealer.” prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation. WARNING!
 An In-Vehicle Audio message will state These include, but are not limited to, the ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
“Vehicle device requires service. Please following factors: the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
contact an authorized dealer.”  The ignition is in the OFF position on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
 The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact the use of the features and applications in
 The SOS Call system software and/or hard- this vehicle. Only use the features and
ware are damaged during a crash applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
NOTE:
PREPARATIONS FOR J ACKING
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
 Being under a jacked-up vehicle is NOTE:
authorized by the subscriber.
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the If your vehicle is equipped with Air Suspension,
 Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. you will need to enable Tire Jack Mode in the
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS Never put any part of your body under a Uconnect system Ú page 165 before changing
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/ vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get the tire.
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
which can prevent your vehicle from placing 1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
center where it can be raised on a lift.
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/ slippery areas.
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a  Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack. WARNING!
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.  The jack is designed to be used as a tool for Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
changing tires only. The jack should not be the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
NOTE: enough off the road to avoid being hit when
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
Changes or modifications not expressly operating the jack or changing the wheel.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
approved by the party responsible for compli-
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
ance could void the user's authority to operate
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. 7
the equipment.
NOTE:
3. Apply the parking brake.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspen-
sion system, there is a feature which allows the 4. Shift the transmission into Park (P).
WARNING! automatic leveling to be disabled to assist with
changing a tire. This feature can be activated 5. Turn the ignition OFF.
 Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
through the Uconnect system Ú page 249.
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
(Continued)
6. Block both the front and rear wheel REMOVAL O F JACK A ND T OOLS
diagonally opposite of each jacking
position. For example, if the driver’s front To access the jack and tools, you must remove
wheel is being changed, block the the plastic access cover located on the side of
passenger’s rear wheel. the front passenger’s seat. To remove the
cover, pull the front part of the cover (closest to
the front of the seat) toward you to release a
locking tab. Once the front of the cover is loose,
slide the cover toward the front of the seat until
it is free from the seat frame.
Jack And Tools
Release the tool bag straps from the jack and
remove tools from bag.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being raised or lifted.
Pull Jack Access Cover From Front
J ACK L OCATION Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing
The jack and tools are stored under the front bolt counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt
passenger seat. and then slide the assembly out from under the Jack And Tool Bag
seat.
There are two ways to assemble the tools: NOTE: Assembled For Jack Operation
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising If the tailgate is lowered, adding the shorter
extension 5 to jack extension 4 will enable
lowering the spare tire without having to raise
the tailgate.
CAUTION!
 The lug wrench can only be attached to
extension 2.
 When attaching the tool to the winch mech-
anism be sure the large flared end opening Assembled For Jack Operation
on extension 4 is positioned correctly over 1 — Lug Wrench
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
the winch mechanism adjusting nut. 2 — Long Extension 2
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Long Extension Without Spring Clip 2  Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and 3 — Long Extension 3
winch mechanism may occur from 4 — Long Extension 4
3 — Long Extension With Spring Clip 3
4 — Long Extension With Spring Clip 4
improper tool assembly. 5 — Short Extension 5 7
5 — Short Extension 5 6 — Extension With Hook
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall
them in the original carrier and location.
While driving you may experience abrupt
stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A
loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects in
the vehicle may move around with force,
resulting in serious injury.
REMOVING THE S PARE TIRE

1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to
jack up the truck. Attach the lug wrench to
the extension tubes with the curved angle
facing away from the vehicle.
2. Remove the protective cover over the
access hole for the winch mechanism by
sliding the cover upward.
Winch Mechanism Tube Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
5. Pull the spare tire out from under the
vehicle to gain access to the spare tire
retainer.
Access Hole Cover Location

Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole
3. Insert the extension tube through the
access hole between the lower tailgate and 4. Rotate the lug wrench handle counter-
the top of the fascia/bumper and into the clockwise until the spare tire is on the
winch mechanism tube. ground with enough cable slack to allow you Pulling The Spare Tire Out
to pull it out from under the vehicle.
6. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give NOTE:

clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of The winch mechanism is designed for use with WARNING! (Continued)
the cable. the extension tubes only. Use of an air wrench  Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
or other power tools is not recommended and jack. If you need to get under a raised
can damage the winch. vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
J ACKING INSTRUCTIONS
 Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
WARNING!
change.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
 If working on or near a roadway, be
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
extremely careful of motor traffic.
your vehicle:
 To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
 Always park on a firm, level surface as far
Tilting The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel are securely stowed, spares must be
from the edge of the roadway as possible
stowed with the valve stem facing the
7. Pull the retainer through the center of the before raising the vehicle.
ground.
wheel. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.

7
 Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
 Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
 Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
 Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
Pulling The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel (Continued) Jack Warning Label
4. Placement for the front and rear jacking

CAUTION! locations are critical. See below images for
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking proper jacking locations.
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from

the stored location.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel nuts
(but do not remove), by turning them Front Lifting Point
counterclockwise one turn while the wheel
is still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Jack / Extensions Placement
Connect the jack handle driver to the Front Jacking Location
extension, then to the lug wrench.
When changing a front wheel, place the
scissor jack under the rear portion of the
lower control arm as shown. Access the
front jacking location from behind the front
tire.
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
Operate the jack using the extension with
jack hook and the lug wrench. The exten-
sion tubes may be used but is not required.
Assembled Jack And Tools
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the

extension with jack hook to the jack and
WARNING!
connect the extension tubes. Access the Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
rear jacking location from behind the rear make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
tire. Place the jack under the Jack Lifting the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
Point located on the rear axle lower control vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
arm bracket. Then locate the slot in the jack
lift plate onto the rear axle Jack Lifting Point. 6. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off.
Attach the extension with jack hook extend- Install the spare wheel and lug nuts with the
ing to the rear of the vehicle. Rear Jacking Location cone shaped end of the lug nuts toward the
Connect the long extensions to the lug wheel. Hand tighten the lug nuts with the
wrench. vehicle lifted. To avoid the risk of forcing the
vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the
CAUTION! lug nuts until the vehicle has been
completely lowered.
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make
sure that the jack will not damage 7. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
7
surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack the wrench handle for increased leverage.
position as required. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each lug nut has been tightened twice
Rear Lifting Point 5. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise Ú page 467. If in doubt about the correct
the vehicle until the wheel just clears the tightness, have them checked with a torque
ground surface. wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
service station.
WARNING! TO STOW THE FLAT OR S PARE 2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a WARNING! the cable and position it properly across the
collision or hard stop, could endanger the wheel opening.
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
parts and the spare tire in the places collision or hard stop could endanger the
provided. occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
8. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel or replaced immediately.
center cap, install the cap and remove the
wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or
aluminum wheel center caps on the spare 1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is
wheel. This may result in cap damage. facing upward and toward the rear of the
vehicle for convenience in checking the
9. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. spare tire inflation. Slide the wheel retainer Pushing The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
Stow the replaced tire, and secure the jack through the center of the wheel. And Positioning It
and tools in the proper location.
10. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
Reinstalling The Retainer

3. Remove the extension with the hook and

reattach the short extension 5. Attach the
lug wrench to the extension tubes with the
curved angle facing away from the vehicle
Ú page 378. Insert the extension tubes
through the access hole between the lower
tailgate and the top of the fascia/bumper
and into the winch mechanism tube.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle Jack And Tool Bag
NOTE: 3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.

The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and can
damage the winch.
REINSTALLING T HE JACK A ND T OOLS 7

Reinstalling The Flat Or Spare Tire
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise turning the jack turn-screw counter-
until the wheel is drawn into place against clockwise until the jack is snug.
the underside of the vehicle. Continue to Jack And Tools Tied
2. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure
rotate until you feel the winch mechanism
the lug wrench is under the jack near the
slip, or click three or four times. It cannot be 4. Place the jack and tools in the storage
jack turn-screw.
overtightened. Push against the tire several position holding the jack by the jack
times to ensure it is firmly in place. turn-screw, slip the jack and tools under the
seat so that the bottom slot engages into
the fastener on the floor.
NOTE:
Ensure that the jack slides into the front hold
JUMP STARTING PREPARATIONS FOR J UMP START
down location. If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can The battery in your vehicle is located in the front
be jump started using a set of jumper cables of the engine compartment, behind the left
5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a headlight assembly.
floor pan. Reinstall the plastic cover. portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION! Battery Location

Jack Hold Down Wing Bolt
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or NOTE:
any other booster source with a system The positive battery post may be covered with a
WARNING! voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall the battery, starter motor, alternator or to the positive battery post. Do not jump off
them in the original carrier and location. electrical system may occur. fuses. Only jump directly off positive post which
While driving you may experience abrupt has a positive (+) symbol on or around the post.
stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A NOTE:
loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects in When using a portable battery booster pack,
the vehicle may move around with force, follow the manufacturer's operating instruc-
resulting in serious injury. tions and precautions.
WARNING! J UMP S TARTING P ROCEDURE

 Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan WARNING!
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
be injured by moving fan blades. could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
 Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You CAUTION!
Positive Battery Post could be seriously injured.
Failure to follow these procedures could
See below steps to prepare for jump starting:  Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can result in damage to the charging system of
burn your skin or eyes and generate the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
automatic transmission into PARK and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks Connecting The Jumper Cables
turn the ignition OFF.
away from the battery.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories. 7
WARNING!
3. Pull upward and remove the protective
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
cover over the remote positive (+) battery
this could establish a ground connection and
post.
personal injury could result.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables’ reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF. Jumper Cable Connections
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery, let the engine idle a few jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
discharged vehicle. minutes, and then start the engine in the the booster battery.
NOTE: vehicle with the discharged battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the
Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive (+) jumper cable from the positive
positive post. CAUTION!
(+) post of the vehicle with the discharged
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) Do not connect jumper cable to any of the battery.
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the fuses on the positive battery terminal. The
booster battery. resulting electrical current will blow the fuse. If frequent jump starting is required to start your
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper vehicle you should have the battery and
6. Once the engine is started, follow the charging system inspected at an authorized
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
disconnection procedure below. dealer.
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) Disconnecting The Jumper Cables CAUTION!
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as jumper cable from the engine ground of outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The the vehicle with the discharged battery. even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
ground must be away from the battery and 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
the fuel injection system. engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery. discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
WARNING! and/or prevent the engine from starting.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS WARNING!

The fuel filling procedure in case of an If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be You or others can be badly burned by hot
emergency is described on Ú page 208. serviced by an authorized dealer. engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel. In any of the following situations, you can your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
If refueling is necessary, while using an reduce the potential for overheating by taking from under the hood, do not open the hood
approved gas can, please insert the refueling the appropriate action. until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
funnel into the filler neck opening. try to open a cooling system pressure cap
 On the highways — slow down.
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
 In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase
the engine idle speed while preventing CAUTION!
vehicle motion with the brakes. Driving with a hot cooling system could
NOTE: damage your vehicle. If the temperature
There are steps that you can take to slow down gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the
an impending overheat condition: vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops 7
Refueling Funnel  If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. back into the normal range. If the pointer
The A/C system adds heat to the engine remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
cooling system and turning the A/C off can chimes, turn the engine off immediately and
help remove this heat. call for service.
 You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
Inserting Funnel
MANUAL PARK RELEASE 3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,

open the Manual Park Release cover, which
WARNING! is located to the lower left of the steering
column.
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying
the parking brake before activating the
Manual Park Release. In addition, you should
be seated in the driver’s seat with your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual
Manual Park Release Tether
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake, To Reset The Manual Park Release:
or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an 1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury Manual Park Release Access Cover while seated in the driver’s seat.
or death for those in or around the vehicle.
4. Behind the Manual Park Release access 2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release
cover is the orange tether strap. Pull the it.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such tether strap out as far as it will go, then
as a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release release it. The tether and lever will remain
is available. outside of the trim panel and the
transmission should now be in NEUTRAL,
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park allowing the vehicle to be moved.
Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal
while seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake if possible.
3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever

back to its original position.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE WARNING!
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking generated by excessive wheel speeds may
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
clear the area around the front wheels. Then and tires. A tire could explode and injure
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
REVERSE (R), while gently pressing the faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
accelerator. Use the least amount of than 30 seconds continuously without
accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain stopping when you are stuck and do not let
the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
or racing the engine. what the speed.
Manual Park Release Tether NOTE:
4. Verify the transmission is in PARK. Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
CAUTION!
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully less. Whenever the transmission remains in  Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
and re-install the access cover. If the access NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you may lead to transmission overheating and 7
cover cannot be reinstalled, repeat steps 1 must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
through 4. REVERSE. transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
NOTE: Push the “ESC OFF” switch to place the cycles. This will minimize overheating and
When the lever is locked in the released posi- Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in reduce the risk of transmission failure
tion the access cover cannot be reinstalled. “Partial OFF” mode, before rocking the vehicle during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
Ú page 312. Once the vehicle has been freed, vehicle.
push the “ESC OFF” switch again to restore (Continued)
“ESC On” mode.
CAUTION! (Continued) TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE NOTE:

Vehicles equipped with the Active-Level Four
 When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting This section describes procedures for towing a Corner Air Suspension System must be placed
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin disabled vehicle using a commercial towing in Transport mode, before tying them down
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), service. (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck
or drivetrain damage may result. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, Ú page 165. If the vehicle cannot be placed in
 Revving the engine or spinning the wheels disabled vehicles may also be towed as Transport mode (for example, engine will not
too fast may lead to transmission over- described on Ú page 230. run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles
heating and failure. It can also damage the (not to the body). Failure to follow these instruc-
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph tions may cause fault codes to be set and/or
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
shifting occurring).
Wheels OFF The

Towing Condition 2WD Models 4WD Models
Ground
Detailed instruction on Ú page 230
If transmission is operable:
• Automatic Transmission in PARK
Flat Tow NONE • Transmission in NEUTRAL
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• Tow in forward direction
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
Wheel Lift Or Front NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to TWO-W HEEL DRIVE MODELS  Using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow hold the front wheels in the straight position
bars and other equipment designed for this FCA recommends towing your vehicle with all with the rear wheels raised when and the
purpose, following equipment FCA’s four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. front wheels ON the ground.
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main transmission is operable, the vehicle may be CAUTION!
structural members of the vehicle, not to towed (with rear wheels on the ground) under
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State the following conditions:
requirements can cause severe transmission
and local laws regarding vehicles under tow The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N).
 damage. Damage from improper towing is not
must be observed. Instructions on shifting the transmission to covered under the New Vehicle Limited
If you must use the accessories (wipers, NEUTRAL (N) when the engine is off Warranty.
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition Ú page 390.
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC
 The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
FOUR-W HEEL DRIVE MODELS
mode.
(48 km/h). FCA recommends towing with all wheels OFF
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
battery is discharged, find Instructions on  The towing distance must not exceed
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle
shifting the transmission out of PARK 30 miles (48 km). 7
raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
Ú page 390. If the transmission is not operable, or the
vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph CAUTION!
CAUTION! (48 km/h) and farther than 30 miles (48 km),  Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
 Do not use sling type equipment when tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground. the remaining wheels are on the ground).
towing. Vehicle damage may occur. Acceptable methods to tow the vehicle on a Internal damage to the transmission or
flatbed are as follows: transfer case will occur if a front or rear
 When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-  The front wheels raised and the rear wheels wheel lift is used when towing.
sion components. Damage to your vehicle on a towing dolly (Continued)
may result from improper towing.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
 Towing this vehicle in violation of the above both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk (EARS)
requirements can cause severe transmis- of damage to the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
sion and/or transfer case damage. Accident Response System.
Damage from improper towing is not WARNING!
covered under the New Vehicle Limited This feature is a communication network that
Warranty.  Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck takes effect in the event of an impact
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious Ú page 353.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — I F injury or death.
E QUIPPED  Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
tow hooks. Tow straps may become disen- This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency gaged, causing serious injury. Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
tow hooks. to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
CAUTION! certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not obstacle Ú page 355.
use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or
highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle.
Emergency Tow Hooks

395
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under
 Check tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign
ENGINE Instrument Cluster Display Ú page 114. of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil oil indicator system turns on.
NOTE:
change indicator system. The oil change Under no circumstances should oil change  Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
indicator system will remind you that it is time to intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), brake master cylinder, and fill as needed.
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. 12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
 Check function of all interior and exterior
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
lights.
change indicator message will illuminate. This run or idle time is generally only a concern for
means that service is required for your vehicle. fleet customers. MAINTENANCE P LAN
Operating conditions such as frequent
Severe Duty All Models Refer to the Maintenance Plan for required
short-trips, trailer tow, and extremely hot or cold
maintenance. More frequent maintenance may
ambient temperatures will influence when the NOTE:
be needed in severe conditions, such as dusty
“Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Vehicles that are operated in a dusty and
areas and very short trip driving. In some
Severe operating conditions can cause the off-road environment, or predominately at idle
extreme conditions, additional maintenance
change oil message to illuminate as early as or very low engine RPM are known as Severe
not specified in the maintenance schedule may 8
3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have Duty vehicles. It is recommended that you
be required.
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, change the engine oil at 4,000 miles
within the next 500 miles (805 km). (6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change  Check engine oil level.
is performed by someone other than an  Check windshield washer fluid level.
396 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

 Change the oil and filter.
 Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
 Inspect the battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
 Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
 Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.
 Inspect the engine cooling system protection and hoses.
 Inspect the exhaust system.
 Inspect the engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace the engine air cleaner, as necessary.
 Inspect and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air Filter as necessary; replacement may be more frequent if vehicle is operated in extreme dusty
conditions.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 397
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
X X X X X X X
and replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle
surfaces. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid level. If
X X X X X
using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing, 8
change axle fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
X X X X X X X
necessary.
Inspect transfer case fluid. X
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace engine air cleaner. X X X X X
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
If equipped with Stop/Start, replace

accessory drive belt with OEM grade X
Mopar belt.
Replace spark plugs. 1 X
Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 10 years or 150,000 miles X X
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change
for any of the following: police, taxi, X X
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Change the transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
X
necessary.
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil NOTE:

WARNING! change indicator message will illuminate. This Under no circumstances should oil change
 You can be badly injured working on or means that service is required for your vehicle. intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service Operating conditions such as frequent 12 months, whichever comes first.
work for which you have the knowledge and short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
the right equipment. If you have any doubt Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
ambient temperatures will influence when the
about your ability to perform a service job, “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.  Check engine oil level
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Severe Operating Conditions will cause the
 Check windshield washer fluid level
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain change oil message to illuminate more
your vehicle could result in a component frequently. Have your vehicle serviced as soon  Check the tire inflation pressures and look
malfunction and effect vehicle handling as possible, within the next 500 miles for unusual wear or damage
and performance. This could cause an acci- (805 km).
 Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
dent. An authorized dealer will reset the oil change brake master cylinder, and power steering,
indicator message after completing the and fill as needed
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change
is performed by someone other than an  Check function of all interior and exterior
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil authorized dealer, the message can be reset by lights
change indicator system. The oil change referring to the steps described under
indicator system will remind you that it is time to Instrument Cluster Display Ú page 114. 8
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
MAINTENANCE P LAN — D IESEL FUEL UP TO B5 BIODIESEL

Refer to the Maintenance Schedules for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

 Change oil and filter.
 Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank.
 Drain water from fuel filter assembly.
 Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
 Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
 Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
 Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
 Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
 Inspect exhaust system.
 Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace engine air cleaner, as necessary.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Second Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
 Change fuel filter.
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if
X X X X X X X
necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid level. If using your vehicle for
X X X X X
police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing change
the axle fluid. 8
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter X X X X X X X
Drain water from fuel filter assembly. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace fuel filter and drain water from the fuel filter Fuel filter replacement intervals should be every second oil change and must not
assembly.1 exceed 20,000 miles (32,000 km) if using diesel fuel up to B5.
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Replace engine air cleaner. X X X X X

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
X X
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Replace accessory drive belt(s). X
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for any of the
X X
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Change transfer case fluid. X
1. Under normal conditions the diesel fuel filter should be replaced every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) (every other oil change). If the vehicle is being used in severe operating conditions,
or In certain geographical areas of the country (Pennsylvania, New York, Ohio, Maryland, West Virginia, Arkansas, Oklahoma, Kansas, Iowa, Missouri and Nebraska) due to fuel
cleanliness issues, it’s recommended to replace the fuel filter every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).
WARNING! ADDITIONAL M AINTENANCE — B6 TO

B20 B IODIESEL
 You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service NOTE:
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt  Under no circumstances should oil change
about your ability to perform a service job, intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. six months, whichever comes first when
using biodiesel blends greater than 5% (B5).
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component  The owner is required to monitor mileage for
malfunction and effect vehicle handling B6-B20 biodiesel, the automatic oil change
and performance. This could cause an acci- indicator system does not reflect the use of
dent. biofuels.
 Fuel filter change interval is maintained at
every second oil change. This is especially
important with biodiesel usage.
For more information on using biodiesel
Ú page 472.
8
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L E NGINE WITH STOP/START
1 — Motor Generator Unit Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap 6 — Battery

2 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
5.7L E NGINE WITHOUT STOP/START
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Battery

2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
5.7L E NGINE WITH STOP/START
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Battery

2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
3.0L DIESEL E NGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap

2 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap 6 — Battery
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
CHECKING OIL L EVEL Adding 1 quart (1.0 liter) of oil when the reading To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
is at the low end of the dipstick range will raise system in cold weather, select a solution or
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine the oil level to the high end of the range mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
oil must be maintained at the correct level. marking. range of your climate. This rating information
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as can be found on most washer fluid containers.
every fuel stop. The best time to check the CAUTION!
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully WARNING!
warmed up engine is shut off. Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This Commercially available windshield washer
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level could damage your engine. solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
readings. NOTE: or working around the washer solution.
There are four possible dipstick types: It is possible for your oil level to be slightly
higher than a previous check. This would be due
 Crosshatched zone. After the engine has warmed up, operate the
to diesel fuel that may temporarily be in the
defroster for a few minutes to reduce the
 Crosshatched zone marked SAFE. crankcase due to operation of the diesel partic-
possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on
ulate filter regeneration strategy (if equipped).
 Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the the cold windshield. Windshield washer solution
This fuel will evaporate out under normal oper-
low end of the range and MAX at the high end used with water as directed on the container,
ation.
of the range. aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point
ADDING W ASHER FLUID to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to
 Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at paint or trim.
the MIN and the MAX ends of the range. The fluid reservoir is located under the hood
and should be checked for fluid level at regular
NOTE:
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
hatch markings on the dipstick.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or
towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will
help blade performance.
MAINTENANCE-F REE BATTERY CAUTION! VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

Your vehicle is equipped with a  It is essential when replacing the cables on An authorized dealer has the qualified service
maintenance-free battery. You will never have the battery that the positive cable is personnel, special tools, and equipment to
to add water, and periodic maintenance is not attached to the positive post and the nega- perform all service operations in an expert
required. tive cable is attached to the negative post. manner. Service Manuals are available which
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and include detailed service information for your
WARNING! negative (-) and are identified on the battery vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
 Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and case. Cable clamps should be tight on the attempting any procedure yourself.
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow terminal posts and free of corrosion.
NOTE:
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or  If a “fast charger” is used while the battery Intentional tampering with emissions control
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle systems may void your warranty and could
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes battery cables before connecting the result in civil penalties being assessed against
or on skin, flush the area immediately with charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast you.
large amounts of water Ú page 386. charger” to provide starting voltage.
 Battery gas is flammable and explosive. WARNING!
Keep flame or sparks away from the PRESSURE WASHING
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any You can be badly injured working on or
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
other booster source with an output greater pressure washer is not recommended. for which you have the knowledge and the 8
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other. proper equipment. If you have any doubt
CAUTION! about your ability to perform a service job,
 Battery posts, terminals, and related acces- take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
parts and connections however, the
Wash hands after handling.
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
ENGINE OIL — GAS ENGINE MS-12991, and that are API SN certified and Materials Added To Engine Oil
meet the requirements of FCA LLC. FCA strongly recommends against the addition
Engine Oil Selection — Gasoline Engine of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
For best performance and maximum protection to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered
under all types of operating conditions, FCA only Oil Identification Symbol
product and its performance may be impaired
recommends engine oils that are API Certified This symbol means that the oil has by supplemental additives.
and meet the requirements of FCA Material been certified by the American
Standard MS-6395. Petroleum Institute (API). The Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
manufacturer only recommends API Filters
NOTE: Certified engine oils. Care should be taken in disposing of used
Hemi engines (5.7L) at times can tick right after
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
startup and then quiet down after approxi-
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils. oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
mately 30 seconds. This is normal and will not
present a problem to the environment. Contact
harm the engine. This characteristic can be
caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the CAUTION! an authorized dealer, service station or
governmental agency for advice on how and
vehicle is started then shut off after driving a Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
where used oil and oil filters can be safely
short distance. Upon restarting, you may experi- as the chemicals can damage your engine.
discarded in your area.
ence a ticking sound. Other causes could be if Such damage is not covered by the New
the vehicle is unused for an extended period of Vehicle Limited Warranty. ENGINE OIL FILTER
time, incorrect oil, extended oil changes or
Synthetic Engine Oils The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
extended idling. If the engine continues to tick
new filter at every engine oil change.
or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
on, see the nearest authorized dealer. recommended oil quality requirements are met, Engine Oil Filter Selection
and the recommended maintenance intervals A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be
Engine Oil Selection — Diesel Engine
for oil and filter changes are followed. used for replacement. The quality of
For best performance and maximum protection
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the replacement filters varies considerably. Only
under all types of operating conditions, FCA
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE high quality Mopar certified filters should be
recommends engine oils that meet the
viscosity grade number should not be used. used.
requirements of FCA Material Standard
ENGINE AIR CLEANER F ILTER Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection And 2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to
Replacement access the engine air cleaner filter.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 395. Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or 3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or the housing assembly.
NOTE: debris you should change your engine air
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions” cleaner filter.
maintenance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
WARNING! 1. With suitable tool fully loosen (six)
fasteners on the engine air cleaner filter
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
cover.
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no Engine Air Cleaner Filter
one is near the engine compartment before 1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
starting the vehicle with the air induction 2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal 8
injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
1 — Fasteners
The quality of replacement filters varies 2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
considerably. Only high quality Mopar certified
filters should be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation

CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION!
NOTE:
 Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving If the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” remains
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appro- on, DO NOT START the engine before you
present before replacing the engine air cleaner
priate container. drain water from the fuel filter to avoid engine
filter.
damage.
If water is detected in the water separator while
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
the engine is running, or while the ignition If the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” comes on
housing assembly with the engine air and a single chime is heard while you are
switch is in the ON/RUN position, the “Water In
cleaner filter inspection surface facing driving, or with the ignition in the ON position,
Fuel Indicator Light” will illuminate and an
downward. there may be a problem with your water
audible chime will be heard. At this point, you
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover should stop the engine and drain the water from separator wiring or sensor. See an authorized
onto the housing assembly. the filter housing. dealer for service.
Upon proper draining of the water from the fuel
3. Tighten the fasteners (six) on the engine air filter, the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” will
cleaner filter assembly. remain illuminated for approximately 10
seconds. If the water was drained while the
DRAINING FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR engine was running, the “Water In Fuel Indicator
FILTER — D IESEL ENGINE Light” may remain on for approximately three
minutes.
The fuel/water separator filter housing is
located inside the frame rail, behind the left NOTE:
front wheel. The best access to this water drain Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids
valve is from under the vehicle. from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately
Fuel Filter Assembly discarded, can present a problem to the envi-
CAUTION! 1 — Water In Fuel Drain Valve ronment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station, or government agency for advice on
 Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter recycling programs and for where used fluids
when the engine is running. and filters can be properly disposed of in your
(Continued) area.
Drain the fuel/water separator filter when the and Nebraska) due to fuel cleanliness’ issues, 1. Turn engine off.
“Water In Fuel Indicator Light” is ON. Within it’s recommended to replace the fuel filter every
2. Place a drain pan under the fuel filter
10 minutes of vehicle shutdown, turn the filter 10,000 miles.
assembly.
drain valve (located on the bottom of the filter
housing) counterclockwise to drain fuel/water, CAUTION! 3. Open the water drain valve, and let any
then turn the ignition switch to the ON position, accumulated water drain.
 Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
and allow any accumulated water to drain.
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appro- 4. Close the water drain valve.
Leave the drain valve open until all water and
priate container.
contaminants have been removed. When clean 5. Remove bottom cover using a strap wrench.
fuel is visible, close the drain valve by turning it  Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a Rotate counterclockwise for removal.
clockwise, and turn the ignition switch to OFF. new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris Remove the used o-ring and discard it.
could be introduced into the fuel filter
If more than two ounces or 60 milliliters of fuel
during this action. It is best to install the 6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the
have been drained Ú page 414.
filter dry and allow the in-tank lift pump to housing and dispose of it according to your
UNDERBODY M OUNTED FUEL FILTER prime the fuel system. local regulations.
REPLACEMENT — DIESEL E NGINE 7. Wipe the sealing surfaces of the lid and
NOTE: housing clean.
Using a fuel filter that does not meet FCA’s filtra- 8. Install a new o-ring into the ring groove on
tion and water separating requirements can the filter housing and lubricate with clean 8
severely impact fuel system life and reliability. engine oil.
Under normal conditions the diesel fuel filter
should be replaced every 20,000 miles (every
other oil change). If the vehicle is being used in
severe operating conditions, or In certain
geographical areas of the country (Pennsyl- Fuel Filter Assembly
vania, New York, Ohio, Maryland, West Virginia, 1 — Water In Fuel Drain Valve
Arkansas, Oklahoma, Kansas, Iowa, Missouri 2 — Fuel Filter Access
PRIMING IF THE ENGINE HAS RUN OUT WARNING! I NTERVENTION REGENERATION

OF FUEL — DIESEL E NGINE STRATEGY — MESSAGE P ROCESS F LOW
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel
blending agent. They can be unstable under (D IESEL ENGINE)
WARNING!
certain conditions and be hazardous or This engine meets all required diesel engine
Do not open the high pressure fuel system explosive when mixed with diesel fuel. emissions standards. To achieve these
with the engine running. Engine operation emissions standards, your vehicle is equipped
causes high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel with a state-of-the-art engine and exhaust
CAUTION!
spray can cause serious injury or death. system. These systems are seamlessly
Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or integrated into your vehicle and managed by
1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the gasoline, the use of these fuels can cause the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM
tank, approximately 2 to 5 gal (8 L to 19 L). damage to the fuel system. manages engine combustion to allow the
2. Press ignition switch twice without your foot exhaust system’s catalyst to trap and burn
NOTE:
on brake to put vehicle in ON/RUN position. Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input
This will activate the in tank fuel pump for  Use of biodiesel mixture in excess of 20% can or interaction on your part.
approximately 30 seconds. Repeat this negatively impact the fuel filter's ability to
separate water from the fuel, resulting in Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert
process twice.
high pressure fuel system corrosion or you to additional maintenance required on your
3. Start the engine using the “Normal Starting” damage. vehicle or engine Ú page 114.
procedure Ú page 144.
 In addition, commercially available fuel addi- WARNING!
CAUTION! tives are not necessary for the proper opera-
tion of your diesel engine. A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
The starter motor will engage for park over materials that can burn, such as
approximately 30 seconds at a time. Allow  For extreme cold conditions, "Mopar grass or leaves, and those items that come
two minutes between cranking intervals. Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment" is recom- into contact with your exhaust system. Do not
mended to assist with cold starting. park or operate your vehicle in areas where
NOTE: your exhaust system can contact anything
The engine may run rough until the air is forced that can burn.
from all the fuel lines.
DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID WARNING!

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sometimes known  Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
simply by the name of its active component, R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
cants approved by FCA for your air condi- hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
UREA—is a key component of Selective Catalytic tioning system. Some unapproved
Reduction (SCR) systems, which help diesel Environmental Protection Agency and is an
refrigerants are flammable and can
vehicles meet stringent emission regulations. ozone-friendly substance with a low
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
DEF is a liquid reducing agent that reacts with global-warming potential. It is recommended
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
engine exhaust in the presence of a catalyst to that air conditioning service be performed by an
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
convert smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
Refer to Warranty Information Book, for
into harmless nitrogen and water vapor. equipment.
further warranty information.
Refer to Engine Fluids And Lubricants  The air conditioning system contains refrig- NOTE:
Ú page 475 for further information. erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of Use only FCA approved A/C system PAG
personal injury or damage to the system, compressor oil, and refrigerants.
AIR CONDITIONER M AINTENANCE
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
For best possible performance, your air
Cabin Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
lines to be disconnected should be done by
conditioner should be checked and serviced by an experienced technician. For the proper maintenance intervals
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm Ú page 395.
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test. CAUTION! WARNING! 8
Drive belt tension should also be checked at Do not use chemical flushes in your air Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
this time. conditioning system as the chemicals can vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in
damage your air conditioning components. the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air
Such damage is not covered by the New filter removed and the blower operating, the
Vehicle Limited Warranty. blower can contact hands and may propel dirt
and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet 3. There are glove compartment travel stops 5. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the
behind the glove compartment. Perform the on both sides of the glove compartment finger tabs on each end of the filter cover.
following procedure to replace the filter: door. Push inward on both sides of the glove
compartment to release the glove
1. Open the glove compartment and remove
compartment travel stops.
all contents.
2. With the glove compartment door open,
remove the glove compartment tension
tether and tether clip by sliding the clip
toward the face of the glove compartment
door. Lift the clip out of glove compartment
door and release into dash panel.
Filter Cover
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
4. Disengage the glove compartment door

from its hinges by opening the glove
Right Side Of Glove Compartment compartment past the travel stop and
1 — Glove Compartment Door pulling it toward you. Filter Cover Removal
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether 1 — Finger Tabs
6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it 9. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall ACCESSORY D RIVE BELT INSPECTION
straight out of the housing. the glove compartment past the travel stops
by pushing in on the glove compartment WARNING!
sides.
 Do not attempt to inspect an accessory
drive belt with vehicle running.
 When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could
be injured by the moving fan blades.
 You can be badly injured working on or
Cabin Air Filter around a motor vehicle. Only do service
7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on work for which you have the knowledge and
Glove Compartment
the filter pointing toward the floor. When the proper equipment. If you have any
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop doubt about your ability to perform a
installing the filter cover, press on each end 2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether service job, take your vehicle to a compe-
until you hear an audible click. 3 — Glove Compartment Door tent mechanic.
CAUTION! NOTE: 8
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
glove compartment travel stops are fully cracks that run across the ribbed surface of the
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
engaged. belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. This
Failure to properly install the filter will result
is not a reason to replace the belt. However,
in the need to replace it more often. 10. Reattach the glove compartment tension cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
tether by inserting the tether clip in the normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib
8. Reinstall the glove compartment on the glove compartment and sliding the clip
hinges. must be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if
away from the face of the glove it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe
compartment door. glazing.
NOTE: attention should also be given to hood latching

Identify and correct problem before new belt is components to ensure proper function. When
installed. performing other underhood services, the hood
latch release mechanism, and safety catch
NOTE:
should be cleaned and lubricated.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Stop/Start,
belt must be replaced with an OEM grade The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
Mopar belt. twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt) component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Conditions that would require replacement: should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment. WINDSHIELD WIPER B LADES
 Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-
Belt replacement on some models requires the Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
rated from belt body)
use of special tools, we recommend having your the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
 Rib or belt wear vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer. cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
 Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between BODY LUBRICATION
two ribs) Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
Locks and all body pivot points, including such periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
 Belt slips items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
 “Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated windshield.
correct position on pulley)
periodically. Use a lithium-based grease, such
 Belt broken as Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
easy operation and to protect against rust and ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
 Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or out of contact with petroleum products such as
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in engine oil, gasoline, etc.
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
operation)
remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular
NOTE: Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies arm, press the release tab on the wiper
depending on geographical area and frequency CAUTION! blade and while holding the wiper arm with
of use. If chattering, marks, water lines or wet Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back one hand, slide the wiper blade down
spots are present, clean the wiper blades or against the glass without the wiper blade in towards the base of the wiper arm.
replace as necessary. place or the glass may be damaged.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
performance problems are experienced. This
full up position.
inspection should include the following points:
 Wear or uneven edges
 Foreign material
 Hardening or cracking
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
 Deformation or fatigue
1 — Wiper Blade
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, 2 — Wiper Arm J Hook
replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a 3 — J Hook Retainer 8
new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm
or blade that is damaged. Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position 3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
1 — Wiper Blade the wiper blade from the wiper arm.
2 — Wiper Arm 4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
3 — Release Tab
Installing The Front Wipers each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or
oil change. Replace as required. CAUTION! (Continued)
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
 Damage to the catalytic converter can
wiper arm is in the full up position. WARNING! result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on  Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They operating condition. In the event of engine
the tip of the wiper arm. contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is malfunction, particularly involving engine
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
3. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on mance, have your vehicle serviced
the wiper arm, latch engagement will be make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing CO see promptly. Continued operation of your
accompanied by an audible click. vehicle with a severe malfunction could
Ú page 369.
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
4. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.  A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you in possible damage to the converter and
park over materials that can burn. Such vehicle.
EXHAUST SYSTEM materials might be grass or leaves coming
The best protection against carbon monoxide into contact with your exhaust system. Do Under normal operating conditions, the
entry into the vehicle body is a properly not park or operate your vehicle in areas catalytic converter will not require
maintained engine exhaust system. where your exhaust system can contact maintenance. However, it is important to keep
anything that can burn. the engine properly tuned to assure proper
If you notice a change in the sound of the
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
damage.
detected inside the vehicle; or when the CAUTION!
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; NOTE:
have an authorized technician inspect the  The catalytic converter requires the use of Intentional tampering with emissions control
complete exhaust system and adjacent body unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will systems can result in civil penalties being
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as assessed against you.
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose an emissions control device and may seri-
connections could permit exhaust fumes to ously reduce engine performance and In unusual situations involving grossly
cause serious damage to the engine. malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected (Continued) odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn COOLING SYSTEM Engine Coolant Checks
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, Check the engine coolant (antifreeze)
including a tune-up to manufacturer's WARNING! protection every 12 months (before the onset of
specifications, should be obtained immediately. freezing weather, where applicable). If the
 You or others can be badly burned by hot
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from engine coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance,
damage: your radiator. If you see or hear steam the system should be drained, flushed and
coming from under the hood, do not open refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the
 Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
the hood until the radiator has had time to A/C condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
cool. Never open a cooling system pressure accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean
motion.
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is by gently spraying water from a garden hose
 Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or hot. vertically down the face of the A/C condenser (if
towing the vehicle. equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
 Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
 Do not idle the engine with any ignition away from the radiator cooling fan when Check the engine cooling system hoses for
components disconnected or removed, such the hood is raised. The fan starts automati- brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged cally and may start at any time, whether the tightness of the connection at the coolant
periods during very rough idle or malfunc- engine is running or not. recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
tioning operating conditions. system for leaks.
 When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
8
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
NOTE: system will need to be drained, flushed, and reducing this extended maintenance period, it
Some vehicles require special tools to add refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to is important that you use the same engine
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
properly could lead to severe internal engine as possible. throughout the life of your vehicle.
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized  Do not use water alone or alcohol-based Please review these recommendations for
dealer. engine coolant products. Do not use addi- using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
tional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or they may not be compatible with the radiator Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
contains visible sediment, have an authorized engine coolant and may plug the radiator. engine coolant:
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant
 This vehicle has not been designed for use  We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
(conforming to MS.90032).
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
For the proper maintenance intervals Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant Formula OAT that meets the requirements of
Ú page 395. is not recommended. FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Selection Of Coolant  Some vehicles require special tools to add  Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
For further information Ú page 475. coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
properly could lead to severe internal engine Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
NOTE: damage. If any coolant is needed to be added water. Use higher concentrations (not to
to the system please contact an authorized exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
dealer. (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
than specified Organic Additive Technology
authorized dealer for assistance.
(OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine Adding Coolant
damage and may decrease corrosion protec-  Use only high purity water such as distilled or
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
tion. OAT engine coolant is different and deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic engine coolant solution. The use of lower
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
any “globally compatible” coolant. If a intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE: The cap should be inspected and cleaned if Checking Coolant Level — 3.6L Engine
there is any accumulation of foreign material on The level of the coolant in the pressurized
 It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
the sealing surfaces. coolant bottle should be between the “MIN” and
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in “MAX” range on the bottle when the engine is
WARNING! cold.
the area where the vehicle is operated.
 Do not open hot engine cooling system. The radiator normally remains completely full,
 Some vehicles require special tools to add Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems so there is no need to remove the cap unless
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or checking for coolant freeze point or replacing
properly could lead to severe internal engine remove the cap to cool an overheated
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in attendant of this. As long as the engine
to the system, please contact an authorized the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
dealer. operating temperature is satisfactory, the
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
coolant bottle need only be checked once a
 Mixing engine coolant types is not recom- while the system is hot or under pressure.
month. When additional engine coolant is
mended and can result in cooling system  Do not use a pressure cap other than the needed to maintain the proper level, it should
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed one specified for your vehicle. Personal be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
in an emergency, have an authorized dealer injury or engine damage may result.
drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant Checking Coolant Level — 5.7L Engines
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as Disposal Of Used Coolant With the engine off and cold, the level of the
possible. Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) engine coolant should be between the ADD and 8
is a regulated substance requiring proper SAFE range on the dipstick.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
disposal. Check with your local authorities to To check the coolant level:
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
determine the disposal rules for your
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure 1. Open the coolant reservoir.
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
that engine coolant will return to the radiator
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery 2. Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain
tank (if equipped). reservoir neck.
in puddles on the ground, clean up any ground
spills immediately. If ingested, seek emergency
assistance immediately.
Cooling System Notes  Maintain engine coolant concentration at a

minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
NOTE: MS.90032) and distilled water for proper
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ corrosion protection of your engine which
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor contains aluminum components.
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from  Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-  Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti- vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
Coolant Reservoir Dipstick freeze) to enter the radiator. keep the front of the condenser clean.
3. Check the coolant level on the dipstick. If an examination of your engine compartment  Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
The radiator normally remains completely full, shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, Winter operation. If replacement is ever
so there is no need to remove the radiator cap the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) soon dissipate. mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
freeze point or replacing engine coolant. Advise  Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. factory engine cooling performance, poor gas
your service attendant of this. As long as the mileage, and increased emissions.
 Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine CHARGE AIR COOLER — I NTER-COOLER
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
coolant needs to be added, the contents of (D IESEL ENGINE)
the coolant expansion bottle must also be
When additional engine coolant is needed to protected against freezing. The charge air cooler is positioned in front of the
maintain the proper level, it should be added to radiator and the air conditioner condenser. Air
the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.  If frequent engine coolant additions are enters the engine through the air cleaner and
required, the cooling system should be pres- passes through the turbocharger, where it is
sure tested for leaks. pressurized. This pressurized air rapidly
reaches high temperature. The air is then
directed through a hose to the charge air cooler
and through another hose to the intake Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
manifold of the engine. This cooling process WARNING! (Continued)
The fluid level of the brake master cylinder
enables more efficient burning of fuel resulting should be checked whenever the vehicle is  To avoid contamination from foreign matter
in fewer emissions. serviced, or immediately if the brake system or moisture, use only new brake fluid or
To guarantee optimum performance of the warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid to fluid that has been in a tightly closed
system, keep the surfaces of the charge air bring level within the designated marks on the container. Keep the master cylinder reser-
side of the reservoir of the brake master voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
cooler, condenser and radiator clean and free
cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the master a open container absorbs moisture from
of debris. Periodically check the hoses leading
cylinder area before removing cap. With disc the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This
to and from the charge air cooler for cracks or
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
loose clamps resulting in loss of pressure and
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
reduced engine performance. brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
sudden brake failure. This could result in a
checked when pads are replaced. If the brake
BRAKE SYSTEM fluid is abnormally low, check the system for
collision.
In order to ensure brake system performance, leaks Ú page 478.  Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
all brake system components should be result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
inspected periodically Ú page 395. WARNING! parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
 Use only manufacturer's recommended
WARNING! vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
brake fluid Ú page 478. Using the wrong
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure type of brake fluid can severely damage 8
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot your brake system and/or impair its perfor-  Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result mance. The proper type of brake fluid for contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
in abnormally high brake temperatures, your vehicle is also identified on the original components could be damaged, causing
excessive lining wear, and possible brake factory installed hydraulic master cylinder partial or complete brake failure. This could
damage. You would not have your full braking reservoir. result in a collision.
capacity in an emergency. (Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION If you notice fluid leakage or transmission performance and life. Use only the
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer recommended transmission fluid Ú page 478.
Special Additives immediately to have the transmission fluid level It is important to maintain the transmission fluid
FCA strongly recommends against using any checked. Operating the vehicle with an at the correct level using the recommended
special additives in the transmission. Automatic improper fluid level can cause severe fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered transmission damage. transmission; only the approved lubricant
product and its performance may be impaired should be used.
by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not CAUTION!
add any fluid additives to the transmission. If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
CAUTION!
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may authorized dealer immediately. Severe Using a transmission fluid other than the
adversely affect seals. transmission damage may occur. An manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
authorized dealer has the proper tools to cause deterioration in transmission shift
CAUTION! adjust the fluid level accurately. quality and/or torque converter shudder
Do not use chemical flushes in your Ú page 478.
transmission as the chemicals can damage Fluid And Filter Changes
your transmission components. Such damage Under normal operating conditions, the fluid REAR AXLE AND 4X4 FRONT DRIVING
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited installed at the factory will provide satisfactory AXLE FLUID L EVEL
Warranty. lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks
Routine fluid and filter changes are not are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
Fluid Level Check
required. However, change the fluid and filter if for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil
not require adjustment under normal operating etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not any reason. Ú page 478. This inspection should be made
required, therefore the transmission has no
with the vehicle in a level position.
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your Selection Of Lubricant
transmission fluid level using special service It is important to use the proper transmission The fluid level should be even with the bottom
tools. fluid to ensure optimum transmission of the fill hole (within 1/4 in (6.4 mm) of edge of
hole) for the front axle and rear axle.
Drain And Refill NOTE: FUSES

For the proper maintenance intervals When refilling a limited slip differential axle
Ú page 395. which requires a friction modification additive, General Information
the additive should be added before the gear
Lubricant Selection lubricant to ensure proper additive fill. WARNING!
For further information Ú page 478.  When replacing a blown fuse, always use
TRANSFER C ASE an appropriate replacement fuse with the
NOTE: same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
The presence of water in the gear lubricant will Fluid Level Check
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
result in corrosion and possible failure of differ- This fluid level can be checked by removing the amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
ential components. Operation of the vehicle in filler plug. The fluid level should be to the metal wires or any other material. Do not
water, as may be encountered in some bottom edge of the filler plug hole (or within place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
off-highway types of service, will require 1/8 inch of the bottom) with the vehicle in a or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage. level position. may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Limited-Slip Differentials Drain And Refill
Rear axles equipped with a Limited Slip For the proper maintenance intervals  Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
Ú page 395. ignition is off and that all the other services
Differential require that 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar
are switched off and/or disengaged.
Limited Slip Additive be added to the gear
Selection Of Lubricant
lubricant Ú page 478. The Mopar Limited Slip  If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an 8
Additive should be added to the gear lubricant Use only the recommended fluid Ú page 478. authorized dealer.
whenever a fluid change is made to an axle  If a general protection fuse for safety
equipped with a Limited Slip Differential. systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
External Power Distribution Center

CAUTION!
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
If it is necessary to wash the engine engine compartment near the battery. This
compartment, take care not to directly hit the center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses,
fuse box, and the windshield wiper motors relays, and circuit breakers. A description of
with water. each fuse and component may be stamped on
the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of
The fuses protect electrical systems against
each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that
excessive current.
corresponds to the following chart.
When a device does not work, you must check Blade Fuses
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a 1 — Fuse Element
break/melt. 2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse ele-
Also, please be aware that when using power ment
outlets for extended periods of time with the 3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse el-
engine off may result in vehicle battery ement (blown fuse)
discharge.
Power Distribution Center
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F01 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Pump Motor
F03 – 5 Amp Tan MGU
F04 – – Spare
F05 – – Spare

F06 – 10 Amp Red OUTPUT TO UPFITTER PDC — If Equipped
F07 – – Spare
F08 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup
F09 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Stop / Turn Lamp Left
F10 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Stop / Turn Lamp Right
F11 – 15 Amp Blue ID/CLEARANCE LIGHTS — If Equipped
F12 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Park Lamp
F13 – – Spare
F14 – 10 Amp Red AC Clutch
F15 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F16 – – Spare
F17 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension
F18 – 15 Amp Blue AGS / Rear Axle Cooling Valve / Active Air Dam
F19 – – Spare 8
F20 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals
F21 30 Amp Pink – Power Side Step
F22 50 Amp Red – Air Module
F23 – – Spare
F24 – 20 Amp Yellow TCM SBW
F25 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lights 2

F26 50 Amp Red – ESP Module
F27 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F28 – 10 Amp Red PCM / ECM
F29 40 Amp Green – ESP Module
F30 – – Spare
F31 – – Spare
F32 20 Amp Blue – ECM / PCM
F33 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump
F34 – – Spare
PCM / ECM / Power Pack Unit (PPU) Motor Generator Unit (MGU)
F35 – 10 Amp Red
Wake Up / EPS / Active Tuned Mass Module (ATMM) / ESP
F36 – – Spare
F37 – 5 Amp Tan R / S Output to iPDC
F38 – 10 Amp Red DTCM / Active CL TEMP VLV
F39 – 15 Amp Red MOD ATMM
F40 40 Amp Green – Starter
F41 – 10 Amp Red IRCAM Heaters
F42 20 Amp Blue – AUX SWITCH #5 — If Equipped
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow MGU Coolant Pump
F44 – 10 Amp Red Trailer Camera
F45 – 10 Amp Red ADCM — If Equipped

F46 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Heater
F47 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster
F48 – – Spare
F49 30 Amp Pink – Htr Ctrl (Diesel Only)
F50 20 Amp Blue – AUX SWITCH #6 — If Equipped
F51 25 Amp White – FUEL PUMP MOTOR #1 — If Equipped
F52 – – Spare
F53 – 10 Amp Red Supply / Purging Pump – If Equipped
F54 – 15 Amp Blue PCM
F55 – 15 Amp Blue Right HID Headlamp
F56 – – Spare
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F58 25 Amp White – FUEL PUMP MOTOR #2 — If Equipped
F59 – 25 Amp Clear Injectors / IGN Coil / Glow Plug Module 8
F60 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM / PCM / ACT Short Running Valve
F61 – 15 Amp Blue Left HID Headlamp / Spare
60 Amp Blue
F62 – Glow Plug (DSL) / LTR Coolant Pump (TRX)
40 Amp Green
F63 20 Amp Blue – NOx Sensor
F64 – 10 Amp Red PM Sensor – If Equipped
Internal Power Distribution Center

CAUTION!
The Power Distribution Center is located under
 When installing the power distribution the drivers side instrument panel. This center
center cover, it is important to ensure the contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays,
cover is properly positioned and fully and circuit breakers. A description of each fuse
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to and component may be stamped on the inside
get into the power distribution center and cover, otherwise the cavity number of each fuse
possibly result in an electrical system is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds
failure.
to the following chart.
 When replacing a blown fuse, it is important
to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.

F01 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle
F03 – 20 Amp Yellow Module Seat Heater Front (Pass)
F04 – – Spare
F05 – 20 Amp Yellow Module PPU Cooling Fan
F06 – – Spare
F07 40 Amp Green – Mod CBC 3 PWR Locks
F08 – – Spare

F09 – – Spare
F10 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower Motor
F11 – 5 Amp Tan Output to Under-hood Power Distribution Center (UPDC) Run Coil
F12 – 25 Amp Clear Mod Audio Amplifier / Active Noise Cancellation / SW Inverter
F13 – 20 Amp Yellow Mod Seat Heater Front (Driver)
F14 – 15 Amp Blue Mod Seat Heater Front (Steering Wheel)
F15 – – Spare
F16 – – Spare
F17 – 20 Amp Yellow LT Spot Lamp — If Equipped
F18 30 Amp Pink – Motor Sunshade Sunroof
F19 – – Spare
F20 – 20 Amp Yellow Comfort Rear Seat Module (CRSM) (Heat Rear RT)
F21 – – Spare
F22 – – Spare 8
F23 – – Spare
F24 – 15 Amp Blue Mod RF Hub / Mod Ignition / Mod Cluster
F25 40 Amp Green – Mod Integrated Trailer Brake
F26 – 15 Amp Blue Mod Cluster CCN / Mod Cyber Security
F27 – 5 Amp Tan Mod Cluster CCN / Mod SGW
F28 – 10 Amp Red Mod ORC

F29 – 20 Amp Yellow Mod CRSM (Heat Rear LT)
F30 30 Amp Pink – Mod DTCM / Mod Tailgate
F31 30 Amp Pink – Mod CBC 1 Interior Light
F32 – 20 Amp Yellow RT Spot Lamp — If Equipped
Assy Overhead Console / Switch 911 / Switch Assist / Heads Up
F33 – 10 Amp Red
Display (HUD)
F34 – 15 Amp Blue Frt & RR Ventilated Seat Motor
Mod Inverter / Mtr Sunshade Sunroof / Mtr Dual Sunroof / USB
F35 – 10 Amp Red
Charge Only
F36 40 Amp Green – Mod CBC 2 Exterior Light 1
F37 – – Spare
F38 – – Spare
F39 – – Spare
F40 20 Amp Blue – Dome Pursuit Vehicle — If Equipped
Lumbar Support & Pass SW / Mod ICS Sw Bank / HVAC Ctrl / Sw
F41 A&B – 15 Amp Blue
Bank Upper / Mod Ctrl Steering
Mod Transfer Case Switch Module (TCSM) / SBW / Electric Park
F42 A&B – 10 Amp Red Brake SW / Overhead Console (OHC) SW / E-Call / Bank 3 SW / Seat
LT & RT Vent / Mod Trailer A&B Tire Pressure / Mod Gateway Trailer
F43 A&B – 10 Amp Red Port Diagnostics / Mod CD / Front & Rear USB
Radio / DCSD / Telematics Box Mod / Fleet Telematics Module
F44 – 20 Amp Yellow
(FTM)

F45 30 Amp Pink – Mod Door MUX Driver
F46 30 Amp Pink – Mod Door MUX Passenger
F47 A&B – – Spare
Rear View Mirror / SW Window Passenger / Rear USB / Wireless
F48A - 10 Amp Red
Charging Pad Mod
Mod CVPM / SNSR Blind Spot / HDLP Adaptive Front Lighting
F49 – 15 Amp Blue
Sensor (AFLS)
F50A – 10 Amp Red Battery PACK Control Mod
F51 A&B – – Spare
F52 20 Amp Blue – Direct Battery Feed — If Equipped
F53 – 10 Amp Red Trailer Reverse Steering Control / Trailer Steering Control Knob
F54B – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Center Seat
F55 25 Amp White – Upfitter — If Equipped
F56 30 Amp Pink – Mod Network Interface — If Equipped
8
F60 50 Amp Red – Mod Inverter
F61 – – Spare
ITBM / Mod Occupant Class / Mod IAIR Suspension / Mod HVAC
F62 A&B – 10 Amp Red Snsr Incar Temp / Rear Coolant Temp / PTS / Mod IRCM / HRLS /
Mod Gateway Trailer TPM

F63 – – Spare
F64 – – Spare
F65 – 10 Amp Red Mod ORC
F66 – 10 Amp Red Run Accessory Feed — If Equipped
CAUTION!
 When installing the power distribution
center cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to
get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
 When replacing a blown fuse, it is important
to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9
Dome Lamp 7679
NOTE:
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number 8
Low Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
High Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 9005LL
Low & High Beam (LED Reflector Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Low & High Beam (LED Projector Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Turn Signal / Front Position (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 7444NA
Turn Signal / Front Position (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Front Side Marker (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) W5W
Front Side Marker (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Fog Lamps (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
Front Fog Lamps (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Base Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp 7440LL/W21WLL
Premium Rear Tail/Turn/Backup and Stop Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Base Backup Lamp 7440/W21W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 921
Cargo Lamp 921
Rear License Plate Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Base Turn Lamp 7440NA / WY21W
Replacing Exterior Bulbs NOTE: High Beam

It may be necessary to remove/reposition Air
Base Quad: Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Cleaner Assembly to access passenger side
Headlamp, Front Park And Turn — If Equipped headlamp/side marker light bulbs.
Low Beam
4. Disengage the bulb access cover by rotating
See below steps to replace: counterclockwise.
1. Open the hood. 5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
connector from the low beam bulb.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
CAUTION!
3. Locate the low beam access cover, which High Beam Headlight Cover
 Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
can be found on the back side of the touching it with your fingers or by allowing it See below steps to replace:
headlamps. to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened 1. Open the hood.
bulb life will result.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
 Always use the correct bulb size and type
cable.
for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or
type may overheat and cause damage to 3. Locate the high beam access cover, which
the lamp, the bulb socket, or the lamp can be found on the back side of the 8
wiring. headlamps.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter NOTE:

turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp. It may be necessary to remove/reposition Air
Cleaner Assembly to access passenger side
Low Beam Headlight Cover 7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing. headlamp/side marker light bulbs.
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of
new bulb and covers.
4. Reach behind the headlamp and disengage Front Park And Turn 6. Separate the bulb from the socket without
the access cover by rotating counter- See below steps to replace: twisting.
clockwise.
1. Open the hood. 7. Reverse the procedure for installation of
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness new bulb and covers.
connector from the high beam bulb. 2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable. Side Marker Lamp
CAUTION! See below steps to replace:
3. Locate the park and turn socket, which can
 Do not contaminate the bulb glass by be found on the back side of the 1. Open the hood.
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it headlamps.
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened 2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
bulb life will result. cable.
 Always use the correct bulb size and type 3. Locate the side marker lamp, which can be
for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or found on the back side of the headlamps.
type may overheat and cause damage to
the lamp, the bulb socket, or the lamp
wiring.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter

turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp.
Park And Turn Socket
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
4. Reach behind the headlamp and unlock the
park and turn socket from the lamp by
new bulb and cover.
rotating counterclockwise a quarter turn.
Side Marker Lamp
4. Disengage the side marker socket by Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup Lamps
rotating counterclockwise a quarter turn. See below steps to replace:
5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from 1. Remove the two screws and push pins
the housing. retainers that pass through the bed sheet
6. Separate the bulb from the socket without metal.
twisting.
new bulb and covers.
Fog Lamp Bulb
Fog Lamps — If Equipped 3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
Please see an authorized dealer for service on turn to unlock the bulb from the housing.
LED and Halogen front fog lamps.
Halogen
5. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb
See below steps to replace: Tail Lamp Locations
and cover.
1. Reach under and behind the front fascia/ 1 — Tail Lamp
bumper to access the back of the front fog CAUTION! 2 — Fasteners
lamp housing.
8
3 — Push - Pin Retainers
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
connector from the fog lamp bulb. to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb
life will result.
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward 4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise a
far enough to unsnap the two receptacles quarter turn to unlock it from the housing.
on the outboard side of the lamp housing
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
from the two plastic snap post retainers in
the outer box side panel.
CAUTION!
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb
life will result. CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations
6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb 2. Separate the connector holding the housing
and housing. and wiring harness to the body.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)

Tail Lamp Removal With Cargo Lamp
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors See below steps to replace:
from the bulb socket.
1. Remove the four screws holding the
housing/lens to the body as shown.
CHMSL Bulb Location
Wiring Harness Connector

3. Turn the desired bulb socket a quarter turn Tire Markings  European — Metric tire sizing is based on
counterclockwise and remove the socket European design standards. Tires designed
and bulb from housing. to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
socket. size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
CAUTION!  LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based

on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
to contract other oily surfaces. Shortened molded into the sidewall preceding the size
bulb life will result. Tire Markings designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
 Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps 1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)  Temporary spare tires are designed for
2 — Size Designation temporary emergency use only. Temporary
 Inside Bulb: Center High Mounted Stop
3 — Service Description high pressure compact spare tires have the
Lamp
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
4 — Maximum Load
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of preceding the size designation. Example:
bulbs and housing. 5 — Maximum Pressure T145/80D18 103M.
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera- 8
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
TIRES ture Grades

design standards and it begins with the tire
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
NOTE:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the  P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
following information: Tire Markings, Tire US design standards. P-Metric tires have the
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. the size designation. Example: P215/65R15
95H.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
 Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
 "R" means radial construction, or
 "D" means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
 A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
 A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
 The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
 XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
 LL = Light load tire or

 C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white
sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black 8
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
 This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
EXAMPLE:
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 01 means the year 2001
 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure FCA’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
Tire Placard
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information
about the:
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed 1. Number of people that can be carried in
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the vehicle.
the driver's side door.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
pressure for your vehicle. Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) rear, and spare tires.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in Vehicle Loading 8
Ú page 213.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
NOTE: (3) Subtract the combined weight of the Metric Example For Load Limit
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, driver and passengers from XXX kg or For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front XXX lbs. and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
and rear axles must not be exceeded. vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
(4) The resulting figure equals the luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
available amount of cargo and luggage (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
loading, and trailer towing Ú page 213.
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
To determine the maximum loading conditions amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will NOTE:
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The be five 150 lb passengers in your  If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
combined weight of occupants and cargo
vehicle, the amount of available cargo from your trailer will be transferred to your
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the vehicle. The following table shows examples
Tire and Loading Information placard. The and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
luggage, and towing capacities of your
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should (5) Determine the combined weight of vehicle with varying seating configurations
never exceed the weight referenced here. and number and size of occupants. This table
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
Steps For Determining Correct Load vehicle. That weight may not safely is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry
Limit— exceed the available cargo and luggage capacity of your vehicle.
(1) Locate the statement “The combined load capacity calculated in Step 4.
 For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, weight of occupants and cargo should never
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your load from your trailer will be transferred exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
vehicle's placard. to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
(2) Determine the combined weight of determine how this reduces the
the driver and passengers that will be available cargo and luggage load
riding in your vehicle. capacity of your vehicle.
WARNING! TIRES — G ENERAL I NFORMATION Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure: 8
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Tire Pressure
 Safety
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.  Fuel Economy
distance. Use tires of the recommended load
 Tread Wear
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload
them.  Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the Tire Inflation Pressures
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
WARNING! of sluggish response or over responsiveness in on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the
 Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and the steering. driver's side door.
can cause collisions. NOTE: At least once a month:
 Underinflation increases tire flexing and  Unequal tire pressures from side to side may  Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
can result in overheating and tire failure. cause erratic and unpredictable steering quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
 Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to response. make a visual judgement when determining
cushion shock. Objects on the road and proper inflation. Tires may look properly
 Unequal tire pressure from side to side may inflated even when they are underinflated.
chuckholes can cause damage that result
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
in tire failure.
 Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
 Overinflated or underinflated tires can Fuel Economy damage.
affect vehicle handling and can fail Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. CAUTION!
control.
Tread Wear After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
 Unequal tire pressures can cause steering always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
problems. You could lose control of your Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
vehicle. valve stem, which could damage the valve
resulting in the need for earlier tire
 Unequal tire pressures from one side of the replacement. stem.
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left. Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
Proper tire inflation contributes to a always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
 Always drive with each tire inflated to the
comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
jarring and uncomfortable ride. after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is Tire Repair
maximum inflation pressure molded into the very important. Increased tire pressure and If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
tire sidewall. reduced vehicle loading may be required for repaired if it meets the following criteria:
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an
authorized tire dealer or original equipment  The tire has not been driven on when flat
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes. vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating  The damage is only on the tread section of
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable)
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi pressures.
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature  The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire WARNING! inch (6 mm)
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter. High speed driving with your vehicle under Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
maximum load is dangerous. The added and additional information.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
You could have a serious collision. Do not have experienced a loss of pressure should be
the cold tire inflation pressure should be drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph of identical size and service description (Load
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside (120 km/h).
temperature condition. Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi Radial Ply Tires be reused. 8
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build up or your tire WARNING! Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
pressure will be too low. Combining radial ply tires with other types of Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
four. Never combine them with other types of
speed limits or conditions are such that the pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
tires.
vehicle can be driven at high speeds, Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be These indicators are molded into the bottom of
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
WARNING! the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
after driving with underinflated tire condition, generated by excessive wheel speeds may inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not cause tire damage or failure. A tire could tread wear indicators, the tire should be
designed to be reused when driven under Run explode and injure someone. Do not spin your replaced.
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition. vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) For further information Ú page 453.
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
NOTE:
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a Life Of Tire
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. The service life of a tire is dependent upon
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
varying factors including, but not limited to:
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded Tread Wear Indicators
 Driving style
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in Tread wear indicators are in the original
the Run Flat mode. equipment tires to help you in determining  Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
when your tires should be replaced. pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
For more information Ú page 327.
to develop across the tire tread. These
Tire Spinning abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels ment
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than  Distance driven
30 seconds continuously without stopping.
 Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
For further information Ú page 391. V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
Tire Tread highly recommended
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information

WARNING! placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after size designation of your tire. The Load Index and  Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the speed rating other than that specified for
Failure to follow this warning can result in sud- original equipment tire sidewall. your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
den tire failure. You could lose control and have proved tires and wheels may change
For more information relating to the Load Index
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. suspension dimensions and performance
and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 444.
characteristics, resulting in changes to
NOTE: It is recommended to replace the two front tires steering, handling, and braking of your
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
when installing new tires due to wear and tear can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If handling and stress to steering and
in existing tires. you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the suspension components. You could lose
wheel’s specifications match those of the control and have a collision resulting in
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
original wheels. serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline. It is recommended you contact an authorized
your vehicle.
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
Replacement Tires questions you may have on tire specifications or  Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance capability. Failure to use equivalent capacity, other than what was originally
of many characteristics. They should be replacement tires may adversely affect the equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire 8
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
tire inflation pressures. FCA strongly overloading and failure. You could lose
recommends that you use tires equivalent to control and have a collision.
the originals in size, quality and performance (Continued)
when replacement is needed Ú page 452.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Snow Tires

Equipped Some areas of the country require the use of
 Failure to equip your vehicle with tires Summer tires provide traction in both wet and snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
having adequate speed capability can dry conditions, and are not intended to be identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
result in sudden tire failure and loss of driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is on the tire sidewall.
vehicle control. equipped with Summer tires, be aware these If you need snow tires, select tires
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving equivalent in size and type to the
CAUTION! conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle original equipment tires. Use snow
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F tires only in sets of four; failure to do
Replacing original tires with tires of a (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. so may adversely affect the safety and handling
different size may result in false speedometer For more information, contact an authorized of your vehicle.
and odometer readings. dealer.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
TIRE TYPES Summer tires do not contain the all season than what was originally equipped with your
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on vehicle and should not be operated at
All Season Tires — If Equipped the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction safety and handling of your vehicle. original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
levels may vary between different all season for recommended safe operating speeds,
tires. All season tires can be identified by the WARNING! loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice While studded tires improve performance on
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; conditions. You could lose vehicle control, ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too surfaces may be poorer than that of
and handling of your vehicle. fast for conditions also creates the possibility non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
of loss of vehicle control. studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE T IRES — IF E QUIPPED Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

WARNING!
NOTE: The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is Compact and collapsible spares are for
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit temporary emergency use only. With these
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
further information. Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
CAUTION! spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. follow the warnings, which apply to your
not take your vehicle through an automatic car spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
wash with a compact or limited use temporary T, S = Temporary Spare Tire tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
result. equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire The collapsible spare is for temporary
opportunity.
designated for temporary emergency use emergency use only. You can identify if your
Ú page 222. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire since the wheel is designed specifically for the and Loading Information Placard located on the 8
And Wheel — If Equipped compact spare tire. Do not install more than driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire one compact spare tire and wheel on the the tire.
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the vehicle at any given time.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
original equipment tire and wheel found on the 165/80-17 101P.
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
rotation pattern. opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is Full Size Spare — If Equipped
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
WARNING!
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
collapsible tire using the electric air pump use only. This tire may look like the originally Limited use spares are for emergency use
before lowering the vehicle. equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the drive more than the speed listed on the
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically tread wear indicators, the temporary use full limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
for the collapsible spare tire. size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
not the same as your original equipment tire, and Loading Information Placard located on
WARNING! replace (or repair) the original equipment tire the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
Compact and Collapsible spares are for original equipment tire at the first opportunity
opportunity.
temporary emergency use only. With these and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph Limited Use Spare — If Equipped so could result in loss of vehicle control.
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have The limited use spare tire is for temporary
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use WHEEL A ND WHEEL TRIM CARE
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to This label contains the driving limitations for All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
follow the warnings, which apply to your this spare. This tire may look like the original and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
tire failure and loss of vehicle control. vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited to maintain their luster and to prevent
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
is not the same as your original equipment tire, solution recommended for the body of the
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire vehicle and remember to always wash when the
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first surfaces are not hot to the touch.
opportunity.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including NOTE:
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals an extended period after cleaning the wheels
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on and equipment to prevent damage to the with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar the brakes to remove the water droplets from
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is the brake components. This activity will remove
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the recommended or select a non-abrasive, the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome vehicle vibration when braking.
from corroding and tarnishing. wheels.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
CAUTION! CAUTION! Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
Avoid products or automatic car washes that Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle CAUTION!
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
If your vehicle is equipped with these
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket products may damage the wheel's protective
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes finish. Such damage is not covered by the
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
may damage the wheel's protective finish. New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
They will permanently damage this finish and
Such damage is not covered by the New soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, recommended.
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is 8
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
recommended.
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that
is required to maintain this finish.
SNOW TRACTION D EVICES  Snow traction device must be of proper size

for the tire, as recommended by the snow
Use of traction devices require sufficient traction device manufacturer.
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
the following snow traction devices are  No other tire sizes are recommended for use
recommended. Follow these recommendations with the snow traction device.
to guard against damage:
 Please follow the table below for the recom-
mended tire size, axle and snow traction
device:
Snow Traction Device

4x2 (2WD)
Axle Tire/Wheel Size (maximum projection beyond
Trim Level
tire profile or equivalent)
HFE
Tradesman 275/65R18
Rear S Class
Bighorn Lonestar 275/55R20
Laramie
Longhorn
Sport Rear 275/55R20 S Class
Limited
REBEL Not Chainable
Snow Traction Device

4x4 (4WD)
Axle Tire/Wheel Size (maximum projection beyond
Trim Level
tire profile or equivalent)
Tradesman
275/65R18
Bighorn Lonestar Rear S Class
275/55/R20
Laramie
Longhorn
Sport Rear 275/55R20 S Class
Limited
REBEL Not Chainable
WARNING! CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

Using tires of different size and type (M+S, To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,  Install device as tightly as possible and
Snow) between front and rear axles can observe the following precautions: then retighten after driving about ½ mile
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose  Because of restricted traction device clear- (0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not
control and have a collision. require retightening.
ance between tires and other suspension 8
components, it is important that only trac-  Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
tion devices in good condition are used.
 Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
Broken devices can cause serious damage.
large bumps, especially with a loaded
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
vehicle.
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device  Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
before further use. pavement.
(Continued) (Continued)
or unusual wear should be corrected prior to shown on the sidewall of the tires on
CAUTION! (Continued) rotation being performed. your vehicle.
 Observe the traction device manufacturer’s The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
instructions on the method of installation, All passenger vehicle tires must conform
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
operating speed, and conditions for use. rotation pattern does not apply to some
to Federal safety requirements in
Always use the suggested operating speed directional tires that must not be reversed. addition to these grades.
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h). TREADWEAR
 Do not use traction devices on a compact The Treadwear grade is a comparative
spare tire. rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS on a specified government test course.
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles For example, a tire graded 150 would
operate at different loads and perform different wear one and one-half times as well on
steering, driving, and braking functions. For
the government course as a tire graded
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross) 100. The relative performance of tires
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation depends upon the actual conditions of
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION their use, however, and may depart
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on all season type tires. Rotation will UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES significantly from the norm due to
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow The following tire grading categories variations in driving habits, service
and wet traction levels and contribute to a were established by the National practices, and differences in road
smooth, quiet ride.
Highway Traffic Safety Administration. characteristics and climate.
For the proper maintenance intervals The specific grade rating assigned by the
Ú page 395. More frequent rotation is tire's manufacturer in each category is
permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid
TRACTION G RADES Sustained high temperature can cause STORING THE VEHICLE
the material of the tire to degenerate
The Traction grades, from highest to If you are storing your vehicle for more than
and reduce tire life, and excessive three weeks, we recommend that you take the
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
temperature can lead to sudden tire following steps to minimize the drain on your
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
failure. The grade C corresponds to a vehicle's battery:
pavement, as measured under
level of performance, which all Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
controlled conditions on specified 
passenger vehicle tires must meet
government test surfaces of asphalt and  Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
traction performance. more, run the air conditioning system at idle
represent higher levels of performance for about five minutes in the fresh air and
WARNING! on the laboratory test wheel, than the high blower setting. This will ensure
minimum required by law. adequate system lubrication to minimize the
The traction grade assigned to this tire is possibility of compressor damage when the
based on straight-ahead braking traction system is started again.
WARNING!
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac- The temperature grade for this tire is BODYWORK
teristics. established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed, PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
8
TEMPERATURE G RADES underinflation, or excessive loading, either AGENTS
separately or in combination, can cause heat
The Temperature grades are A (the buildup and possible tire failure. Vehicle body care requirements vary according
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
resistance to the generation of heat and that make roads passable in snow and ice and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly
under controlled conditions on a
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the susceptible to stone breakage than glass  If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather headlights. accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
and other extreme conditions will have an Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and remove.
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
underbody protection. must be followed.  Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
The following maintenance recommendations To minimize the possibility of scratching the Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping stains and to protect your paint finish. Use
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with precautions to not scratch the paint.
What Causes Corrosion? a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.  Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or Do not use abrasive cleaning components, buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
removal of paint and protective coatings from solvents, steel wool or other aggressive out the paint finish.
your vehicle. material to clean the lenses.
CAUTION!
The most common causes are: Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care
 Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
 Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold
materials such as steel wool or scouring
Tonneau cover, use Mopar Whitewall & Vinyl
 Stone and gravel impact. powder that will scratch metal and painted
Top Cleaner and Mopar Leather and Vinyl surfaces.
 Insects, tree sap and tar. Conditioner/Protectant.
 Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
 Salt in the air near seacoast localities. PRESERVING T HE BODYWORK (8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
 Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. Washing
 Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
BODY A ND UNDERBODY M AINTENANCE
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Cleaning Headlights Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with water.
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less
Bumper Care  If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,

CAUTION! (Continued) fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
The customer is responsible to clean and
maintain the chrome components of the  Avoid products or automatic car washes materials are well packaged and sealed.
vehicle. Washing away road debris and salt that use acidic solutions, strong alkaline
 If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
using an automotive soap. Fascia/bumpers additives, or harsh brushes. Many after-
consider mud or stone shields behind each
should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral market cleaners and automatic car washes
wheel.
Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and may damage the bumper’s protective
to prevent corrosion. finish. Such damage is not covered by the  Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
Your fascia/bumpers are susceptible to wash soap, Mopar Chrome Cleaner, or touch up paint to match the color of your
deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, equivalent is recommended. vehicle.
magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and
other road chemicals used to melt ice or control Special Care Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped
dust on dirt roads. Do not use harsh chemicals  If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you During ownership, the shine and luster of the
or a stiff brush. They can stain or damage the drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar- Spray-On Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road
protective coating that helps keep them from riage at least once a month. dirt, heavy-duty hauling and hard water stains.
corroding and tarnishing. Weathering and UV exposure will lead to fading.
 It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and To help maintain the appearance of your
CAUTION!
trunk be kept clear and open. Spray-On Bedliner, the manufacturer
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a
8
 recommends you periodically rinse all loose dirt
bristle brush, metal polishes, or oven  If you detect any stone chips or scratches in from your truck bed and clean your truck at
cleaner. These products may damage the the paint, touch them up immediately. least twice per year using the Mopar Spray-On
bumper’s protective finish. Such damage is  If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision Bedliner Conditioner available at a local
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited or similar cause that destroys the paint and authorized dealer.
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
Chrome Cleaner, or equivalent is recom- as soon as possible.
mended.
(Continued)
To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Spray-On Bedliner, Follow The Steps Below: While extremely tough, it is possible to damage Equipped
1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to a Spray-On Bedliner. One common condition is Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the
remove any loose dirt and debris. when loading a heavy pallet and dragging that following manner:
pallet across the floor of the bed. If a nail or  Remove as much of the stain as possible by
2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water. sharp point is exposed under the weight of the
Then apply solution with a soft cloth or blotting with a clean, dry towel.
pallet a scratch or tear is possible. While not
brush. covered by your new vehicle warranty, a  Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp
cosmetic fix to cover the metal exposed by the towel.
3. Rinse bedliner with water.
scratch is required. To repair a tear or gouge,
 For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or
4. Once dry, apply a small amount of Mopar follow the directions provided in the Mopar
a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth
Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner to a moist Quick Repair Kit. and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
towel or sponge and wipe over the entire
surface of the truck bedliner. INTERIORS remove soap residue.
 For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove
WARNING!
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
Do not use silicon-based protection products upholstery and carpeting. soap residue.
to clean your bedliner. Silicon-based products
can become slippery and may result in  Do not use any harsh solvents or any other
WARNING! form of protectants on Stain Repel products.
personal injury.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to
and if used in closed areas they may cause
many different types of chemicals (including
respiratory harm.
gasoline, oil, hydraulic fluids) for short periods
of time. If a spill occurs on your Spray-On
Bedliner, rinse the truck out as soon as possible
to avoid permanent damage.
Seat Belt Maintenance Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster

WARNING!
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with Lenses
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a The lenses in front of the instruments in this
weaken the fabric. collision and leave you with no protection. vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the avoid scratching the plastic.
must be replaced immediately. Do not
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
soft cloth. assemblies must be replaced after a collision may be used, but do not use high alcohol
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. if they have been damaged (i.e., bent content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn retractor, torn webbing, etc.). wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a
or if the buckles do not work properly. soft cloth.
NOTE: PLASTIC A ND C OATED PARTS LEATHER SURFACES

If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
turning loop for soiling. If soiling is present, for leather upholstery.
clean with a wet soft cloth until all residue is CAUTION! Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
removed.
 Direct contact of air fresheners, insect by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani- Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
8
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated and damage the leather upholstery and should
surfaces of the interior may cause perma- be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
nent damage. Wipe away immediately. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft
 Damage caused by these type of products cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be
may not be covered by your New Vehicle taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery
Limited Warranty. with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery.
NOTE: GLASS SURFACES

If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom- commercial household-type glass cleaner.
mends Mopar Total Clean leather cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
needed. with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
CAUTION!
elements.
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
leather upholstery, as damage to the
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
upholstery may result.
467
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER BRAKE SYSTEM WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found If power assist is lost for any reason (for Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
on the left front corner of the instrument panel, example, repeated brake applications with the ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
visible through the windshield. engine off), the brakes will still function. the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
However, you will experience a substantial and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle. bolts should be torqued using a properly
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses calibrated torque wrench using a six sided (hex)
normal braking capability, the remaining deep wall socket.
system will still function with some loss of TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during Lug Nut/
Lug Nut/ **Lug
application, greater pedal force required to slow Lug Nut/ Bolt
Bolt Nut/Bolt
or stop, and the “Brake Warning Light” and the Bolt Type Socket
Torque Size
“ABS Warning Light” will activate during brake Size
Vehicle Identification Number use. 130
M14 x
NOTE: Ft-Lbs Cone 22 mm
1.50
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. (176 N·m)
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/ 9
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
468 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE: octane number can cause engine failure and

Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts. Limited Warranty.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
loose particles. experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
Four, Five, And Six Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Pattern 3.6L E NGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
WARNING! greater than 15% in this engine.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the This engine is designed to meet all
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully emissions regulations and provide
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to optimum fuel economy and
follow this warning may result in personal performance when using high quality
Wheel Mounting Surface injury. unleaded “Regular” gasoline having a posted
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until octane number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE 2 method. The use of higher octane “Premium”
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/ gasoline is not required, as it will not provide
bolt (do not insert it halfway). While operating on gasoline with the required any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound engines.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt from the engine is not a cause for concern.
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
properly seated against the wheel. knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with a lower than recommended
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 469
5.7L E NGINE MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS

Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends Besides using unleaded gasoline with the Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
greater than 15% in this engine. proper octane rating, gasolines that contain with oxygenates such as ethanol.
This engine is designed to meet all detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
emissions regulations and provide recommended. Using gasolines that have these CAUTION!
satisfactory fuel economy and additives will help improve fuel economy, DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
performance when using high-quality reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle methanol, or gasoline containing more than
unleaded gasoline having an octane range of performance. 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. Designated TOP TIER Detergent result in starting and drivability problems,
The use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is Gasoline contains a higher level of damage critical fuel system components,
recommended for optimum performance and detergents to further aide in cause emissions to exceed the applicable
fuel economy. minimizing engine and fuel system standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
REFORMULATED G ASOLINE TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit pump labels as they should clearly
Many areas of the country require the use of www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER communicate if a fuel contains greater than
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Detergent Gasoline retailers. 15% ethanol (E-15).
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
gasoline contains oxygenates and are Problems that result from using gasoline
agents should be avoided. Many of these
specifically blended to reduce vehicle containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
materials intended for gum and varnish
emissions and improve air quality. gasoline containing methanol are not the
removal may contain active solvents or similar
The use of reformulated gasoline is ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
responsibility of FCA and may void the New 9
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
recommended. Properly blended reformulated and diaphragm materials.
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
DO N OT U SE E-85 IN N ON-FLEX F UEL CNG or LP are not the responsibility of FCA and
VEHICLES may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
 The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol MANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) I N impair engine performance and damage
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol GASOLINE the emissions control system.
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic  An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
Warranty.
additive that is blended into some gasoline to tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT converter to overheat. If you notice a
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of provides no performance advantage beyond pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
these symptoms: gasoline of the same octane number without your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
 Operate in a lean mode. MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces tioning and may require immediate service.
spark plug life and reduces emissions system Contact an authorized dealer for service
 OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on. performance in some vehicles. FCA assistance.
 Poor engine performance. recommends that gasoline without MMT be  The use of fuel additives, which are now
used in your vehicle. The MMT content of being sold as octane enhancers, is not
 Poor cold start and cold drivability. gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline recommended. Most of these products
 Increased risk for fuel system component pump; therefore, you should ask the gasoline contain high concentrations of methanol.
corrosion. retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California mance problems resulting from the use of
CNG AND LP F UEL SYSTEM reformulated gasoline. such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
MODIFICATIONS bility of FCA and may void or not be covered
FUEL S YSTEM CAUTIONS under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid CAUTION! NOTE:
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the Follow these guidelines to maintain your Intentional tampering with the emissions
engine, emissions, and fuel system vehicle’s performance: control system can result in civil penalties being
components. Problems that result from running assessed against you.
(Continued)
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE WARNING! DIESEL F UEL SPECIFICATIONS

Federal law requires that you must fuel this Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel This diesel engine has been developed to take
vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel blending agent. They can be unstable under advantage of the high energy content and
fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits certain conditions and hazardous or generally lower cost Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur
the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel explosive when mixed with diesel fuel. diesel fuel or Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur
(500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to Climatized diesel fuels.
the emissions control system.
Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. NOTE:
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable To prevent fuel system trouble, drain the
supplier in your vehicle. For most year-round  If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with gaso-
accumulated water from the fuel/water
service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM line on your diesel vehicle, do not start the
separator filter using the fuel/water separator
(formerly known as the American Society for engine. Damage to the engine and fuel
drain provided on the fuel filter housing. If you
Testing and Materials) specification D-975 system could occur. Please call an autho-
buy good quality fuel and follow the cold
rized dealer for service.
Grade S15 will provide good performance. If the weather advice above, fuel conditioners should
vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 20°F not be required in your vehicle. If available in  A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting
or -7°C), or is required to operate at your area, a high cetane “premium” diesel fuel ASTM specification D-975 may be used with
colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged may offer improved cold-starting and warm-up your diesel engine without any adjustments
periods, use Climatized Number 2 diesel fuel or performance. to regular service schedules.
dilute the Number 2 diesel fuel with 50%
Number 1 diesel fuel. This will provide better  Commercially available fuel additives are not
CAUTION!
necessary for the proper operation of your
protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains diesel engine. 9
the fuel filters.
on, DO NOT START engine before you drain
 Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should
the water from the fuel filter(s) to avoid
only be used where extended arctic condi-
engine damage Ú page 412.
tions (-10°F or -23°C) exist.
BIODIESEL FUEL R EQUIREMENTS Biodiesel is a fuel produced from renewable

CAUTION!
resources typically derived from animal fat,
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting rapeseed oil (Rapeseed Methyl Ester (RME) In the event that the vehicle is filled with
ASTM specification D975 is recommended for base), or soybean oil (Soy Methyl Ester (SME or biodiesel and not used for more than a
use with your diesel engine. If frequent SOME) base). month, the fuel should either be used up by
operation with Biodiesel blends that are driving (up to quarter tank) and filled with
between 6% and 20% (B6–B20) is desired, the Biodiesel fuel has inherent limitations which
require that you understand and adhere to the standard diesel blends with less than 5% that
maintenance schedule is subject to shorter is normally available. This will help prevent
intervals. following requirements if you use blends of
Biodiesel between 6% and 20% (B6–B20). the fuel filter clogging and potential damage
The oil and filter change along with fuel filter There are no unique restrictions for the use of to the fuel injection system due to degraded
replacement is subject to shorter intervals B5. biodiesel, which is not covered by the New
when operating your engine on biodiesel Vehicle Limited Warranty.
greater than 5%. Do not use biodiesel greater CAUTION!
than 20%. Biodiesel Fuel Properties — Low Ambient
Use of blends greater than 20% is not Temperatures
For regular use of biodiesel blends between 6% approved. Use of blends greater than 20%
and 20% (B6–B20) it is important that you Biodiesel fuel may gel or solidify at low ambient
can result in engine damage. Such damage is
understand and comply with these temperatures, which may pose problems for
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
requirements. For further direction both storage and operation. Precautions can be
Warranty.
Ú page 403. necessary at low ambient temperatures, such
as storing the fuel in a heated building or a
CAUTION! heated storage tank, or using cold temperature
additives.
Failure to comply with Oil Change
requirements for vehicles operating on
biodiesel blends between 6% and 20%
(B6–B20) will result in premature engine
wear. Such wear is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fuel Quality — Must Comply With ASTM Fuel Water Separation — Must Use Mopar Biodiesel Fuel Filter Change Intervals
Standards Approved Fuel Filter Elements The use of biodiesel requires more frequent fuel
The quality of Biodiesel fuel may vary widely. Biodiesel fuel has a natural affinity to water and filter change intervals. When operating on
Only fuel produced by a BQ9000 supplier to the water accelerates microbial growth. Your Mopar biodiesel between 6% and 20%, fuel filter
following specifications may be blended to filtration system is designed to provide replacement intervals should be every second
meet Biodiesel blend B6 – B20 fuel meeting adequate fuel water separation capabilities. oil change, and must not exceed 16,000 miles
ASTM specification D-7467: (25,750 km).
Fuel In Oil Dilution — Must Adhere To
Petrodiesel fuel meeting ASTM specification Required Oil Change Interval NOTE:
D-975 and Biodiesel fuel (B100) meeting ASTM Under no circumstances should oil change
Fuel dilution of lubricating oil has been
specification D-6751 intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or
observed with the use of Biodiesel fuel. Fuel in
six months, if regular operation occurs with 6%
Fuel Oxidation Stability — Must Use Fuel oil must not exceed 5%. To ensure this limit is
- 20% biodiesel blends. Under no circumstances
Within Six Months Of Manufacture met your oil change interval must be
should fuel filter replacement intervals exceed
Biodiesel fuel has poor oxidation stability which maintained with in the suggested schedule. The
every second oil change and must not exceed
can result in long term storage problems. Fuel regular use of biodiesel between 6% and 20%
16,000 miles (25,750 km), if regular operation
produced to approved ASTM standards, if requires intervals shorter than the outlined
occurs with 6% - 20% biodiesel blends. Failure
stored properly, provides for protection against 10,000 miles (16,100 km) and must not
to comply with these oil change and fuel filter
fuel oxidation for up to six months. exceed the suggested schedule. When routinely
requirements for vehicles operating on
operating on biodiesel between 6% and 20%, oil
biodiesel blends up to B20 may result in prema-
and filter replacement intervals must not
ture engine wear. Such wear is not covered by
exceed 8,000 Miles (12,900 km) or six months,
which ever comes first.
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The engine 9
may suffer severe damage if operated with
concentrations of biodiesel higher than 20%.
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 23 Gallons 87 Liters
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters
1500 Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab Models (Optional) 33 Gallons 121 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
5.7L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System
3.6L Engine 13.7 Quarts 13 Liters
3.6L Motor Generator Unit 1.8 Quarts 1.7 Liters
5.7L Engine 18.3 Quarts 17.3 Liters
Fuel (Approximate)
3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine 26 Gallons 98.5 Liters
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
Tradesman/Rebel Models 5.14 Gallons 19.5 Liters
All Other Models 5.74 Gallons 21.7 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine 8.5 Quarts 8.0 Liters
Cooling System
3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine 11.6 Quarts 11 Liters
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Gas Engine Coolant
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Motor Generator Unit – 3.6L Engine (If Equipped)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 engine oil, meeting the requirements of FCA
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil
filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 engine oil, meeting the requirements of FCA
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil
filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Gas Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar brand engine oil filters.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol (Do not use E-85).
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol (Do not
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engines
use E-85).
Diesel Engine Coolant
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology). 9
We recommend you use 5W-40 synthetic engine oil such as Mopar that meets FCA Material
Engine Oil — 3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine
Standard MS-12991 and the API SN engine oil category is required.
We recommend you use Mopar engine oil filters. Using an oil filter that does not meet FCA’s
Diesel Engine Oil Filter
filtration requirements can severely impact engine life and reliability.

We recommend you use Mopar fuel filter. Must meet 3 micron rating. Using a fuel filter that
does not meet FCA’s filtration and water separating requirements can severely impact fuel
system life and reliability. Under normal conditions the diesel fuel filter should be replaced
every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) (every other oil change). If the vehicle is being used in severe
Fuel Filters — 3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine
operating conditions, or In certain geographical areas of the country (Pennsylvania, New York,
Ohio, Maryland, West Virginia, Arkansas, Oklahoma, Kansas, Iowa, Missouri and Nebraska)
due to fuel cleanliness issues, it’s recommended to replace the fuel filter every 10,000 miles
(16,000 km).
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal law requires that
you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum)
and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid
damage to the emissions control system.
For most year-round service, Number 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade
Fuel Selection — 3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine
S15 will provide good performance. We recommend you use a blend of up to 5% biodiesel,
meeting ASTM specification D-975 with your diesel engine.
This vehicle is compatible with biodiesel blends greater than 5% but no greater than 20%
biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D-7467 provided the shortened maintenance intervals
are followed as directed.
Mopar Diesel Exhaust Fluid (API Certified) (DEF) or equivalent that has been API Certified to
Diesel Exhaust Fluid the ISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not API Certified to ISO 22241 may result in system
damage.
NOTE:
If Climatized or Number 1 ULSD fuel is not avail- CAUTION! (Continued)
able, and you are operating below 20°F (-6°C),  Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
in sustained arctic conditions, Mopar Premium engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equivalent) is recom- not use additional rust inhibitors or anti-
mended to avoid gelling. rust products, as they may not be compat-
ible with the radiator engine coolant and
CAUTION! may plug the radiator.
 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other  This vehicle has not been designed for use
than specified Organic Additive Technology with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
result in engine damage and may decrease engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
corrosion protection. Organic Additive mended.
Technology (OAT) engine coolant is
different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a
non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, the cooling system will need to
be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh 9
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use
Automatic Transmission
the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case – 48-11 Active On-Demand 2–speed
We recommend you use Mobil Fluid LT.
Transfer Case (With 4WD AUTO)
Transfer Case – 48-12 Part Time 2–Speed Transfer
We recommend you use Shell Spirax S2 ATF A389.
Case (Without 4WD AUTO)
Front Axle We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (MS-A0160).
Rear Axle (3.21/3.55) Limited-Slip Rear Axles require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar Limited Slip Additive
(MS-10111).
We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (MS-8985).
Rear Axle (3.92) Limited-Slip Rear Axles require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar Limited Slip Additive
(MS-10111).
Max Tow Rear Axle (3.92) We recommend You Use Dana SAE 80W90 Axle Lubricant.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1709.
479
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE (additional charges may apply). If you need a
rental, it is advisable to make these
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer’s service manager first. If for
FOR YOUR VEHICLE arrangements when you call for an some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to
appointment. the general manager or owner of the authorized
PREPARE F OR T HE APPOINTMENT dealer. They want to know if you need
All work to be performed may not be covered by IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally resolve the concern, you may contact the FCA
the service manager. Keep a maintenance log interested in your satisfaction. We want you to US LLC's Customer Assistance center.
of your vehicle's service history. This can often be happy with our products and services. Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer
provide a clue to the current problem. center should include the following information:
Warranty service must be done by an
PREPARE A L IST authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that  Owner's name and address
you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or  Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
They know your vehicle the best, and are most
the specific work you want done. If you've had and office)
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
an accident or work done that is not on your
service. FCA US LLC's authorized dealers have  Authorized dealer name
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
BE R EASONABLE WITH REQUESTS special tools, and the latest information to  Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a Vehicle delivery date and mileage
If you list a number of items and you must have 
timely manner.
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
items in order of priority. At many authorized P.O. Box 21–8004 10
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
480 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
FCA C ANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE SERVICE CONTRACT
P.O. Box 1621 HEARING O R S PEECH I MPAIRED (TDD/ You may have purchased a service contract for
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 TTY) a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after the FCA US LLC's
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / To assist customers who have hearing
New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The
(800) 387-9983 French difficulties, FCA US LLC has installed special
Mopar Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY
TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)
MEXICO vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 or speech impaired customer, who has access
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle
in the United States, can communicate with FCA
Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
Mexico, D. F. US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300 Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
require assistance can use the special needs If you have any questions about the service
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY contract, call the FCA US LLC's Service Contract
PUERTO R ICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
FCA Caribbean LLC
Bell Relay Service operator. English / (800) 387-9983 French).
P.O. Box 191857
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
San Juan 00919-1857 contract you may have purchased from another
Phone: (866) 726-4636 manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Fax: (787) 782-3345
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those
documents.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 481
We appreciate that you have made a major

investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
MOPAR® PARTS cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
authorized dealer has also made a major Mopar® original equipment parts &
accessories and factory filled fluids are dealer or FCA US LLC.
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
ensure that you are absolutely delighted with available from an authorized dealer. They are To contact NHTSA, you may call the
the ownership experience. recommended for your vehicle to keep it Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
operating at its best and maintain its original 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
WARNING! condition.
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS www.safercar.gov; or write to:
only), some of its constituents, and certain Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
vehicle components contain, or emit, I N T HE 50 U NITED STATES AND Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
chemicals known to the State of California to WASHINGTON, D.C. D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
If you believe that your vehicle has a information about motor vehicle safety
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
defect that could cause a crash or cause from http://www.safercar.gov.
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals injury or death, you should immediately I N C ANADA
known to the State of California to cause inform the National Highway Traffic
cancer and birth defects, or other Safety Administration (NHTSA) in If you believe that your vehicle has a
reproductive harm. addition to notifying FCA US LLC. safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it immediately. Canadian customers who
WARRANTY INFORMATION may open an investigation, and if it finds wish to report a safety defect to the
See the Warranty Information for the terms and that a safety defect exists in a group of Canadian government should contact
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable vehicles, it may order a recall and Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect 10
to this vehicle and market. Refer to remedy campaign. However, NHTSA Investigations and Recalls at
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP.
482 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To access your Owner's Information online, visit

www.mopar.com/om
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
To order the following manuals, you may use Development applicables aux appareils radio
either the website or the phone numbers listed To order a hard copy of your Owner’s
Information, visit: exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
below. aux deux conditions suivantes:
Service Manuals  www.techauthority.com (US)
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide Or brouillage, et
a complete working knowledge of the vehicle, Call Tech Authority toll free at:
system, and/or components and is written in 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
straightforward language with illustrations,  1-800-890-4038 (US) brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
diagrams, and charts. brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
mettre le fonctionnement.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
GENERAL INFORMATION La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. The following regulatory statement applies to all siguientes dos condiciones:
These manuals make it easy to find and fix Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
problems on computer-controlled vehicle vehicle:
cause interferencia perjudicial y
systems and features. They show exactly how to This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
find and correct problems, using step-by-step Rules and with Innovation, Science and 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, Economic Development Canada license-exempt cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the pueda causar su operación no deseada.
tools and equipment. following two conditions:
NOTE:
Owner's Manuals 1. This device may not cause harmful Changes or modifications not expressly
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared interference, and approved by the party responsible for compli-
with the assistance of service and engineering ance could void the user’s authority to operate
2. This device must accept any interference the equipment.
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
received, including interference that may
LLC vehicles.
cause undesired operation.
483
INDEX
A Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Automatic Headlights .......................................54
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Filter) ............................................................ 411 Automatic High Beams.....................................53
Control) ................................................ 177, 179 Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 415 Automatic Tailgate Release .............................85
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............422 Air Conditioner Refrigerant ........................... 415 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............65
Adding Fuel .......................................... 208, 210 Air Conditioner System ................................. 415 Automatic Transmission....................... 156, 426
Additives, Fuel ...............................................469 Air Conditioning................................................63 Adding Fluid .............................................. 426
Adjust Air Conditioning Filter ..............................67, 415 Fluid And Filter Change............................. 426
Down ........................................................... 36 Air Conditioning System ...................................65 Fluid Change............................................. 426
Forward ....................................................... 36 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................66 Fluid Level Check...................................... 426
Rearward..................................................... 36 Air Filter ........................................................ 411 Fluid Type ........................................ 426, 478
Up................................................................ 36 Air Pressure Special Additives ...................................... 426
Adjustable Pedals ............................................ 43 Tires ......................................................... 450 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode... 159
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................279 Air Suspension ..................................... 165, 169 AutoPark ....................................................... 141
Air Bag Alarm AUX Camera ......................................... 204, 208
Air Bag Operation ......................................344 Security Alarm ....................................26, 127 Auxiliary Driving Systems .............................. 318
Air Bag Warning Light ...................... 342, 345 Alterations/Modifications Axle Fluid.............................................. 426, 478
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 353, 394 Vehicle.........................................................11 Axle Lubrication ............................................ 426
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................394 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 422, 474
Front Air Bag .............................................345 Disposal ................................................... 423 B
If Deployment Occurs ................................352 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 310 Back-Up......................................................... 202
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................349 Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 132 Back-Up Camera ........................................... 202
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............354 Assist, Hill Start............................................. 317 Battery ................................................. 128, 409
Maintenance .............................................354 Audio Settings ............................................... 266 Charging System Light .............................. 128
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............343 Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 236 Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................18
Transporting Pets ......................................369 Auto Down Power Windows .............................78 Battery Saver Feature ......................................57 11
Air Bag Light ............................... 126, 342, 369 Automatic Door Locks ......................................30 Belts, Seat .................................................... 369
484
Blind Spot Monitoring ....................................318 Carbon Monoxide Warning................... 371, 372 Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 455
Bluetooth Cargo Light.......................................................56 Connected Services ...................................... 282
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone CD ................................................................. 268 Connected Services FAQ ............................... 301
Or Audio Device After Pairing ................275 Cellular Phone .............................................. 309 Connected Services Features ....................... 286
Body Builders Guide ........................................ 11 Center High Mounted Stop Light ................... 442 Connected Services, Getting Started ............ 284
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................418 Center Seat Storage Compartment ..................68 Connected Services, Introduction ................. 282
B-Pillar Location.............................................447 Charge Air Cooler .......................................... 424 Contract, Service ........................................... 480
Brake Assist System ......................................311 Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 444 Controls ........................................................ 259
Brake Control System ....................................311 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 423
Brake Fluid .......................................... 425, 478 Light)............................................................. 138 Cooling System ............................................. 421
Brake System ...................................... 425, 467 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 369 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 422
Fluid Check ...............................................425 Checks, Safety .............................................. 369 Coolant Level ................................... 421, 423
Master Cylinder .........................................425 Child Restraint .............................................. 355 Cooling Capacity ....................................... 474
Parking ......................................................151 Child Restraints Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 423
Warning Light ............................................126 Booster Seats ........................................... 358 Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 422
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................155 Child Seat Installation ..................... 364, 365 Inspection ................................................. 423
Bulb Replacement .........................................437 How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 363 Points To Remember ................................ 424
Bulbs, Light.......................................... 371, 437 Infant And Child Restraints....................... 357 Pressure Cap ............................................ 423
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 362 Radiator Cap............................................. 423
C Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 360 Selection Of Coolant
Camera ..........................................................202 Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 357 (Antifreeze) .........................422, 474, 475
Camera, AUX ........................................ 204, 208 Seating Positions ...................................... 359 Corrosion Protection ..................................... 461
Camera, Rear ...................................... 202, 204 Clean Air Gasoline......................................... 469 Cruise Control
Camper ............................................................ 97 Cleaning Accel/Decel .............................................. 178
Capacities, Fuel .............................................474 Wheels ..................................................... 456 Cancel....................................................... 179
Caps, Filler Climate Control ................................................60 Resume .................................................... 179
Oil (Engine) ................................................404 Automatic ....................................................60 Cruise Control (Speed Control) ............. 177, 179
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................423 Manual ........................................................63 Cruise Light ................................................... 136
Car Washes ...................................................462 Cold Weather Operation ............................... 146 Customer Assistance .................................... 479
Cybersecurity ................................................ 236
485
D E Jump Starting ........................................... 386

Daytime Running Lights ................................... 53 Electric Brake Control System....................... 311 Oil ...........................................410, 474, 475
Dealer Service ...............................................409 Anti-Lock Brake System ............................ 310 Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 404
Defroster, Rear Window................................... 63 Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 312, 318 Oil Filter .................................................... 410
Defroster, Windshield .............................63, 369 Electric Parking Brake................................... 151 Oil Selection..................................... 410, 474
Deleting A Phone ...........................................275 Electrical Power Outlets ...................................74 Oil Synthetic.............................................. 410
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........................137 Electronic Range Select (ERS) ...................... 159 Overheating .............................................. 389
Diesel Fuel .....................................................471 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 312 Starting ............................................ 143, 144
Diesel Fuel Requirements .............................471 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light...... 128 Enhanced Accident Response
Bulk Storage Of .........................................210 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case .... 161, 163 Feature ................................................ 353, 394
Diesel Fuel System, Re-Priming .....................414 Emergency Braking ....................................... 327 Entry System, Illuminated ................................58
Differential, Limited Slip ................................174 Emergency Gas Can Refueling ...................... 389 Ethanol.......................................................... 469
Disable Vehicle Towing ..................................392 Emergency, In Case Of Exhaust Gas Cautions .......................... 371, 372
Disc Drive ......................................................268 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ..................... 391 Exhaust System ................................... 371, 420
Disconnecting ................................................275 Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 373 Exterior Lighting ...............................................52
Disposal Jump Starting ........................................... 386 Exterior Lights ........................................ 52, 371
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .......................423 Emission Control System Maintenance ........ 138
Disturb ...........................................................278 Engine........................................................... 404 F
Door Ajar........................................................129 Air Cleaner ................................................ 411 Family Alerts ................................................. 300
Door Ajar Light ...............................................129 Block Heater ............................................. 150 Filters
Door Locks Break-In Recommendations ..................... 150 Air Cleaner ................................................ 411
Automatic .................................................... 30 Compartment ................404, 405, 406, 407 Air Conditioning ................................. 67, 415
Doors ............................................................... 27 Compartment Engine Fuel ............................................... 412
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter ............412 Identification .............404, 405, 406, 407 Engine Oil ........................................ 410, 475
Driver Memory Presets ..................................265 Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 475 Engine Oil Disposal ................................... 410
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 34 Exhaust Gas Caution ....................... 371, 372 Flashers
Driving Fails To Start ............................................ 144 Turn Signals .............................. 55, 136, 371
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Flooded, Starting ...................................... 144 Flash-To-Pass ...................................................54 11
Standing Water .....................................234 Fuel Requirements .......................... 468, 474 Flat Tire Stowage .......................................... 384
Dual Rear Wheels ..........................................467 Idling ........................................................ 148 Fluid Capacities ............................................ 474
486
Fluid Leaks ....................................................371 G Heated Mirrors .................................................48

Fluid Level Checks Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....................49 Heated Seats ...................................................38
Brake ........................................................425 Gasoline, Clean Air........................................ 469 Heater, Engine Block..................................... 150
Fluid, Brake ...................................................478 Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 469 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Fog Lights ...............................................55, 441 Gauges Switch ..............................................................53
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................. 34 Voltage ..................................................... 146 Hill Descent Control ...................................... 315
Forward Collision Warning .............................324 Glass Cleaning .............................................. 466 Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 315
Four Wheel Drive ...........................................161 Grocery Bag Retainer .......................................39 Hill Start Assist .............................................. 317
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...............................373 Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 215 Hitches
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................391 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 214 Trailer Towing ........................................... 218
Front Axle (Differential) ..................................426 Guide HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .....................49
Fuel ............................................ 210, 468, 471 Body Builders ..............................................11 Hood Prop ........................................................84
Adding ............................................. 208, 210 GVWR............................................................ 213 Hood Release...................................................84
Additives ...................................................469
Clean Air ....................................................469 H I
Ethanol ......................................................469 Hazard Ignition .............................................................21
Filter ..........................................................412 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Switch ..........................................................21
Gasoline ....................................................468 Standing Water .................................... 234 Illuminated Entry ..............................................58
Light ..........................................................131 Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 373 Inside Rearview Mirror .................... 44, 45, 373
Materials Added ........................................469 Head Restraints ...............................................40 Instrument Cluster ............................... 110, 113
Methanol ...................................................469 Head Rests ......................................................40 Descriptions............................110, 113, 136
Octane Rating ........................ 468, 469, 475 Headlights .................................................... 439 Display ...................................................... 114
Requirements ........................ 468, 471, 474 Cleaning ................................................... 462 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 465
Specifications............................................471 High Beam ...................................................53 Integrated Trailer Brake Control .................... 223
Tank Capacity ............................................474 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........53 Interior Appearance Care .............................. 464
Fuses .............................................................427 Lights On Reminder .....................................55 Interior Lights ...................................................57
Passing ........................................................54 Intervention Regeneration Strategy ..... 121, 414
Switch ..........................................................52 Inverter Outlet (115V) ......................................75
487
J Lights ............................................................ 371 Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 126

Jack Location .................................................377 Air Bag .................................... 126, 342, 369 Security Alarm .......................................... 127
Jump Starting ................................................386 Brake Assist Warning ............................... 314 Service ...................................................... 437
Brake Warning .......................................... 126 Traction Control ........................................ 314
K Bulb Replacement .................................... 437 Turn Signals ............55, 136, 371, 439, 441
Key Fob Cargo ...........................................................56 Warning Instrument Cluster
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............. 20 Center Mounted Stop ............................... 442 Descriptions ................................ 128, 136
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Courtesy/Reading .......................................57 Limited-Slip Differential ....................... 174, 427
Entry) ............................................................... 18 Cruise ....................................................... 136 Load Shed Battery Saver Mode..................... 125
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Daytime Running .........................................53 Load Shed Battery Saver On ......................... 125
Entry) ............................................................... 20 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ........... 125
Keyless Enter-N-Go .................................28, 143 Indicator ............................................... 128 Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............ 125
Passive Entry ............................................... 28 Exterior ...............................................52, 371 Loading Vehicle ............................................. 213
Keys................................................................. 17 Fog ........................................................... 441 Tires .......................................................... 447
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 373 Locks
L Headlights ............................................ 52, 54 Automatic Door ............................................30
Lane Change And Turn Signals ........................ 55 High Beam ...................................................53 Child Protection ...........................................31
Lane Change Assist ......................................... 55 High Beam/Low Beam Select ......................53 Power Door ..................................................28
LaneSense ....................................................199 Hill Descent Control Indicator ................... 315 Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 327
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................................336 Illuminated Entry .........................................58 Lubrication, Body .......................................... 418
Latches ..........................................................371 Interior .........................................................57 Lug Nuts........................................................ 467
Hood ........................................................... 84 Lights On Reminder .....................................55 Lug Nuts/Bolts .............................................. 467
Lead Free Gasoline........................................468 Low Fuel ................................................... 131
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................371 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)....... 130 M
Life Of Tires ...................................................452 Park .......................................................... 135 Maintenance .............................................81, 84
Light Bulbs ........................................... 371, 437 Passing ........................................................54 Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 409
Maintenance Schedule ...............395, 399, 400
11
488
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) ................... 235 Pets ............................................................... 369
Engine) ..........................................................130 Oil Filter, Change .......................................... 410 Phone Mode .................................................. 271
Manual Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 410 Pickup Box ................................................90, 92
Service ......................................................482 Oil Pressure Light .......................................... 128 Pinch Protection ........................................81, 83
Media Hub ....................................................... 72 Oil, Engine ............................................ 410, 475 Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 447
Media Mode ..................................................268 Capacity.................................................... 474 Power
Memory Seat ................................................... 32 Dipstick .................................................... 408 Distribution Center (Fuses) .............. 428, 432
Memory Settings ............................................. 32 Disposal ................................................... 410 Door Locks...................................................28
Methanol .......................................................469 Filter ................................................ 410, 475 Mirrors .........................................................47
Mirrors ............................................................. 44 Filter Disposal........................................... 410 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet)..........74, 75
Electric Powered ......................................... 47 Identification Logo .................................... 410 Seats ...........................................................36
Heated ........................................................ 48 Materials Added To .................................. 410 Side Steps ...................................................28
Memory ....................................................... 32 Pressure Warning Light ............................ 128 Sliding Rear Window ....................................79
Outside ........................................................ 46 Recommendation ............................ 410, 474 Steering ............................................. 47, 174
Rearview .....................................44, 45, 373 Synthetic .................................................. 410 Sunroof .................................................80, 82
Trailer Towing .............................................. 48 Viscosity ................................................... 474 Windows ......................................................77
Modifications/Alterations Onboard Diagnostic System.......................... 137 Power Seats
Vehicle ........................................................ 11 Operating Precautions .................................. 137 Down ...........................................................36
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.......................327 Operator Manual Forward .......................................................36
Mopar Parts ...................................................481 Owner's Manual ........................................ 482 Rearward .....................................................36
MP3 Control .................................................... 72 Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................46 Recline.........................................................37
Multi-Function Control Lever............................ 53 Overheating, Engine...................................... 389 Tilt................................................................37
Up ................................................................36
N P Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 340
New Vehicle Break-In Period................ 150, 151 Paint Care ..................................................... 461 Presets .......................................................... 265
Parking Brake ............................................... 151 Pretensioners
O ParkSense Active Park Assist........................ 195 Seat Belts ................................................. 340
Occupant Restraints ......................................334 ParkSense System, Rear .............................. 189
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 468, 469 Passive Entry ...................................................28
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) ....................235 Pedals, Adjustable ...........................................43
489
R Remote Keyless Entry Schedule, Maintenance ..............395, 399, 400

Radial Ply Tires ..............................................451 Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............20 Seat Belt Reminder ....................................... 126
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .. 421, 423 Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ......... 259 Seat Belts ............................................ 335, 369
Radio Remote Start (Diesel) ......................................25 Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 339
Presets ......................................................265 Remote Start (Gasoline) ..................................22 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 339
Radio Controls ...............................................259 Remote Starting Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Radio Mode ...................................................259 Exit Remote Start Mode ..............................23 Anchorage ............................................ 339
Radio Operation .................................. 259, 309 Remote Starting System ........................... 22, 25 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 341
Radio Remote Controls..................................259 Remove, Tailgate .............................................86 Child Restraints ........................................ 355
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ........................... 59 Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 437 Energy Management Feature ................... 340
Rear Axle (Differential)...................................426 Replacement Tires ........................................ 453 Extender ................................................... 340
Rear Camera .................................................204 Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 481 Front Seat ...............................335, 336, 338
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ............................ 91 Restraints, Child ........................................... 355 Inspection ................................................. 369
Rear Cross Path .............................................321 Restraints, Head ..............................................40 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 338
Rear ParkSense System ................................189 Roadside Assistance ............................ 292, 302 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 339
Rear Window, Sliding ....................................... 79 Rotation, Tires .............................................. 460 Lap/Shoulder Belts................................... 336
Reclining Rear Seats ....................................... 36 Operating Instructions .............................. 338
Recreational Towing ......................................230 S Pregnant Women ...................................... 340
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) .....232 Safety ........................................................... 258 Pretensioners ........................................... 340
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N)..233 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 369 Rear Seat.................................................. 336
Reformulated Gasoline ..................................469 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................... 371 Reminder .................................................. 335
Refrigerant ....................................................415 Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 481 Seat Belt Extender .................................... 340
Registering SiriusXM Guardian ......................283 Safety Features............................................. 258 Seat Belt Pretensioner.............................. 340
Release, Hood ................................................. 84 Safety Information, Tire ................................ 443 Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 335
Release, Tailgate ............................................. 85 Safety Tips .................................................... 369 Untwisting Procedure................................ 339
Reminder, Seat Belt ......................................335 Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 371 Seat Belts Maintenance ................................ 465
Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock .. 290, 302 Satellite Radio .............................................. 261
Remote Features, Horn And Lights ................291 Saved Radio Stations ................................... 265 11
Remote Features, Starting .................. 291, 303
490
Seats ................................................. 34, 35, 36 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Steps, Power Side ............................................28
Adjustment ........................................... 34, 36 Browse in SXM ......................................... 264 Stolen Vehicle Assistance .................... 297, 303
Easy Entry ................................................... 37 Favorites................................................... 264 Storage ............................................................68
Head Restraints .......................................... 40 Replay ...................................................... 262 Storage Compartment, Center Seat .................68
Memory ....................................................... 32 Sliding Rear Window, Power ............................79 Storage, Vehicle ..................................... 66, 461
Power .......................................................... 36 Smart Watch ................................................. 300 Store Radio Presets ...................................... 265
Rear Folding ................................................ 34 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 458 Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 461
Reclining Rear ............................................. 36 Snow Plow .................................................... 227 Sun Roof .....................................80, 81, 82, 84
Tilting .......................................................... 34 Snow Tires .................................................... 454 Sunglasses Storage .........................................70
Security System ......................................26, 127 SOS Call ............................................... 286, 301 Sunshade Operation ........................................81
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................475 Spare Tires .......................................... 455, 456 Suspension
Send & Go ........................................... 293, 302 Spark Plugs................................................... 475 Air .................................................... 165, 169
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) .................................. 20 Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..................... 179 Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 318
Service Assistance .........................................479 Starting ....................................... 140, 143, 144 Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 410
Service Contract ............................................480 Automatic Transmission ........................... 141
Service Manuals ............................................482 Button .........................................................21 T
Settings, Audio ..............................................266 Cold Weather ............................................ 146 Tailgate Removal .............................................86
Shifting ..........................................................154 Engine Fails To Start................................. 144 Tailgate, Electronic Lowering ...........................85
Automatic Transmission ............................156 Starting And Operating......................... 143, 144 Telescoping Steering Column ...........................31
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Starting Procedures ............................. 143, 144 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .............65
Case Neutral (N) ...................................232 Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) ............... 140 Tilt
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Steering Down ...........................................................37
Case Neutral (N) ...................................233 Power ....................................................... 174 Up ................................................................37
Shoulder Belts ...............................................336 Tilt Column ..................................................31 Tilt Steering Column .........................................31
Side Steps, Power............................................ 28 Wheel, Heated ...................................... 31, 32 Tip Start ........................................................ 143
Signals, Turn ..................................55, 136, 371 Wheel, Tilt....................................................31 Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 447
Sirius Satellite Radio .....................................261 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..................... 259 Tire Markings ................................................ 443
Favorites ...................................................264 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ...... 259 Tire Safety Information.................................. 443
Replay .......................................................262
491
Tires...................................371, 449, 455, 460 Towing ................................................. 214, 392 U

Aging (Life Of Tires) ...................................452 Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 392 Uconnect
Air Pressure ...............................................449 Guide ........................................................ 218 Phone Call Features ................................. 276
Chains .......................................................458 Recreational ............................................. 230 Things You Should Know About Your
Compact Spare .........................................455 Weight ...................................................... 218 Uconnect Phone ................................... 279
Dual...........................................................467 Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 230 Uconnect App ................................................ 284
General Information ........................ 449, 455 Traction ......................................................... 234 Uconnect Phone ................................... 272, 273
High Speed ................................................451 Traction Control ............................................ 318 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Inflation Pressure ......................................450 Trailer Reverse Steering Control ................... 219 Call Currently In Progress ..................... 278
Life Of Tires ...............................................452 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 318 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Load Capacity............................................447 Trailer Towing ............................................... 214 No Call Currently In Progress ................ 277
Pressure Monitoring System Hitches ..................................................... 218 Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 281
(TPMS) ........................................ 131, 327 Minimum Requirements ........................... 221 Call Continuation ...................................... 279
Quality Grading..........................................460 Mirrors .........................................................48 Call Controls ............................................. 277
Radial ........................................................451 Tips........................................................... 227 Call Termination ....................................... 279
Replacement .............................................453 Trailer And Tongue Weight........................ 219 Cancel Command ..................................... 273
Rotation ....................................................460 Wiring ....................................................... 225 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Safety .............................................. 443, 449 Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 218 Or Audio Device After Pairing................ 275
Sizes..........................................................444 Trailer Weight................................................ 218 Help Command ......................................... 273
Snow Tires .................................................454 Transfer Case ............................................... 427 Join Calls .................................................. 279
Spare Tires ...................................... 455, 456 Electronically Shifted ....................... 161, 163 Making A Phone Or Audio Device A
Spinning ....................................................452 Fluid ......................................................... 478 Favorite ................................................ 275
Trailer Towing ............................................222 Transmission ................................................ 156 Making A Second Call While Current Call
Tread Wear Indicators ...............................452 Automatic ........................................ 156, 426 Is In Progress........................................ 278
Wheel Nut Torque .....................................467 Fluid ......................................................... 478 Managing Your Favorites .......................... 276
To Open Hood .................................................. 84 Maintenance ............................................ 426 Natural Speech ......................................... 272
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .......................219 Shifting ..................................................... 154 Operation .................................................. 272
Tonneau Cover .......................................97, 462 Transporting Pets.......................................... 369 Overview ................................................... 271 11
Tonneau Cover Cleaning ................................462 Tread Wear Indicators .................................. 452
Turn Signals ......................... 55, 136, 439, 441
492
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile V Water Separator

Phone ...................................................273 Vehicle Finder ...................................... 295, 303 Diesel Fuel ................................................ 412
Phonebook Download ...............................275 Vehicle Health Alert ...................................... 298 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........................... 456
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ...............278 Vehicle Health Report ................................... 297 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 456
Power-Up ...................................................281 Vehicle Loading ................................... 213, 447 Wi-fi ............................................................... 296
Recent Calls ..............................................277 Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 409 Wind Buffeting .................................................80
Redial ........................................................279 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................11 Window Fogging ...............................................66
To Remove A Favorite ...............................276 Vehicle Notifications ..................................... 298 Windows ..........................................................77
Toggling Between Calls .............................278 Vehicle Storage .......................................66, 461 Power...........................................................77
Touch-Tone Number Entry .........................277 Voice Command...............................................41 Rear Sliding .................................................79
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone ..279 Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................41 Reset Auto-Up ..............................................78
Voice Command ........................................279 Windshield Defroster .................................... 369
Uconnect Settings W Windshield Washers .............................. 58, 408
Customer Programmable Features ............. 28 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Fluid................................................... 58, 408
Passive Entry Programming......................... 28 Descriptions)................................................. 131 Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 418
Uconnect System ...........................................256 Warnings And Cautions ....................................11 Windshield Wipers ...........................................58
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...........................460 Warranty Information .................................... 481 Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 418
Unleaded Gasoline ........................................468 Washers, Windshield .................................... 408 Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................59
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....................339 Washing Vehicle ........................................... 462 Wireless Charging Pad .....................................77
USB ................................................................. 72 Water
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area ........................... 91 Driving Through ........................................ 234
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the
equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle
is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit
With respect to vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common
questions.
1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada), or by contacting your dealer.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S.), www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting
www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the WARNING
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
2021 RAM 1500
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your
vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next
appointment, we know you will find the app an important extension of your Ram vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App
21_DT_OM_EN_USC
Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
FIRST EDITION
U.S. CANADA
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF
RAM 1500
THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLET
MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
20 21 OWNER’ S M ANUAL
RAMTRUCKS.COM (U.S.) RAMTRUCK.CA (CANADA)
©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.

A Free Electronic Copy of The Most Up-To-Date Owner'S Manual, Uconnect and Warranty Booklet

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

A Free Electronic Copy of The Most Up-To-Date Owner'S Manual, Uconnect and Warranty Booklet

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2021 RAM 1500

DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................17 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ..................................................... 104 3

4 STARTING AND OPERATING .............................................................................................. 140 4

5 MULTIMEDIA .............................................................................................................................. 236 5

INTRODUCTION VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .. 26 Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —

SLIDE-IN CAMPERS .............................................97 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY.....................114 STARTING AND OPERATING

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .................................. 409 TIRES....................................................................443 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE WARRANTY INFORMATION ..............................481

SYMBOLS KEY VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

FOOTNOTE VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

SYMBOL GLOSSARY Red Warning Lights

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

Air Bag Warning Light

Brake Warning Light

Hood Open Warning Light

Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light

Red Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights

Door Open Warning Light Service LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped

Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped

Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Indicator Lights

Yellow Indicator Lights Yellow Indicator Lights

Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light Green Indicator Lights

ECO Mode Indicator Light

Green Indicator Lights White Indicator Lights

Stop/Start Active Indicator Light

White Indicator Lights

Cruise Control Ready Indicator

Speed Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19

Key Fob Battery Replacement

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

IGNITION SWITCH OFF START/STOP ignition button and push to

 All the electrical devices are available (e.g. WARNING!

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

prevent the Keyless Enter-N-Go system from NOTE:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

The Vehicle Security system is designed to

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29

30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: AUTOMATIC UNLOCK D OORS ON E XIT —

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31

32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33

34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

MEMORY POSITION R ECALL WARNING! (Continued)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35

36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

MANUAL A DJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS) NOTE:

Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37

Tilting The Seat Up Or Down

38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE